The URL can be used to link to this page

R2022-261 2022-12-05RESOLUTION NO. R2022-261 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract associated with the Traffic Signals Upgrade Program, to Reliable Signal & Lighting Solutions, LLC., in the amount of $1,560,471.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Traffic Signals Upgrade Program have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards a bid to Reliable Signal & Lighting Solutions, LLC., in the amount of $1,560,471.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the construction of the Traffic Signals Upgrade Program. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 5th day of December, A.D., 2022. ________________________________ J.KEVIN COLE MAYOR ATTEST: ________________________________ FRANCES AGUILAR, TRMC, MMC CITY SECRETARY APPROVED AS TO FORM: ________________________________ DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY DocuSign Envelope ID: E0AAA06D-261D-48C2-AFD2-3BB3403B0AF7 Project Manual for: Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 U 4 wig E' •x, -A s i 9 T. 1S " Bid No • 0822-25. . gtp:�•E•�FT 1 ♦ Rq,� •* I August, 2022 •; r••• N ''�•••� laQ%►'':l�3'68 S. Prepared By. ItI,s'S►��FNSEO VAL `N : ....••• Rajendra Shrestha, PE City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Dr, Pear;and, TX 77581 02/2022 City of Pearland � *iv p3519 Liberty Drive A Cty, Pearland, Texas 77581 Tel 281 652.1600 - IPE • ARLAND1 pearlandtx.gov T L X A 5 4s'` 164414 CONSTRUCTION NOTICE OF INTENT TO AWARD November 2,2022 Enrique Del Cid, President Reliable Signal & Lighting Solutions, LLC 2617 Lazy Bend St Pearland,Texas 77581 Re: Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22 Construction Contract Project No.TR2201 Contract Amount:$1,560,471.00 Dear Mr Del Cid, On November 21,2022 the City of Pearland Traffic Department will recommend to the City Council that the contract for the Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22 Bid Number 0822-25, beawarded to Reliable Signal& Lighting Solutions, LLC In preparation for the contract execution by the City of Pearland,the following items are being transmitted • Contract Document Checklist • 3 Sets of Contract Documents for preparation and execution Please adhere to the instructions contained in"Contract Documents Checklist" carefully Upon receipt of all properly executed documents and City Council approvals,,a Notice to Proceed will be issued to establish the official start date of the project. Any questions regarding these instructions shall be directed to the Project Manager,Yolci Ramirez,at 281-652- 1686 Please make arrangements to return these documents as soon as possible. Sincerely, /Phi, iee 2Ut,G� Yolci Ramirez Traffic Engineer Attachment:CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CHECKLIST, HOUSE BILL 89 FORM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CHECKLIST Check List instructions for Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22 Contract Documents. The City requires(3)three sets of original executed documents. All documents should be fully executed and dated for the Council meeting date,at which the Contract is actually awarded, identified below Council is scheduled to award the contract on November 21, 2022. Upon the completion and return of these documents the City Manager will execute the Contract for the City at which time the Contractor will receive his copy Sections requiring specific attention e4 Section 00300 Bid Proposal-Print,sign and date, affix seal and insert the Bid Proposal as submitted via EBID to the City ❑Section 00500 Standard Form of Agreement-Review Contractor information in Preamble and Article 4 of the Standard Agreement. Sign and date the Standard Form of Agreement on page 7 Date all documents November 22,2022. ❑ Section 00610 Performance Bond-Sign and date the Performance Bond form Or provide and insert Performance Bond ❑ Section 00611 Payment Bond-Sign and date the Payment Bond form Or provide and insert Payment Bond ❑Section 00612 One Year Maintenance Bond-Sign and date the One-Year Maintenance Bond form Or provide and insert One-Year Maintenance Bond ❑Section 00700 General Conditions-Attachment 1 or Attachment 2— Provide Worker's Compensation &General Liability Insurance certificate listing the City as"Additionally Insured" in amounts required by Attachment No.3 of the General Conditions. ❑ Form 1295 Submittal of certificate Texas Ethics Commission https.//www.ethics.state.tx.us/forms/1295.pdf ❑Section 00500 Standard Form of Agreement Appendix B—Submittal of House Bill 89 Verification, All of the above-listed documents must be inserted in the Protect Manual and their locations marked with a colored flag or tab for review by Staff prior to execution. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AM Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,THAT WE Reliable Sional&Lighting Solutions, LLC P.0,Box 2767.Pearland.TX 77588 as Principal,hereinafter called the Principal,and Harco National Insurance Company 28420 Hardy Toll Road.Suite 200, -Sarinn.TX 77373 a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois as Surety,hereinafter called the Surety,are held and fly bound unto city of pandend _ as Obligee,hereinafter called the Obligee,in the sum of Five Percent of Amount Rid Dollars($ 5% ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,administrators,successors and assigns,Jointly and severally,firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has submitted a bid for Trafflc.Signal Upgrades FY22,Bid,No.0822-25,COP PN NO. TR2201 - - NOW,THEREFORE, If the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid,and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and materials furnished In the prosecution thereof,or In the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, If the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid,then this obligation shall be null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 20th day of October , 2022 Retiabie,Slgnal&Lighting Solutions.LLC (Principal) (sent) Maw) ayc - Weside.rlfi IM) . �9'rM""4gy rfect;ow7 c�,: Harco National Insu5an " .Comp any- SEAL. (suety, A A/17 (5ert0 •,•,,,,,,,• 71 may4n.Fact Mid ele M-Bonrrin --OHO AIA DOCUMENT A310•'BID BOND•AIA■FEBRUARY 1970 ED.•THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCUITECFS,173S N.Y.AVE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 1 POWER OF ATTORNEY MARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY Member companies of IAT Insurance Group,Headquartered:4200 Six Forks Rd,Sulte 1400,Raleigh,NC 27606 Bond# Bid Bond Prindpat ellnbble Si:i� !R Liit" I LLG • - - - - Obligee cl/e'of Peariandf KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That MARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the Stele of Illinois,and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey,and having their pdndpal offices located respectively In the dudes of Roiling Meadows,Illinois and Newark,New Jersey,do hereby conadtute and appoint Michele M Bonnln their true and lawful altomey(s)-in-fact to execute,seal and deliver for end antis behalf as surety,any and all bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity.end other writings obligatory In the nature thereof,which are or may be Allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise, and the execution of ouch Instrument(s) In pursuance of there presents, shall be as binding upon the said MARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,as fully and amply,to all Intents,and purposes,as If the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by their regularly elected ofliosre at their prindpal offices. This Power of Attorney Is executed,end may be revoked,pursuant to and by authority of the By-Laws of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY and is granted under,end by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY ate meeting duly held on the 13th day of December,2018 end by the Board of Directors of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting held on the 13th day of December,2018. 'RESOLVED,that(1)the Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President,Vice President,or Secretary of the Corporation-shell We the power,to appoint,and;to revoke the appointments of,AttameyaIn• -Feat or egenle with power and euthodtyi as defined or limited in their mapocdye powers or attorney,and to execute on behalf of the Corporation•and'affix-the Corporation's seal,Thereto,bonds, undertakings; racognizancea,contracts of indemnity and other written obligations In the nature thereof or related thereto; end(2)any such Officers of the Corporation may appoint end revoke the appointments of Joint-control custodians,agents for acceptance of process,end Attorneys-in-fad with authority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the Corporation;and(9)the signature of any such Officer of the Corporation end the Corporation's seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification given for the execution of any-bond.underteing,recognizance,contract of Indemnity or other written obligation In the nature thereof or related thereto,such signature and seals when so used whether heretofore or hereafter,fining hereby adapted by the Corporation as the original signature of such officer and the orlginel seal ofthe Corporation,to be-valid and beefing rupolt.the Cornetatonwith the same force and effect as though manually affixed' IN WITNESS WHEREOF,HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents on this 31st day of December,2021. ++,,�,n»rp,ir, .0V,1TYJ�jG STATE OF NEW JERSEY STATE OF ILLINOIS ,+yptaNSp9.{�,,; 1r 4°p`gg��.� County of Eaeex County of Cook =ti�410t�nP:. n e x SEAL $ JE �`b OV ``f9e4ga i a Kenneth Chapman • [mC�� • .741..A Executive Vice President,Marco National Insurance Company ,,,. and international Fidelity insurance Company On this 31st day of December,2021 ,before me came the individual who executed the preceding Instrument,tome personally known,and, being by me duly sworn,said he Is the therein described and authorized officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY;that the meals affixed to said instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies;that the said Corporate Seats and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies. `,�at• A,,,, IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal.-at the City of Newark, New Jersey the day and year first above written. 6f fy 4)149it-11411 F. I AZ* dit1444 Veto-ey s�� "Shireile A.Outlay a NotaryPublidof,NewJersoy 4/- n7.4.,ERI,vs My Commission Expires April 4,2023 CERTIFICATION I,the undersigned officer of MARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney end affidavit,end the copy ct the Sections of the By-Laws of said Companies as set forth In said Power of Attorney,with the originals on file In the home office of said companies,and that the same are correct transcripts thereof.end of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked end la now In full force.end effect. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand this 20th day of October,2022 Irene Martins,Assistant Secretary IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener information o pare presenter nun queja: You may contact Harco National Insurance Company Usted puede comunicarse con su Harco National at: Insurance Company al: 1-800-333-4167 1-800-333-4167 You may also write to:Harco National Insurance Usted tambien puede escribir a Harco National Company do IAT Surety at: Insurance Company do IAT Surety at: Attn: Claims Department Attn: Claims Department One Newark Center,20tb Floor One Newark Center,20te Floor Newark,NJ 07102 Newark,NJ 07102 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de to obtain information on companies,coverages,rights Texas pare obtener informaacioa acerca de companias, or complaints at: coberturas,derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P.O.Box 149104 P O.Box 149104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Fax:(512)490-1007 Fax:(512)490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.t;ov Web:www.tdi:texas.gov E-mail:ConsumerProtectiowa tdi.texas.gov E-mail:'ConsumerProtectioniitdi.texas.4ov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS 0 RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si time una disputa concerniente a su prima o a nn or about a claim you should contact the agent or the reclamo,debe comunicarse con el agente o le companla company first.If the dispute is not resolved,you may primero.SI no se resuelve la disputa,puede entonces contact the Texas Department of Insurance. comunicarse con el departamento(TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU FIANZA DE GARANTIA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo pare proposito de informacion y no become a part or condition of the attached document. se convierte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto. CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date. Bid of rit61e. S ,s kAi*reiC+��y ��,��i � , an individual proprietorship/a corporation organize and existing older the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of ,for the construction of Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN. TR2201 BID NO.. 0822-25 (Submitted in Electronic format) To The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Traffic Signal Upgrade Program FY22 with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Engineering Staff, City of Pearland, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth inExhibit"A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and,executable proposal from the Bidder It is•understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Workso changed The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and scaled hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance-Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the'total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within {f the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder's Jnitizl•'s: 08-2018 oo30Q :of 2 CITY OFPTA.RI AND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 190 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on.the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500—Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance 'and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices Addendum No 1'. Date:c'1I 11 I ava,Z, Addendum No ,5 Date: kb1643..t. , Addendum No. a. Date•O) Addendum No Date• to lAak, Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are f' those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated m any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: _\iU S: INAS L'It,airn 104r:t tisvt.Lc: By. -~- Title: (.e-c d'e4 --- Address.Q.l ls.l,.O;envi S-1. i)ectelfarkdi-NICY+51, Phone No ( >c1`1I '111,1_ 1 )B ATTEST rrl.l �i gc10 „ _. (Seal,if Bidder is a Corporation) .Printed Name) .( ; Signature Date: ID) fY Bidder's Initial's. . 08-2018 00300-2 of 2 L Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) _ Bid#•0822-25 _ Project##•TR2201 . Spec r• ,. Item# Quantity UOM •Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Shadow Creek Parkwa Corridor ' ,Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials.equipment and incidentals 8,500 00 8,500 00 1.1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor. 01505 Traffic'Control:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the ,Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 300 00 2,100 OD ]2 7 EA intersection. - 01555 , Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,'materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 23,800 00 166,600 00 1.3 7 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor_materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage'all existing video imaging vehicle detection system . _ - including all cable_Contractor shall ensure a minimum of I pull tape remains in the mast arm, 400 00 2,8 0 0 00 I 4 7 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 166-601 • Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all seven(7) intersections for one hundred forty-six thousand,three hundred and eighty seven dollars per _ 1.5 - 1 LS ,lump sum - 16-603 -S 146,38 7.00 ,S 146.387.00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor_materials,and incidentals required to install, 1.6 11 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 . 900 00 9,900 00 API install:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 5,200 00 10,400 00 1.7 2 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 • -Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor.equipment.materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 7,200 00 50,400 00 1 1.8 _ 7 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 13BU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials.and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to • 1.9 - EA ,be installed byCity). - 16-608 250 00 1,250 00 BBU Cabinet side of controller:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 2,600 00 5,200 00 1 IQ -, 2 EA installed by City). , _ -- 16-608 Addendum 04 / Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#'0822-25 Project k•TR2201 • Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Broadway St./FM 518 Corridor 'Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 8,500 00 8,500 00 2.] .1 LS ,required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor. _ 01505 Traffic Control:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish.and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 2.2 8 EA intersection. 01555 • 300 00 2,400 00 'Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 2.3 8 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 23,800 00 190,400 00 VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor.materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of I pull tape remains in the mast arm. 400 00 • 3,200 00 2.4 8 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601` - Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all eight(8) intersections for one hundred seventy-seven thousand,five hundred ninety four dollars per 2.5 1 LS lump,sum. 16-603 .S 177,594.00 S 177.594.00 ' 1 1 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials.and incidentals required to install. 900 00 , 14,400 00 2.6 16 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. , 16-604 , • PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 5,500 00 11,000 00 2.7 2 EA t contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install:Furnish all labor materials,and ineidentals-required to install and implement the 100 00 200 00 2.8 2 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment.materials.and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 2.9 8 EA , traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 7,200 00 57,600 00 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 250 00 1,000 00 2.10 ' 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 ' BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor,materials.and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 2 600 00 • 10,400 00 2.1] - 4 EA installed by City): 16-608 McHardRd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 8,500 00 8,500 00 3.1 1 LS ,required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 — i Addendum 04 Project Name:Traffic SienaLUpa odes(FY22) Bid# 0822-25 Project 4•TR2201 Spec Item# ' Quantity_ UOM Description- Reference Unit Price Total Amount Traffic Control:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 300 00 2,700 00 3-2 9 • EA , Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. _ _ 0 155s Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 23,800 00 190,400 00 3.3 8 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 , VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor.materials.equipment and incidentals required for the • Contractor to'remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm. 400 00 3,600 00 3.4 9 EA ,from the camera location to the base of the polo: 16-601 , Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all nine(9) 3.5 1 LS intersections for two hundred three thousand,eight hundred thirty dollars per lump sum. 16-603 S 203,830.00, S ) 203,830.00 , Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, __ 3.6 14_ ,_ EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 900 00 12,600 00 PTZ.Furnish all labor.materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3.7 2 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. ' 16-605 - 5,500 00 11,000 00 API install:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and.implement the ,3.8 3 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 . 100 00 300 00 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor.equipment.materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBL system at each proposed 7,200 00 64,800 00 1,9 9 EA traffic signal cabinet. --- - 16-607 _ BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and-incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet al each intersection to house City Provided& 250 00 1,500 00 3 10 6 EA' Installed Cisco Switch 16-608 ' I BBU Cabinet side of controller:Furnish all labor.materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be , . 2,600 00 7,800 00 3,l l 3 EA :installed by City). 16-608 1 1 m Addendum 04 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid ft.0822-25 Project n•TR2201 Spec Item;t Quantity UOM Description - Reference Unit Price Total Amount Baley Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 3,300 00 3,300 00 4.1 1 LS ,required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor. 01505 Traffic Control:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 300 00 1,200 00 4.2 4 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control_ 01555 ' 'Vehicle Detection-Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all four(4) 4.3 1 LS intersection`s for seventy three thousand,two hundred ninety three dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 73,293.00 $ 73,293.00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install, 4.4 4 EA ;program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16,604 900 00 3,600 00 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor.equipment.materials.and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed ' 4.5 , 4 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 7,200 00 28,800 00 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 250 00 1,000 00 4.6 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 Main St'SFI 35 Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor materials,equipment and incidentals 5.1 1 _ LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 3,415 00 3,415 00 Traffic Control:Furnish all labor,materials;equipment and incidentals required for the 5.2 1 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 300 00 1,200 00. Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for one(1)intersection for 5.3 ' 1 LS . eighteen thousand,seven hundred two dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 18.702.00 $ 18,702.00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install. 900 00 900 00 ' 5.4 . 1 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 Battery Backup Unit(BBU) Furnish all labor.equipment.materials,and incidentals required, - to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 7,200 00 7,200 00 5.5 1 EA :traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 250 00 250 00 5.6 1 EA be installed by City). .. - • 16-608 - ' Addendum 04 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#.0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# , Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount • Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment.materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 7,200 00 7,200 0 0 5.7 1 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a Cityprovided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 250 00 250 00 5.8 I EA be installed.by City). 16-608_ - All sterns above arelbr labor,inateiials;:equipmeut,incidentals,and related tasks as required to provide work complete in-place,-approved and accepted,byOwner,and ready for occupancy/use at commencement of warranty period. Bidder's Authorized Signature Addendum 04 f ¢ • wow D" TEXAS d REFERENCES.FOR:cel i Qbtt . S;r41' 12.51-rVo ; ,tAhtAcll_C Offeror must furnish,with this proposal,at least three(3) references from customers with a similar or larger operation as the City of Pearland. This document, or a similar version issued by your company, must be included with your proposal Company Name SE,R. eautruc ibn Company Address:: lj3v c4Ece,rena:2ilvd.- tso eict, Contact Name.R[t(A (1 oxr e2_ Phone Number: C1rs.) Email Address.gqul@5 Was nAdibA-mt Description of Project/Work: \rLSkfll - :ccIstA l5 c ' Company Name �C'-ip1'e_ Services Company Address: RICO Id ` Contact Name. NMI - aliesw Phone Number C-ezi) 3a.t4-3a Q4 Email Address. : eci..k0� +tye. cuiCeS Description of Project/Work: \y\all--Vicar( was I _. References fort-t\iabe_ irk\ ,121r '1)1A..6411(1SILL(._ Page 2 Company Name rtraA Col Lid Company Address:Q.0. tiowyl otushmiTc--+-4,aw Contact Name ( 1c.. a% Phone Number: C-11(3) q-31— 3Dt I Email Address kbbis,ftg....Svibell.i\d- Description of Project/Work: ,\M-c01 —1-1(1.4ic Company Name. ik,ILbn (\--kt7,4i1g Company Address: tir3.5 8.411\-Ustma-4107 I Contact Name. \ler oe_S3e-1.1 Phone Number\-. (-1rWiig Email Address.--lrkox6-ill VIA-‘3m4._e-ovi Description of Project/Work. IMAM\ -17cgic.„ 5g\cIK _ Company Name:lerCibi-A .1-TterPOS-e,. Company Address: 1.31-k -5 CcrlicciPzhl-cirit 6-tqq-citc.1 Contact Name. ZIC-_kuebra- _ Phone Number (1./3 - _ _ Email Address: taveSyrcio14.COW) Description of Project/Work: \rail\ tfetf-Cic%irv4,1.\ _ _ CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. OFFICE USE ONLY This questionnaireiis being filed in accordance with Chapter 176,Local Government Code,by a vendor who Date Received has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the-local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of Facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1),Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006,Local Government Code.An offense under this section is a misdemeanor it Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. �.rriC�lue_ ( ��c1 ` -- 1 DCheck this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire.(The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) .J Name of local government,officer about whom the information is being disclosed. 11 - Name of Officer AI Describe each employment or other business relationship with the local government officer,or a family member of the officer,as described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A). Also describe any family relationship with the local government officer. Complete subparts A and B for each employment or business relationship described. Attach additional pages to this Form CIO as necessary. A. Is the local government officer or a family member of the officer receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor? Yes .✓ No N I A- B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income,other than investment income,from or at the direction of the local government officer or a family member of the officer AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No t I t- Describe each employment or business relationship that the vendor named In Section 1 maintains with a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director,or holds an ownership interest of one percent or more. 11 Ie1/4- flCheck this box if the vendor has given the local government officer or a family member of the officer one or more gifts as described in Section 176.003(a)(2)(B), excluding gifts described in Section 176.003(a-1). Signature of'vendor doing,business`wlth the governmental entity Dale Form provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state tx.us Revised 11/30/2015 , h jrt i k x n s , (As, ``+$ry'. / Contractor Questionnaire Yes No 0 Ill 1. Has the City of Pearland or other governmental entity incurred costs as a result of contested change order(s)from the n (� undersigned company? I i I_,1 2. Has the City of Pearland or other governmental entity been involved in litigation relative to contract performance with the undersigned company? ElEl 3. Has the undersigned company failed to meet bid specifications or time limits on other contracts? IIIEl 4. Has the undersigned company abandoned a contract or refused to perform without legal cause after submitting a bid? I I 5. Has the undersigned company had bidding errors or omissions in two or more bid submissions within athirty six(36) month period? 0 6. Has the undersigned company failed to perform or performed unsatisfactory on two or more contracts within a thirty ' six(36)month period? 2 El 7 Does the undersigned company have adequate equipment,personnel and expertise to complete the proposed contract? 0 F 1 8. Does the undersigned company have a record of safety violations in two or more contracts within a thirty six(36) month period? a. 9. Does the undersigned have a criminal offense as an incident to obtaining or attempting to obtain a public or private ' contractor subcontract,or In the performance of such a contract or subcontract within a ten(10)year period? El El ,l 10. Has the undersigned company been convicted of a criminal offense within a ten(10)year period of embezzlement, theft,bribery,falsification or destruction of records,receiving stolen property or any other offense indicating a lack of business integrity or business honesty which might affect responsibility as a municipal contractor? IIIEl 11. Has the undersigned company been convicted of state or federal antitrust statutes within a ten(10)year period arising out of submission of bids or proposals? 0 3 '� 12. Has the undersigned company been disbarred or had a similar proceeding by another governmental entity? If you answered"yes"to Items 1-6 or 8-12 or answered"no"to Item 7,please attach a full explanation to this questionnaire. Company Name:ce icthhe.. S:y .1 It L—tit giALti'll2AS LLLC. , Address: 9.13.- 'Q & a1-54-i, A(1t}Ack r 9,1:5B Name: t.11rfiO`l[E'.. til..re::ki, ' Title: 'GS►Ciec- (Please Print) (Please Print) signature: _-. � Date: ' `I()'I'el 1aoa:a, 1 I 1 1 `v`..�-re"'" e l . A' p 'A.K41r c X n s CITY OF PEARLAND LOCAL BIDDER PREFERENCE CLAIM FORM Sections 271.905 and 271.9051 of the Texas Local Government Code authorize a municipality to consider a vendor's location in the determination of a bid award if the lowest bid received is from a business outside the municipality and contracting with a local bidder would provide the best combination of price and other economic benefits to the municipality The City of Pearland has determined that the allowable preference shall be applied to local vendor's bids for the purposes of evaluation when requested in writing by local bidder and when determined to be in the best interest of the City to do so. This request form and any supporting documentation must be submitted with bid in order to be considered by the City of Pearland. Questions should be addressed to the Purchasing Department at 281-652-1790. Exclusions to the local preference include expenditures of$3,000 or less, and those purchases which are: sole-source, emergency, federally-funded, cooperative contracts, or via interlocal agreement. The local preference status will expire one year from the date of this form;for any subsequent requests for preference during this period,the applicant need only complete and submit section 3 of this form. The City Council requires the following information for consideration of a local bidder preference (information may be submitted in an attachment to this form): SE6 1 Locational Eligibility: Principal place of business in Pearland,Texas? Principal place of business is defined herein as any business which owns or leases a commercial building within the City limits and uses the building for actual business operations. a. If yes, identify name of business/DBA, address, and business structure: sole proprietorship, partnership,corporation,or other b. Name and city of residence of owner(s)/partners/corporate officers;_as applicable. 2. General Business Information: a. Year business established(Pearland location). b. Most recent year property valuation(if owned);real and personal property c. Annual taxable sales(originating in Pearland). d. Is business current on all property and sales taxes at the time of this application? e. Total number of current employees and number of Pearland-resident employees. 3 Economic Development benefits resulting from award of this contract: , a. Number of additional jobs created or retained for Pearland resident-employees? b: Amount of additional City of Pearland ad valorem and/or sales taxes anticipated? Please explain how the amount has been determined. c. Local subcontractors utilized,if applicable:name,location and contract value for each. d. Other economic development benefit deemed pertinent by applicant. Reliable Signal m# lighting Solutions October 4,2022 City of Pearland—City Hall 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 RE. City of Pearland-Local Bidder Preference Claim Form(Q&A) Sir/Madam. 1. Locational Eligibility• a. Reliable•Signal&Lighting Solutions,Limited Liability Company(RSLS) 2617 Lazy Bend Street • Pearland, Texas 77581= b. Enrique Del.Cid—Manvel,Texas Larry Oviedo—Sugar Land,Texas Ana Oviedo—Sugar Land,Texas 2. General Business Information. a. In the year 2006 RSLS was established in Pearland, Texas b Property was evaluated in 2008. c. The annual taxable sales are$6.5 million. d. RSLS is up to date on property and sales taxes. e. RSLS has a total of 25 employees and in which,two of them are Pearland- residents. 3 Economic Development benefits resulting from award of this contract: a. Pearland residents will maintain their position with the company b. City of Pearland is a tax-exempt entity and therefore RSLS do not anticipate any type of sales taxes. c. Not applicable d. None Should you have any questions or need additional information,please do not hesitate to contact me at the number below or via e-mail at rdelcid ci reliable-signal.com. Sincerely, Enrique Del Cid President > J P 0 Box 2757 Pearland,Texas 77588 OFFICE(281)997-1111 FAX(281)754-4381 Local Bidder Preference Claim Form,page 2 Certification of information: The undersigned does hereby affirm that the information supplied is true and correct as of the date hereof, under penalty of perjury City Bid No./Quote for which the local preference is requested:t)$aa, Lablc, st s + Upecin J i% .,kl c It 110 l/In 3. , (Name of dder) (Date) � C9Ni C'\Dell�'i:C�` (Signature) (Print) THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF 1: 11-tatc1 i ,§ Appeared before me the above-named' t CiUC C:d, .,known to me to be the same, and swore that the information provided in response to the foregoing questions are true and correct to the best of his/her knowledge and belief,this .a.okh day of (x er' ,20* NOTARY BLIC,t TATE OF TEXAS ar vas NANNY•tHtG2I1A Printed Name: ��a�y�iN�� ekt ut1� _° ��'� Nntary'Iff.N12'4285807 �— --"1, �• TM,. My commis J Exp*es Commission Expires: tAcui S► May'2Z,:2U25 �7.� ►Qa�• i r Tia. AX e NON-COLLUSION STATEMENT 2 "The undersigned affirms that they are duly authorized to execute this contract, that this company, corporation,firm, partnership or individual has not prepared this bid in collusion with any other bidder, and that the contents of this bid as to prices, terms or conditions of said bid have not been communicated by the undersigned nor by any employee or agent to any other person engaged in this type of business prior to the official opening of this bid." Vendor,'r"fe G)1r.. t„.0.c1 L+o��l1'�► %-olu}tt s, IA-C.- Address 1ecAs'10 '-x *1-S81 P►ctdres's Pecs Lund,`G. 4- 5St Phone Number (2 C) Ctgl — Fax Number (2—'0 15 Email Address GAO Old @,_'CGLabbe—St h41:COrn Bidder(Signature) T'``'� �=""~~�`'�, Position with Company "C§Ci eP Signature of Company � Official Authorizing This Bid Company Official(Printed Name) .G-r11G u-e _e'-i ct 'i s Official Position cZesICle 1 AC�® DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 10/22/2021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY)THE POLICIES BELOW THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Certificate Desk Brady, Chapman, Holland&Associates PHONE FAX 10055 West Gulf Bank tAvC.No.Est):713-688-1500 (NC.No):713-688-7967 Houston TX 77040 ADDRess: ecerts@bch-insurance.cbm INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A.Phoenix Ins Co(Travelers) 25623 INSURED INSURER B.Navigators Specialty Ins.CO.(AmWINS) 36056 Reliable Signal&Lighting SolutionsLLC P 0 Box 2757 INSURER C.Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 Houston TX 77588 INSURER D.Texas Mutual Insurance Co 22945 INSURER E.Travelers Indemnity of AM(Travelers) 25666 INSURER F. COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:343330377 REVISION NUMBER. THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,.THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP/Y LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MM/DDYYY) (MM/DD(YYYY) E X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DTC05D776590TIA21 10/26/2021 10/26/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $300,000 X 5,000 PD Ded MED EXP(Any one person) $5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: f _GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 X POLICY X 1 jEC LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA6N8633042126G 10/26/2021 10/26/2022 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 _(Ea_accident) X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ • B UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR H021EXC7959091V 10/26/2021 10/26/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $2,000,000 X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $2,000,000 DED RETENTION$ $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION 0001259808 10/26/2021 10/26/2022 X STATUTE OERH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y N/A E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C Equipment QT6607D077817TLC21 10/26/2021 10/26/2022 Leased/Rented Equip $250,000 Installation Installation Floater $500,000 Maximum `Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The policy includes Blanket additional insured on the general liability per form CGD6040813 and automobile per form CAT3530215,with a waiver of subrogation on the general liability per form CGD3161111,automobile per form CAT3530215 and workers compensation per form WC420304B when required by written contract. This insurance is primary and non-contributory as respects general liability CGD6040813. *Deductible: Installation Floater$2,500 Per Occurrence,2%Windstorm or Hail Subject to a$5,000 Minimum Deductible *Deductible: Leased/Rented Equipment$1,000 Per Occurrence,$5,000 Theft WC Excluded Officer-Ana Oviedo CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION i SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Sample AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD CITY OF PEAItLAND BRAZORIA COUNTY, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 ' Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings ( 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Inspection Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying Nolo- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01750 Starting Systems 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2—SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 02415 Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 02417 Augering Pipe or Casing for Water Lines 02510 ( Water Mains 02511 c Water Meters 02512 Polyethylene Wrap 02513 Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines 02514 Fire Hydrant Assembly 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02532 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid Wall Pipe 02533 Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Markings 02603 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 02624 Structural Plate Culvert Structures 02628 Jacking Pipe or Box 02629 Safety End Treatments 02630 Storm Sewers ' 02631 Precast Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02632 .Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 02710 Base Course for Pavement 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 02742 Prime Coat 02743 Tack Coat 00010-2 of 3 I CITY OFPEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 2—SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS � 1 16-601 Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System (VIVDS)Removal 16-602 Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet 16-603 Vehicle Detection Purchase , 16-604 Vehicle Detection Installation 16-605 Pan-Tilt-Zoom Camera Installation 16-606 Wireless Access Point Installation 16-607 Battery Backup System Installation 16-609 Cisco Switch Installation 16-610 BBU Cabinet(Side Mounted) Attachment 01 —Project Locations/Intersections Attachment 02—Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet Attachment 03 —Gridsmart Quote Attachment 04—PTZ Camera Information Attachment 06—Battery Backup System Information Attachment 07—Cisco Switch Information Attachment 08—Side Mounted BBU Cabinet Attachment 09—TxDOT Workzone and Traffic Control Standards END OF SECTION CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date September 13,2022 PROJECT Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 BID NO 0822-25 BID DATE September 20, 2022, 2.00PM FROM Morgan R Early Project Manager City of Pearland 2016 Old Alvin Rd.,Pearland,TX 77581 To Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Updated Bid Opening Date. 09/20/22 @ 2.00PM Replace.Section 00100 in its entirety with the attached. Replace Section 00300 Schedule of Values with the attached,marked "Addendum 01" Attached is the Mandatory Pre-Bid meeting agenda and sign-in sheet. SPECIFICATIONS Delete Section 16-608, Replace Section 16-606, 16-607, and 16-609 in its entirety with the attached. Replace Section 01100 in its entirety with the attached. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS Q,A-t '1 END OF ADDENDUM NO 1 Morgan R Early Project Manager 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration" Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below- * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to. City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive,, Pearland, Texas 77581 Electronic bids will be accepted until 2.00 p.m., Tuesday, September 20, 2022. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO. 0822-25 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland Engineering and Public Works Service Center Rio Grande Training Room at 2016 Old Alvin Rd,Pearland, Texas 77581 at 11.00 a.m.on Thursday September 1,2022. The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets and vehicle detection equipment with associated fiber splices at twenty-nine (29) intersections along four (4) corridors. The four corridors and twenty-nine intersections are as follows 06-2019 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Shadow Creek Parkway 1 Kingsley 2. Reflection Bay 3 Trinity Bay 4 Kirby 5 Business Center 6 Market Place 7 SH 288 Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 2. Windward Bay Drive 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Shadow Creek H.S. 6 Kirby Drive 7 Town Center 8. Business Center McHard Road 1 Mykawa 2. SH 35/Main Street 3 Old Alvin 4 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park Lane 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 6. Shallow Creek Drive 7 Province Village Drive Bailey Road 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 2. Harkey Road 3 McLean Road 4 Veterans Drive There are three alternate intersections along McHard Road which will require three cabinets and four vehicle detection cameras. 1 Country Place Parkway 2. Country Place Boulevard(quad) 3 Cullen Parkway Signals shall be inspected and accepted by the City upon substantial completion.All intersections will need to be operation at the conclusion of the project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200 06-2019 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Electronic Bid Documents. including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092, The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 7035 W Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System.BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds. Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements mstalled as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity- All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 06-2019 00100 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U S C 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal. The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria. The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder In identifying this criterion,the City will consider 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to Base Bid,Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Frances Aguilar City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date August 24, 2022 Second Publication date August 31,2022 06-2019 00100-4 of 4 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#.0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Shadow Creek Parkway Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 1 1 1 LS _required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 1.2 7 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and 1.3 7 EA _replace the existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 1 4 7 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all seven(7) intersections for one hundred forty-six thousand,three hundred and eighty seven dollars per 1.5 1 LS lump sum 16-603 $ 146,387,00 $ 146,387 00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 1.6 11 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 1 7 3 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 1.8 3 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each 1.9 7 EA proposed traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 1.10 5 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 1 11 2 EA installed by City). 16-608 Broadway St./FM 518 Corridor Addendum 01 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Mobilization and Demobilization.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 2.1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 2.2 8 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and 2.3 7 EA replace the existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 2.4 7 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all eight(8) intersections for one hundred seventy-seven thousand,five hundred ninety four dollars per 2.5 1 LS lump sum. 16-603 $ 177,594 00 $ 177,594 00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 2.6 16 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 2.7 4 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 2.8 4 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and'incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each 2.9 7 EA proposed traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 2.10 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 2.11 4 EA installed by City). 16-608 McHard Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 3 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor. 01505 Addendum 01 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 3.2 10 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and 3.3 8 EA replace the existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of I pull tape remains in the mast arm, 3 4 10 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all ten(10) intersections for two hundred twenty-eight thousand,three hundred thirty four dollars per 3.5 1 LS lump sum. 16-603 $ 228,334 00 $ 228,334 00 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 3 6 22 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3 7 2 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3.8 2 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each 3.9 14 EA proposed traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 3 10 7 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 3 11 8 EA installed by City). 16-608 Baley Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 4 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 4.2 4 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all four(4) 4.3 l LS intersections for seventy three thousand,two hundred ninety three dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 73,293 00 $ 73,293 00 Addendum 01 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project# TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM �Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 4 4 4 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each 4.5 4 EA proposed traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 4 6 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 All items above are for labor,materials,equipment,incidentals,and related tasks as required to provide work complete in place,approved and accepted by Owner,and ready for occupancy/use at commencement of warranty period. Bidder's Authorized Signature Addendum 01 CITY OF PEARLAND �oE pt PROJECTS DEPARTMENT fl 2016 Old Alvin, Pearland, Texas 77581 &ADO tsk pearlandtx.gov/projects T E X AS Sr t$�15' PRE-BID MEETING AGENDA Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 Thursday,September 1,2022 11 00 AM The pre-bid meeting for this project is mandatory Please make sure you have signed the sign-in sheet. This meeting is not to make changes in the design, but to answer any questions about the plans and specifications. Any questions you have shall be sent in writing through the E-bid system at ebids@pearlandtx.gov There will be no decisions made at this meeting. All questions and clarifications regarding project documents shall be made in writing and will be addressed by an addendum.Addendums will be available for viewing along with the contract documents. 1) Sign-in, Social Distancing Measures 2) Introduction of Participants a) City of Pearland Project Manager Morgan R.Early 2016 Old Alvin Rd., Pearland, TX 77581 281 652.1734 office b) City of Pearland Traffic Engineer Yolci Ramirez 2559 Hillhouse Rd., Pearland, TX 77584 281 652.1686 office 3) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 b) City of Pearland Project Number TR2201 c) ITB No 0822-25 4) Project Overview a) Overview of Work—Lowest Responsible Bidder The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four(24)traffic signal control cabinets with associated fiber splices and vehicle detection equipment at twenty-nine (29) Design 1 of 3 D30.Revised 7/08 intersections along four(4)corridors. The four corridors and twenty-nine intersections are as follows. Shadow Creek Parkway 7 Town Center I Kingsley 8 Business Center 2. Reflection Bay 3 Trinity Bay McHard Road 4 Kirby 1 Mykawa 5 Business Center 2. SH 35/Main Street 6 Market Place 3 Old Alvin 7 SH 288 4 Summit Springs/Forest Park Ln 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road Broadway Street/FM 518 6 Shallow Creek Drive 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 7 Province Village Drive 2. Windward Bay Drive 3 Kingsley Drive Bailey Road 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 5 Shadow Creek H.S 2 Harkey Road 6 Kirby Drive 3 McLean Road b) The Contractor shall be aware of existing utilities in and around the project areas. It is the Contractor's responsibility to locate and verify all utilities prior to construction. Contractor must contact and coordinate with all pertinent entities (i.e. AT&T, CenterPoint Energy, Comcast, etc ) and meet their requirements. c) Preliminary Cost Estimate-Approximately $1,950,000 d) Construction concerns. i) Future Issues. COVID related resource delays that could affect schedule. Coordination ° between entities will be crucial for success.Acquisition of long lead time items to be prioritized to maintain construction schedule. ii) Existing Conditions. Project Site is within several critical road network corridors, which are heavily trafficked and visible to the public. Traffic control, visibility, and site cleanliness will be priority iii) Coordination Between other Entities.Entities to include City of Pearland Streets and Drainage, Traffic,Information Technologies, Right-of-Way, and Communications. 5) Procurement Process a) Advertised. 08/24/22 & 08/31/2022 in Pearland Reporter News. b) Mandatory Pre-bid Conference Thursday, September 1,2022 @ 11.00 AM at the City of Pearland Engineering and Public Works Service Center at 2016 Old Alvin Rd,Pearland, Texas 77581 c) Any inquires to the bid requirements should be emailed to ebids@pearlandtx.gov no later than Wednesday, September 7,2022. d) Construction Specs available for download at City's EBID system. All bids should be submitted through the E-Bid system located on the City's website at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Proposers are advised to register as a "supplier"on the City's E-Bid System at the above website by clicking on"Supplier Registration" Design 2 of 3 D30 Revised 7/08 and completing a short registration questionnaire Electronic Bid Documents, including Plans, Technical Specifications and Bid Forms are available for download after registration is approved by City Purchasing office No plan fees or deposits are required for bid documents obtained through the City's E-bid System.Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov e) Electronic Bids are to be submitted no later than. Thursday, September 15, 2022 by 2.00 pm .(via EBID system). Bids will be opened and read aloud after the 2.00 pm deadline.Location. City Hall Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Dr,Pearland TX 77581 0 Bidder Qualifications—must be submitted with bid g) Bid Security—Five percent (5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond; (Upload under attachments. Apparent low bidder to submit hardcopy of bond within 48 hours of request from City) h) Each Offeror by submitting a bid agrees that if their offer is accepted by City Council,such Offeror will furnish all items and services upon which prices have been tendered and upon the terms and conditions in the proposal/contract. 6) Contract a) Award i) Notice of Award—Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement,and Payment, Performance and Maintenance Bond Forms within 10 days of receipt of Notice of Intent to Award. ii) Notice to Proceed — Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed (NTP) (1) Due to potential for long lead items on equipment,contractor shall begin submittal process upon receipt of NTP Once submittals are approved, contractor shall issue PO for items and submit documentation of such to City within 10 calendar days of approval. b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion 310 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed (1) Contract time includes calendar days for equipment procurement. ii) Complete/Final Payment. 90 days after Owner receives approved retainage invoice & close- out documentation required. iii) Liquidated Damages. Five hundred dollars ($500)/calendar day 7) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre-Bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional questions regarding bid documents must be submitted in writing to ebids@pearlandtx.gov Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre-Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required. Interested proposers are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the City of Pearland. 8) Questions? Design 3 of 3 D30.Revised 7/08 of r94,e Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 9v CoP Project No. TR2201 Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting Sign-in Sheet T EX AS Thursday, September 1, 2022 @ 11 00 AM ''sr' ,69 2016 Old Alvin Rd, Pearland TX 77581 Name(Print) Company Phone Number Email Morgan R Early City of Pearland 281-652-1734 mearlyCa pearlandtx.gov Yolci Ramirez City of Pearland 281-652-1686 vramirezenearlandtx.gov Mario Tellez City of Pearland 281 997 5990 mtellez(a)_pearlandtx.gov r � , l , bleki,, Ax i ce' "�2 4.�. - e, , /eix.11 /Lle%rre%.e< l',, Cv. el cool A c 7/-3Li7/ PJo s. �i-L,�/ �d✓e Z. ev'e4-co,.,i c. <a CiLi 1ThEA CC c+ A�: 0\k4 ,5 N4.- � Lt 1 2s -b_it (z81)?l`I9.-11/( ,c4_.`c.. a gr,. ,.. \,-s rs,„►4.I Gawk 1-ewin2 04 /45S -77-4kPic, S 5{ 5 M/- 7-161 %Assjr•es+ feeo ,,,-,/.�ti,A J 2- /7Aasco,. Ct kip srvikr s7 cede i,e yCf-, -c,4 Uu L 1 of 2 D5.Revised 9/08 Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets with associated fiber splices and vehicle detection equipment at twenty-nine (29) intersections along four (4) corridors. The four corridors and twenty-nine intersections are as follows Shadow Creek Parkway Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Kingsley 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 2 Reflection Bay 2. Windward Bay Drive 3 Trinity Bay 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Kirby 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Business Center 5 Shadow Creek H.S 6 Market Place 6 Kirby Drive 7 SH 288 7 Town Center 8 Business Center McHard Road 7 Province Village Drive 1 Mykawa 2. SH 35/Main Street Bailey Road 3 Old Alvin 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 4 Summit Springs/Forest Park Ln 2. Harkey Road 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 3 McLean Road 6 Shallow Creek Drive B Contractor to setup and test new cabinet prior to installation. C Contractor to modify existing traffic signal controller cabinet foundations (if needed) to be sufficient size to accommodate all dimensions of proposed traffic signal controller cabinet. Typical minimum size is 60"x33" D Remove existing cabinet and return to City of Pearland Traffic Department at 2559 Hillhouse Rd.,Pearland, TX 77584 E Contractor to maintain integrity of existing traffic signal controller foundation, conduit,cable,ground boxes,and other signal related equipment in the project area. F Proposed traffic signal cabinet to be two door,,with internal Battery Backup Unit (BBU) side cabinet. G Per locations noted in the attached corridor maps,contractor to install City supplied BBU cabinets, and contractor to provide and install BBU cabinets mounted to side of traffic signal cabinet. H Locate controller, etc., as approved by the City I Repair or replace pavement and sidewalks damaged by the contractor's forces during construction at no cost to the City J All submittals are subject to review and approval by the City of Pearland Traffic Department. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A IT staff to provide and install Cisco network switch in side-mounted BBU cabinet. B Traffic department will provide phasing and timing for permanent traffic signals. 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Traffic operations staff to provide several BBU side cabinets for contractor installation. B IT staff to provide wireless access point for contractor installation. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Contractor to submit proposed construction schedule to City for approval, as specified in Section 01350—Submittals. B Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the City's Traffic Department, as specified in Section 01310—Coordination and,Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A N/A 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the project site(s) and Contractor's use of Rights-of-Way, as specified in Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Work should be scheduled to accommodate the Owner's operations and minimize conflict. 2.0 PRODUCTS—Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION—Not Used END OF SECTION CITY OF PEARLAND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT INSTALLATION SECTION 16-606 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT INSTALLATION 1.0 Wireless Access Point Installation 1.1 Contractor to install Wireless Access Point on the Mast arm of the traffic.Signal Pole closest to the signal cabinet. Wireless Access Point and mounting hardware will be supplied by the City 1.2 Contractor will provide all tools, power and network cable to complete the installation 1.3 Contractor will coordinate with City's IT representative to finalize installation and ensure proper function prior to submitting for payment. 1.4 Please see Attachment 05 for cut sheets. CITY OF PEARLAND BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM INSTALLATION SECTION 16-607 BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 1.0 Battery Backup System 1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install a battery backup system as specified by the City(APC Smart-UPS) System shall include all components necessary for proper installation (labor and materials) 1.2 Contractor to verify that battery backup system is the model installed inside of a standard traffic signal cabinet. 1.3 More information can be found in Attachment 06. CITY OF PEARLAND CISCO SWITCH INSTALLATION SECTION 16-609 CISCO SWITCH INSTALLATION 1.0 Cisco Switch Installation 1.1 The City shall furnish and the Contractor will install a Cisco switch as specified by Attachment 08. 1.2 This shall include all components necessary for proper installation as directed by the City(labor and materials) CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO 2 Date September 16, 2022 PROJECT Traffic Signal Upgrade FY22 BID NO 0822-25 BID DATE. 10/04/2022, 2.00PM FROM. Yolci Ramirez Traffic Engineer City of Pearland 2559 Hillhouse Road Pearland, TX 77584 To Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The department is modifying the Scope,please look for another Addendum with modification SPECIFICATIONS NA CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS NA END OF ADDENDUM NO 2 Yolci Ramirez Traffic Engineer 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.3 Date. October 4, 2022 PROJECT Traffic Signal Upgrade FY22 BID NO 0822-25 BID DATE 10/20/2022, 2:00PM FROM. Morgan R Early Project Manager Engineering:and Public Works City of Pearland 2016 Old Alvin Rd.,Pearland, TX 77581 To Prospective.Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL, FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Replace Section 00100 in its entirety with the Attached Addendum 03 postpones the project bid opening to Thursday,,October 20,,2022 at 2.00 PM SPECIFICATIONS NA CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS NA ,4 , 7 ,s. n 6 r-sl4-` ` '`` ' END OF ADDENDUM NO 3 Morgan R Early Project Manager 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration" Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below. * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 Electronic bids will be accepted until 2.00 p.m., Thursday, October 20, 2022. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format.All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN• TR2201 BID NO.. 0822-25 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the. City of Pearland Engineering and Public Works Service Center Rio Grande Training Room at 2016 Old Alvin Rd;Pearland, Texas 77581 at 11.00 a.m.on Thursday September 1,2022. The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets and vehicle detection equipment with associated fiber splices at twenty-nine (29) intersections along four (4) corridors. The four corridors and twenty-nine intersections are as follows 06-2019 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Shadow Creek Parkway 1 Kingsley 2. Reflection'Bay 3 Trinity Bay 4 Kirby 5 Business Center 6 Market Place 7 SH 288 Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 2. Windward Bay Drive 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Shadow Creek H.S. 6 Kirby Drive 7 Town Center 8. Business Center McHard Road 1 Mykawa 2. SH 35/Main Street 3 Old Alvin 4 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park Lane 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 6. Shallow Creek Drive 7 Province Village Drive Bailey Road 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 2. Harkey Road 3 McLean Road 4 Veterans Drive There are three alternate intersections along McHard Road which will require three cabinets and four vehicle detection cameras. 1 Country Place Parkway 2. Country Place Boulevard(quad) 3 Cullen Parkway Signals shall be inspected and accepted by the City upon substantial completion.All intersections will need to be operation at the conclusion of the project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer This,system has certain hardware, interne access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200 06-2019 001.00-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Electronic Bid Documents including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System.BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of'ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the.Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally,the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity. All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. 06-2019 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination. The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such. Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder In identifying this criterion,the City will consider- 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested,,including but not limited to Base Bid,Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Frances Aguilar City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date August 24, 2022 Second Publication date August 31, 2022, 06-2019 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO 4 Date. October 20, 2022 PROJECT Traffic Signal Upgrade FY22 BID NO 0822-25 BID DATE 10/27/2022, 2 OOPM FROM. Morgan R Early Project Manager Engineering and Public Works City of Pearland 2016 Old Alvin Rd., Pearland,TX 77581 To Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL, FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Addendum 04 corrects the intersections and equipment quantities and postpones the project bid opening to Thursday, October 27,2022 at 2.00 PM. Replace Section 00100, Section 00300, Section 01100,Attachment 01, and Attachment 03 in their entirety with the Attached. Remove Spec 16-609 and Attachment 07 in their entirety SPECIFICATIONS NA CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS NA END OF ADDENDUM NO 4 Morgan R Early Project Manager 0090,1 - 1 of 1 2-22-12 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: I�t '%eari_and, clnviar_c��i 1.oz.m.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration" Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on, this web site.. When prompted to add Or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below- * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200,, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ehld�.,a`pea landtx.gor, All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 Electronic bids will be accepted until 2.00 p.m., Thursday, October 27, 2022, All Bids shall reference the following proj ect information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened"and read aloud into the public record following,the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO 0822-25 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland Engineering and Public Works Service Center Rio Grande Training,Room at 2016 Old Alvin Rd,Pearland, Texas 77581 at 11.00 a.m. on Thursday September 1,2022. The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets and vehicle detection equipment with associated fiber splices at thirty-one (31) intersections along five (5) corridors. The five corridors and thirty-one intersections are as follows. 06-2019 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Shadow Creek Parkway 1 Kingsley 2. Reflection Bay 3 Trinity Bay 4 Kirby 5 Business Center 6 Market Place 7 SH 288 Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 2. Main/SH35 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Shadow Creek KS 6 Kirby Drive 7 Town Center 8 Business Center McHard Road 1 SH 35/Main Street 2. Old Alvin 3 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 4 Shallow Creek Drive 5 Province Village Drive 6 Broadway 7 Country Place Parkway 8. Country Place Boulevard(quad) 9 Cullen Parkway Bailey Road 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 2. Harkey Road 3 McLean Road 4 Veterans Drive Main St/SH 35 1 Orange Signals shall be inspected and accepted by the City upon substantial completion. All intersections will need to be operation at the conclusion of the project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals„RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer This system has certain hardware,, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200 06-2019 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Electronic Bid Documents. including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the.City's.Website at. 1,tt s !ait F l ti ,ogiri_asp; upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System.BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID D EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents. plans, specifications hid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to "day(s) shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds. Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check; or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening, Bid Security shall be delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581 The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in.the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. 06-2019 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEA RLAND INVITATION TO BID • The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate Nondiscrimination, The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S C 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBEISBE Goal. The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected' must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder In identifying this criterion,the City will consider 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to Base Bid,Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves,the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes'of correcting an error in the bid price. Frances Aguilar City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date August 24, 2022 Second Publication date August 31. 2022 06-2019 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date. Bid of , an individual proprietorship/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO. 0822-25 (Submitted in Electronic format) To The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Traffic Signal Upgrade Program FY22 with all related appurtenances, complete., tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Engineering Staff, City of Pearland, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth inExhibit"A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Workso changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder s Initial's. 08-2018 00300- I of 2. CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 190 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s).specified in Section 00500—Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to"day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s) The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No Date, Addendum No. Date' Addendum No Date. Addendum No Date Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion,,or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name By Title. Address. Phone No ATTEST (Seal, if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typed or Printed Name) Signature Date Bidder's Initial's. 08-2018. 00300-2 of 2 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project#-TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit.Price Total Amount Shadow Creek Parkway Corridor Mobilization,and Demobilization Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 1 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize, Max 3%for each corridor. 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 1.2 7 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials; equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 1.3 7 EA 'existing traffic signal control,cabinet at each.intersection. 16-602 V1VDS removal.Furnish all labor materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 1 4 7 EA froth the earners location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all seven(7) intersections,for one hundred forty-six thousand,three hundred and eighty seven dollars per 1.5 1 LS lump sum 16-603 $ 146,387.00 $ 146,387 00 Vehicle Detection Installation.Furnish.all labor.materials,and incidentals required to install, 1,6 11 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 API install.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 1 7 2 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install.program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 1.8 7 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 _ _ BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only). Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to.install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 1 9 5 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller'Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied B13U cabinet at each intersection to.house Cisco Switch(to be 1 10 2 EA installed by City), 16-608 Addendum 04 Project Name.Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid.4'0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Broadway St/FM 518 Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization.Furnish all labor materials,equipment and incidentals 2.1 1, LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 2.2 8 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices Furnish all labor materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage.and replace the 2,.3 8 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VJVDS removal.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of l pull tape remains in the mast arm, 2.4 8 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all eight(8) intersections for one hundred seventy-seven thousand,five hundred ninety four dollars per 2.5 1 LS lump sum. 16-603 $ 177,594 00 5 177,594 00 Vehicle Detection Installation.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 2.6 16 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection, 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the _ 2.7 2 _EA _ contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install.Furnish all labor.materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 2.8 2 EA City provided equipment at each intersection, 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 2.9 8 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-60'7 BBL Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 2.10 4 FA be installed by City). 16-608 BBL Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor.materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house.Cisco Switch(to be 2.11 4 EA installed'by City). 16-608 Mel-lard Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization. Furnish all labor materials,equipment and incidentals 3 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor, 01505 Addendum 04 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#'0822-25 Project#'TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UQM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Traffic Control Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 3:29 EA Contractor to design.establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with Associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 3.3 8 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape re tiains in the mast arm. 3.4 9 EA from the camera location to the base of-the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all nine(9) 3.5: 1 LS intersections for two hundred three thousand,eight hundred thirty dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 203,830,00 S 203,830 00 Vehicle Detection Installation.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 3.6 14 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3 7 2 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. _ 16-605 API install:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3 8 3 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 3.9 9 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house City Provided& 3.10 6 EA Installed Cisco Switch 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 3 11 3 EA installed by City). 16-608 Addendum 04 Project Name Traffic Signal'Upgrades(FY22) .Bid#'0822-25 Project# TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price, Total Amount. Baley Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 4.1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 4.2 4 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all four(4) 4.3 1 LS intersections for seventy three thousand,two hundred ninety three dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 73,293.00 S 73,293 00 Vehicle Detection Installation,Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install. 4 4 4 EA program and i nplement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials.and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBC.system at each proposed 4.5 4 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only) Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 4 6 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 Main StJSH 35 Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all Tabor,materials,equipment and incidentals 5 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 5.2 1 EA Contractor to design,establish.and maintain all appropriatetratfic control. 01555 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for one(1)intersection for 5.3 1 LS eighteen thousand,,seven hundred two dollars per lump sum. 16-603 $ 18,702.00 $ 18,702.00 Vehicle Detection'Installation:Furnish all labor materials,and incidentals required to install, 5 4 1 EA program and implement the_contractor,supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 Batte rBackup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied'BBU system at each proposed 5.5 1 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller'(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 5 6 1 EA be installed by City). 16-608 Addendum 04 Project Name:'Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#-0822-25 Project# TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity, UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total.Amount Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 5'7 1 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 5 8 1 EA be installed by City). 16-608 All items above are for labor,materials,equipment, incidentals,and related tasks as required to provide work complete in place,approved and accepted by Owner and ready for occupancy/use at commencement of warranty period. 'Bidder's Authorized Signature Addendum 04 Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 10 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to. be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises,and Owner occupancy 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets with associated fiber splices .and vehicle detection equipment at thirty-one (31) intersections along five (5) corridors. The five comdors and thirty-one intersections arc as follows. Shadow Creek Parkway Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Kingsley I Shadow Ridge Lane 2 Reflection Bay 2. Main St/SH 35 3 Trinity Bay 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Kirby 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Business Center 5 Shadow Creek U.S 6 Market Place 6. Kirby Drive 7 S11 288 7 Town Center 8 Business.Center McHard Road 1 Main.St/SH 35 Bailey Road 2 Old Alvin 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 3 Barry Rose Rd/liughes Road 2 Harkey Road 4 Shallow Creek Drive 3 McLean Road 5 Province Village Drive 4 Veterans Drive 6 Broadway 7 Country Place Parkway Main St/SH 35. 8 Country Place Boulevard (quad.) 1 Orange Street 9 Cullen Parkway B Contractor to setup and test new cabinet prior to installation. Contractor to modify existing traffic signal controller cabinet foundations (if needed) to be sufficient size to accommodate all dimensions of proposed traffic signal controller cabinet. Typical minimum size is 60"x33" D Remove existing cabinet and return to City of Pearland Traffic Department at 2559 Hillhouse.Rd., Pearland, TX 77584 Contractor to maintain integrity of existing traffic signal controller foundation., conduit,cable,ground boxes,and other signal related equipment in the project area F Proposed traffic signal cabinet to be two. door, with internal Battery Backup Unit (BBU) side'cabinet. G Per locations noted in the attached corridor maps,contractor to install City supplied BBU cabinets, and contractor to provide and install BBU cabinets mounted to side of traffic signal cabinet. II Locate controller, etc , as approved by the City I Repair or replace pavement and sidewalks damaged by the contractor's forces during construction at no cost to the City J All submittals are subject to review and approval by the City of Pearland Traffic Department. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A IT staff to provide and install Cisco network switch in side-mounted BBU cabinet. B Traffic department will provide phasing and timing for peimanent traffic signals. 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Traffic operations staff to provide several BBU side cabinets for contractor installation. B IT staff to provide wireless access point for contractor installation. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE' A Contractor to submit proposed construction schedule to City for approval, as specified in Section 01350- Submittals. B Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the City's Traffic Department, as specified in Section 01310 -Coordination and Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A N/A 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. Comply with procedures for access to the project site(s) and Contractor's use of Rights-of-Way, as specified in Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Work should be scheduled to accommodate the Owner's operations and minimize conflict. 2.0 PRODUCTS-Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION-Not Used END OF SECTION Vehicle Detections (GridSmart Camera) Locations per corridor• Shadow Creek Parkway 1. Kingsley—2 cams, NW and SE poles, 2 Reflection Bay—2 cams, NW and SE poles 3 Trinity Bay—1 camera on the NE pole 4 Kirby—2 cams, NW and SE poles 5 Business Center— 1 camera, NW pole 6. Market Place—1 camera, NW pole 7 SH 288—2 cameras, NW and SE poles with fiber cable solution on the SE pole Broadway Street/FM 518 1. Shadow Ridge Lane—2 camera, SE and NW poles 2 Main (SH 35)—2 cameras, SE and NW poles 3 Kingsley Drive—2.cameras, SW and NE poles 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive—2 cameras, NW and SE poles 5 Shadow Creek H.S.—2 cameras, SE pole and NE pole 6. Kirby Drive—2 cameras, NE and SW poles 7 Town Center—2 cameras, NE and SW poles 8 Business Center-2 cameras, NE and SW poles McHard Road/Pearland Pkwy 1 SH 35/Main Street—1 camera, NW pole. 2 Old Alvin-2 cameras, NW and SE poles. 3 Broadway—1 cameras,Pole in the south median 4 Barry Rose'Rd/Hughes Road—2 cameras, E and W corners. 5 Shallow Creek Drive—2 cameras on the West and East poles 6. Province Village Drive—1 camera on the West pole McHard Road 1. Country Place Parkway-1 camera, NW pole 2 Country Place Boulevard (quad)—4 cameras. i NW pole ii. SW pole (fiber run) iii. NE pole (fiber run) iv SE pole (fiber run) 3 Cullen Parkway—1camera, NE pole. Bailey Road 1. Manvel Road/FM 1128— 1 camera on NW pole 2. Harkey Road— 1 camera on NE pole 3 McLean Road—1 camera on NW pole, 4. Veterans Drive— 1 camera, NW pole Main Street 1. Orange Street—1 camera on NE pole i - - T-- T - r7--- _ ;-. • d 1 i _ -S"Sam KUUSfon P6+«y"k` ' 8__ S Sam-Huuston Pkvri'.W �f - _. .'�taySi KO b,StbP i' y I '; '1 , 'l t f ro ' 7 r „ i i - `„„mueb,nnQ:of X J4 I 0 J X d; IY 5n;th Or „6.aut'Dr T . - f fix, R fi ,, _..-- - -ram II I / - — r • f _ AUK .. li 0 SHADOW CRt/t AKWY 0 '^ I a G ii',i ry 2 ;i I' ,, i g -c] r / G 7 a i 4s 1 is '.4/ ./1 .4.."‘.' f) x r� F p' i :� �}g 1 ;afesNT 4. mt-i/,`l'`mre,, -;F'r,A§ t4.' ',P.c.:ca w ErS:N GstES t,l, ''y 4 _ _ _ 'i - x 4***Th zy-ltr •Caet. utxs,,,.r 5 Hp,s aon.;;PB, .4Parr r &W i3hfe,CONANr E, /Ert C.*v r •*o* ,e,Sa`e rr.,01,G.+o Tec vnoivg I c I i✓, > © cabinet Replaceivient and Detection Upgrade(^) "`h"'`,z""CITY OF PEARLAND1 a c,r. 03 Shadow Creek Parkway Traffic Signals Upgrade - 1 Kingsley Drive(*2) S.Business Center("1) �" " 2. Reflection Bay(*2) 6.Market Place(J1) aas<oa ryi',' 3.Trinity Bay ("1) 7$H 288(*2) vV,�©;a;:,."A'.1as•r:u. 4 Kirby Drive(*2) v .1 .-. ...:4. —...—...------.—,—, --_,— &1 Attet r.:fien 171— . -— —..-111•11011 —- —...'--S".- J..1 A k. 1 . ^. , 1,4 11 7 1 I i i 3 0.c.x.tiTS „- : -. . VII 1 1 *7 ,Irc;i6 1 ; ,,.• I 4: • , ..1'2 —, • 014 i 4 0.- TRAIrry a4 14 tA 0 i-; ! '0 kE Li; Ar -0 i / ,0' -4 xf, 1 el• c) v 4t <2. e r ,,? ), It' i ,-- ,r TlVe t ri 99 e 1' Eq 0 .4 91 41 I 'e; 8 CLEAR LAIN LOOY 0 1 i a ; Tr't 1 P 't, ,...t 1 11',..' I i OADWAY''..i't I SRC/POWAY T 0 0 0 0 i ERGADOTAY,f5T * r 3 fr;GA.DWAY vr 1 ,.."- I , . . 1 , i .. ..,, i f i 4-1' 43 .0 1 , ,51 • .., a m CS a, . , r li 11 I 0 69 If E.14,--,-,. ,ity .p.s c, ,te,t A.,r-Ce ,14-4t-Q. ''t: -s,,,,,.,',i1..t LiWil xtP'.."01,..A. t-.P..r..G.7, ,, r <u,,,..- ..,,,,S.,51 C.c5ileth 0 .till,, ...SA 1,...,,,....,=.` NP•'41...-C-T, u,A., 1: l, ,i i -5 Li 1 ir, 0 11';;.laitiA>A1r*ZalgeeffsAtZKW-17.TORe4.74;0';li Pit A 144:;7'..4ir Cii;SiiVii4: 442-1VIKISPFA4W/MAIVACW:W.1.!%AltfV..41.4aira:AtilkVa-,*--rtY14";'W-:r..1 -Lt.p CITY OF PEARLAND 0 'Cabinet Replacement and DPtection Upgrade e) 1.901 I 509faqt .1 6 ait 0- 1, Broadway Street Traffic Signals Upgrade . ':kk. 111111=11=1 . I Shadow Ridge Lane("2) 5. Shadow Creek H.S. (*2) * Cabinet Replacement PTZ and Detection Upgrade(a) isY)ritvrri-i7r- 2. Main Street(*2) 6. Kirby Drive(*2) ' ,-,4"47". 3 Kingsley Drive (*2) 7 Town Center(*2) gt'=,%tf=7,41 4 Halfrnoon Bay Drive(*2) 8. Business Center(*2) 1.4 !".01...._ 'frki,:+1..cirlgrkraig-01,414:2U-440 11 ii —- — ; r I, :-'• r f 9, 1 . ' i X ,• I 'ot,(1,4101-;A MAY 1 '' , .5,,, ---2_-_a__--__ •_..-f'.'AI VIAGSfOlfA PKV4'Af t,q,C.NOLIA PKWY k -, :-, L2, m n'l l'.1 a' 1> Al rfill co- n a a 0 4 I! [1 ‘ 1 I t r, I . r Ir.r I it. #'1 , i ' ‘ I*. 0 5Aii_tl'KO I 3A,I1_Vti v a 0 E A ELE%RD \ , 1 \ .1 f ix \ ... J 1 I 'S; & ,J---.r., i IN I -f; A', OS. of* , ,,.. ,f1 f:',-,-,- '-" '`', -'- , 1 I AI,, .sA SA.t• - ESA S, P _ ., _ - - — . .• I, '.•,:r.„ ,.-3-1,. , A,.. x,,,, .."'" --,,; ,,, ,.4...q ,,„,7-1:. i-:Ak,'.., i.„, ' 4,,,i1 -.i- ;,•.4.` ' .hi CITY OF PEARLAND 0 Detection Only(1, t, f?' V ,•'. Bailey Road Traffic Signals Upgrade .,==,,. . ry‘rortsr+0,,v . 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128(*1) r',2. Harkey Road(*1) 1 ,.. ,,w, ! ‘,. 4 ,',"'.• "--11-21,..P•3. McLean Road(*1) - ',•- 4 Veterans Drive(*1) NH --- '.-, ,-i...7,•c--', -.I; i,;:=7,:.,tt-...t.:=, ik,,,‘ i- =, 'r _ ',_:'•Fk,'_;'. •_7-Tr,,,, .----,;:.:T 7-7-i:, 7---,-7---.'•Z----,..- -f-,:!-::,3----4-",72.1-,'- '7,7- n.:.-,...-- e.-7----'7:',7-...-,' -ri,+f-:,--5:!----:'..:A,4-110'-i:-. '','''''.'-'' ...;;2_--•.','t'-',-, ",.••---.*.x.,... ....2.41,i..:A..:•-t...--, .`,..''',.4.:_.''-',.-,;--,-.,7' - z',';,,..*, -r. -:)i Jkl.--;, :4,-.-,!:,,,, ', ,..,..'?':.:-..,,,,,:::„2,-„,-/,..4,-,-,1, _ _ *_,E+4vn---F4AAA-iort Rkory E . , . ., . x...1 ....- 4 /Nyp, --/ ,. 3. .. . ".. 6k,,,,, 1';:,; ,' ,..- - 1 !.,..... 4, 0 '1 ear, 0 x xi' ,,--- -4,-- -u ;-*- ', _ .0,,,, A. 4- Et-R ooksor.',1?„oti.S.;_!DE 4.4a St J.° , AstAr.3'k 1 l Rd 'CV, Puotto<RA .,..6 d . I 0 t4irCit'at'° \ . 1 ,,,,f ,,,,- .:', 1 4 i pf.' ,-,. , • „, „,,,, ,s,. . .„ › ,..,-X 0 * t -‹ . ,.. 0 A, > z -4 E , . . • r p .., •; o ..Ag t. ;".... N .. ..._., 41, 7 4 '' /to., / BROADWAY ST t A Eill 4 E WALNUT ST ."' • •- 81 z r. rn > -4 In a) a \ 0 t i 40 ,.c3., [-.•." A5 \ CI ‘ CI o 0 .- - ' ,I 1 ',. (12 t ...• 4. . 1 1 : \ ,- i,..., ,1 ..0,,' BR04,4,4 040 LIA PKWY vitkii•iity.!5,1-.10.,,l,r,,in-e",„3,'A'AA at Irn,k"CfAAIP..-4.- 44E-4,,8,,A..n.ko-ft.40 ,414C,,pk",---4.0'441X44/019.,Inc""CYNA`,/4„4/AR-054.40, " II C I TY OF PEARLAND 0 Cabinet Replacement and Detection Upgrade(*) 0 4.1..009.g 09 0.13 ',.;! McHardtPearland Pkwy Traffic Signals Upgrade „Ita?,,,,,ta., . 1 SH 35/Main Street(*1) 5 Province Village Drive(*1) 2, Old Alvin Road(*2) S.Broadway(*2) E3 Detection Upgrade only( ) - 3. Barry Rose Road/Hughes Road(*2) 4 Shallow Creek Drive(*2) - .- ---.- - , - -- -- - - — :: 1- r =� t -t --y T� ,c- - 3—fi. ,.: --=3-P4ter+ 1 Yt etc rnSdr^ e Avlr wo t, _ A,::»r ,R Z .j I, -- `T fGt�. at - I i.y f a - -t _. 4' f;]t, r'<d �' c..fl'V: 'Rd �At' �� - '� = 'ZT 14,' e ~t s t3 ^ e' II I Fett^w9 Rd bw's RA P�cros id4 !y ; — "�,Joaro+ try. - f1,.'i Ef- ,am,,.ct,Nonfr�kwyE _ '"Y ~-w `/I i„! rr 4`! J '1'.r a:=. u x" ilS$ '' 3fv)0 a9C:'nrt 3,� a iv- u. ,III , � ._ _ yam. , ti - ..-q r— — '' nx.;hAi.n RC,mr,,1nRpara 4' n ^h tl II 8FsaSG:3tP:�YEF' F I � ' ,I( i m . v 4 I uc 1 dE J.00 t T, R Ili p: A 6 c 1. ): 6„ 4 , Y','S. 22 kN 8+:i..1NCc )1 w 11 Y w > v �j 1 1 iArri BAY '' I'•1 f c v 1.�I OfE.0A SWAY�,Y 11t £SRC1AIM4Y Si x n r -t Iffl c� cla z 7^ 1 of-,p_._ 7 Y� .r<,jt:79E;'a'#$r 'N:<• ,r. •< 31..% '.)n.`. > Mr R UITY OF PEARLAND 0 3b not Reel-tce 1E'ii`and i D t ct o U gra 13 MCRA3cow'. .ri P p 3 tY8 ,1^, `.:, McHard Road Additional Intersections Traffic Signals Upgrade - J P9 :' P Cabinet Qe.placern;nt. 13 t r and � 1 Country Place Parkway (*1) t etect°t°,.si Upgrade I') , ..r<,,R M. :, rt, 2. Country Place Boulevard(quad)(*4) _ . =° a- wa vM -•_ ! -i 3. Cullen Parkway("1) ""A, :�,;a<d,:,,. =,fi _ ±!'1,.'s'°'� 74,1..r- Pr''•'' -:-'- _ r 44`_ _ ,. ' - •-- i --- r-- 3t --3z- i•5`aLFS.'/��+4a[W._•, ' ' i.'-- - - —- - -a•a d it15. I.1 � ir`tl--' '4 t.r j : R_.� * '.:.i` :7F1!+,'-'1i tt 0_;_ .7 �,• .,,'k :a_ _ ,1 1. - it,,tip,r,,,,i�T -'Pi'.a^ :io _ __ - a. -71.-1 a„c�..., Eta HALIK ,., ,. _ i. t Z 1 I e ]^1 t a C RICE DRIER RD 0 Ir, A ', A HIGHLAND PID,NTLpe I Y 1 1;2 � a a 0 ii SHANK RD v,,,,,,,,,,rA ,s5_ ,?.i - ' i _ CACTUS H,.iQPiTS l.h; ��.1 t} 1 i, BRENTWOOD LN i I NUnter.^Par 9' "y LiP f��r 'Ji"CRANOE ST t�i�l,AtdGr 'T 0 f^kgti�:YGr S'` E.URf NCE ST CP��',�.'�r ,. rC,y"r LIRNAIDOD t;R I^ ' x, I. 4.'�Y4, 2 a E Plti N:c, b E�LU'M ST ViksoctyRat* 0 n a` a v v+ n i' c z- , S v c 1 o tdd 7-f 9 x' tJ i7 -t. aA4 ' I = m 4 gyp' r :o E,uont WAY ST '_. C,iFSR*s'ST ,f-' I, tt a ,n,-.. .r ,�.;+{^., .,a �. -r µc;r T Y.4.:.M1.ic'° ].•�r• [:rt'ap x ., 'F ,- c r, I, X tP to r .e ,, �a'e-r1111,;•, i, h"t N,'A',ji„ r ,, -y--:. i:-S a :A A to - 4, r , — n _ ._..a_ 'x A It -— - `----�.— IA 10 h _.,- -. ..-r -. ;,._. r, R '.,y i:q §; h ! 0. �,. - M1�`r �'.'�`. + p �'Y;..y *1✓lN it SM, T, i,.. ;g. .c e- .p .yF• • CITY OF PEARLAND .<'.,5,2feat Main Street Traffic Signal Upgrade Cabinet Replacement and Detection Upgrade(") i' 05 Pk; 1 Orange Street (w .'1) 4 , m, i xa.,xw,+w•a„vy ,,..c-<�.uwgxez nF-F,a r we 7 ,C.. 9 AAL - '1-.'.--_._ .,i 's r-`__ f', : c-i5t"r..e... 5 '_',4:* !6_ 'wi_ r: .5. J_---;': .. __nai-"Lit"' _.- r'' ^' !. '-'! '' • Cubic ITS Inc r )1.11.);' C :) 10545 Hardin Valley Road USA Attachment 03 Knoxville TN 37932 Description Shadow Creek Pkwy Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017755 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Motor Ramirez Email feff.petersonrdcubin.com Phone 2816521686 Email vramirez@,pearientitx,gov Bill To Name Peadand TX Ship To Name Peariai id TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Peariand,Texas f7581 United States 71. i':.,,,:.:::;,"':_','•''1:_],_ ' -- ... .0*-#4,,pogo. ._•'= :..,: ,,,.,,-,._t.,;-_,:2-,,'...:,..).-:„. Till*r#4 GS-3-CBL 84 Cable Bracket USD 167 11 00 USD 1,837 GS-3-CAT5 Burial Grade Cat5e USD 505 2.00 USD 1 010 GS-3-FIB Fiber Optrc Cable 1000' USD 2,043 1.00 USD 2 043 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 7.00 USD 76.342 GS-3-PFM Performance Module USD 3,200 7.00. USD 22,400 GS-3-SMK-F SMARTMOUNT 2025 Bell Camera USD 4,160 1.00 USD 4,160 Gs-a-sNAK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3.709 10,00 USD 37.090 GS-3-TS2 TS2 Interface Cable USD 177 7.00 USD 1,239 GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 7.00 USD 266 Total Price USD 146,387 Grand Total USD 146,387 Cubic Transportation Systems will charges 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses I agree to the.above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature. Printed Name: Title Date. All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full conurneot here,To help us serve you better please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along Aourocel instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to erders(Lii„gridsmArt,coni or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you ' Cubic ITS Inc. C Li El 0.545 Hardin Vaileyi Road Attachment 03 1.,%. 1 (.., Knexv,Ile TN 37932 LIS/‘ Description Broadway Street Lorridor Quote Quote Number ,i)0017748 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jefire, Poterscin Contact Name 7oli:::i Ramire7 Email Islf.peterrioniAcubic-.cann Phone 2.31652161-16 Email yramliezgparlanolx.trov Bill To Name Pearlarld. IX Ship To Name Pearland I.X Bill To 3519 Liberty Onvi Peariand l'exas 77531 United States r-1-17: 1".;;:" ":`.R'Irt''':47--Kt(A;7( 1.T.fa-ifiS5e'tiP'-it'fC:441.21V4'3,-TIP:a-tWetkr01-'iWt:k:7T-., *.i. w,.i, ,.Y5.-pW1j:liVpiinMA A4 44:;r4:V't-',S.'' il'ziV.'-%t„"%iti. -',',,:.‘,.., -T,;r,:, •-14:.Lci:«V":A'.1-fi.' iitt't ti-: 2-!..4-L';'-';.--,2--+-1.-0-6.%*''"F' .'''..r.r ._ - T _____j_‘.'4‘,-_'f:-:;,:2 I-V -,..4'-.4e-, --,i•e;" GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 16.00 USD 2,672 GS-3-CATS Burial Grade Cat5e USD 505 2.00 USD 1.010 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 8.00 USD 87,248 GS-3-PFM Performance Module USD 3,200 8.00 USD 25.600 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 16.00 USD 59,344 GS-3-TS2 TS2 Interface Cable USD 177 8.00 USD 1 416 GS3-TS2-OPT 'TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 8:00 USD 304 Total Price USD 177 594 Grand Total U3D 1/1 594 Cubic Transportation Sy--terns will charge s 25°,.,restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product en order .Signature Printed Nam, Title: Date. All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See rip t 11 ..1.g,.,,tment liore To heip us serve you better please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along,,NagIcytiZrgvia I cl instructions or shipping prefeiences. Please submit via email to c, ,r;911.7--jaqtri‘ corn,or fax to 865-24'9-6608 Thank you f6d I Cubic!TS inc, (46....... 10545 Hardin Valley Road Attachment 03 %_. ,I, , . , KnokAlle TN 37932 USA Desctiption McHardiPearlano Plkwiy Corridor Quote Rev3 Quote Number 00017/49 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email Jeff,pei=rsonit;b i' corn Phone 2816521686 Email yrarnirez@peariaridlx.90v Bill To Name Pearland TX Ship To Name Peadand,'TX Bill To 3510 Liberty DI ive Pearland,'Tear.77551 United Slates , . ,,_,._4,.......,,,.c,„_,.,_.:4;:-. ..-,•,,...,-;,44 u.7-410.P.,.. ;,;,-,60.44-,. _.., ..!..,h,_,,.---N,,,. GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 14.00 USD 2,338 GS-3-CAT5 Burial Grade Cat5e USD 505 3.00 USD 1.515 GS-3-F162 Fiber Optic Cable 2000 USD 3.488 1.00 USD 3,488 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 16.906 10,00 USD 109,060 GS-3-PFM Performance.Module USD 3,200 10.00 USD 32,000 GS-3-SMK-F SMARTMOUNT 2025 Bell Camera USD 4 160 3.00 USD 12,480 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 11 00 USD 40 799 GS-3-TS2 TS2 Interface Cable USD 177 10.00 USD 1,770 GS3-TS2-0PT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 10.00 USD 380 Total Price LSD 2u3,830 Grand Total USD 203.830 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25% restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Sidnature. Printed Name Title - — Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions See tia, ,,I OcicAi_cr&ittl--f-e To help us serve you better please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing.Quotation Number along vxigaioayusrmai instructions or shipping preferences. Please submit via email to oi_ier 1::Stig„dsr_n,-_;ite,•in or fax to 865-249-6608:ifhank you '' Cubic ITS, Inc. i I C 10545 Hardin Valley Road Knoxville,TN 37932 Attachment 03 USA Description Bailey Road Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017750 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email ieff.petersondcuble.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez©pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States r \. q1.0141V'Aj- 0,?4, GS-3-CBL. 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 4.00 USD 668 GS-3-CATS Burial Grade Cat5e USD 505 1.00 USD 505 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 4.00 USD 43,624 GS-3-PF1M Performance Module USD 3,200 4.00 USD 12,800 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 4.00 USD 14,836 GS-3-TS2 TS2 Interface Cable USD 177 4.00, USD 708 GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 4.00 USD 152 Total Price USD 73,293 Grand Total USD 73,293 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature. Printed Name. Title Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full documenl,here.To help us serve you better please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s) Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number along virtztidiguncel Instructions or shipping preferences.Please,submit via email to orriersggridsmartcorri or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you `' Cubic ITS,Inc. C,imigj.. 10545 Hardin Valley Road Attachment 03 Knoxville TN 37932 USA Description Main and Orange intersection Quote Quote Number 00018725 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peierson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx:gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Peariand,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States rt''}. '3^} rr :,• I1JF �`�' � y ::1 '� 'y dY�s GS-3-CBL 84'Cable Bracket USD 167 1.00 USD 167 GS-3-CAT5 Burial Grade Cat5e USD 505 1.00 USD 505 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 1.00 USD 10,906 GS-3-PFM Performance Module USD 3,200 1.00 USD 3.200 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 1.00 USD 3,709 GS-3-TS2 TS2 Interface Cable USD 177 1.00 USD 177 GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 1.00 USD 38 Total Price USD 18,702 Grand Total USD 18,702 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature: ___-- Printed Name: Title. Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full d cumeut flee_To help us serve you better please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity Pricing,Quotation Number along it an s cal instructions or shipping preferences. Please submit Via email too__rders@ ri smert.cQw or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you ( CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration" Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this webs site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below• * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City , Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids. shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 Electronic bids will be accepted until 2 00 p.m., Thursday, October 27, 2022. All Bids shall reference the followmg proj ect information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of. ,' Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO 0822-25 t A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland Engineering and Public Works'Service Center Rio Grande Training Room'at 2016 Old Alvin Rd, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 11 00 a.m. on Thursday September 1,2022. The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four (24) traffic signal control cabinets and vehicle detection equipment with associated fiber splices at thirty-one (31) intersections along five (5) corridors The five corridors and thirty-one intersections are as follows 06-2019 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Shadow Creek Parkway 1 Kingsley 2. Reflection Bay 3 Trinity Bay 4 Kirby 5 Business Center 6. Market Place 7 SH 288 Broadway Street/FM 518 1 Shadow Ridge Lane 2. Windward Bay Drive 3 Kingsley Drive 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 5 Shadow Creek H.S. 6 Kirby Drive 7 Town Center 8. Business Center McHard Road 1 Mykawa 2. SH 35/Main Street 3 Old'Alvin 4 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park Lane 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 6 Shallow Creek Drive 7 Province Village Drive Bailey Road 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 2. Harkey Road 3 McLean Road 4 Veterans Drive There are three alternate intersections along McHard Road which will require three cabinets and four vehicle detection cameras. 1 Country Place Parkway 2. Country Place Boulevard(quad) 3 Cullen Parkway n Signals shall be inspected and accepted by the City upon substantial completion.All intersections will need to be operation at the conclusion of the project. Upon award,of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction' project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200 06-2019- 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID , Electronic Bid Documents.)including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Logm.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System.BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYS 1'EM IN ORDER.TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90)/days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds. Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base1 bid price must accompany, each'proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee.Additionally,the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity. All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 06-2019 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT`assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U S.0 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of 4he Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal. The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria. The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of LowestResponsible Bidder In identifying this criterion,the City will consider 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to Base Bid,Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened''may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Frances Aguilar City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date August 24, 2022 Second Publication date August 31, 2022 06-2019 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (LRB) 1 Defined Terms 1 1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City" Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City of Pearland and may be used inter-changeably 1.2 The term "Bidder" means one who submits\a Bid Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder The term "Successful Bidder" means the Lowest Responsible Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders,Instructions to Bidders,the Bid Proposal,and the proposed Contract Documents(plans and specifications including all Addenda issued prior to bid opening). 1.3 The term "E-bid System"refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web- based system (Ion Wave) that provides all Bid Documents electronically to interested parties (potential Bidders and forms the pathway for Bidders to submit bids in response to The Invitation to Bid. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal with all required attachments to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above bid submittal process to submit a bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. 14 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management software used by the contracting parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized project information hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for accessing this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1 6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1 7 The term"Alternate(s)"or"Add Alternate(s)"as used here inter-changeably are defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based on the Owner's sole acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate work item shall be added to the Base Bid price and made a part of the Contract price. 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier Interested Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on 08-2018 00200-1 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed blow * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of future bid opportunities. Downloading any project bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates, addenda, changes or additional information associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to ebids@pearlandtx.gov 3 Copies of Bidding Documents 3 1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx.Interested Bidders must register as a"Supplier"on this site in`order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and, all subsequent communications,addenda or additional information from the City or its Engineer 3.3 Copies of Bidding Documents are available Or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation'to Bidders. It is recommended that all interested Bidders,whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders/Vendors providing pricing to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download all of the project Bid Documents. 3 4 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals, neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including,but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. r , 08-2018 00200-2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4 Qualifications of Bidders 4 1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2)days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Bid. 1) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope, specifically including a list of 5 representative projects completed by the Bidder of a similar nature and scope to the work covered by this proposed Contract. The references for the projects provided must include the)cost of the project, Owner's name,Engineer or prime contact and telephone number; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on-going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete including total contract value and current percent complete by payment; 3) A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid and the total value of work awarded to subcontractors as shown on the Subcontractors List Bid Form, , 4)A list of names, address and telephone number of references for other projects completed by Bidder; and 5)A Financial Statement of Bidder,consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder 5 Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5 1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work,(d)study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, (f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's"Pro-Trak"software to administ9r the construction process and perform the Work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review, but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 08-2018 00200-3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS r 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon- information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5 4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. '5 6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5 7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4,that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6 Interpretations and Addenda 6 1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding.-Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid,System. J 08-2018 00200-4 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7 Bid Security 7 1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or a Bid Bond ("Bid Security") 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of their Bid Security(sealed Bid Bond,,Certified Check or Cashier's Check)as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested-by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's`Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement,and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time 8 1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract'Time"). All references to "time" or"days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9 Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9 1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus,if any,are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10' Substitute or "Or-Equal"Items 10 1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the specified materials and equipment described in the Plans and Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or- equal" items unless otherwise stated. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or"or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or Owner approved equal" Any substitution made by the Bidder upon which the bid is based shall be at the Bidder's)sole risk. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00200-5 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11 Bid Form 11 1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. 11.2 All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposals form must be completed or filled in. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.3 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid 11 4 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All'names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.5 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). Failure to do so could be cause for rejection of the Bid. 11 6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https.//pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. 12.3 Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13 Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13 1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. 08-2018 00200-6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means.A 'withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals.No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13 4 If,within twenty-four(24)hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or, at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13.5 Bid securities for unsuccessful Bidders will be returned to)bidders once a successful Bidder has be identified and notified of the Owner's intent to award a contract. 14 Opening of Bid Proposals 14 1 Bid Proposals will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read aloud publicly An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates (if any)will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals through E-Bid. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 15 Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15 1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety(90) days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening,but Owner may,in its sole discretion,release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. , 16 Award of Contract 16 1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2)Bidder improperly'or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents, 3) Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal, 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal, 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal, 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 4 of these Instructions to Bidders, or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the Lowest Responsible Bidder , 16.2 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of bidder, if requested to do so As required by the Instructions to Bidders and as a condition of Bid acceptability,the Contractor hereby agrees. 08-2018 00200-7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 That the City, as Owner and Contract Administrator, retains the right to review and approve the Contractor's and all Subcontractors' qualifications to perform the Work of the Contract and to reject any Subcontractor not meeting the City's standards, as outlined in the General Conditions, or TxDOT's and FHWA qualifications for performing the Work. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work, Add Alternates / and Cash Allowances, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria'may include the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates,unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 16 4 A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.5 Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre-bid meeting. 16 6 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility,qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform,and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction,within the Contract Time. 16 7 Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Professional/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 17 Contract Security 17 1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner 18 Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner 08-2018 00200-8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 19 Pre-bid Conference 19 1 A pre-bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20 Retainage 20 1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION / 1 / t l v 08-2018 00200-9 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: Bid of , an individual proprietorship/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO 0822-25 (Submitted in Electronic format) To The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Traffic Signal Upgrade Program FY22 with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared'by Engineering Staff, City of Pearland, for the,unit prices or applicable prices set forth inExhibit"A",the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Workso changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders,is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder's Initial's: 08-2018 00300- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 190 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500—Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid'Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and' Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to "day(s)"shall mean calendar(day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No Date Addendum No Date Addendum No Date , Addendum No Date Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name By Title Address Phone No ATTEST (Seal,if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typed or Printed Name) Signature Date: Bidder's Initial's. 08-2018 00300-2 of 2 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Shadow Creek Parkway Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 1.1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 1.2 7 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 1.3 7 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 1.4 7 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all seven(7) 1.5 1 LS intersections. 16-603 Vehicle Detection Installation.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 1.6 11 EA program and-implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 1.7 3 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the - 1.8 3 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 - Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 1.9 7 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 1.10 3 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 1.11 4 EA installed by City). - 16-608 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Broadway St./FM 518 Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 2.1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control,per each 2.2 8 EA intersection. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the 2.3 7 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 2.4 7 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. — 16-601- Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all eight(8) 2.5 1 LS intersections. 16-603 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 2.6 16 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 2.7 4 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 2.8 4 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 2.9 7 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 2.10 2 EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required_to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 2.11 5 EA installed by City). _ 16-608 McHard Rd Corridor Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 3 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor. 01505 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid# 0822-25 Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description — Reference Unit Price Total Amount Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 3.2 10 EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Remove and Replace Signal Cabinet with associated fiber splices:Furnish-all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove,salvage,and replace the , 3.3 9 EA existing traffic signal control cabinet at each intersection. 16-602 VIVDS removal:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to remove and salvage all existing video imaging vehicle detection system including all cable.Contractor shall ensure a minimum of 1 pull tape remains in the mast arm, 3 4 10 EA from the camera location to the base of the pole. 16-601 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all ten(10) 3.5 1 LS intersections. 16-603 Vehicle Detection Installation:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, 3.6 17 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 PTZ.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3 7 4 EA contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-605 API install,Furnish all Tabor,materials,and incidentals required to install and implement the 3.8 4 EA City provided equipment at each intersection. 16-606 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 3.9 5 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 3 10 6 - EA be installed by City). 16-608 BBU Cabinet side of controller:Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install the contractor supplied BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to be 3 11- 5 - EA installed by City). 16-608 Project Name:Traffic Signal Upgrades(FY22) Bid#•0822-25 _ Project#•TR2201 Spec Item# Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Baley Rd Corridor _ Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals 4 1 1 LS required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Max 3%for each corridor 01505 Traffic Control.Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the 4.2 4, EA Contractor to design,establish,and maintain all appropriate traffic control. 01555 Vehicle Detection Purchase:Furnish Vehicle Detection Equipment for all four(4) 4.3 1 LS intersections. 16-603 Vehicle Detection Installation.Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install, - 4.4 4 EA program and implement the contractor supplied equipment at each intersection. 16-604 Battery Backup Unit(BBU)-Furnish all labor,equipment,materials,and incidentals required to install,program and implement the contractor supplied BBU system at each proposed 4.5 4 EA traffic signal cabinet. 16-607 BBU Cabinet side of controller(Install Only): Furnish all labor,materials,and incidentals required to install a City provided BBU cabinet at each intersection to house Cisco Switch(to 4.6 4 EA be installed by City). 16-608 All items above are for labor,materials,equipment,incidentals,and related tasks as required to provide work complete in place,approved and accepted by Owner,and ready for occupancy/use at commencement of warranty period. Bidder's Authorized Signature .1 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland(hereinafter called OWNER or City)and Reliable Signal & Lighting Solutions, LLC (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows. Article 1 WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows. Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: TR2201 BID NO.. 0822-25 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by City of Pearland,2016 Old Alvin Rd.,Pearland, TX 77581 who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3 CONTRACT TIME 3 1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within three hundred ten(310)days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5 01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within three hundred forty (340) days fromthe date when the Contract Time commences to run.No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3 1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CON IRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred 4-2015 00500-1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT dollars ($500 00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3 1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars ($500 00)for each day that expires after thg time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4 CONTRACT PRICE 41 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $1,560,471 00 (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid as accepted by OWNER as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5 1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6"Measurement and Payment"of the General Conditions. 5 1 1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5 1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon 4-2015 00500-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or -the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under"Final Payment." 5:2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6 09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6 09 Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations. 7 1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized'himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations,tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7 4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities 4-2015 1 00500-3 of 7 CITY OFPEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7 5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations,tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7 6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference 8 1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). K 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 N/A. 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 4-2015 00500-4of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 8 8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective. Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8 The Contract Documents may only be amended,modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9 MISCELLANEOUS 9 1 Terms used in this Agreement which are'defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 Noi assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound, and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9 4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment m which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional,cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities 9 6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period-prescribed by applicable law 9 7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 4-2015 00500-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 9 8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be earned out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9 10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9 11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER(through its employee handbook)considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER. Any fraud, forgery,misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked,mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9 12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A(attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 r CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date , 20• OWNER. CONTRACTOR. CITY OF P ND Q c4o e STot 4 �.,i iilc Solutibis`LLC By, By Title /'rive. /y Title. Pre 5iclent Date: //972-0.23 Date. 11) 30 1 a03v (Corporate Seal) ATTEST ATTEST �'• Address for giving notices }, ``�oo„,P 11EAq�,i��' ll\(`y- � 47 S 1 f e e" a' Pena rlcond, Tu 11513 I Phone ( 21(C) 994 - 111 l Fax: Cal) --54 '41% l Agent for service of process , END OF SECTION ' 4-2015 00500-7 of 7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the"contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract (2) Nondiscrimination The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts„including Procurements of Materials and Equipment. In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed.under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin (4) Information and Reports The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information , (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part (6) Incorporation of Provisions The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of , enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition,the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States 1 , A i i ,, J CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00510 House Bill 89 Verification I, Enrique Del Cid (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of Reliable Signal & Lighting Solutions, LLC (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18)years of age,after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following 1 That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland, and 3 That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel"is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270 001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. ..� SIGNATURE OF REPRESENTATIVE SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this,�1 day of NO eTftbgr , 20 2,a, Lc!!: !?J I i` NUI Notary CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 of 1 Complete Nos.1-4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1,2,3,5,and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number of business. 2022-953711 Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC Pearland,TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 11/09/2022 being filed. City of Pearland Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. TR2201 Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22 Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. El 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is Enrique Del Cid , and my date of birth is 03/07/1975 My address is 2617 Lazy Bend St. , Pearland , Tx 77581 , USA (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in Brazoria County, State of Texas ,on the 9thday of November20 22 (month) (year) - Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V3.5.1.d1b92728 ACCORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DAT1(MMID 2YY) THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Certificate Desk Brady,Chapman,Holland&Associates PHONE FAX 10055 West Gulf Bank (A/c.No.Extl:713-688-1500 (A/c,No):713-688-7967 Houston TX 77040 ADDRESS: ecerts@bch-insurance.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A.Phoenix Ins Co(Travelers) 25623 INSURED INSURER B.Navigators Specialty Ins.Co.(AmWINS) 36056 Signal&Lighting SolutionsLLC P 0 2g57 INSURER C.Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 Box Houston TX 77588 INSURER D.Texas Mutual Insurance Co 22945 INSURER E.Travelers Indemnity of AM(Travelers) 25666 INSURER F. COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1457916348 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTRINSR ADDL TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD SVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP W LIMITS (MMIDD/YYYY) {MMIDD/YYYY) E X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DTCO5D776590TIA22 10/26/2022 10/26/2023 EACH OCCURRENCE S 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $300,000 X 5,000 PD Ded MED EXP(Any one person) $5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY X JECT LOC PRODUCTS COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: .1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA6N8633042226G 10/26/2022 10/26/2023 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 (Ea accident) X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) S OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS BODILY INJURY(Per accident) S X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ B UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR H022EXC7959091V 10/26/2022 10/26/2023 EACH OCCURRENCE _S 5,000,000 X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DED RETENTIONS _ Increase effective $12/5/2022 D WORKERS COMPENSATION 0001259808 10/26/2022 10/26/2023 X ER ETH- P AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETORJPARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? Y N/A (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below i E.L.DISEASE POLICY LIMIT S 1,000,000 C Equipment QT6607D077817TLC22 10/26/2022 10/26/2023 Leased/Rented Equip $250,000 Installation Installation Floater $500,000 Maximum 'Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached if more space is required) The policy includes Blanket additional insured on the generai liability per form CGD6040813 and automobile per form CAT3530215,with a waiver of subrogation on the general liability per form CGD3161111 automobile per form CAT3530215 and workers compensation per form WC420304B when required by written contract. This insurance is primary and non-contributory as respects general liability CGD6040813. °Deductible: Installation Floater$2,500 Per Occurrence,2%Windstorm or Hail Subject to a$5,000 Minimum Deductible °Deductible: Leased/Rented Equipment$1,000 Per Occurrence,$5,000 Theft WC Excluded Officer-Ana Oviedo Job-Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22,Project No.TR2201,Bid Number 0822-25,RSLS Job#16608 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Pearland 2016 Old Alvin Pearland TX 77581 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED - AUTOMATIC STATUS IF REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART 1 The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS (a) The Additional Insured — Owners, AN INSURED- Lessees or Contractors — Scheduled Any person or organization that; Person or Organization endorsement CG 20 10 07 04 or CG 20 10 04 13, a. You agree in a "written contract requiring in- the Additional Insured — Owners, surance" to include as an additional insured Lessees or Contractors — Completed on this Coverage Part;and Operations endorsement CG 20 37' b. Has not been added as an additional insured 07 04 or CG 20 37 04 13, or both of for the same project by attachment of an en- such endorsements with either of dorsement under this Coverage Part which those edition dates:or includes such person or organization in the (b) .Either or both of the following: the endorsement's schedule; Additional Insured — Owners, Les- is.an insured,but: sees or 'Contractors — Scheduled a. Only with respect to liability for"bodily injury" Person.Or Organization endorsement "property damage"or"personal injury";and CG 20 1.4: Or the Additional Insured— Owners, Lessees or Contractors — b. Only as described in Paragraph (1), (2) or_(3) Completed Operations endorsement below,whichever applies: ,CG.20 37, without an edition date of (1) If the "written contract requiring .insuy- such endorsement specified: ance" specifically requires you to provide the person or organization is an additional additional insured coverage to that per- insured only if the injury Or damage, is son or organization by the use of caused, in whole, or in part, by acts or (a). The Additional Insured — Owners, omission's of you Or your subcontractor in Lessees or Contractors — (Form B) the performance.of"your work" to which :endorsement CG 20 10 11 85,or the "Written contract requiring insurance" (b) •Either pr both of the' following the applies: or' Additional Insured — Owners, Les- (3) -If neither Paragraph (.1) nor(2)above ap- sees or Contractors — Scheduled plies. Person Or Organization endorsement (a) The person,or organization is an ad- 'CG 20 10 10 01, or the Additional In- ditidnal insured only if, and to the,ex sure —Owners, Lessees orContrac= tent that,. the injury Or damage is tors — Completed Operations en- caused;by acts or omissions of you or dorsement CG 20 37 10 01, your subcontractor in the perform- the person ororganization is an additional 'once of"your work"to which the"writ- insured only if the injury or damage arises ten contract requiring insurance"•ap- out of "your work" to which the "written plies: and contract requiring insurance"applies; (b) The person or•organization does'not (2) if the' "written 'contract requiring insur- qualify as an additional insured With ance" specifically requires you to,provide respect to the, independent acts or additional insured coverage to that per- omissions of such person or organi- son or organization bythe use of zation CG D6 04 08 13 ©2013 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured and collectible other insurance, whether primary, by this endorsement is limited as follows: excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is a. If the Limits of Insurance of this Coverage available to the.additional insured when that per- Part shown in the Declarations exceed the son or organization is an additional insured or is minimum limits of liability required by the any other insured that does not qualify as. a "written contract requiring insurance",'the in named insured, under such Other insurance. surance provided to the additional insured will 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the addi- be limited to such minimum required limits of tional insured by this,endorsement. liability For the purposes of determining a. The additional insured must give us written whether this limitation applies, the minimum notice as soon as practicable of an "occur- limits of liability required by the "written con- rence" or an offense which may result in a tract requiring insurance" will be considered claim To the extent possible, such notice to include the minimum limits of liability of any should include: Umbrella or Excess liability coverage required for the additional insured by that"written con- (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" tract requiring insurance" This endorsement or offense took place; will not increase the limits of insurance.de- (2) The names and addresses of any injured scribed in Section III—Limits Of Insurance. persons and witnesses; and b. The insurance provided to the additional in- (3) The nature and location of any injury or sured does not apply to"bodily injury", "prop- damage arising out of the"occurrence"or erty damage";or "personal injury" arising out offense of the.rendering of, or failure to render, any b. If a claim is made or "suit"is brought against professional architectural, engineering or sur- the additional insured, the additional insured veying services;including: must: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to (1) Immediately record the specifics. of the prepare or approve, maps, shop draw- ings, opinions, reports, surveys, field or— ders or change orders, or the preparing, (2) Notify us as soon as practicable. approving, or failing to prepare or ap- The additional insured must see to it that we prove, drawings and specifications;,and receive written notice of the claim or"suit"as (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or soon as practicable. engineering activities c. The additional insured must immediately send c. The insurance provided to the additional in- us copies of all legal papers received in con- sured does ,not apply to "bodily injury" or nection with the claim-or"suit' cooperate with "property damage"caused by"your work"and us• in the investigation or settlement of the included in the "products-completed opera- claim or defense against the "suit", and oth- tions hazard" unless the "written contract re- erwise comply with all policy-conditions. quiring insurance" specifically requires you to d. The additional .insured must tender the de: provide such coverage for that additional in- fense and indemnity of any claim or "suit".to. sured during the policy period any provider of other insurance which would 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured cover the additional' insured -for a loss we by this endorsement.is excess over,any valid and cover under this endorsement. However, this collectible other insurance, whether primary, ex- condition does not affect whether the insur- cess, contingent or On any' other basis. that is ante provided to the additional insured by'this available to the.additional'insured.However, if the endorsement is primary to other insurance "written contract requiring insurance" specifically available to'the additional insured which cov- requires that:this insurance apply en..a primary ers that person or organization as a named basis or a primary and non-contributory basis;this insured es-described in Paragraph 3.above. insurance is primary to other insurance.available 5. The following is'added to'the DEFINITIONS Sec to the additional insured under Which that person or organization qualifies'as a named insured, and tion: we will not share with that other insurance. Rut 'Written contract requiring insurance" means that the insurance provided to the additional insured part of any written contract or agreement under by this endorsement still is excess over any valid which you are required to include a person or or- Page.2 of 3 6 2013 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved PG D6 04 08 13 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ganization as an additional insured on this Cover- a. After the signing and execution of the contract age Part, provided that the "bodily injury" and or agreement by you;and "property damage" occurs, and the "personal in- b. While that part of the contract or agreement is jury" is caused by an offense committed, during in effect. the policy period and: CG D6 04 08 13 ©2013 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 3 of 3 Policy No DTC05D776590TIA22 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ. IT CAREFULLY DESIGNATED PROJECT(S) GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMIT This endorsement.modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Designated Project Designated Project(s): General Aggregate(s)- EACH "PROJECT" FOR WHICH YOU HAVE AGREED, IN GENERAL.AGGREGATE A WRITTEN CONTRACT WHICH. IS IN EFFECT DURING LIMIT SHOWN ON THE THIS POLICY PERIOD, TO PROVIDE A SEPARATE DECLARATIONS GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMIT; PROVIDED THAT THE CONTRACT IS SIGNED AND EXECUTED BY YOU BEFORE THE "BODILY INJURY" OR "PROPERTY DAMAGE" OCCURS A. For all sums which the insured becomes legally 3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A. obligated,to pay as damages caused by "Occur- for damages or under COVERAGE C. for rences" under COVERAGE A.(SECTION.I), and medical expenses shall reduce the Desig- for all medical expenses caused by accidents un- nated Project General Aggregate Limit for der COVERAGE C (SECTION 1), which can be that designated "project" Such payments attributed only to operations at a single desig- shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nated"project"shown in the Schedule above. shown in the Declarations nor shall they re- 1 A separate Designated Project General -Ag- gregate duce any other Designated Project General gregate Limit applies to each designated"'pro Aggregate Limit for any other designated ject",,and that limit is equal'to the amount of "project"shown in the.Schedule-above. the General Aggregate- Limit shown in the 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Declarations, unless separate Designated Occurrence, Damage To Premises !Rented Project General Aggregates) are Schad- To You 'and Medical Expense continue to uled,abov.,e apply HOweyer, instead of being subject to 2. The Designated Project General Aggregate the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Limitis the most we will pay for the sum bf all Declarations. such limits will be subject to the. damages under COVERAGE A., except applicable Designated Project. General Ag- darriages because of"bodily injury" or'"prop gregate:Limit. erty damage" included in the "products- B. For all sums which the insured becomes legally. completed operations hazard", and:for medi- obligated to pay as:damages.caused by "occur- cal expenses under COVERAGE-C, regard- rences"'under COVERAGE A. (SECTION I). and less of the number of for all medical expenses caused by-accidents un- a. Insureds; der COVERAGE C. (SECTION I), which.cannot be attributed only to operations at a single desig- b. Claims made or"suits"brought; or nated"project"'shown in the Schedule above. c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing"suits" CG D2 11 01 04 Copyright.Th,e Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 Page 1 of 2 COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BUSINESS AUTO EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO•COVERAGE FORM GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE—This.endorsement broadens coverage. However coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to the Coverage Part,.and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the-extent that coverage is•excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only Limitations and exclusions.may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties,and what is and is hot covered A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED H. HIRED AUTO.PHYSICAL DAMAGE-LOSS OF B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED USE-INCREASED LIMIT C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE - TRANSPORTATION EXPENSES-INCREASED LIMIT D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED J. PERSONAL PROPERTY E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - INCREASED K. AIRBAGS LIMITS L. NOTICE AND.KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR F HIRED AUTO - LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- LOSS ERAGE—INDEMNITY BASIS M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE—GLASS N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS PROVISIONS A. BROAD-FORM NAMED INSURED this insurance applies and only'to the extent that The following is added to Paragraph A.1.,Who Is person or organization qualifies as an "insured" An Insured,of SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS under the:Who Is An Insured provision contained LIABILITY COVERAGE. in Section II. Any organization you newly acquire or form dur C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO ing the policy period over which you maintain 1 The following is added to Paragraph A.1., 50% or more ownership interest.and'that is not Who.Is An Insured, of SECTION II =COV= separately insured for Business Auto Coverage ERED.AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE Coverage under this provision is afforded-only un- An "employee"of yours is an"insured" while tit the 180th day after you acquire or form the 'or- operating an "auto" hired or rented' under-a ganization or the end of the policy period, which- contract' Or agreement in an "employee's" ever is earlier name,'with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your busi- B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ness. The following is added to Paragraph c. in A.1., 2. The following replaces Paragraph b. in.B.5. Who Is An Insured,.of'SECTION II —COVERED Other Insurance: of SECTION IV — .BUSI- AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE NESS AUTO CONDITIONS Any person or organization who-is required under. b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage cover- a written contract or agreement between-you and age, the following are deemed to be cov- that person or organization, that is signed and ered"autos"you own executed by you before the "bodily 'injury" or (1) Any covered "auto" you lease, hire, "property damage" occurs and that is in effect rent or borrow;and during the policy period, to be named as-an addi- (2) Any covered "auto"hired or rented by tional insured is an "insured" for'Covered Autos your "employee" under a contract in Liability.Coverage, but only for damages to which an "employee's" name, with your CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc.with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO permission, while performing duties (a) With respect to any claim made or "suit" related to the conduct of your busi- brought outside the United States of ness. America, the territories and possessions However, any"auto" that is leased, hired, of the United States of America, Puerto rented or borrowed with a driver is not a Rico and Canada. covered "auto" (i) You must arrange to defend the "in- D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED sured"against, and investigate or set- tle any such claim or "suit" and keep The following is added to Paragraph A.1.,Who Is An Insured of SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS us advised of all proceedings and ac- An LIABILITY COVERAGE. (ii) Neither you nor any other involved Any "employee"of yours is an "insured"while us- "insured" will make any settlement ing.a covered "auto"you don't own, hire or borrow without our consent. in your business or your personal affairs. E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED (iii)We may, at our discretion, participate LIMITS in defending the "insured" against, or in the settlement of, any claim or 1 The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(2), "suit" of SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- (iv)We will reimburse the "insured" for ITY COVERAGE, sums that the "insured" legally must (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (in- pay as damages because of "bodily eluding bonds for related.traffic law viola- injury" or"property damage" to which lions) required because of an "accident" this insurance applies, that the "in- we cover We do not have to furnish sured" pays with our consent, but these bonds. only up to the limit described in Para- 2. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(4), graph -C., Limits Of Insurance, of of SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS. ITY COVERAGE. LIABILITY COVERAGE. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the (v) We will reimburse the "insured" for "insured" at Our request, including actual the reasonable expenses incurred loss of earnings up to $500-a day be- with our consent for your investiga- cause of time off from work. [ion of such claims and your defense ofF HIRED AUTO LIMITED WORLDWIDE.'COV- "suit"the "insured"tonly against any. such ERAGE—INDEMNITY BASIS but up to and included within -the. limit described in Para- The following.replaces Subparagraph (5).in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of graph B.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS Of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- LIABILITY 'COVERAGE, and not in TIONS addition to such limit. Our duty to (5) Anywhere in the world, except any country or make such payments ends when we jurisdiction while any trade sanction, ern- have used up the applicable limit of bargo, Or similar regulation imposed by 'the insurance in. payments for damages,. United States of America applies to and pro- settlements or defense expenses. hibits the transaction of business with or (b)•This insurance is. excess over any valid within such country or jurisdiction, for Coy- and collectible other insurance available Bred Autos Liability Coverage for any covered to the"insured"whether primary, excess, "auto" that you lease, hire, rent or borrow Contingent or on any other basis. without a driver for a period of 30 days or less (c) This insurance is not a substitute for re- and that is not an "auto"'you lease, hire, rent quired or compulsory insurance in any or borrow from any of your "employees", c p ountry outside the United States; its ter- partners (if you are a partnership), members ritories and possessions. Puerto Rico and (if you are a limited liability company) or Canada. members of their households. Page 2 of 4 ©.2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc.with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO You agree to maintain all required or (2) In or on your'covered"auto" compulsory insurance in any such Coun- This coverage applies only in the event of a total try up to the minimum limits required by theft of your covered"auto" local law Your failure to comply with No deductibles apply to this Personal Property compulsory insurance requirements will not invalidate the Coverage afforded by coverage. this policy, but we Will only be liable to the K. AIRBAGS same extent we would have been liable The following is added to Paragraph B.3., Exclu- had you complied with the compulsory in- sions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE surance requirements. COVERAGE; (d) It is understood that we are not an admit- Exclusion 3.a. does not apply to "loss" to one or ted or authorized insurer outside the more airbags in a covered "auto"you own that in- United States of America, its territories flate due to a cause other than a cause of"loss" and possessions. Puerto Rico and Can- -set forth in Paragraphs A.1.b. and A.1.c., but ada.We assume no responsibility for the only. furnishing of certificates of insurance, or •a. If that "auto is a covered "auto"for Compre- for compliance in any way with the laws hensive Coverage under this policy; of other countries relating to insurance. b. The airbags are not covered under any war- G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE—GLASS ranty and The following is added to Paragraph D., Deducti- C. The airbags were not intentionally inflated. ble, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE We will pay Up to a maximum of$1,000'for any COVERAGE. one'loss" No deductible for a covered "auto" will apply to L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than LOSS replaced The following is added to Paragraph A.2.a., of H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE—LOSS OF SECTION IV--BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS. USE—INCREASED LIMIT Your duty to give us Or our authorized representa- The following replaces the last sentence of Para- tive prompt notice of the "accident"or "loss" ap- graph A.4.b., Loss Of Use Expenses. of SEC- plies only-when the "accident" or "loss" is known TION III.—PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE. to. However,.the most we will pay for any expenses (a) You(if you'are an individual); for loss'of use is $65'per day, to a maximum of (b) A partner(if you are a partnership); $750 for any one"accident" (c) A member (if you are a limited liability com- l. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION pany); EXPENSES-INCREASED LIMIT (d) An executive. officer, director or insurance The following replaces the first sentence in Para- manager'(if you are a corporation or other or- graph A.4:a., Transportation Expenses, of ganization);or SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE,COVER- AGE. (e) Any"employee"authorized by you to give no- tice.ofthe'accident"or'loss" We will pay up to $50 per day to-a maximum of M. BLANKET.WAIVER.OF SUBROGATION $1,500 for temporary'-transportation expense in- The following replaces.Paragraph A.5:, Transfer cared by you because'of the total theft of a coy- -Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us. ered"auto"of the private passenger type. of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI-- J. PERSONAL PROPERTY TIONS The following is added to Paragraph A.4., Cover- S. Transfer Of Rights. Of Recovery Against age Extensions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL Others To Us DAMAGE COVERAGE; We waive any right of recovery we may have Personal Property against any person or organization to,the ex- tent required Of -you by a written -contract We will pay up to $400•for "loss" to wearing ap- signed and executed prior to any "accident" parel and other personal property which is. or"loss", provided that the"accident"or"loss" C. (1) Owned by an"insured';-and arises out of operations contemplated by CA'T3 53 02 15 ©2015-The Travelers Indemnity-Company-All rights reserved Page 3 of 4 Includes-copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc.with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO such contract. The waiver applies only to the The unintentional omission of, or unintentional person or organization designated in such error in, any information given by you shall not contract. prejudice your rights under this insurance. How- N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ever this provision does not affect our right to col- The following is added to Paragraph B.2., Con- lect additional premium or exercise our right of cealment, Misrepresentation, Or Fraud, of cancellation or non-renewal. SECTION IV—BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS Page 4 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. LOSS PAYABLE CLAUSE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following. BUSINESS AUTO'COVERAGE FORM The following replaces the LOSS PAYABLE C. We may cancel the policy as allowed by the CLAUSE in the BUSINESS. AUTO COVERAGE CANCELLATION Common Policy Condition PART DECLARATIONS. LOSS PAYABLE CLAUSE Cancellation ends this agreement as to the loss A. We will pay you and the loss payee.on file with us payee's interest If we cancel the policy we will for"loss"to a covered "auto", as interest may ap- mail you and the loss payee the same.advance pear notice B. The insurance covers the interest of the loss D. If we make any payment'to the loss payee, we payee unless the "loss" results from conversion, will obtain their rights against:any other party secretion or embezzlement on your part. CA T4 45 04 09, (.2009 The Travelers Companies.Inc Page 1"of 1 Includes the copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.with its permission. COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET LOSS PAYEES This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the IM PAK COVERAGE FORM. The following is added to Section E — ADDITIONAL b. Pay any claim for loss or damage jointly to you COVERAGE CONDITIONS. and the Loss Payee as your interests may ap- Loss Payable Provision pear In the event of a Covered Cause of Loss to Covered This endorsement applies to all Covered Property for Property in which both you and a Loss Payee share which a Loss Payee is on file with us or your insur an insurable interest,we will: ance agent or insurance broker a. Adjust the loss or damage with you;and C CM T5 60 01 10 ©2009 The Travelers Indemnity Company Page 1 of 1 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.with its permission. Policy No DTCO5D776590TIA22 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY CONTRACTORS XTEND ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE—This endorsement broadens coverage However,coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to this Coverage Part,and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights,duties,and what is and is not covered. A. Aircraft Chartered With Pilot H. Blanket Additional Insured — Lessors Of Leased B. Damage To Premises Rented To You Equipment C. Increased Supplementary Payments I. Blanket Additional Insured — States Or Political Subdivisions—Permits D. Incidental Medical Malpractice E. Who Is An Insured— Newly Acquired Or Formed J Knowledge And Notice Of Occurrence Or Offense Organizations K. Unintentional Omission F Who Is An Insured — Broadened Named Insured L. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation —Unnamed Subsidiaries M. Amended Bodily Injury Definition G. Blanket Additional Insured — Owners, Managers N. Contractual Liability—Railroads Or Lessors Of Premises PROVISIONS INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LI- A. AIRCRAFT CHARTERED WITH PILOT ABILITY The following is added to Exclusion g., Aircraft, Exclusions c. and g. through n. do not apply Auto Or Watercraft,in Paragraph 2.of SECTION to "premises damage" Exclusion f.(1)(a) I — COVERAGES — COVERAGE A BODILY IN- does not apply to "premises damage" caused JURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY by. This exclusion does not apply to an aircraft that a. Fire; is: b. Explosion; (a) Chartered with a pilot to any insured; c. Lightning; (b) Not owned by any insured;and, d. Smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, (c) Not being used to carry any person or prop or lightning; or erty for a charge. e. Water; B. DAMAGE TO PREMISES RENTED TO YOU unless Exclusion f of Section I—Coverage A 1 The first paragraph of the exceptions in Ex- —Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability clusion j., Damage To Property, in Para is replaced by another endorsement to this graph 2. of SECTION I — COVERAGES — Coverage Part that has Exclusion—All Pollu- COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND tion Injury Or Damage or Total Pollution Ex- PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY is deleted. clusion in its title. 2. The following replaces the last paragraph of A separate limit of insurance applies to Paragraph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I — "premises damage" as described in Para- COVERAGES — COVERAGE A. 'BODILY graph 6. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF IN- SURANCE. CG D3 16 11 11 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 3. The following replaces Paragraph 6. of SEC- C INCREASED SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS TION III—LIMITS OF INSURANCE: 1 The following replaces Paragraph 1.b. of Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Prem- SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVER- ises Rented To You Limit is the most we will AGES A AND B of SECTION I — COVER- pay under Coverage A for damages because AGE. of "premises damage" to any one premises. b Up to $2,500 for the cost of bail bonds The Damage To Premises Rented To You required because of accidents or traffic Limit will apply to all "property damage" law violations arising out of the use of any proximately caused by the same "occur- vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability rence", whether such damage results from. Coverage applies. We do not have to fur- fire explosion; lightning;smoke resulting from nish these bonds. such fire, explosion, or lightning; or water; or 2. The following replaces Paragraph 1.d. of any combination of any of these causes. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVER- The Damage To Premises Rented To You AGES A AND B of SECTION I — COVER- Limit will be. AGES: a. The amount shown for the Damage To d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the Premises Rented To You Limit on the insured at our request to assist us in the Declarations of this Coverage Part;or investigation or defense of the claim or b. $300,000 if no amount is shown for the "suit", including actual loss of earnings up Damage To Premises Rented To You to $500 a day because of time off from Limit on the Declarations of this Coverage work. Part. D. INCIDENTAL MEDICAL MALPRACTICE 4. The following replaces Paragraph a. of the 1 The following is added to the definition of"oc- definition of"insured contract" in the DEFINI- currence" in the DEFINITIONS Section: TIONS Section: "Occurrence" also means an act or omission a. A contract for a lease of premises. How- committed in providing or failing to provide ever, that portion of the contract for a "incidental medical services", first aid or lease of premises that indemnifies any "Good Samaritan services"to a person. person or organization for "premises damage"is not an"insured contract"; 2. The following is added to Paragraph 2.a.(1)of SECTION II—WHO IS AN INSURED. 5. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS Section: Paragraph (1)(d) above does not apply to "bodily injury" arising out of providing or fail- "Premises damage" means "property dam- ing to provide. age"to. (i) "Incidental medical services" by any of a. Any premises while rented to you or tern- your "employees" who is a nurse practi- porarily occupied by you with permission tioner, registered nurse, licensed practical of the owner;or nurse, nurse assistant, emergency medi- b. The contents of any premises while such cal technician or paramedic; or premises is rented to you, if you rent such (ii) First aid or"Good Samaritan services" by premises for a period of seven or fewer consecutive days. any of your "employees" or "volunteer workers", other than an employed or vol- 6. The following replaces Paragraph 4.b.(1)(b)SECTION IV—COMMERCIAL GENERAL unteer doctor Any such "employees" or of LIABILITY CONDITIONS "volunteer workers" providing or failing to provide first aid or "Good Samaritan ser- (b) That is insurance for"premises damage"; vices"during their work hours for you will or be deemed to be acting within the scope 7 Paragraph 4.b.(1)(c) of SECTION IV — of their employment by you or performing COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CON- duties related to the conduct of your busi- DITIONS is deleted. ness. Page 2 of 6 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. CG D3 16 11 11 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 3. The following is added to Paragraph 5. of 4. Any organization you newly acquire or form, SECTION III—LIMITS OF INSURANCE: other than a partnership,joint venture or lim- For the purposes of determining the applica- ited liability company, of which you are the ble Each Occurrence Limit, all related acts or sole owner or in which you maintain the ma- omissions committed in providing or failing to, jority ownership interest, will qualify as a provide "incidental medical services", first aid Named Insured if there is no other insurance or"Good Samaritan services"to any one per- which provides similar coverage to that or- son will be deemed to be one"occurrence" ganization. However 4. The following exclusion is added -to Para- a. Coverage under this provision is afforded graph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I —COV- only' ERAGES—COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY (1) Until the 180th day after you acquire or AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY form the organization or the end of the Sale Of Pharmaceuticals policy period, whichever is earlier, if you "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising do not report such organization in writing out of the willful violation of a penal statute or to us within 180 days after you acquire or ordinance relating to the sale of pharmaceuti- form it;or cals committed by, or with the knowledge or (2) Until the end of the policy period, when consent of,the insured. that date is later than 180 days after you 5. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS acquire or form such organization, if you Section. report such organization in writing to us "Incidental medical services"means: within 180 days after you acquire or form a. Medical, surgical, dental, laboratory,x-ray it, and we agree in writing that it will con- or nursing service or treatment, advice or tinue to be a Named Insured until the end instruction, or the related furnishing of of the policy period; food or beverages;or b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" b The furnishing or dispensing of drugs or or "property damage" that occurred before medical, dental, or surgical supplies or you acquired or formed the organization,and appliances. c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal in- "Good Samaritan services" means any emer- jury" or "advertising injury" arising out of an gency medical services for which no-compen- offense committed before you acquired or sation is demanded or received. formed the organization. 6. The following is added to Paragraph,4.b., Ex- F WHO IS AN INSURED— BROADENED NAMED cess Insurance, of SECTION IV — COM- INSURED—UNNAMED SUBSIDIARIES MERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDI- TIONS: The following is added to SECTION II—WHO IS AN INSURED' The insurance is excess over any valid and collectible other insurance available to the in- Any of your subsidiaries,other than a partnership, sured, whether primary, excess, contingent or joint venture or limited liability company, that is on any other basis, that is available to any of not shown as a Named Insured in the Declare- your "employees" or "volunteer workers" for tions is a Named Insured if you maintain an own- "bodily injury" that arises out of-providing or ership interest of more than 50% in such subsidi- failing to provide "incidental medical ser- ary on the first day of the policy period. vices", first aid or"Good Samaritan services" No such subsidiary is an insured for"bodily injury" to any person to the extent not subject to or "property damage" that occurred, or "personal Paragraph 2.a.(1) of Section II —Who Is An injury" or "advertising injury" caused by an of- Insured. fense committed after the date, if any, during the E. WHO IS AN INSURED — NEWLY ACQUIRED policy period, that you no longer maintain an OR FORMED ORGANIZATIONS ownership interest of more than 50%in such sub- The following replaces Paragraph 4. of SECTION sidiary II—WHO IS AN INSURED' CG D3 16 11 11 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 3 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY G. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED -OWNERS, H. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED—LESSORS MANAGERS OR LESSORS OF PREMISES OF LEASED EQUIPMENT The following is added to SECTION II WHO IS The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED. AN INSURED. Any person or organization that is a premises Any person or organization that is an equipment owner, manager or lessor and that you have lessor and that you have agreed in a written con- agreed in a written contract or agreement to in- tract or agreement to include as an insured on dude as an additional insured on this Coverage this Coverage Part is an insured, but only with re- Part is an insured, but only with respect to liability spect to liabilityfor"bodilyinjury", ro"property dam- for "bodily injury", "property damage", "personal p p y injury"or"advertising injury"that: age", "personal injury"or"advertising injury"that: a. Is "bodily injury" or "property damage" that a. Is "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs, or is "personal injury" or "advertising occurs, or is "personal injury" or "advertising injury" caused by an offense that is commit- injury" caused by an offense that is commit - injury"subsequent to the execution of that con- ted, subsequent to the execution of that con- tract or agreement; and tract or agreement;and b. Arises out of the ownership, maintenance or b. Is caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or use of that part of any premises leased to omissions in the maintenance, operation or you. use of equipment leased to you by such equipment lessor The insurance provided to such premises owner, The insurance provided to such equipment lessor manager or lessor is subject to the following pro- is subject to the following provisions. visions: a. The limits of insurance provided to such a. The limits of insurance provided to such equipment lessor will be the minimum limits premises owner, manager or lessor will be which you agreed to provide in the written the minimum limits which you agreed to pro- contract or agreement, or the limits shown on vide in the written contract or agreement, or the Declarations,whichever are less. the limits shown on the Declarations, which- ever are less. b. The insurance provided to such equipment lessor does not apply to any"bodily injury" or b. The insurance provided to such premises "property damage" that occurs, or "personal owner, manager or lessor does not apply to: injury"or"advertising injury"caused by an of- (1) Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" fense that is committed, after the equipment that occurs,or"personal injury"or"adver- lease expires. tising injury" caused by an offense that is c. The insurance provided to such equipment committed, after you cease to be a tenant lessor is excess over any valid and collectible in that premises; or other insurance available to such equipment (2) Structural alterations, new construction or lessor, whether primary, excess, contingent demolition operations performed by or on or on any other basis, unless you have behalf of such premises owner, lessor or agreed in the written contract or agreement manager that this insurance must be primary to, or c. The insurance provided to such premises non-contributory with, such other insurance, owner, manager or lessor is excess over any in which case this insurance will be primary valid and collectible other insurance available to, and non-contributory with, such other in- to such premises owner, manager or lessor, surance. whether primary, excess, contingent or on I. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — STATES any other basis, unless you have agreed in OR POLITICAL SUBDIVISIONS—PERMITS the written contract or agreement that this in- surance must be primary to, or non- The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS contributory with, such other insurance, in AN INSURED which case this insurance will be primary to, Any state or political subdivision that has issued a and non-contributory with, such other insur- permit in connection with operations performed by ance. you or on your behalf and that you are required Page 4 of 6 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. CG D3 16 11 11 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY by any ordinance, law or building code'to include (ii) A manager of any limited liability as an additional insured on this Coverage Part is company; or an insured, but only with respect to liability for (iii)An executive officer or director of "bodily injury", "property damage", "personal in- any other organization, jury" or"advertising injury" arising out of such op that is your partner, joint venture erations. member or manager; or The insurance provided to such state or political (b) Any "employee" authorized by such subdivision does not apply to. partnership, joint venture, limited li- e. Any "bodily injury" "property damage," "per- ability company or other organization sonal injury" or"advertising injury"arising out to give notice of an "occurrence" or of operations performed for that state or po- offense. litical subdivision; or (3) Notice to us of such"occurrence"or of an b. Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" in- offense will be deemed to be given as cluded in the "products-completed operations soon as practicable if it is given in good hazard" faith as soon as practicable to your work- J KNOWLEDGE AND NOTICE OF OCCUR- ers' compensation insurer This applies RENCE OR OFFENSE only if you subsequently give notice to us The following is added to Paragraph'2., Duties In of the"occurrence"or offense as soon as The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or practicable after any of the persons de Suit, of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GEN- scribed in Paragraphs e. (1) or (2) above ERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS discovers that the"occurrence"or offense may result in sums to which the insurance e. The following provisions apply to Paragraph provided under this Coverage Part may a. above, but only for the purposes of the in- apply surance provided under this Coverage Part to you or any insured listed in Paragraph 1 or 2. However, if this Coverage Part includes an en of Section II—Who Is An Insured: dorsement that provides limited coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" or pollution (1) Notice to us of such "occurrence" or of- costs arising out of a discharge, release or es- fense must be given as soon as practica- cape of"pollutants"which contains a requirement ble only after the "occurrence" or offense that the discharge, release or escape of "pollut- is known by you(if you are an individual), ants" must be reported to us within a specific any of your partners or members who is number of days after its abrupt commencement, an individual (if you are a partnership or this Paragraph e. does not affect that require- joint venture), any of your managers who ment. is an individual (if you are a limited liability K. UNINTENTIONAL OMISSION company), any of your "executive offi- cers"or directors (if you are an organiza- The following is added to Paragraph 6., Repre- tion other than a partnership;joint venture sentations, of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL or limited liability company) or any "em- GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS. ployee" authorized by you to,give notice The unintentional omission of, or unintentional of an"occurrence"or offense. error in, any information provided by you which (2) If you are a partnership, joint venture or we relied upon in issuing this policy will not preju- limited liability company,and none of your dice your rights under this insurance. However, partners, joint venture members or man- this provision does not affect our right to collect agers are individuals, notice to us of such additional premium or to exercise our rights of "occurrence" or offense must be given as cancellation or nonrenewal in accordance with soon as practicable only after the "occur- applicable insurance laws or regulations. rence"or offense is known by. L. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION (a) Any individual who is: The following is added to Paragraph 8., Transfer (i) A partner or member of any part- Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us. nership or joint venture, of SECTION IV— COMMERCIAL GENERAL LI- ABILITY CONDITIONS. CG D3 16 11 11 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. Page 5 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY If the insured has agreed in a contract or agree- 3. "Bodily injury" means bodily injury mental ment to waive that insured's right of recovery anguish, mental injury, shock,fright, disability against any person or organization,we waive our humiliation, sickness or disease sustained by right of recovery against such person or organiza- a person, including death resulting from any tion,but only for payments we make because of. of these at any time. a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" that oc- N. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS curs,or 1 The following replaces Paragraph c. of the b. "Personal injury" or "advertising injury" definition of"insured contract" in the DEFINI- caused by an offense that is committed; TIONS Section: subsequent to the execution of that contract or c. Any easement or license agreement; agreement. 2. Paragraph f.(1) of the definition of "insured M. AMENDED BODILY INJURY DEFINITION contract" in the DEFINITIONS Section is de- The following replaces the definition of "bodily leted. injury"in the DEFINITIONS Section: Page 6 of 6 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company All rights reserved. CG D3 16 11 11 TlêXaSMutual® WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS'COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule Schedule 1 () Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3 Premium. The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s)arising out of the operations described 4 Advance Premium. Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on ioi26120 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0001259808 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/26/2022 Issued to: RELIABLE SIGNAL&LIGHTING SOLUTIONS LLC /74/4-€ This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 10/18/19 PO Box 12058,Austin,TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com I (800)859-5995 I Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B TlêXaSMutual® a �. u WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS'COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy,we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule.The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule Schedule 1 Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy) This endorsement,effective on 10/26/20 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no.0001259808 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 10/26/2022 Issued to: RELIABLE SIGNAL&LIGHTING SOLUTIONS LLC MAL This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 10/18/19 PO Box 12058,Austin,TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com I(800)859-5995 I Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01 Commercial Excess Liability Coverage Part Various provisions of this policy restrict coverage Read the entire policy carefully to determine your rights, duties and what is and is not covered. Throughout the policy the words"you"and"your"refer to the Named Insured.The words"we," "us"and"our" refer to the company providing this insurance.The word"insured"means any other person or organization qualifying as such under SECTION II—WHO IS AN INSURED Other words and phrases that appear in quotations in this policy have special meanings. Refer to SECTION V-DEFINITIONS. SECTION I—COVERAGE 1 Insuring Agreement A. Excess Liability 1 We will pay on behalf of the insured and in excess of"underlying limits"those sums the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages for"loss"to which this insurance applies. This insurance applies only it a. the"loss"is caused by an"event"that takes place in the coverage territory; b the"loss"occurs during the"policy period;"and c. the"controlling underlying insurance"applies to the"loss." 2. If an aggregate limit of"controlling underlying insurance"is exhausted by the payment of judgments or settlements to which this insurance applies, or would have applied but for the amount of the damages,this insurance will apply in place of the"controlling underlying insurance"until we have paid our applicable Limits of Insurance. 3 When paragraph 2.above applies,ending the"controlling underlying insurance" obligations to investigate and settle claims or defend suits against the insured,we have the right and duty to investigate claims and defend suits which seek damages to which this insurance applies. Our right and duty to defend end when we have paid our applicable Limits of Insurance. 4 When paragraph 2. above does not apply,we have the right, but not the duty,to participate in the investigation or settlement of any claim or the defense of any suit against any insured. 5. We have the right, at our discretion,to settle any claim to which this insurance applies. 6. As respects paragraphs 3. and 4 above,"defense expenses"we incur in the investigation of any claim or defense of any suit will be paid in addition to the Limits of Insurance except when such costs reduce the limits of"controlling underlying insurance,"in which case they will reduce our Limits of Insurance. 7 The amount we pay is limited. See SECTION III—LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Page 1 of 7 2. Exclusions The EXCLUSIONS sections of the"controlling underlying insurance"are made part of this policy If an inconsistency or contradiction exists between an Exclusion of this policy and an Exclusion of the"controlling underlying insurance"the Exclusion of this policy will apply However, in no case will coverage be excluded by the"controlling underlying insurance" and not excluded by this policy This insurance does not apply to any liability 1 to which"controlling underlying insurance"does not apply; 2. for which coverage is provided by"controlling underlying insurance"at limits less than the limits of insurance applicable to other coverage provided by the"controlling underlying insurance"and less than"underlying limits;" 3 for"loss"which commenced prior to this"policy period,"whether or not such"loss" continues, progresses, changes or resumes during this"policy period;" 4 for damage to property you own, rent or occupy, including any costs or expenses incurred by you or any other person,organization or entity,for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including the prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; 5 for damage to personal property in the care,custody or control of any insured; 6 arising out of any"aircraft products;" 7 arising out of the actual,alleged, suspected or threatened inhalation of, ingestion of, contact with,exposure to, existence of, or presence of"asbestos;" 8 arising out of the actual, alleged, suspected or threatened inhalation of, ingestion of, contact with,exposure to, existence of, or presence of"fungi"or bacteria; 9 arising out of the actual, alleged,suspected or threatened inhalation of, ingestion of, contact with, exposure to, existence of, or presence of"silica"or"silica related dust;" 10 arising out of any"employment practices"of any insured; 11 arising out of a. war, including undeclared or civil war; b warlike action by a military force,including action in hindering or defending against an actual or expected attack, by any government,sovereign or other authority using military personnel or other agents; or c. insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped power, or action taken by governmental authority in hindering or defending against any of these, 12. imposed under a. an uninsured or underinsured motorist, uninsured or underinsured boater, Medical Payments, Personal Injury Protection, No-Fault or any similar law; b a workers compensation,disability benefits, unemployment compensation or any similar law; c. the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, any amendments thereto or any similar law Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Page 2 of 7 SECTION II—WHO IS AN INSURED The WHO IS AN INSURED section of the"controlling underlying insurance"is made part of this policy Any person or organization that is an insured in"controlling underlying insurance"is an insured in this policy to the same extent. SECTION III—LIMITS OF INSURANCE The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations and the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of the number of insureds, claims made or suits brought, or persons or organizations making claims or bringing suits. 1 The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages to which this insurance applies, except: a. damages because of bodily injury or property damage included within any applicable products-completed operations hazard;or b. damages arising out of the ownership, operation, maintenance or use of an automobile, 2. The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages included within any applicable products-completed operations hazard; 3 Subject to paragraphs 1 and 2. above,the Each Event Limit is the most we will pay for all damages that arise out of any one"event." SECTION IV—CONDITIONS The CONDITIONS sections of the"controlling underlying insurance"are made part of this policy If an inconsistency or contradiction exists between the Conditions of this policy and the Conditions of the"controlling underlying insurance,"the Conditions of this policy will apply 1 Appeals At our discretion we may appeal any judgment which would result in a payment under this policy When we do appeal,we will pay all costs associated with the appeal in addition to the Limits of Insurance.Any such appeal will not increase our Limits of Insurance. 2. Bankruptcy or Insolvency Bankruptcy or insolvency of the insured or the insured's estate will not relieve us of our obligations under this policy Bankruptcy or insolvency of any company providing "controlling underlying insurance"will not reduce the"underlying limits"or increase our obligations under this policy We will not be required to drop down or replace"controlling underlying insurance." 3. Cancellation a. The first Named Insured may cancel this policy at any time by providing us advanced written notice of the cancellation date. b. We may cancel this policy at any time by providing the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation: i. at least 10 days in advance if we cancel for non-payment of premium, or ii. at least 30 days in advance if we cancel for any other reason. Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Page 3 of 7 c. If the"controlling underlying insurance"is cancelled for any reason,this policy is also cancelled. Reinstatement of the`controlling underlying insurance"does not reinstate this policy unless reinstatement is endorsed hereon. Return premium, if any,will be calculated per Condition 11 Premium. Proof of mailing will be proof of notice. 4 Non-Renewal a. We are not obligated to renew this policy However, should we decide not to renew, we will provide the first Named Insured written notice of our decision at least 30 days. prior to the expiration date shown in the Declarations. b We will not restrict the terms or increase premium of this policy at renewal unless we have given the first Named Insured at least 30 days advanced notice of any such changes. However; no notice will be provided or required if a restriction in this policy results from a restriction applicable to"controlling underlying insurance." c. The first Named Insured may non-renew this policy by i. providing advance written notice to us; ii. rejecting our offer to renew;or iii. failing to reply to our offer to renew Proof of mailing will be proof of notice. 5. Changes This policy contains all of the agreements between you and us.This policy may only be changed by endorsements we issue. 6 Duties When There is an"Event,"Claim or Suit a. You must see to it that we and any other insurers who could provide coverage are notified as soon as practicable of any"event"which may be reasonably expected to result in a claim under this policy To the extent possible, notice should include. i. how,when and where the"event"took place, ii. the names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and iii the nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the"event." b If a claim is made or suit is brought against any insured which may be reasonably expected to result in a claim under this policy, you must: i. immediately record the specifics of the claim or suit and the date received;and ii. notify us, and any other insurers who could provide coverage, as soon as practicable. c. You and any other involved insured must: i. immediately send us, and any other insurers who could provide coverage, copies of any demands, notices, summonses or legal papers.received in connection with a claim or suit which may be reasonably expected to result in a claim under this policy; ii. authorize us to obtain records and other information; iii. cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim, issues relating to coverage under this policy or defense against the suit;and iv assist us, upon our request, in the enforcement of any right against any person or organization which may be liable to the insured because of the injury or damage to which this insurance may apply Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission Page 4 of 7 d. No insured will, except at that insured's own cost, voluntarily make a payment, assume any obligation or incur any expense, other than first aid,without our consent. Notice to us may be sent to our address shown in the Declarations. 7 Legal Action Against Us No person or organization has a right under this insurance. a. to join us as a party or otherwise bring us into a suit asking for damages from an insured, or b. to sue us on this insurance unless all of its terms have been fully complied with. 8 Maintenance of Controlling Underlying Insurance During the"policy period"you must maintain"controlling underlying insurance"with "underlying limits"at least equal to the amounts shown in the Declarations.The "underlying limits"must be unimpaired at the beginning of this"policy period." If you fail to maintain the"controlling underlying insurance"this policy will be invalid If you fail to maintain"underlying limits,"we will only be liable to the extent we would have been liable had you maintained the"underlying limits." Reduction of"underlying limits"by the payment of judgments or settlements for"loss"to which this insurance applies,or would have applied but for the amount of the damages,will not be considered a failure to maintain"underlying limits." 9 Other Insurance This insurance is excess over any insurance available to the insured except insurance purchased specifically to apply in excess of this policy 10 Payment of Damages When the amount of damages payable under this policy has been determined by final judgment or a written settlement agreement between the claimant and us,we will pay that amount, up to our applicable Limits of Insurance,after the"controlling underlying insurance"or the insured has paid the full amount of the"underlying limits." 11 Premium The Premium shown in the Declarations is the premium for the coverage we provide for the"policy period"The first Named Insured is responsible for the payment of all premiums under this policy If this policy is cancelled prior to its expiration date return premium will be calculated as follows: a. if cancelled by us: [{(Premium)—(Minimum Earned Premium)}x(Pro Rata factor)] b if cancelled by you: [{(Premium)—(Minimum Earned Premium)}x{(Pro Rata factor)x(.90)}]. 12. Separation of Insureds Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance and any rights or duties specifically assigned in this policy to the first Named Insured, this insurance applies: a. as if each Named Insured were the only Named Insured; and b. separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought. 13 Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others If an insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this insurance,the insured must preserve those rights and, at our request, pursue or transfer those rights to us.The insured must do nothing after an"event"to impair them. Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Page 5 of 7 14 Reformation of Underlying If the"controlling underlying insurance"is reformed after an"event"to provide coverage for a"loss,"the terms of such reformation do not apply to this policy 15. When we Defend When we have a duty to defend an insured,the insured will cooperate with us in the transfer of the defense to counsel of our choosing. If the law of the governing jurisdiction permits an insured to select their own counsel to be paid for by us,we shall only be liable for the reasonable and necessary defense costs of one law firm per insured at rates customarily paid by us for the defense of similar claims in the jurisdiction where the claim is pending. 16. Claims outside the U.S.A, it's Territories, Possessions or Canada When we have the duty to defend an insured and are prevented by law or otherwise from doing so,we will reimburse the insured for any reasonable and necessary expenses incurred in the defense of a suit to which this insurance applies. If the insured becomes legally obligated to pay damages to which this insurance applies and we are prevented by law from paying such damages on behalf of the insured,we will reimburse the insured, in U S currency at the prevailing exchange rate at the time the damages were paid,for such damages. SECTION V—DEFINITIONS The DEFINITIONS sections of the"controlling underlying insurance"are made part of this policy, and apply to words or phrases used in this policy provided always that words or phrases in quotations in this policy will have the meaning given them in this policy "Aircraft products"means: a. an aircraft; b. ground control or support equipment; or c. any article, component or device made, sold, licensed, handled or distributed by any insured that is used to achieve, control or maintain flight or landing of an aircraft. "Asbestos"means the mineral in any form. "Controlling underlying insurance"means the policy listed,in the Schedule of Underlying Insurance shown in the Declarations, or its renewal or replacement,which applies to the "loss,"or would have applied but for a. an exclusion in that policy;or b. the exhaustion or erosion of an aggregate limit of insurance, If more than one policy is listed in the Schedule,the"controlling underlying insurance"is the policy which applies to the"loss"or would have applied but for the reasons a.or b. listed above. "Defense expenses"means expenses we incur to investigate a claim or defend a suit. Defense expenses include interest which accrues on our portion of a judgment,after entry of that judgment and after the insured or any underlying insurer has paid the full amount of their portion of the judgment but before we have paid, offered to pay or deposited in the court the part of the judgment that is within our applicable Limits of Insurance. "Employment practices"means: Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Page 6 of 7 a. dismissal,discharge or termination of employment,whether actual, constructive or retaliatory; b failure or refusal to hire or promote; c. discipline, demotion, coercion or retaliatory treatment; d. failure to grant tenure; e. negligent employment evaluation, f sexual or other workplace harassment, including quid pro quo and hostile work environment; g employment discrimination, h. invasion of privacy,violation of employment related civil rights, employment related libel, slander or defamation, i. creating or enforcing or failing to create or enforce employment related policies or procedures;or j. actual or alleged violations of the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 or its amendments. "Event"means an accident, incident,occurrence,offense,wrongful act or other"loss"causing "event"defined by and to which the"controlling underlying insurance"applies. "Fungi"means any type or form of fungus, including mold or mildew and any mycotoxins, spores, scents or byproducts produced or released by fungi. But"fungi"does not include mushrooms cultivated for human consumption. "Loss"means bodily injury, property damage, personal and advertising injury or other loss defined by and to which the"controlling underlying insurance"applies. "Policy period"means the period of time between the effective date shown in the Declarations and the earlier of the expiration date shown in the Declarations or the expiration date shown in an endorsement to this policy "Silica"means silicon dioxide, occurring in crystalline, amorphous or impure forms,silica particles,silica dust or silica compounds. "Silica related dust"means a mixture or combination of silica and other dust particles. "Underlying limits"means the amounts shown in the Declarations as the minimum limits of insurance to be provided by"controlling underlying insurance." In Witness Whereof,the issuing Company has caused this policy to be signed officially below,and countersigned on the Declarations page by a duly authorized representative of said Company CbOltikaUr2zot Douglas Elliot Lisa Levin President Secretary Navigators Insurance Company Contains copyrighted material of the NAV-EXC-001 (04/10) Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission Page 7 of 7 COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY AMENDMENT OF CONDITIONS OTHER INSURANCE PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTING This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE When required by written contract executed before the "loss " A. Section IV-Conditions, 9 Other Insurance is deleted and replaced by the following: 9 This insurance is excess over any other insurance available to the insured except: a. insurance that is purchased specifically to apply in excess of this policy; or b insurance available to the person or organization shown in the Schedule of this endorsement as an additional insured on.the"controlling underlying insurance." B When this insurance applies on a primary and non-contributing basis,the Limits of Insurance available for the additional insured will be the lesser of 1 the amounts shown in item 3 of the Declarations of this policy; or 2. the amount of insurance you are required to provide the additional insured in the written contract or agreement. All other terms of the policy remain unchanged. NAV-EXC-348A(01/11) Navigators Insurance Company Page 1 of 1 Contains copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. i CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 BOND NO HSHNSU0830532 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS ThatReliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC of the City of __ Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal, and Harco National Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$1,560,471 00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the (p day ofbe 1\911 , 20fi(the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO. 0822-25 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder 12/2007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEA.RLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day of ,20 Principal: Surety. Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC Harco Nati a1 I r c ompany 133, By, ItY q .apA�"41 c " /'T( k ( z; EAL I0, S Title: 4 es%ca er i- Title: Michele Bonnie,Attorney_In-Fact?c: , Address: Address: P 0 Box 2757 28420 Hardy Toll Road, Suite 200 Pearland,Texas 77588 Spring,Texas 77373_ Telephone. (281) 997-1111_ _ Telephone: (281)681-3900 Fax.. . __ (281) 754-4381 _ _ Fax. . (281) 681-3903 -. NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610-2 of 2 _,CITY OT PEARLAND . PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 BOND NO HSHNSU0830532 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS. That Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria ,and State of Texas, as principal, and Harco National Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in the penal sum of$1,560,471.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and Their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the (0 day of 1 2.ejr , 205.?(the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO.•0822-25 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OFPEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day Of ,20 -_ Principal. Surety Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC Harco Natio al I r c om an Dy. - By._ (.04 `—_' '°'; -ri,.,A - Title; PC E5 c C'r1i- EAL :SS Title: Michele Bonnin,Attomey-In-Fact=z 19sn, i a ' °�dm'�n oe Via: Address. Address: *,.ti"' P O Box 2757 -__ 28420 Hardy_Toll Road, Suite 200 Pearland, Texas 77588 Spring,Texas 77373 - Telephone:. (281) 997-1111 Telephone: _ (281)681-3900 281 754-4381 Fax. (281)681-3903 Fax.. ( ) . NOTICE• THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00611 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 BOND NO HSHNSU0830532 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC of the City of Pearland ., County of Brazona , and State of Texas, as principal, and Harco National Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$4,560,471.00 _for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the (p day of ilr t 11)r- , 20P(the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Traffic Signal Upgrades FY22 City of Pearland, Texas COP PN TR2201 BID NO.: 0822-25 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder 07/2006 00612-1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND _ ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day of , 20_ Principal Surety, Reliable Signal&Lighting Solutions,LLC Harco Nati al I c ompany PS i Q�'1� l SEAL :n: Title•. Gl Title. Michele Bonnin,Attorney-In-Fact: �;ago .tW Address., Address, ' ?•'"' I P 0 Box 2757 _ 28420 Hardy Toll Road, Suite 200 Pearland, Texas 77588 Spring,Texas 77373 Telephone. (281) 997-1111 Telephone: (281) 681-3900 Fax. (281) 754-4381 Fax. (281)681-3903 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612-2 of 2 POWER OF ATTORNEY Bond# HSHNSU0830532 HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY Member companies of IAT Insurance Group,Headquartered 4200 Six Forks Rd,Suite 1400,Raleigh,NC 27609 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois,and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey,and having their principal offices located respectively in the cities of Rolling Meadows,Illinois and Newark,New Jersey,do hereby constitute and appoint EDWARD ARENS, PHILIP BAKER, JILLIAN O'NEAL, ERICA ANNE COX, REBECCA GARZA, MICHELE BONNIN The Woodlands, TX their true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by their regularly elected officers at their principal offices. This Power of Attorney is executed,and may be revoked,pursuant to and by authority of the By-Laws of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY and is granted under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly held on the 13th day of December,2018 and by the Board of Directors of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting held on the 13th day of December,2018. "RESOLVED, that (1) the Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President, Vice President, or Secretary of the Corporation shall have the power to appoint,and to revoke the appointments of,Attorneys-in-Fact or agents with power and authority as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, and to execute on behalf of the Corporation and affix the Corporation's seal thereto, bonds, undertakings, recognizances,contracts of indemnity and other written obligations in the nature thereof or related thereto; and(2)any such Officers of the Corporation may appoint and revoke the appointments of joint-control custodians, agents for acceptance of process, and Attorneys-in-fact with authority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the Corporation;and(3)the signature of any such Officer of the Corporation and the Corporation's seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification given for the execution of any bond,undertaking,recognizance,contract of indemnity or other written obligation in the nature thereof or related thereto,such signature and seals when so used whether heretofore or hereafter,being hereby adopted by the Corporation as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Corporation,to be valid and binding upon the Corporation with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN WITNESS WHEREOF,HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents on this 31st day of December,2021 ,;,,,,,r,,,, `017Y0%re. STATE OF NEW JERSEY STATE OF ILLINOIS � �,aQ...';y y Countyof Essex C'o• r� � 4, O / County of Cook �; „ty �' SEAL �' /1414e'e-- :x:; SEAL 'Ot.t3 r i g r:Zj=C lE�1 % "Kenneth Chapman .$' "' 1 .• 1y7 ,+Executive Vice President,Harco National Insurance Company *"��, and International Fidelity Insurance Company On this 31st day of December,2021 ,before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument,to me personally known,and, being by me duly sworn,said he is the therein described and authorized officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY;that the seals affixed to said instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies;that the said Corporate Seals and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies. ,.,,. A",!.,1� IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal,at the City of Newark, Q.r. s " New Jersey the day and year first above written. \co �°IOTA i .4 2 �� G j``A..Q w J Q '�VBL'O JESS/y�`, Shirelle A.Outley a Notary Public of New Jersey V 'pis,,,,, My Commission Expires April 4,2023 CERTIFICATION I,the undersigned officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Sections of the By-Laws of said Companies as set forth in said Power of Attorney,with the originals on file in the home office of said companies,and that the same are correct transcripts thereof,and of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been evoked and is now in full force and effect. y. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand on this day; A00868 rt.— Irene Martins,Assistant Secretary IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para presentar una queja. You may contact Harco National Insurance Company Usted puede comunicarse con su Harco National at: Insurance Company al: 1-800-333-4167 1-800-333-4167 You may also write to:Harco National Insurance Usted tambien puede escribir a Harco National Company do IAT Surety at: Insurance Company do IAT Surety at: Attn. Claims Department Attn. Claims Department One Newark Center,20th Floor One Newark Center,20th Floor Newark,NJ 07102 Newark,NJ 07102 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de to obtain information on companies,coverages,rights Texas para obtener informacion acerca de companias, or complaints at: coberturas,derechos o quejas al. 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P.O.Box 149104 P O.Box 149104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax:(512)490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.gov Web:www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail.ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov E-mail. ConsumerProtectionAtdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS 0 RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un or about a claim you should contact the agent or the reclamo,debe comunicarse con el agente o la compania company first.If the dispute is not resolved,you may primero.Si no se resuelve la disputa,puede entonces contact the Texas Department of Insurance. comunicarse con el departamento(TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU FIANZA DE GARANTIA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo para proposito de informacion y no become a part or condition of the attached document. se convierte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto. CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows. In consideration of Pay Estimate No in the amount of$ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any,through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right,to claim or lien,,arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me,this day of , 20 My Commission Expires. Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 1 01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1 02 Contract Documents 103 Subcontractor 1 04 Written Notice 105 Work 1 06 Extra Work 1 07 Work Day 1 07-1 Rain Day 1 07-2 Impact Day 1 08 Calendar Day 1 09 Substantially Completed 1 10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1 11 Referenced Standards 1 12 Contract Time 1 13 Construction Inspector 1 14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700-i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes-and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3 01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3 02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3 03 Preliminary Approval 3 04 Inspection by Engineer 3 05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3 06 Recommendation of Payment 4 0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 8 - 1 4 01 Independent Contractor 4 02 Contractor's Understanding 4 03 Laws and Ordinances 4 04 Assignment and Subletting 4 05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4 06 Insurance 4 07 Permits and Fees 4 08 Texas State Sales Tax 4 09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4 10 Character of Workers 4 11 Labor,Equipment,Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 412 Sanitation 4 13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4 14 Performance of Work 4 15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700-ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4 16 Layout of Work 4 17 Shop Drawings 4 18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship, Observations 4 19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 1 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors,Laborers,Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment,Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 18 5 01 Time and Order of Completion ,5 02 Extension of Time 5 03 Hindrances and Delays 5 04 Suspension of Work 5 05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5 06 Change of Contract Time 5 07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21 6 01 Discrepancies and Omissions 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 ( 00700-iii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6 03 'Estimated Quantities 6 04 Price of Work 6 05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6 07 Use of Completed Portions &Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6 08-1 6 09 Final Payment 6 10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6 11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 612 Payments-Withheld 6 13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7 01 Differing Site Conditions 7 02 Change Orders 7 03 Change Orders 7 04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7 05 Minor Changes 7`06 Extra Work 7 07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8 01 Default by Contractor 8 02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8 03 Cumulative Remedies& Specific Performance 8 04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8 07 Waiver of,Consequential Damages 8 08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 , DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO 1 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO 2 AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B1' ATTACHMENT NO 3 OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl 10-2012 '00700-v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 101 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner;s representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1 02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders, (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) ,, Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in,the Project Manual, (7) Instructions to Bidders, (8) Bid Proposal, and 06-2022 00700- 1 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits. The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto,.are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the ,Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used,in the Contract Documents with a well-knorwn technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor 1 04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1 05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the W,ork described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1 06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER,to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only 1 07 WORK DAY As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 06-2022 00700-2 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7 04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1 07-1 RAIN DAY As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1 12 Contract Time below) 1 07-2 IMPACT DAY As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day (See 1 12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to,the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time 1 08 CALENDAR DAY A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1) 1 09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or"Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations,the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work., The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1 10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 06-2022 00700-3 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITION'S OF AGREEMENT o ` Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment.of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words,terms or clauses c efinmg the character of the work. 111 REFERENCED STANDARDS No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1 12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i)to achieve Substantial Completion, and,(ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6 09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only, be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and-(b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1 13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals,engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1 14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER ' 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR 'IMPLIED Prior to' commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field,measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 06-2022 00700-4 of 36 1 CITY OF PEARLAN D GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT r � inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER`in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. 'CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements.of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2 02 RIGHT OF ENTRY The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection,performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done,they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work,then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 06-2022 00700-5 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3 01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents, and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER'S liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7 Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3 02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four (4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3 03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract'for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change.No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR, otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection-or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 06-2022 00700-6 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3 04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precaution§ or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors,. omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3 05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or -instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER,shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7 07 3 06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6 12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. f 06-2022 00700-7 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4 0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4 01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, .an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the-result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4 02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the CON TRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather,, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4 03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 06-2022 00700-8 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 —Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4 04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4 05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000 00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent(100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000 00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required ,Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7 19-1 of tile Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall riot be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment\and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4 06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4 07 PERMITS AND FEES Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4 08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection IY. 06-2022 00700-9 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase 4 09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistauts, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. • The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons-performing any of the Work. 4 10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract,to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly,or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their'best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 411 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same, and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or , other forms of protection,will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 06-2022 '00700- 10 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4 12 SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the,purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4 13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of deliris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris,trash,waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4 14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done .and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4 15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time,/the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 416 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4 17 SHOP DRAWINGS The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and -schedules 06-2022 00700- 11 of 36 /. CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review(all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules,t or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. - OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The - OWNER,ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4 18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP, OBSERVATIONS It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 06-2022 00700- 12 of 36 / 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR.may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 419 OBSERVATION AND TESTING The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such.tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 06-2022 00700- 13 of 36 C CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ' 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident\thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER,the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents , so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences,traffic control,warning signs and other safety devices. 06-2022 00700- 14 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration, of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CON I'RACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The CONTRACTOR shall ' employ proper means to protect the, adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction, and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION ' MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS; MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT When so `desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 06-2022 00700- 15 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all 'such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise, between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier , of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL.OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER, PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF " 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS,ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND'EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 06-2022 00700- 16 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT,LIABILITY,JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE. (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR, OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM,AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130 002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractorsunder workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 06-2022 00700- 17 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship, and against unusual damage fromcproper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5 0.1 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless'otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction, provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces,the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized„and-the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates On which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated, dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends tot undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5 02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written irecommendation, to the 06-2022 , 00700- 18 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under,the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to - the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time 5 03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5 04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5 05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the 'OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 06-2022 00700- 19 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that,ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty,the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond, all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy 5 06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum,the following data. A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5 07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL Where. CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitledto an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 06-2022 00700-20 of 36 i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CON 1RACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6 01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a-clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the' Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 6 02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered,unless otherwise specifically provided. 6 03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR againstCthe OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages,unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6 04 PRICE OF WORK.( It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents. as interpreted by the /ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a, unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for ny services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as ' payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 06-2022 00700-21 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6 05 PAYMENTS No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as-acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract-- 6 06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount,prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. When the Contract Price is based on Unit Costs the Contractor shall utilize the Bid Form Quantities and Unit Costs as the basis of the Pay Application. The Contractor shall develop individual Pay Applications by accurately recording in progressive order the total accumulated number of units of work (line items) performed in the Pay Application multiplying that quantity by'the agreed Contract Unit Price to derive a progressive total for each line item of the Work, If, at any time during the performance of the WORK, the performed quantity, exceeds the CONTRACT quantity, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER and the OWNER of the pending discrepancy prior to submitting the Pay Application. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the , ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work performed by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month, said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such Schedule of Values or statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the-ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, or, if the ENGINEER or OWNER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise 06-2022 I 00700-22 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT disputed,the OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute in writing by issuance of a Notification Of Error requesting the correction of the application for payment identifying those items deemed to be in error The contractual time for the ENGINEER'S and OWNER'S review, approval and processing for payment of the Pay Application shall reset once the CONTRACTOR re-submits a corrected Application for Payment. ENGINEER'S or OWNER'S Notification of Error to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment or required corrections. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the project management system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding`amount of the payment application. Upon receipt of a Correct and Approved Application for Payment the OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR,within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld,by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Suchhretainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payment's, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6 09 FINAL PAYMENT" The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6 07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCIILIST The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or 06-2022 00700-23 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6 08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete" Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist") If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CON TRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6 08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner , 6 09 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment of the Retamage withheld from the Contract Price shall b&made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as (a) the Work, including all Change/Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is 06-2022 00700-24 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER, (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any,to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions, (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections,/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction, (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors,vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor,vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment,tools,temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction, (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No 2, executed by CONTRACTOR, (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc' -in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion, and, (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than,any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER,,and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CON TRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of - the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6 10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment( or Work which is 06-2022 00700-25 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt,of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6 11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship, to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies,which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity 612 PAYMENTS WITHHELD The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of. (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims, (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; , (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise, 06-2022 00700-26 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT , (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion, and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction,the withheld payment shall be made promptly If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6 13 DELAYED PAYMENTS Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the,Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251 051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7 01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract,the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three (3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a)Upon written notification,the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CON TRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7 02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven(7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. 06-2022 00700-27 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather,the ENGINEER will make an adjustment(excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER'S determination, in writing,whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7 03 CHANGE ORDERS Without invalidating this Agreement,the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7 04 In accordance with paragraph 1 06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days,prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day 7 05 MINOR CHANGES The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given i.rior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7 06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is 06-2022 00700-28 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods Method(A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or Method(B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price, or Method(C) --If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the'CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus. a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b)For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work,without ' subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is,hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents,plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used, otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." 06-2022 00700-29 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order In case any orders or instructions, either `oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or,instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall pot constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER'S decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9 0, within sixty (60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7 07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the , parties. In case the CON TRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the°meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9 0 In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason,to timely file a Request for Mediation,the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. 06-2022 00700-30 of 36 __CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8 01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so'elects and without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of ' default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR./ Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the.Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. 1 ' After receiving said notice of default,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense, return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported-owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of-the'Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum Which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand, or 06-2022 00700-31 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT r (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to ,the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost tinder this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such ,increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such,,monies as,may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CON TRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost`to complete under this Contract,the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed,the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notifiedl A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then rbe prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange)for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and'materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools,'materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice,`as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies,'which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8 02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in 06-2022 00700-32 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT accordance with OWNER'S direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said -cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 1 8 03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall`have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared. in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to. OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retamage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8 05 INSOLVENCY It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a` debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon b-ccurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its 'successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8 06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders 06-2022 00700-33 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's,termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon-CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall-not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR-to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8 07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to , this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit,whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve,such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, -purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience 06-2022 00700-34 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8 09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time (limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6 13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials-on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR,which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a) final statement of the balance due the CON TRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to,the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, 06-2022 00700-35 of 36 - CITY OF PEARLAND U GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by is OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 06-2022 ' 00700-36 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS Certificate of coverage ("certificate") A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on,the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406 121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services"\does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B The-CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's Current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER. (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 f 00700-Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter G The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by —i workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of ariy coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR,prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR,prior to the end of the coverage period, a'new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with Whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR. (a) a certifi(ate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the , Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends-during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage.on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10,days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to'perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7),with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will bee'covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject.the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700-A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE l In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between COMPANY NAME (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Projects known as FY21 Traffic Signal Upgrade Program — Magnolia Intersections, the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if,a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation,as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation,their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation. 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract,and the final Change Order issued under the contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CON TRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2 It is(agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue,arising out of or related to the Contract,any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR,acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto,does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment,and'that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims,demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed-that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a , modification,waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself,but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the day of , 20_ CONTRACTOR. By. Signature Print Name. Title [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign, if a partnership, each general partner must sign, if a corporation,the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the - day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR. By. President ATTEST Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 - 00700-B2 r , CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release,who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said. I(We) am(are)the person(s)who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I(we)have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I(we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR-Affiant SWORN TO AND.SUBSCRIBED TO before me,the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700-B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATEOF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release,whose names are set out above,who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said. We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation,pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation,the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation, and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this,the dayof 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires. 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1 Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1 1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and(c) others as required by the Contract Documents,-`if any 1.2 Contractor "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor "Subcontractor"shall include subcontractors of any tier 1 4 ISO "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein. 2.1 1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection, and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect,negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s)is provided to the Contractor by the Owner In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement,the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner'shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so,`the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700-Cl 1 f CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3 Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3 1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A- VII in the most current edition of A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 ( Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict,limit,or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner 3 4 Limits of Liability The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary arid umbrella policies,but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3 5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision. In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder,thirty(30)days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3 6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to,be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor,whether required herein or not. 3 7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. ' 4 Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required. 10-2012 ' 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLANTh GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4 1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 1 4 1 1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all'locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a , business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability 4 1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4 1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than. Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4 1 4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85, or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85, or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01, or ry any form providing equivalent protection to Owner b"' Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non-contributing liability f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3 6, above. 4 1 5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance.,The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements,for at least one(1)year following Date of Substantial 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent) 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3 6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3 1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than. 1 Employer's Liability- $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3 6, above. 4 4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4 4 1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4 4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 4 4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$5,000,000 10-2012 r 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4 4 4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5 1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the-negligent performance of professional services of any type,including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It,is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims- Made basis. r 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000 4.5 4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4 6 Builder's Risk 4 6 1 Insureds. Insureds shall include a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds, and b subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 4 6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover 10-2012 00700-C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located. at the site, c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation, d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b / No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include i. Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project(where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications,workmanship or materials, including collapse iv Debris removal additional limit 25%of direct damage loss v Earthquake (where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage(where $ TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $TBD viii. Flood(where applicable) $TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot& Included without sublimit cold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation,non-renewal or Included lmaterial reduction—40 days prior written notice to each insured 10-2012 1 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND , GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, 1 Included below xiii. Ordinance or law - Included without sublimit xiv Pollutant clean-up and removal $ TBD xv Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below - 4 6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4 6 4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following• a. All Risks of Direct Damage,Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood,Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, BorV d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4 6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit'occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated, b the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached,has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. - 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4 6.6 Waiver,of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5 Intentionally left blank. 6 Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement.New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance,evidence of insurance,and endorsements. 6.2 Form , 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance" 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25,E"Certificate of Insurance" 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify. 6.3 1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name,which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each } coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company 6.3 4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3 6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3 7 Cancellation,non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and"but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 6.3 8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3 10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. r 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3 11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6 4 Required Endorsements A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6 6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the.Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal?policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy ' 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance,with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall ' have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner 7 Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7 1 Insurance similar to 'that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held/ responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating,among other things, the waivers of subrogation,additional insured status,and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary,pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives,and shall cause its subcontractors 'to waive,any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9 Release and Waiver The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release,the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance,whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700-C10 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions,Document 00700 Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions,the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1 01 The OWNER'S representative on the project site is. Yolci Ramirez telephone: 281-652-1686 The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is. telephone. The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4 05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4 05 A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No.3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4 6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Not Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5 08 Add Article 5 08 r The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days.Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year,proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes. Sections 00100 Invitation to Bidders, 00200 Instructions to Bidders and 01505 Mobilization all make reference to provision by the CONTRACTOR of a laptop computer for use by the ' OWNER'S representative or CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. BIDDER is Not Required to 2-24-12 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT provide this equipment or include this cost in the Bid. See Section 1373'0 for full details regarding this computer equipment. Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet ' access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Not Required to provide either a Field Office or any Internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the'section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day Contractor,Will Not be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION 2-24-d2 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS r 04/2008 Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract,work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy' 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 The project will entail the removal and replacement of twenty-four(24)traffic signal control cabinets with associated fiber splices and vehicle detection equipment at twenty-nine(29) intersections along four(4) corridors. The four corridors and twenty-nine intersections are as follows Shadow Creek Parkway McHard Road 1 Kingsley 1 Mykawa 2. Reflection Bay 2. SH 35/Main Street 3 Trinity Bay 3 Old Alvin 4 Kirby 4 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park 5 Business Center Lane 6. Market Place 5 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road 7 SH 288 6. Shallow Creek Drive Broadway Street/FM 518 7 Province Village Drive 1 Shadow Ridge Lane Bailey Road 2. Windward Bay Drive 1 Manvel Road/FM 1128 3 Kingsley Drive 2. Harkey Road, 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive 3 McLean Road 5 Shadow Creek H.S. 6. Kirby Drive 7 Town Center 8. Business Center CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 05/2008 01100- 1 of 3 A Contractor to setup and test new cabinet prior to installation. B Contractor to modify existing traffic signal controller cabinet foundations (if needed) to be sufficient size to accommodate all dimensions of proposed traffic signal controller cabinet. Minimum size is 60"x 33" C Remove existing cabinet and return to Pearland signal shop. D Maintain the integrity of the existing traffic signal controller foundation, conduit, cable, ground boxes and other traffic signal related equipment. E Maximum of one(1)intersection under construction at a time.Provide traffic control per TMUTCD and TxDOT Standards. F Proposed traffic signal cabinet to be two door,with internal Battery Backup Unit(BBU) for eight(8)intersections. G Install City supplied BBU cabinet, mounted to side of traffic signal cabinet for eight (8) intersections. H Locate controller,etc.as approved by the City I Repair or replace pavement and sidewalks damaged by the contractor's forces during construction at no cost to the City J All the traffic signal submittals are subject to be reviewed and approved by the City of Pearland traffic department. K If project budget allows, install badge access RFID lock (alternate item) for each door,of proposed traffic signal cabinets—nine(9)intersections. 1.3 WORK BY OWNER A IT staff to provide and install Cisco switch in side mounted BBU cabinet. B PTZ cameras to be provided and installed by traffic operation staff for four(4)intersections. C Traffic operation staff to remove existing VIVDS equipment. D Traffic operation office will provide phasing and timing for permanent traffic signals. E IT staff to provide and install API. 1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Traffic operations staff to provide BBU cabinet for side mounted install (by contractor) on proposed cabinet. 1.5 WORK SEQUENCE i A See construction narrative in plans as applicable. ' B Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer&Owner for approval as CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 05/2008 01100-2 of 3 specified in Section 01350—Submittals. C Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 -Coordination and,Meetings. 1.6 FUTURE WORK A N/A 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of-way as specified in Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS-NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION-NotUsed END OF SECTION CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 05/2008 01100-3 of 3 Vehicle Detections (GridSmart Camera) Locations per corridor• Shadow Creek Parkway 1. Kingsley—2 cams, NW and SE poles, 2. Reflection Bay—2 cams, NW and SE poles 3 Trinity Bay-1 camera on the NE pole 4 Kirby—2 cams, NW and SE poles 5 Business Center—1 camera, NW pole 6 Market Place—1 camera, NW pole 7 SH 288—2 cameras, NW and SE poles with fiber cable solution on the SE pole Broadway Street/FM 518 1. Shadow Ridge Lane—2 camera, SE and NW poles 2. Windward Bay Drive—2 cameras, SE and NW poles. 3 Kingsley Drive—2 cameras,SW and NE poles 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive—2 cameras, NW and SE poles. 5 Shadow Creek H.S.—2 cameras, SE pole and NE pole. 6. Kirby Drive—2 cameras, NE and SW poles 7 Town Center—2 cameras, NE and SW poles. 8. Business Center—2 cameras, NE and SW poles McHard Road/Pearland Pkwy 1. SH 35/Main Street—1 camera, NW pole. 2. Old Alvin—2 cameras, NW and SE poles. 3 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park Lane—2 cameras, NW and SE poles 4 Barry Rose Rd/Hughes Road—2 cameras, E and W corners. 5 Shallow Creek Drive—2 cameras on the West and East poles 6 Province Village Drive—1 camera on the West pole. 7 Mykawa—1 camera on SW pole. Alternates McHard Road 1. Country Place Parkway—1 camera, NW pole 2 Country Place Boulevard (quad)—4 cameras i. NW pole ii. SW pole (fiber run) iii NE pole (fiber run) iv SE pole (fiber run) 3 Cullen Parkway-1Icamera, NE pole I � Bailey Road r- 1. Manvel Road/FM 1128—1 camera on NW pole ' 2. Harkey Road—1 camera on NE pole 3 McLean Road—1 camera on NW pole, 4 Veterans Drive—1 camera, NW pole � I CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. I � B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&'Patching 3 Section 01555—Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb & Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, &EmbankmentMaterials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement;trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties I outside of the limits of construction. 4 Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer 01/2018 01140-1 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners,,monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the ()wrier or private,property owner 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets,when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7, NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours,72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters,and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, '& Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill,& Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G ` Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejectedproducts. C References to Technical Specifications. See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards. 1 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC) 1.2 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. -B , In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities)submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verifyquantities 1.3 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. r � B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order 1.4 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1 Stockpiles.Measured by cubic dimension using mean length,width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area. Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other Items measured by weight,volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.5 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision;labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals,and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims`for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered`in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unrtprice. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of,the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made.necessary by the Work. E All fiber optic splices are incidental to the unit cost of splice enclosures,and patch panels. Unit costs of those items should incorporate the labor and materials necessary to splice and/or terminate the individual fiber optic strands. 1.6 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the'Work,not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies 1 The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, 05/2007 01200-2 of 3 i - CITY OF.PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.7 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of thefollowing: 1 Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or afterplacement. 3 Products not completely unloaded from transportingvehicle 4 Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5 Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work,unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejectedproducts. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION , 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 'Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders,including: 1 , Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3 Change procedures,using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order,Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4 Execution of Change Orders, 5 Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References. 1 Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue Book).Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Make .Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.3 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE ANDCONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290-1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C , Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable. 1 Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer 3 Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4 Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required. 1 Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3 Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7 03 "Extra Work" 4 Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5 Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls 6. Invoices and receipts for products,rented equipment, andsubcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site,the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176 (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows 1 Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily,weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent off the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift perday) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day No other rate adjustments shall apply 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700,— General Conditions of Agreement, 7 01 "Change Orders" 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OFPEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7 02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work.All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.6 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A r The Engineer may issue a-Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.\The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to,a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. � l B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.7 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.8 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.9 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal,the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions ofAgreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 Th A CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions ofAgreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-materialliasis as specified in this Section, 1 04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time" D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — StandardTorm of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END'OF SECTION 02/2008 01290'-4 of 4 1 7- 2 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS r 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference,and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the, Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary 1.3 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1 01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer",,and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.4 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of Installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required. Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. J C Agenda. 1 Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3 Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4 Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule ofValues, and Construction Schedule. 5 Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6 Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions,Applications for Payment,Requests for Information,Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7 Scheduling of the Work and coordination with othercdntractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9 Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1 06 "Site Mobilization , Conference",when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 1. I 10 Procedures for testing. 11 Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13 Discussion of requirements of a Trench SafetyProgram. 1.6 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractoroccupancy B Attendance Required. Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda. 1 Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3 Construction controls provided by Owner 4 Temporary utilities 5 Survey and layout 6 Security and housekeeping procedures 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer B Attendance Required. Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 '01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda. 1 Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule,Applications for Payment,payrolland compliance submittals. 3 Field observations,problems, and decisions. 4 Identification of problems which impede plannedprogress. 5 Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6 Review status of Requests for Information,Requests for Proposal. 7 Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9 Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10 Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11 Planned progress during succeeding workperiod. 12. Coordination of projected progress 13 Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14 Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15 Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of'Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for 1 Schedule of Values ' 2. Construction Schedules 3 Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples • 4 Operations and Maintenance Data 5 Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7 Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications 1 Section 01310—Coordination&Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options &Substitutions 3 Section 01100—Summary of Work 4 Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5 Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1 Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, ` correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the•Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor 3 The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical Specifications, and dimensions, which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements, review of 10/2017 01350- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4 Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by ' individual Technical Specifications. 5 Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6 The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated,or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until t approval has been obtained in the specified manner B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1 Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1 Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or _ equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3 Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4 For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1 10"Video" C Contractor's Certification 1 Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 —Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x'1 1",plain bond,white paper Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest$100 00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—BidProposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 10/2017 01350-2of7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Acjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5)percent of the LumpSum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart,. (computer generated or prepared manually)and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements. 1 The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved bythe Engineer 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3 For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4 For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5 For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price,the Construction Schedule shall indicate, dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. \ 6 For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7 A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates,\unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal,of the Construction Schedule for review The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 10/2017 01350-3 of 1 I CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700 -General Conditions ofAgreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan andschedulc. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly The date fo be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule, Activities Deleted from the.Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1 Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. (- 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1 02"Submittal Procedures"shall be placed on each ShopDrawing. 3 The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified assuch. b Arrangement and section views. c. Relation, to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for m`aking connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as'shown on the Plans. 4 Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 10/2017 - 01350-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1 Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1 02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data itemsubmitted. 3 Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models, options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project,where required by the Technical Specification. 4 , For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name,model or catalog designation,and applicable reference standard. 5 For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1 04"Selection Options"and 1 07 "Substitution Procedures" 7 For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer orOwner C Samples 1 Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1 02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper 3 Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification,one of which will be retained by the Engineer 4 Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications.r 1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCEDATA , A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting,(finishing, and maintenance.' B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1 02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers'instructions and Contract Documents. 1.7 , MANUFACTURER'SCERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1 02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 10/2017 01350-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting feference data,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer 1.8 CONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—ConstructionPhotographs. 1 Prints. Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 set of prints directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs One set of prints shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS 1 Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs May be stored on electronic media(CD-ROM or flash drive) 3 The photographs shall show a. Date photographs were taken b. An index of the photo will be provided which will contain the location of the photograph, house number and street name. 4 Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b Yards (near, side and far side ofstreet) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway;curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features (yard lights,shrubs,fences,trees,etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS 1 On completion of construction,provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO 1, T02, T03,etc. 10/2017 01350-6 of 7 I CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review B Contractor's Certification,as described in this Section, 1 02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each designmix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 10/2017 01350-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications 1 Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals , J 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section; Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in r accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two (2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7) days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment.-' G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the,Project Site will beleft. H With each submittal, include photographic negatives m protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 10/2017 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, andquality 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 - PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs;shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph. 1 Job number 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3 Location of the photograph,house number and street,along with the project number C Indicate the condition of the following. 1 Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards(near side and far side ofstreet). 3 House-walk and sidewalk. 4 Curb 5 Area between walk and curb 6. Particular features(yard lights,shrubs,fence,trees,etc.). 7 Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction ofshot on a key plan of the Project Site D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, `shrubs andgrass. E Identify each photograph with an index document with the following information. 1 Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographeris used) 3 Name of the Contractor 4 Date the photograph was taken. 5 Photographs and index should correspond for easy access andviewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work,take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 10/2017 01380-2 of 3 J ' CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.2 POST-CONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work, take photographs from corresponding vantage points and,direction of shots. 3.3 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 10/2017 01380-3 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERA'L 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B , References to Technical Specifications None 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444"North Capitol Street,N W Washington,DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute PO Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit,MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957E Street,N W Washington,DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park,MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue,Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street,N W Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York,NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York,NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street,N W Washington,DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street,N W Washington,DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia,PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda,MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society PO Box 35104 Miami,FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 , CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS 1 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue,N W Washington, DC 20036 CRD U S.A. Corps of Engineers ' Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains,NY 10604 FDA U.S Food and Drug Administration _ 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville,MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S W Washington,DC 20406 ICEA ' Insulated Cable Engineer Association P O Box 440 S Yarmouth,MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane PO Box 1331 Piscataway,NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S W Washington,DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P 0 Box 986 Katy,TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 2101 L Street,N W., Suite 300 Washington,DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park,P 0 Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S.Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington,DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie,IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago,IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh,PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P 0 Box 13087 Austin,TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East l lth Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic"Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook,IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 ' 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement,Institute r 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P 0 Box 12157 Austin,TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 1 ) 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 C CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY'CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 1.2 - SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required byindividual Technical Specifications. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical-Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training,test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 r 01430- 1 of 2 J , CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The,representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION /- 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 ' 1 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests,,and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,tools,and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services.Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used, )1 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 09/2009 01440- 1 of 1 CITY OFPEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications. 1 Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards 1 American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT 1 � A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of ContractDocuments. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoids delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory,with prior approval of Owner,to perform the following: 1 Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitarysewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete,asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner 3 Tests required to,establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet densityrequirements. 4 Cores to test for thickness. 5 Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of ContractDocuments. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.3 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratoryto the Contractor and Project Manager 1.4 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor p D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to-laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested,to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for 1 Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3 Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his ownpurposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.1 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION r , � I - 04/2008 01450-3 of 3. CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards 1 Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) Z 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%) of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable 1 Schedule of Values (Section 01350—Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program (Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3 Construction Schedule (Section 01350—Submittals) 4 Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5 Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s) (Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6 Installation and acceptance of Field Office (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7 Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable. 1 Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 2. Laptop Computer(Section 00800—Special Conditions of Agreement) D Payment for 15%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. 09/2012 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as-stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s)per Section 01580 The name, address and contact information of the'general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described iri Section 01580,part 1 03.,D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer r END OF SECTION C � 09/2012 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OFPEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards 1 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation, including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans,provision of traffic control devices, and provision of _ equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D - Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.4 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified,use only Flaggers who are off-duty,regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations 1 Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly 3 Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehiculartraffic lanes and walks. 4 Where construction equipment may intermittentlyencroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5 Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehiculartraffic around the work site. 7 When requested by Owner C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for ally damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS, SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires, that,public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7.00 a.m.to 9.00 a.m.and 4.00 p.m.to 6.00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all,times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets 1 Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations.Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking,and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parkmgon or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.2 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.3 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes`designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.4 ' TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.5 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats,angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed. 1 On an existing bus'route; 2. When more than five percent of dailytraffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic, 3 When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge,or 4 When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days C Install bridging to operate with,minimum noise. D Adequatelyshore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL I Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B- References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation 3 Section 01600—Materials&Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid'Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section-under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners, along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information. 1 Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3 Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 2.0, PRODUCTS - Not Used 07/2006 i 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material.\When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location dr locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material. Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer C Pipe culvert:Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer F When temporary, on-site storage 'of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials&Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans,dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. B Off-site disposal is the responsibility-of the Contractor C Sediment to be,placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL,WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble, broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1 03D 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 \ I CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis,such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way END OF SECTION r 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 01563 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 10 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage 1 Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing or bolting. 3 Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4 Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5 Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6 Damage from lack of water due to a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7 Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete,plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8 Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees,other than those designated for removal,are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula. 0 7854 x D2 x $10 00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk,measured 12 inches above grade. B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester 02/2013 01563- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue,free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D Temporary Barrier Fence. Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed,perform the following. 1 Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed.Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3 Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below C For trees or shrubs to remain,perform the following. 1 Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary a. Trees'and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b Cut limbs at branch collar No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will;be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3 Preyent damage or compaction of root zone(area inside dripline)by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4 Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. - a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b This watering shall consist of saturating soils, at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5 Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems'while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6 At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission,trees and L shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS ' A Protection of tree's or shrubs in open area. 1 Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet minimum above ground. 3 For trees or shrubs in paved areas,use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4 Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1 ' Wrap trunk with layer of burlap 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's(5-foot to 6-foot lengths)vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3 Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. C 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted'for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1 Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner,have become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced,the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year 3 Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4 Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION-SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 -Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current,payment will be made by change order C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer,at no additional\cost to the City If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction.Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker Experienced as a professional sign company D Sign Placement:Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1 A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects Provide one project identification sign. 3 Multiple Sites. Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4 Sign Relocation.As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction. Post-mounted signs are preferred, but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 -Submittal Procedures. B I Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing- All sign materials shall be new 1 Sign Posts Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing- 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3 Skid Members. 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4 Fasteners a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match signbackground B. Sign and Sign Header Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints, do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers. White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gldss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 L \ 1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members wl}ite on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D Colors Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1 03 or this Section.Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D If mounted on posts? sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing,grade for mounting of the sign and header E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF BEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01'566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.3 PRODUCTS A Products. Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erectign of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION •l A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor 1.5 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storagespace. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1 Work of other contractors or the Owner 2. Limitations of storage space.- 3 Availability of equipment and personnel for handlingproducts. 4 Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment toassure 1 Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3 Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4 Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner,by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping,marring,or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending oroverstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles:Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.7 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control.storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 C CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner) to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the ProjectManager F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is notadequate.' G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the ProjectManager H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers'unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION r � 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 1 � CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process. Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.4 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products. Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in'the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved" Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal" Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility- To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer,make, or source. Where more, than one choice is available as. a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. C B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the-Engineer, determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.6 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly,to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner 1.7 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalencyas related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information. 1 Complete\data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and - test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was usedand date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3 For construction methods a. Detailed description of proposed method. b Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4 Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5 Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any 7 Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION l i r 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING J t 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A - Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and referencepoints. C References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is acomponent. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section'01350— Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.6 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.7 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners,prior to starting site work.Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged, Control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.8 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering surveypractices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations, lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work.Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means 1 Site improvements including pavements, stakes for grading; fill andtopsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid,or axis for structures. 3 Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.4 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 3 02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications, Accessible" r B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files, racks, and securestorage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document"PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large,printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for in§pection byEngineer 1.5 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions,including: 1 Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3 Field changes of dimension and detail. - 4 Changes made by modifications. 5 Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set,provided by Engineer 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 i 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ` I Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data,warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready,for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record - Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new,items will be addressed during warrantyperiod. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General ' Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas; rake clean landscapedsurfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.7 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B ' Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover 2 C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1 Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1 09 "Substantially Completed" 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work,the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. i END OF SECTION v 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS _ DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION' iJ Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01200—Measurement and PaymentProcedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3 Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4 Section 01500—Temporary Facilities andControls 5 Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill and EmbankmentMaterial 6. ' Section 02330—Embankment 7 Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises G (Referenced Standards 1 American Society for Testing and'Materials(AS TM) a. ASTM D 4318,"Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is acomponent. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and PaymentProcedures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 07/2006 , 02200- 1 of 4 1 CITY OF PEARLAND r SITE PREPARATION 1.4 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.5 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in ' conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION ,3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1 On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove- stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots,to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction,remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3 Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are'to be covered by at least 3 feet ofembankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,unless further excavation Or earthwork is indicated. 1 Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing,blading, and grading so that prepared area is free of holes,unplanned ditches,abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours,,and preserve drainage of area. 1 Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage,except in areas to be immediately excavated 07/2006 02200-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.2 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating andstockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping. 1 Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3 Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4 Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying,sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter,weeds,roots, leaves, and debris. 5 Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main rootsystem. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1 Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surfacewater 3 Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4 Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceedmg 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.3 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut,remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitablefor subsequent construction. B - Material Used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.4 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. B When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. C Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.5 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 07/2006 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. L END OF SECTION r 07/2006 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF-PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and basecourses. C Removing concrete curbs,concrete curb and gutters,sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood,plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry,etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01200—Measurement and PaymentProcedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3 Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4 Section 01100—Summary of Work 5 Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use.of Premises 7 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless,indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for whicli this Work is a component. If indicated as a Bid Item,measurement will be as follows 1 Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. - 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3 Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 04/2008 02220- 1 of 5 r ` CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4 Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5 Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7 Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9 Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and PaymentProcedures. - 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities, Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval.Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. A E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.4 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shormg necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 04/2008 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION • 1.5 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Material's and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition,handling and storage.Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse,or salvage become the propertyof the Contractor 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated onPlans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section,1 03"Submittals' B _ Use of a"drop hammer"must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition,make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated fordemolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications,pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is.necessary 04/2008 02220-3 of 5 1 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in adcordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.3 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water, chemical,gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be (altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For _ piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonrybulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switcligear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct,conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow contmued operation'of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 04/2008 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry-to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicablecodes. 3.5 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. J � B Remove from the site all items contained in or,upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. f END OF SECTION r 04/2008 02220-5 of 5 CITY OFPEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING Section 02931 LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing all plants and trees, labor, equipment, appliances and materials for landscape and tree planting. Rough and finish grading is part of the landscape work. B References to Technical Specifications 1 Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3 Section 02910—Topsoil 4 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 5 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Landscape Planting is on a Lump,Sum. B Payment for Tree Planting is on lump sum basis for each tree planted. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of.Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit samples of the plants and grasses to be used for approval prior to installation. Inspection will be done on the project site. - C Provide materials from the same source and of the same quality and variety as those inspected and approved. D Soils and/or compost materials must be approved at their source prior to delivery 1.04 REFERENCES A ANSI Z 60 1 -Nursery Stock. B Federal Specification Q-P-166E-Peat,Moss,Peat,Humus, and Peat,Reed-Sedge. 1.05 SCHEDULE A The plant schedule gives quantities, scientific names, common names, sizes, and special remarks. • 12/2014 02931 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND , LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B The plant list conforms with Standardized Plant Names, 1942,and American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1949, revised April 14, 2014, as prepared by the American Joint , Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature and the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. C In case of discrepancies between the plant list and drawings, the working drawings shall govern. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Pack all plant material to provide protection against damage from wind, weather or 'other possible_sources. Tie plants to prevent whipping when shipment is made by truck. B When shipment is made by rail,pack plants and ventilate cars as required to prevent sweating. C Provide a platform from all B&B root balls over 24 inches in diameter D Store plants on the site as directed. E Spray with anti-transpirant at time of delivery in warm season months. Apply at rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Ship trees with Certificates of Inspection as required by governing authorities. Label each tree'and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. G Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at Site. H Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Use protective covering during delivery 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS 5 A Substitution of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit cost. B Substitution of an alternate species may be accepted upon written approval from the Engineer 1 08 ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL A There will be no partial acceptance of grasses. 12/2014 02931 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B Upon Contractor's request,final approval will be made within 15 working days of date of notice to the Engineer if contracted work has been satisfactorily completed. C Final approval of grasses will be given when the following conditions are met: , 1 There are no bare spots larger than 9 inches square. 2. The total area of bare spots does not exceed 5 percent of the entire grass area. 1.09 WARRANTY A Provide 1-year warranty on all plants and grasses. The warranty period commences after final completion. B Replace plants that fail during the warranty period according to the specifications governing the original plants. C Periodically inspect plants for proper watering and spraying,during warranty period. D Damage caused by natural hazards such as hail,high winds or storm is not covered by the warranty E Plant materials and grasses which die due to normal insects or diseases are included in the warranty F Existing in situ plant material required to be moved on the site will be protected under the warranty G Contractor shall warrant trees against defects,including death,unsatisfactory growth,or loss of shape due to improper pruning,maintenance,or weather conditions,for 1 year after completion of planting. Contractor shall plumb leaning trees during warranty period. H Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and replace trees which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period,or if approved by the Engineer, extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. 1.10 SOIL ANALYSIS A Submit for approval an analysis of all soils obtained from off-site sources prior to delivery B Analysis of existing soil is not required. 1.11 PLANT CERTIFICATES A Submit inspection certificates approved by the Engineer as required by law with the invoice for each shipment or order of stock: 1 Submit certificates to the Engineer for review in ample time to be reviewed and meet installation schedule. 12/2014 - 02931 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Take all reasonable precautions to prevent injury to people and to avoid damage to existing structures,plants and grasses Keep the area free of hazardous obstructions. B Construct barricades where necessary for the protection of persons and property Mark all barricades with red and white paint and with red reflectors. Erect barricades in the following locations 1 Areas dangerous to workmen and passersby 2. Along adjoining property that requires protection. 3 Across streets and walks that are temporarily closed or rerouted. 4 Around plants and trees to be protected. C Excavations larger than 1 foot deep and 1 foot wide must be covered when not attended. D Existing trees,which may be subject to damage must be protected by fencing or boxing. E During the course of planting operations,protect all installed plants and lawns from damage. If heavy equipment or materials must be moved across lawns,use planks or pontoons to protect the turf. Similarly protect walks across which heavy equipment must pass. 113 DEFINITIONS A In situ refers to any soil which-is existing land in place on the project site at the time landscape work commences. B Establishment period refers to a period of 45 days after installation during which time 5 percent of the construction costs will be withheld. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Landscaper shall be a firm specializing in landscape and planting work. B Do not make substitutions of approved trees unless approved in writing by the Engineer If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non- availability together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit price. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil. Conform to requirements of Section 02910 -Topsoil. B Peat moss, bark, and fertilizer Use material recommended by nursery for establishment of healthy stock after replanting. Moss shall conform to requirements of Federal Specification Q-P-166E. 12/2014 02931 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.02 FERTILIZER A Provide an inorganic commercial fertilizer which is uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. 1 For lawns. 12-24-12. 2 For ground cover areas,shrub beds and tree holes 20-10-5(Except for Genus Pyrus(Pear). 2.03 ADDITIVES A Adjustment of pH. For topsoil to attain the specified pH level, furnish raw, ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85 percent calcium carbonate of which 50 percent will pass through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent through a 70-mesh sieve. Wait 2 months after planting before application of fertilizer 1 following table is a guideline to establish the pounds of limestone needed per) 1000 square feet of turf LIMESTONE NEEDED PER 1000 SQUARE FEET SOIL PH SANDS,LOAMY SANDS SANDY LOAM CLAY LOAM,CLAY >6 0 0 0 0 5 1 - 6 0 50 75 100 , <5 0 100 125 175 B Humus. Provide a rich humus material free of sticks, stones, weedy roots, or other foreign matter Humus must have ample water holding capacity and plant food retention. Use a humus with a dark brown to black color C Dressing Mulch. Provide pine or redwood bark that is evenly shredded,consisting of 90 percent organic matter, brown in color, and free of harmful 'minerals. Maximum particle size not to exceed 3 inches in diameter D Sharp Sand. Obtain clean sharp sand of hard durable grains, free from dirt, organic matter or other impurities. Use sand with a grade between 0 05 mm and 2 mm. E Concrete Gravel. Provide clean, crushed stone consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft friable, thin or laminated pieces Use gravel which conforms to ASTM C 33 The sieve size will be 3/4 inch, 90 to 100 percent passing. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS A Root Ball Anchors 1 Duck bills will be used to secure the root ball anchors. B , Edging: 12/2014 02931 -5 of 15 l , 1 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1 Provide 1/2-inch x 4 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber headerboard. 2. Provide 1 inch x 2 inches x 12 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber stakes. C Cloth for Balling Trees. Use burlap of jute weighing at least 7.2 ounces per square yard. Secure balled plants with 2-ply twine made of jute. D Paper for Wrapping Trees. Use first quality, 4-inch-wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having'qualities to resist insect infestation. E Materials for Flagging Trees 1 Mark guyed trees with surveyors white plastic tape 2. Use/surveyors plastic tape for marking as follows. a. Red to be removed. b Yellow to be transplanted. c. Green to remain. d. Blue to identify special handling. F Labels. Legibly label plants with durable labels that identify the plant by scientific and common name Use waterproof ink. G Tree Seal. All pruning cuts,bruises,or scars over 3/4 inch in diameter on trees will be treated with a commercial tree wound dressing. H Polyethylene. Use virgin base,resin blended polyethylene sheeting with carbon black concentrate of 2.5 percent. 2.05 SPRAYS A Sterilization. 1 Use approved solution of Dyclomec 4G, or equal, for areas to be planted. 2. Use Pramitol, or equal, for areas to be paved. ' B Herbicides 1 Use an approved systemic non-selective,post emergent herbicide on specified areas to kill all vegetation. 2. Use Confront, or equal,for general control of broadleaf weeds in lawns. 3 Use Preemerg,Eptam,Dryclomec, or equal for ground cover 4 Use an approved pre-emergent to control seed germination in specified areas. C Antitranspirant: 1 Use approved antitranspirant for all'plant material that is stored and/or heeled- in on the site. 2. Use approved antitranspirant on all planted trees and shrubs. D Root Stimulant. Use approved root stimulant on all newly planted trees,shrubs,vines and/or ground cover areas. i 12/2014 02931 -6 of 15 ti CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.06 PLANT CHARACTERISTICS A Provide plants which are true to type and name,and typical of their species or variety Plants must have a normal, well-developed branch structure, with a vigorous root system, and must be generally sound and healthy Use plants'which are free from , defects, including: 1 Disfiguring knots. 2 Sun scald. 3 Injuries. 4 Bark abrasions. 5 Plant diseases. 6 Insect eggs. 7 Borers. 8 Infestations. B Select well-formed plants balanced between height and spread typical of the species or variety with branches in normal position. Heading back plants to meet size limits will not be permitted. C Unless otherwise specified, all plants will be nursery grown and at least twice transplanted. Use plants which have been growing under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least 2 years prior to the date of the contract. Recently stepped-up plants will not be acceptable. All B&B or bare root plants must be freshly dug; heeled-in or cold storage plants will not be accepted. D Balled,bare root,and container-grown plants will conform to the definitions given in American Standards for Nursery Stock. E No tree will be accepted which has had leaders cut or damaged, or which has a thin, weak trunk and/or poorly formed tops. F Regardless of sample selection, a plant may be rejected at the site by the Engineer 2.07 NURSERY STOCK A Deciduous Trees. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader The crown must be in good overall proportion to the entire height of the tree. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line will be furnish. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk. 1 For trees up to 4 inches in diameter,measure caliper 6 inches above ground. 2." For trunks larger than 4 inches,measure caliper 12 inches above ground. B Evergreen Trees. Form of the top will be typical of the species and not unnaturally sheared or color-treated. Measure by average caliper Caliper will be taken 6 inches above the ground on trees up to 4 inches in diameter and 12 inches above the ground on trees larger than 4 inches. 12/2014 02931 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Vines and Ground Cover Provide plants which are container-grown for sufficient time to ensure adequate root-growth to hold the soil in place and retain the original shape when removed from the container 2.08 FIELD-COLLECTED PLANTS A Field-collected plants must be grown in favorable locations that ensure fibrous roots and vigorous growth. Such plants will be selected on site by the Landscape architect. B Provide balls at least 1/3 greater in diameter than those specified for nursery stock. C If dug in dormant season and bare root is acceptable, the spread of roots must be at least 1/3 greater than the spread of roots for bare root nursery stock. 2.09 SEED A Seasonal Limitations 1 Bermuda. a. Hulled seeds may be planted between October and March. b Unhulled seeds may be planted between April and September 2. Rye a. Plant between October and February B Bermuda. Provide common Bermuda seed that is extra-fancy, treated, lawn type. Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis,name of vendor and germination test results. Wet,moldy,or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. C Rye. Deliver annual Winter Rye seed in original unopened containers. Seed must be fresh, clean, and mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. 2.10 HYDROMULCH A Provide hydromulch seeding as noted in Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. 2.11 GRASS A Obtain certified sod from an approved source. B Provide material which is true to type and name,and is typical of the species or variety C Delivery. 1 Identify and tag sods with correct scientific and common name for each species. 2. Do not deliver more sods than can be planted within 8 hours. 3 Transport and deliver sods in/on pallets. 4 Protect sods against dehydration, overheating or contamination during transportation and delivery 12/2014 02931 -8of15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 5 Cover unplanted sods with moistened burlap to prevent dehydration or overheating while awaiting installation. 6. Sods must be harvested within 12 hours of planting and arrive at the project site in a moist condition. D Product 1 Material to be uniform in color, leaf texture and density 2. Material to be graded No 1, or better 3 Uniform mowed height at time of harvesting material. 1-1/2 inches. 4 Inspected and certified free of diseases,nematodes,and undesirable insects by authorized representative of State Department of Agriculture. 5 Material will not be acceptable if it contains any quack grass, Johnson grass, poison ivy,nut grass,thistle, common bent grass,wild garlic,mornmg_glory, perennial sorrell, or brome grass. 6 Turf will be considered weed free when found to contain less than 1 percent of dandelion,jimson weed,mustard, chickweed,per 100 square feet. 2.12 TREES A Provide container grown trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the entire height of tree with branching configuration as recommended by ANSI Z60 1 for type and species specified. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line shall be furnished. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk as follows 1 For trunks up to 4 inches or less in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above top of root ball. 2. For trunks more than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above top of root ball. 3 Caliper measurements shall be by diameter tape measure. Indicated calipers on plans are minimum. Averaging of plant calibers will not be allowed. B Trees shall conform to following requirements. 1 Healthy,vigorous`stock, grown in a recognized nursery 2. Free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as knots, sun- scald, injuries, abrasions, disfigurement, or borers and infestations. 2.13 WATER A Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Notify Engineer, prior to installation, of location where trees that have been selected for planting may be inspected. Plant material will be inspected for compliance with following requirements. r 1 Genus, species,variety, size and quality 2. Size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects. 12/2014 02931 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.15 WORK CONDITIONS iA Site Availability Begin no landscape work where conflicting site work is incomplete or as otherwise directed by the Engineer B Weather Restrictions. Stop all work during inclement weather such as drought,high winds, excessive rain, extreme heat, cold, or freeze. Obtain authorization before resuming work. 2.16 PLANTING PROCEDURES A Temporary Nursery A temporary nursery may be used to store plants, but no more- ' than 5 days before planting. Keep plants well watered and protected. 1 Immediately upon delivery, heel-in balled and burlapped (B&B) plants and spray all plants with an antitranspirant. Apply spray from top to bottom. Thoroughly cover plants,but not to the point of run-off. Spray block units and not individual plants. Use a low-pressure„fine-mist applicator Spray at rates recommended in the,manufacturer's directions 2. Handle all balled and burlapped plants by the ball only 3 Upon delivery, immediately heel-in bare root plants. Open bundles, separate plants, set roots in trenches, and cover with topsoil. Water plants with an approved root stimulant containing vitamin B 4 Handle container plants by the container 5 Handle ground cover plants in flats Pack flats tightly together and sprinkle plants everyday 6 Special plants so designated must be kept in an approved enclosure or planted the day-of delivery 7 Store soils and additives on approved platforms. B Digging and Handling. 1 The actual planting operation must proceed without delay and in a manner to avoid undue drying of the in-situ soil or roots because of exposure to air and sun. Keep an ample supply of sawdust available to cover the roots of B&B stock arriving from the storage nursery Keep the roots well covered and moist until the plants can be placed in the final location and permanently planted. 2. Handle all plant stock with care to prevent injuries to the trunk,branches and roots. 3 Dig bare root plants when fully dormant. Keep all of the root system intact;do not prune the root system. However, any roots that are broken, crushed, or bruised must be cleanly cut back to sound wood. Make the cut on an angle so that the exposed end faces downward. Seal any cut root exceeding 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. 4 Balled and burlapped plants must have the root system encased in a firm,solid ball of natural earth,wrapped in burlap and tightly bound. Each ball must be of sufficient size to encompass all the fibrous feeding roots and not smaller than required by American Standards for Nursery Stock. The ball must remain firm and compact throughout the planting operations. 12/2014 02931 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 30 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A Schedule work so that planting can proceed rapidly as portions of site become available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise approved by Engineer iri writing. If planting of trees occurs after seeding work,protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from tree planting operations. B Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify Engineer before proceeding with Work. Trees shall be staked and approved by Engineer prior to planting. C Existing Trees 1 Protection. Protect tops,trunks and roots of trees to remain on the site. Before starting work, box, fence or otherwise protect trees subject to construction damage. Remove boxing when directed. Permit no stockpiles of heavy equipment within the branch spread of trees. 2. Removal Remove trees marked for removal. Do not remove any tree without proper authorization. Stumps within 36 inches of final grade must also be removed. 3 Pruning and Surgery. Cut and trim trees only as directed, do not cut any tree without proper authorization. Trim existing trees of dead or diseased limbs. Cut limbs close to the trunk. Cover cuts over 3/4 inch-in diameter with an approved tree would dressing. D Grading Around Trees. As required,fill or grade within the branch spread of trees to remain, observing the following requirements. 1 For trenching beneath trees, tunnel under the tree roots with careful hand ° digging. Where possible, avoid cutting or injuring roots. 2. Do not raise or lower the grade around an existing tree in any way unless so directed. E Placing Topsoil. 1 Disk,drag,harrow,or handrake subgrade. Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 1- 1/2 inches. Before placing topsoil, rake the subsoil surface clear of stones, wood,rubbish and other debris. Place no topsoil until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 2. Spread,rake, and compact topsoil to form a layer with a minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas.and 6 inches in shrub areas. Place topsoil to conform to finished gradients as shown on the grading plan. 3 Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. t I 12/2014 02931 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING F In Situ Soil Preparation. 1 Cross-till in two directions all existing soil in designated areas to be planted,as follows. a. In lawn areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. b In shrub areas to a minimum depth of 10 inches. 2. Evenly broadcast fertilizers and soil additives and thoroughly work into soil. a. Smooth all tilled and amended areas to establish a rough gradient: b Deeply irrigate all tilled and amended areas to thoroughly wet soil particles and promote settlement. c. After a settlement period of not less than 5 days,and before proceeding with any planting, smooth and rake as necessary to establish finish gradient as required. 3 In all areas which have been utilized for parking, storage or construction lots 1 and/or where heavy equipment has been used, cross-rip the entire compacted areas in two directions to a depth of 10 inches before tilling and amending the soil as specified. A heavy float or drag harrow should be used to smooth all surface areas. a. Verify location of all underground utilities before ripping. ' b Ripping teeth should not be set at more than 10-inch spacing. G Fertilizer Evenly broadcast and work fertilizer into soil at the following rates 1 Lawns. 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. 2. Ground Cover, Shrub,and Tree Areas 1-1/2 N pound's per 1000 square feet. H Additives 1 Humus. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 2. Sharp Sand. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 3 Concrete Gravel. Utilize as a drainage course as shown on construction drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other C extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B Strip and utilize 4-inch layer of top soil,placed on esplanades under Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding, for planting soil mixture. C Mix recommended soil amendments with topsoil at following rates. 1 Top soil. 50 percent. 2. Peat moss 25,percent. 3 Well rotted Bark: 25 percent. 4 Fertilizer Rate recommended by nursery D Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within 48 hours, unless otherwise directed. 12/2014 02931 - 12 of 15 r , CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING E Incorporate amendments into the soil as a part of the soil preparation process prior to fine grading,fertilizing,and planting. Broadcast or spread amendments evenly at the specified rate over the planting area. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into the top 3 or 4 inches of soil until amendments are pulverized and have become a homogeneous layer of topsoil ready for planting. 3.03 PLANTING A Excavate pits, beds, or trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation raised a minimum of 6 inches at center for proper drainage. Provide following minimum widths 1 15-gallon containers or larger,2 feet wider than diameter of root ball. 2. 1-and 5-gallon containers, 6 inches'wider than diameter of root ball. B When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify the Engineer of such conditions before planting. C Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after deliver, set trees and shrubs m shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap, or other acceptable means of retaining moisture, and water as needed. D Set root ball on undisturbed soil in center of pit or trench and plumb plant. Place plants at such a level that, after settlement, a natural relationship of plant crown with ground surface will'be established. E When set,place additional backfill around base and sides of ball,and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. F Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide no more than 4-inch thickness of mulch,work into top of backfill,and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Cover entire root ball. G Prune, thin out and shape trees in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height andispread. Unless otherwise directed in writing, do not cut tree,leaders, and remove only injured and dead branches from flowering trees. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures. I Anchor root ball immediately after planting. 12/2014 02931 - 13 of 15 CITY OFPEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING J Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. 3.04 PLANTING GRASS A Preparation. Prepare imported topsoil and/or in-situ,soil. Hand rake to remove all sticks, stones and clods larger than 1 inch. Apply the final grade but do not mechanically compact the soil. B Seed. 1 Evenly broadcast seed specified in 2.09 at the following rates a. Bermuda. 1 pound per 1000 square feet b Rye 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Roll the entire seeded area in two directions with a dry/weighted roller 3 Evenly top dress the entire seeded area with an approved sterilized commercial steer manure. Apply at 2 cubic feet per 100 square feet. 4 Lightly but thoroughly sprinkle the entire seeded area with water after top dress application. C Sod. 1 Use Bermuda,Buffalo, or St.Augustine sod in accordance with 2.11A. 2. Prepare soil in accordance with 3 03, 3 Apply eptam (or approved equal) to all areas to be sodded. Follow, manufacturer's recommended rates and apply during soil preparation period. 4 Lay sod in a running bond pattern. Pieces should be consistently cut with joints tightly butted together Water the in-place sod liberally and roll it in two direction with a heavy roller Areas/not level due to fluctuations in the sod depth should be covered and leveled with a 50/50 mix of sharp sand and topsoil. Fertilize in 6 weeks as directed by landscape Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A The Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during progress of Work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these Specifications will be rejected. B An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of the 12 month maintenance period. Additional inspections will be conducted for , extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1 07B 3.06 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 12 months after completion of planting. B Water trees to full depth a minimum of once each week, or as required to maintain a healthy vigorous growth. r 12/2014 02931 - 14of15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Prune, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore-planting saucers. Tighten and repair rootball anchors, and reset trees and shrubs to properl grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A During planting work,keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations. Maintain 'protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace damaged planting work as directed by the Engineer C Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01562— Waste Material Disposal. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be permitted. END OF SECTION • 12/2014 02931 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND VIVDS REMOVAL SECTION 16-601 VIDEO IMAGING VEHICLE DETECTION SYSTEM (VIVDS) REMOVAL 1.0; Vehicle Imaging Video Detection System (VIVDS) Removal 1.1.1 Contractor will remove existing video detection camera system, including mast arm mounted Video Cameras,Videb/Power Cable and video processing units in the traffic signal cabinet. System may be either ITERIS or Trafficware video detection, and the number of parts may differ between the two systems. 1.1.2 At minimum, one (1) pull tape shall be installed from each mast arm back to the traffic signal cabinet. 1.1.3 Completion of the work will present a neat, workmanlike, and finished appearance 1.1.4 Maintain safe construction practices during removal 1.1.5 Disconnect and, isolate any existing electrical power supply before removal of existing field equipment. 1.1.6 Use care to prevent damage to any support structures Any equipment or structure damaged or lost must be replaced by the Contractor (with items approved by the City) at no cost to the City 1.1.7 Coordinate with the City to deliver all removed VIVDS components. 1.1.8 The Contractor is fully responsible for any removed equipment until released by the City 1 ` 1 CITY OF PEARLAND REMOVE AND REPLACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET I SECTION 16-602 REMOVE AND REPLACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET 1.0 Remove And Replace Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet 1.1 Contractor will remove existing traffic signal controller cabinet. 1.2 Contractor to provide temporary stop signs for all approaches and have uniformed traffic control officers present during any traffic signal down time This will be included in the bid price for this item. 1.3 Completion of the' work will present a neat, workmanlike, and finished appearance 1.4 Maintain safe construction practices during removal Disconnect and isolate any existing electrical power supply before removal of existing traffic signal controller cabinet. 1.5 Use care to prevent damage to any support structures Any equipment or structure damaged or lost must be replaced by the Contractor (with items approved by the City) at no cost to the City 1.6 Maintain the integrity of the existing traffic signal controller foundation,conduit, cable, ground boxes and other traffic signal related equipment. Any items damaged must be replaced by the Contractor (with items approved by the City) at no cost to the City 1.7 Coordinate with the City to deliver all removed traffic signal controller cabinet components. The Contractor is fully responsible for any removed equipment until released by the City 1.8 ' Provide a full-time qualified traffic signal technician responsible for installing, 1 - maintaining,or replacing traffic signal devices. ^ r 1.9 Contractor to refer to City of Pearland equipment list for traffic signal components prior to ordering. Cabinet and equipment must be approved by City of Pearland traffic staff prior to ordering. Payment for this item is for an all inclusive and operating traffic signal system including all standard traffic controller cabinet components capable of operating vehicle signal heads, pedestrian signal heads,vehicle detection, illumination and communications. 1.10 Traffic signal controller cabinet to be NEMA P-68(see Attachment 02) CITY OF PEARLAND REMOVE AND REPLACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET 1.11 Contractor to modify existing traffic signal controller cabinet foundations (if needed)to be sufficient size to accommodate all dimensions of proposed-traffic signal controller cabinet. Minimum size is 60"x 33" 1.12 Traffic signal equipment includes but is not limited to • EDI MMU-16LEIP • Trafficware Series 900 controller • Trafficware P52D power supply J CITY OF PEARLAND VEHICLE DETECTION PURCHASE SECTION 16-603 VEHICLE DETECTION PURCHASE 1 1 Gridsmart Vehicle Detection Equipment Purchase 1 1 1 Contractor will furnish all Gridsmart equipment required for install per Attachment 03' 1 1.2 All attachment hardware, cable, conduit, grouted boxes and other items required for a complete and working installation will be included in the —, price and will not be paid for separately , CITY OF PEARL-AND VEHICLE DETECTION INSTALLATION SECTION 16-604 VEHICLE DETECTION INSTALLATION 1.0 Vehicle Detection System Installation 1 1 Contractor will be required to install, set up, and ensure proper calibration of all components required for the Gridsmart Vehicle Detection System 1.2 Installation of all Signal Cabinet mounted hardware per manufacture's specification 1.3 Installation of all mast arm mounted hardware per manufacture's specification 14 Vendor to provide all tools, labor, and cabling necessary for installation 1.5 All network cable connecting the camera to the signal cabinet shall be shielded cable meeting manufacture's recommended specifications. n CITY OF PEARLAND PAN-TILT-ZOOM CAMERA INSTALLATION , SECTION 16-605 PAN-TILT-ZOOM CAMERA INSTALLATION t , 1.0 Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ)Camera Installation 1.1 Contractor to install Pan-Tilt-Zoom camera on the traffic Signal Pole closest to the signal cabinet. Camera and mounting hardware will be supplied by the contractor 1.2 Contractor will provide all tools, power and network cable to complete the installation 1.3 Contractor will coordinate with City's IT representative to finalize installation and ensure proper function prior to submitting for payment. 1.4 Please see Attachment 04 for cut sheets. , l I � CITY OF PEARLAND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT INSTALLATION n SECTION 16-606 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT INSTALLATION 1.0 Wireless Access Point Installation 1.1 Contractor to install Wireless Access Point on the Mast arm of the traffic Signal Pole closest to the signal cabinet. Wireless Access Point and mounting hardware will be supplied by the Contractor l 1.2 Contractor will provide all tools, power and network cable to complete the installation 1.3 Contractor will coordinate with City's IT representative to finalize installation and ensure proper function prior,to submitting for payment. 1.4 Please see Attachment 05 for cut sheets. CITY OF PEARLAND BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM INSTALLATION SECTION 16-607 BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 1.0 Battery Backup System 1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install a battery backup system as specifieid by the City(Alpha, FXM 1100). System shall include all components necessary for proper installation`(labor and materials) 1.2 Contractor to verify that battery backup system is the model installed inside of a standard traffic signal'cabinet. 1.3 More information can be found in Attachment 06. CITY OF PEARLAND RFID CABINET LOCK SECTION 16-608 / RFID CABINET LOCK 1.0 RFID Cabinet Lock 1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install an RFID cabinet lock as approved by the City System shall include all components necessary for proper installation 1.2 Please see Attachment 07 for cut sheets. ' P r / CITY OF PEARLAND CISCO SWITCH INSTALLATION SECTION 16-609 CISCO SWITCH INSTALLATION 1.0 Cisco Switch Installation 1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install a Cisco switch as specified by Attachment 08, 1.2 This shall include all components necessary for proper installation as directed by the City(labor and materials) S , n CITY OF PEARLAND l BBU Cabinet(Side Mounted) SECTION 16-610 BBU Cabinet(Side Mounted) 1.0 BBU Cabinet(Side Mounted) 1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install a BBU Cabinet(Side Mounted)as approved by the City Cabinet shall include all components necessary for proper installation (labor and materials) 1.2 Please see Attachment 09 for cut sheets. f I Attachment 01 Project Locations Sheet 1/5 � --.110111111 — tarnw 5^1 F, S'Sam Houston Pkwy 8 0 S Sam Houston-Pkw`Y W Sam Houston Tlw .1I — — --�-� fer- i- 4P 1 i/J �!.1 ;---1 _ _1 r I 7C H 03 -1 I ■ O 4. , _ i . rirl' I 00 \ ___t 1::: _ il o {U T -. T [1 11 m cn ,,Bluebonnet Dr ro (ems n . a V I' ii . W O . -< South Dr S.outh Dr F 417AI 0 y I ; il 41 FM`34 Sy-, i .. .... .... ... . ` I — — — N ( 4 .... ._ _ iC7' C22 / , 1 i ' ApObk o C II lix • Q`o .I' ,,,, .. PKWY • • • ',L =MCHA ek ,� ifky I I • SHADOW CR ill s g4„ ` ' IOP Clear Cr I l �.1 '''. ----,:\._f SHADOW CREEK PKWY —�' t , 4 s„, r D 4° -<, fi' W >- o I' t�` /Ai I i 477/ , I 416 -J e,' 0 0 1 i -40' A ibt 1 , ? 3 .v,... _COOP . , ._, , . „. 4. „.,, , , lik `� NT�sn Co u Ity Map Co nbu Fs CFty a5 Hou to*.::,.:;"Tex s.. '.�t"Cs. e,COIUNP)Esn,HERE yarmin,Foursquare,S Gra h,, eoTechnologe , 1;, 1111116.1 • I/ . 'Ili REC'� Bq Y. (61H E METI/WASrlO F PABP�lP�S, PS Census Bureau, USDA--- CITY OF PEARLAND i Cabinet Replacement and Detection Upgrade (*) f inch=1505feet Shadow Creek Parkway Traffic Signals Upgrade D4 4\I'PE4, 0 015 0.3 tia `,, mi V C Cabinet Replacement, PTZ and This product H for informational purposes and may not have been 1. Kingsley Drive (*2) 5.Business Center (*1) ♦ prepared for or be suitable for legal engineering or surveying DetectionUpgrade (*) F r a purposes It does not represent an on-the-groundproperty survey and 2 Reflection Bay (*2) 6 Market Place (*1) epresents onlyhe approximate relative location ofboundaries SH sr j8� 3 Trinity Bay (*1) 7 288 (*2) MAP PREPARED AUGUST 2022 CREATED WITH WEB PRINT TOOL 4. Kirby Drive (*2) ENTS-g t. IUGHES , IR . , .. ,.,.., . am , , / . i i 1 k / G -/• lf / RR '91' DISCOVERYBAY_DR0,14,11 "IP !,!, g —� A. a ay i/�, ��,4110* CZ7 of =: _ r' ,, „, ��i�d TRINITY—gq y Q7 , n .1 ,› 4P.-- ,. 74 9 , _, I ,,. , ro i t V/ 0 ffji I I 5 v 0' i 10. - . ci ) , . 4: I Ilk �o4 ,/ .ate; W Q- t Z O B J • Y xZ TRINITY_ / / m i.; r l RN' v / CO "� i W i v i < i `� U rr 41-' 0 El . /all. u) W , I(i •% Z . / rzgLEAR:LAKE-LOOPm/• / c9 E "� ', i \I / �ADWAY ST` / BROADWAY,ST _�� r' / _ . all , iiti RQAD_WAY_STli:i, A„ .....,„ 0 ,..t. / BRQQDWAY_S_T { i ,1 , i , ,._. , 7F if/ ., t. t. y g-,- A , , _____,...._ , .. . . -ittr ii:2: IIW / yFRN TRA�-�'� mn tos*tt; \yN,.J. F rz C x - � ,. . .. ft, Ili rIf N ii z_., [ , a S , _. m -- I 1 Esn Community Maps Contributors,City of Houston,HPB, exa Parrs& ilcie,CONA P,Esn,H.RE, ar in,Foursquare,SafeGraph,GeoT hnologies,Inc, / — METI USGS,EPA,NPS, S Cen$us�Bureau,USDA CITY OF PEARLAND 0 Cabinet Replacement and Detection Upgrade (*) linch=1505feet 0 015 0.3 Broadway Street Traffic Signals Upgrade o� 41 yfq� s° c mi 1 Shadow Ridge Lane (*1) 5 Shadow Creek H S (*2) Cabinet Replacement, PTZ and Detection Upgrade (*) EA(Z AN This product is for informational purposes end may not have been 2 Windward Bay Drive (*2) 6 Kirby Drive (*2) prepared fororbesutablefor legal,engineering or surveying purposes It does not represent an on-Me-ground survey and f A represents only the approximate relative location of properly boundaries 3 Kingsley Drive (*2) 7 Town Center (*2) S=. i8� 4 Halfmoon Bay Drive (*2) 8 Business Center (*2) ElDetection Upgrade only (*) CREA EDEWITHW BUPRINT TOOL 2022 Q 0111111. MIMI = MI 1III Wu a o �' o ,. .. IMMI 111111111 _, fMAGNOLIA:P_KWY,,\ MAGNOLIA:P_KWY 'I 11111111 MAGNO.LIA-P_KWYOIIIIIIMIIMIMIIIIIIIIII .v MI \ \ 111 iii \\----)\, 3 2 \\ ✓.^ a D m Z 1 r < Maws Creek -. m Z . iti 13 I r' � 19 � AIIIIIIIIII I MI \\ „;i' II IN.I1 ", 1 �\ • Q Cr) II 6.............................mommmomonnommie.4 1, I BAILEY:RD BAILEsY/RD \ - BAILEY ..millsollmimmo•••••""mil". _ d" AP 1r c Wendy Ln I 0 • D ,-n o — a NJ n Esri Community Mass Contributors,City of Houston,HPB,Texas Parks&Wildlife,CONANP,Esrl,HERE,Garmin,Foursquare,SafeGfaph;GeoTeehnologfes;-Inc, METI/NASA,USGS,EPA,NP ,US Census Bureau,USDA S7 CITY OF PEARLAND ,inch=1505feet Bailey Road Traffic Signals Upgrade E3 Detection Only (*) Pt 0 0.15 0.3 o mi 1 . Manvel Road/FM 1128 (*1 ) , v2 PEARLANDThis product is for informational purposes and may not have been 2 Harkey Road (*1 ) prepared.It or be surtable represent r legal engineering or surveying � purposes.It does not represent an on-the-ground survey and f x represents only the approximate relative location of properly boundaries 3. McLean Road (*1 ) sr. t9q MAP PREPARED AUGUST 2022 4. Veterans Drive (1 ) CREATED WITH WEB PRINT TOOL —E - t. Houstbrr TIw — S_Sam=Houston_E kwy_E — S-saa�n.�Lston-P_kwy-E Iwy Y — 8 8 t! Catherine 'i i^ / \ 1 45 Keen'ri , 3 1 r leer Creek -o ` Winerness(I, ' — . - ."' -- •• ayou m CathERan'ch ti / \yam / \?emvay Sd %:. ll .... ' Keegan \ r ,F o` 9e9 (;. O Wilderness \ ar iEcf-Cry c$' 9 \ \ / -z duo \a en O ��/, :0 ® > Ranch Creek Cir O 35 . .�. yc .r c ' — Bi �^ �� r 4 z O ��"� ; \ act d,p¢ �Q �'d s �0 a 1r m s d ' �,:p - V <' N. I1 6�`a Zap �� %o Bcd� G��r�°° a`�aaL. is i, ® I N� P. aO coofl „ BROO/(gfDE RD OKSIDE Lila St /I,- 0 0,,o�K, �. am ^E °�< J I 1 • o Astoria 6� ts a � S6,\\ � res Rd Nu hes Rd �� Memorial gm i my ti '? , 1 ��0 g ebud t-n eec Hermann .16 , P" 4 # ��' lk Sag a�� Southeast 4t:,,,e r �.. p►1CHARD: d /� ne Ln a° Hospital ""a 5agedOW � San Jacinto .,_ , q �. `- College-South .„, ,,,_0_,---:-... i ::: 0 . 42> ? , 0 ealir / S cc' rt, -=, -46 Ri '� :D t, .i p ♦ 4.1 .' , .-.Zile 4 0a yam° ioN ;74/1. V- 1. S ---<-' M .>, X i I ,,.. ? , or , Aso ".•' z I '-'1 - i 2 - 0 CI 41r4 ' .'' C I liii 1.1 2 1 r ›- 4 0 / .,, ,. \*1 I:: -I , . D r m W�RANGE_ST \, z ®Of 0:,, ',-- ''' 6�dc _ 7-- .„ ,.,_--- _ . � I Z is, , i • ® oH-i -t n I-1 �O N �0 �� ha�� i , , _ _ .. ____,,,„, /4 ,,.. _..., -I. , : 0P �� 40 4 ,,,.)s 0, 0 0 .9, E WALNUT ST eRO 42.0:1: 111 bit i. R� 1 B t�ADWAY=ST— _V_ r—� ti t v t _ APk, /1 � y ` ..\,,,,,,,/— „-..„ , w. ' ') • .1911111k 0 ,._. , ,, 4 -MyrtvP 0 zip, C;) ---- . -„-, 4111111ka. > #A. II _ 0 , ///// ___ _ ,------- ,..,.:,_ / AIWINP411, Alei/i0 it, Mow /77 L .:, , , , A ..‹ ,s, , ,. ....___ __ _ 0, \ i_ ,,, *.,. ,,,_,_....... , BROAD* 11 Fran �t = := MPGNOLIA,-P_KWY �\ Ity\ • - • HPB, exa 'arks lfe,CONANP,Esn,HERE,G in,,roar quar•e,Safe5ragh, ozr nologies, Inc, METI/NASA,USGStfPA,NPS,US Ran. Via' ` i�� \ \— Census gu-reau,USDA AdAN 41 A, e R107 .. ., ,,,, ./. , , 74, CITY OF PEARLAND • Cabinet Replacement and Detection Upgrade (*) l inch=3,009feet McHard/Pearland Pkwy Traffic Signals Upgrade pE 0 0.3 °.6 °` 4P mi 1 . Mykawa Road (*1) 5 Barry Rose Road/Hughes Road (*2) �yt Cabinet Replacement, PTZ and "! This product is for informational purposes and may not have been prepared for or be suitable for legal,engineering,or surveying 2 SH 35/Main Street *1 6 Shallow Creek Drive *1 (*) purposes It does not represent an on-the-ground survey and ( ) ( ) Detection to et i o n Upgrade i r e x represents only the approximate relative location of property boundaries 3 Old Alvin Road (*2) 7. Province Village Drive (*1) fsr. t89' MAP PREPARED AUGUST 2022 4 Summit Springs Lane/Forest Park Lane (*2) ® Detection Upgrade only (*) CREATED WITH WEB PRINT TOOL E Anderson Rd o, o 'n.arson '• a u, ° Atlasctdge o n .- W n SG >, -o T 3 o m c o 's ALMEDA i ` r �SwickMeadols 7311 S' en 0_ �r Carter Rd w Carter Rd o- co o r to o i' Fellows Rd Fellows Rd h c EiAtvr Fellows Rd mHou ton ` \\\ S=Sam=Houston-Houston _--_ $ S;4,�, c C:t ine — ► L __ Vag _ `l_ — K ess/4r �y+ Wldern 8 .'"" --- ® t • ' CK thFR h 4 ja� r I r +d i WfRanchss \ �0ls �Csr 1 o D w h - ' — t0 creek Dt WI° Daoo Rd > It v / '� r — G Z W r—1 v 73 Bass Regionals W v t�' "`— 1 — .....................0 BROOKSIDE Lila _ -. BROO/{S�DERDccK�E _________ _. — — � r - �� . -_�( - miliw„,„_ _ .., _ _ _ _ , _ , ,__ fLRO _ , ri / .... ..... \ C� MCHARD R MCHARD_RD ill, rlc ,o. 0 • z �,.,. r r ?AU?0 0 SHADOW C 1 ' I 0 l [::: � ill1 tjCi£I_ L!LWM " i Lill; 1 —N eve tp-s ��HUGHES�RANCH_RD D 41, a s t.�— c I( W� _ n W QRANGE Loll Mil (� o o. � F� co Z r 11 W �t N i to I 111 ® till l 1 7irilpi .z., . v(4- m f, x___ an?zie r Aro.r__* ._— al ' arTR/NITYIBAY v dL ` z ..___-- zIti- ;; 1 • IIII 33 �Q DR II__ v �aJ` .____ BROADWAY ST - -- — . I — -BROADWAY_ST-- 1 r . .... 1 1 D D r` !ROAD!Y-ST 1 /iiil I I 11_._I I I 11 . 11111 1 �� 1 , r � lN } r Ix o liriritio ._ i �c-v o o • I • rie ,ial ` `� City of�io�ston,HPB,Texas Parks Aildglt,CONANP,_Esri,HERE,Garmin, Foursquare,Sat ieoT Ft o o oterl q-MEFF/Nttaft-lJ3 - IVP Iw►► fi �� 111 . M - Census { -r u,U DA ---1 .� wk i ' Z. CITY OF PEARLAND 1 inch=3,009 feet McHard Road Additional Intersections Traffic Signals Upgrade of • „, 0 0.3 °s �a mi J v o (*1) Cabinet Replacement, PTZ and This product is for informational purposes and may not have been 1 Country Place Parkway ��ID prepared for or be suitable for legal engineering or surveying 2. Country Place Boulevard (quad) (*4) Upgrade (*) a reseutsod the ebe nuitabl for legal on-the-groundsurveyand Detection ct i o n f 0. P y pproximatr relative locatlon of property boundaries s=. t,3� 3 Cullen Parkway (*1) MAP PREPARED AUGUST 2022 CREATED WITH WES PRINT TOOL / ATTACHMENT 02 CONTROLLER CABINET ;. ' Ira fflc ware , _ Engineered by IN/Naztec NEMA P-68 Double Door Traffic Control Cabinet Shell _ -- - FEATURES :'' .. ,, • Meets NEMA standards w•. ill }#6� A, t` { • Base mounted ,i.. - .1 I • Constructed of 0 125" thick aluminum i , !' : :.,. -.,,:t'i i • "C" mounting channels on side and back t �, '' walls for mounting shelves and panels a • 3-point latching mechanism of zinc .i, ' ' 1 plated steel 1. i f �� ' ' • Stainless steel door handle designed for - ! padlock \i • Stainless steel door hinge • Optional Lifting Ears • Front and Rear Doors SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSION OPTIONS MOUNTING PATTERN 40 50" W x 18.50" D (rounded to the nearest inch) MATERIAL Aluminum ( 125"thick) OUTSIDE OPENING FINISH Bare aluminum standard,, 11 54"H 44"W x 2 6' D 42"H x 41"W optional paint available 2) 68"H 44"W x-r&' D 56"H x 41"W' - MOUNTING Base Mounted 3) 77"H 44"W x 26" D 63"H x 41"W DOORSTOPS Three position bar stop at bottom of door VENTILATION Pleated fiber filter in door, CUSTOMIZED HEIGHTS AVAILABLE fan with thermostatic control LIGHT 4) _" H x 44"W x 26"D i Incandescent or optional fluorescent, door switch activated l T _C , 522 Gillingham I Sugar Land I Texas 177478 I www trafficware.corn 1800-952-7285 Cubic ITS,Inc. • r 10545 Hardin Valley Road Attachment 03 Gridsmart F ) 1J B I ,CW Knoxville,TN 37932 Quotes USA page 1/5 Description Bailey Road Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017750 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peterson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 'United States ,Product Code .Product Sales,Price Quantity • Total Price: • GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 4.00 USD 668 IGS-3--CAT5 Burial.Grade,Cat5e USD 505 COO •USD 505 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 4.00 USD 43,624 l• S-3-PFM `Performance'Module , .USD 3,200 -:4;00 'USD 12,8001 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 4.00 USD 14,836 I GS=3=TS2` `' ' T,S2 Interface.Cable USD'177 ; 4":00 .._....___ USD 708, GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 I USD 38 4.00 USD 152 Total Price USD 73,293 Grand Total USD 73,293 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature: Printed Name: Title. Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full document here.To help us serve you better,please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along with any special instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to ordersagridsmart.com or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you Cubic ITS, Inc. M CU la I 1N 10545 Hardin Valley Road `\+l+"`F///}, Knoxville, dTN 37932 USA Description Broadway Street Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017748 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peterson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States Product Code Product Sales Price Quantity • 'Total Price GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 16.00 USD 2,672 `GS-3-CAT5 Burial Gradeat5e USD'505 2:00 USD 1,010 GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 8.00 USD 87,248 �GS 3=PFM _ Performance Module USD-3,200' 8.00' USD 2$;600] GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 16.00 USD 59,344 GS-3=TS2 TS2 Interface Cable. USD 177", ,8:00 USD 1,416'� GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 8.00 USD 304 Total Price USD 177,594 Grand Total USD 177,594 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature: Printed Name: Title. Date: l All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.Seethe full document here.To help us serve you better,please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along with any special instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to orders(c ridsmart.com or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you Cubic ITS,Inc. 10545 Hardin Valley Road Knoxville,TN 37932 USA Description McHard/Pearland Pkwy Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017749 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peterson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States • Product-Code . , - Product • Sales Price Quantity Total Pride GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 11.00 USD 1,837 GS=3=CAT8' •"Burial Grade Cat5e USD;505 ,2.00 , `USD.1;010, GS3-SYS GS3 System USD 10,906 7.00 USD 76,342 GS-3=PFM 'Performance Module USD.3,200 7 00'. USD 22;400I GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 11.00 USD 40,799 j fGS?3 TS2 TS2;Interface.Cable USD,177` 7:00' USD 1,239 • GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 7.00 USD 266 Total Price USD 143,893 Grand Total USD 143,893 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. { I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature: Printed Name: Title: Date: r All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full document here.To help us serve you better,please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s)t Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along with,any special • instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to ordersegridsmart.cor or fax to 865-249-66 08.Thank you 1 Cubic ITS,Inc. 'N 10545 HarUBIICdin Valley Road �`.�}� Knoxville, 37932 USA _ c Description McHard Rd Alternates Quote Quote Number 00017751 r Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peterson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States Product Code; Product, ' ' . Sales Price ; 'Quantity Total Price, GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD 167 6.00 USD 1,002 ,GS-3 C4T5 ^✓_Buriaj:Grade Cat5e 'USD 505' 1LL0OLL USD 5051 GS-3-FIB Fiber Optic Cable 1000' USD 2,043 1.00 USD 2,043 GS3-SYS_ W GS3'System. _ USD 10906 4:00 ' USD43;624, GS-3-PFM Performance-Module USD 3,200 4.00 USD 12,800 , GS 3 SMK F' .SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 4,160 t 3:00. USD 12;48 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 3.00 USD 11,127 .`.^.'.f;.r--......�._.__._._e..®._.,�_-..-.._.�..q........_..... :. q ....._.._...yam..._.--+,-..�.t.. .. «._ ._. a-.'^.__.ems...-....._...«- ...--e,.._.e...._....� CGS=3=TS2. •1TS2'Interface.Cable USD177 4:00 USD:708s GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 4.00 USD 152 Total Price USD 84,441 Grand Total USD 84,441 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order ' Signature: Printed Name: i Title. Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms-&Conditions.See the full document here.To help us serve you better,please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along with any special instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to orders a gridsmart.com or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you Cubic ITS, Inc. CI C 10545 Hardin Valley Road 6� Knoxville,TN 37932 USA Description Shadow Creek Pkwy Corridor Quote Quote Number 00017755 Payment Terms Net 30 Prepared By Jeffrey Peterson Contact Name Yolci Ramirez Email jeff.peterson@cubic.com Phone 2816521686 Email yramirez@pearlandtx.gov Bill To Name Pearland,TX Ship To Name Pearland,TX Bill'To 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 United States Product.Code Product Sales`Price Quantity Total Price GS-3-CBL 84"Cable Bracket USD)167 ' 11.00 USD 1,837 GS-3-OAT5 Burial Grade Cate ' USD.505, � 2.00 USD 1,010i GS-3-FIB Fiber Optic Cable 1000' USD 2,043 1.00 USD 2,043 j�GS3=SYS.� • -- GS3"System USD 10;906 1 MOT USD 76,342: GS-3-PFM Performance Module USD 3,200 7.00 USD 22,400 in GS-3-SMK-F SMARTMOUNT 2025,,'Bell Cameral -- 'USD 4,160 yi 1,00 ;` USDd,160 GS-3-SMK SMARTMOUNT Bell Camera USD 3,709 10.00 USD 37,090 GS 3 TS2 yi TS2.Interface`Cable USD'177 - Z:00 USD 1,239 GS3-TS2-OPT TS2 Module GS3 USD 38 7.00 USD 266 Total Price USD 146,387 Grand Total USD 146,387 Cubic Transportation Systems will charge a 25%restocking fee on all physical goods and 10%on all software licenses. I agree to the above pricing and terms and would like to place the above product on order Signature: Printed Name: Title:\ Date: All purchase orders and signed quotes adhere to Cubic Transportation Systems Terms&Conditions.See the full document here.To help us serve you better,please make sure Purchase Orders reference Part Number(s),Quantity,Pricing,Quotation Number,along with any special instructions or shipping preferences.Please submit via email to orders(a gridsmart.com or fax to 865-249-6608.Thank you Datasheet ATTACH M ENT 04 AXISA COMMUNICATIONS AXIS P5655—E PTZ Network Camera HDTV 1080p PTZ with 32x zoom and focus recall AXIS P5655-E PTZ Network Camera is a cost-effective, high performance PTZ with HDTV 1080p and 32x optical zoom. It features Forensic WDR for clarity even when there's both dark and light areas in the scene. And, Lightfinder 2.0 to capture low-light images with more saturated colors and sharper images of moving objects. It offers electronic image stabilization and enhanced security features including signed firmware and secure boot.With IP66, NEMA 4X and IKI0 ratings it's resistant to both harsh weather conditions and impacts. Plus,you get two-way audio, I/O ports and extended capabilities for advanced analytics. > HDTV 1080p with 32x optical zoom > Forensic WDR and Lightfinder 2.0 > Signed firmware and secure boot > Focus recall and EIS > Zipstream with support for H.264 and H.265 Y is t , 1 • i i i pbSD 1. Onvi F I 000 HDTV NETWORK VIDEO ATTACH H M E ITT 04 AXIS P5655—E PTZ Network Camera �_ I aera . ' — " _ _ ��T m Event conditions Audio: Audio detection Image sensor 1/2.8' progressive scan RGB CMOS Device status:Above operating temperature,Above or below Lens Varifocal,4.3-137.6 mm,FI 4-4.0 operating temperature,Below operating temperature,Fan Horizontal field of view: FI 4 4.02.4 failure,IP address removed,Network lost,New IP address, Vertical field of view:35.5°-14° Shock detected,Storage failure,System ready,Within operating Including EIS,barrel and pincushion distortion correction ( temperature,Edge storage,Recording ongoing,Storage disruption Autofocus and auto-iris I/O:Digital input,Manual trigger Virtual input Day and night Automatically removable infrared-cut filter MQTT subscribe PTZ:PTZ malfunctioning,PTZ movement Camera I,PTZ preset Minimum Color 0.1 lux at 30 IRE F 14 position re/ ached:Camera I,PTZ ready illumination B/W 0.01 lux at30IRE FI 4 Scheduled and recurring:Scheduled event Shutter speed 1/66500 s to 2 s Video: Day-night mode,Live stream open Pan/Tilt/Zoom Pan:360°endless,0.1°-350°/s Event actions Play audio clips,day-night mode,go to preset position,guard Tilt: 180°,0.1°-350°/s tour,l/O,upload of images or video clips via FTP SFTP HTTP Zoom:32x optical, 12x digital,Total 384x zoom HTTPS,network share and email,notification to email,HTTP, 256 preset positions,nadir flip,limited guard tour control queue, HTTPS,TCP and SNMP trap,overlay text,prioritized text,record r on-screen directional indicator set new pan 0° focus window, video to SD card and network share,WDR mode focus recall MQTT publish System on chip(SoC)> , j Data streaming Event data Model � ARTPEC-7 Built-in Pixel counter Memory 1024 MB RAM,512 MB Flash installation aids Compute Machine learning processing unit(MLPU) Analytics capabilities AXIS Object - Object classes: humans,vehicles f Video .v-,.--' • ••__"____-_ ' -~---t'-' •. 1 Analytics Trigger conditions:line crossing,object in area J Up to 10 scenarios Video H.264(MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)Baseline,Main and High Profiles Metadata visualized with color-coded bounding boxes compression H.265(MPEG-H Part 2IHEVC)Main Profile Polygon include/exclude areas., Motion JPEG Perspective configuration , Resolution 1920x1080 HDTV 1080p to 320x180 ONVIF Motion Alarm event Frame rate Up to 60/50 fps(60/50 Hz)in all resolutions Applications Included AXIS Object Analytics Video streaming Multiple,individually configurable streams in H.264,H.265 and AXIS Video Motion Detection,audio detection,advanced Motion JPEG gatekeeper autotracker 2 Controllable frame rate and bandwidth Support for AXIS Camera Application Platform enabling i Axis Zipstream technology in H.264 and H.265 installation of third-party applications,see axis.com/acap VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265 , General Image settings Compression,saturation,brightness,sharpness,contrast,local Casing , -1P66- NEMA 4X-and IKI 0-rated r' contrast,white balance,exposure control,exposure zones, Aluminum casing,polycarbonate(PC)dome Forensic WDR:Up to 120 dB depending on scene,defogging, Color white NCS,S I002-B,repaintable skin cover day/night shift level,tone mapping,fine tuning of low-light For repainting instructions of casing and impact on warranty, behavior,rotation:0° 180° text and image overlay,image contact your Axis partner freeze on PTZ,electronic image stabilization,scene profiles,20 individual polygon privacy masks Sustainability PVC free Audio_ 1 Power Axis PoE+midspan 1-port: 100-240 V AC,max 37 W IEEE 802.3at,Type 2 Class 4 Audio streaming Two-way,full duplex Camera consumption:typical 10.5 W,max 19 W Audio encoding 24bit LPCM,AAC-LC 8/16/32/44.1/48 kHz,G.71 I PCM 8 kHz, r Multiconnector G.726 ADPCM 8 kHz,Opus 8/16/48 kHz ' 20-28 V DC,typical 10 W max 18 W 20- Configurable bit rate 24 V AC,typical 15.5 V A,max 26 V A Audio External microphone input or line input,line output(Requires (PoE+midspan or power supply not included) input/output Axis 10-pin Push-pull System Connector or Axis Multicable C I/O Connectors RJ45 I OBASE T/100BASE TX PoE Audio Power I m/5 m,not included),automatic gain control RJ45 push-pull connector(IP66)included I,Network I/O connector for DC or AC input,4 configurable alarm Security Password protection,IP address filtering,HTTPSa encryption, Inputs/outputs:mic in/line in,line out(Axis 10-pin push-pull IEEE 802.1 X(EAP-TLS)a network access control,digest system connector or Axis multicable C I/O audio power I m/5 m,(not included)) authentication,user access log,centralized certificate management,brute force delay protection,signed firmware, Storage Support for SD/SDHC/SDXC card secure boot Support for SD card encryption(AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit) Supported IPv4,IPv6 USGv6,ICMPv4/ICMPv6,HTTP HTTP/2,HTTPSa, Recording to network-attached storage(NAS) protocols SSL'TTLSa,QoS Layer 3 DiffServ,FTP'SFTP,CIFS/SMB,SMTP mDNS For SD card and NAS recommendations see axis.com (Bonjour),UPnP® SNMP vl/v2c/v3(MIB-II),DNS/DNSv6,DDNS, Operating -30°C to 50°C(-22°F to 122°F) NTP RTSP RTP SRTP,TCP UDP IGMPvl/v2/v3;RTCP ICMP conditions Maximum intermittent temperature 55°C DHCPv4/v6,ARP SOCKS,SSH,NTCIP L'LDP CDP MOTT v3.l.l, Humidity 10-100%RH(condensing) Syslog,Link-Local address(ZeroConf) Storage -40°C to 65°C(-40°F to 149°F) [System integration -j conditions Humidity 5-95%RH(non-condensing) Application Open API for software integration,including VAPIX®and Approvals EMC Programming AXIS Camera Application Platform;specifications at axis.com EN 55032 Class A,EN 50121-4,IEC 62236-4,EN 61000-3-2, Interface One-click cloud connection EN 61000-3-3,EN 55024,EN 61000-6-I EN 61000-6-2, i ONVIF®Profile G,ONVIF®Profile S,and ONVIFOO Profile T FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A ICES-003 Class A VCCI Class A specification at onvi forg RCM AS/NZS CISPR 32 Class A KC KN32 Class A KC KN35 Safety ` IEC/EN/UL 62368-I,IEC/EN/UL 60950-22,IS 13252 i wcvw.axis.com ATTACHMENT 04 T10132168/EN/M27.2/2110 • Environment For more accessories,see axis.com IEC 60068-2-I,IEC 60068-2-2,IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-14, Video AXIS Companion,AXIS Camera Station,video management IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-30,EC 60068-2-78,IEC/EN 60529 management software from Axis Application Development Partners available IP66,IEC/EN 62262,IK10,NEMA 250 Type 4X software at oxis.com/vms Network NIST SP500-267 IPv6 USGv6 Languages English,German,French,Spanish,Italian,Russian,Simplified Dimensions Height 217 mm(8.54 in) Chinese,Japanese,Korean,Portuguese,Traditional Chinese 0 188 mm(74 in) Warranty 5-year warranty,see axis.com/warranty Weight 2.5 kg(5.5 lb) a. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Included RJ45 Push-pull Connector(IP66),hard ceiling mount,spring pipe OpenSSL Toolkit(openssLorg),and cryptographic software written by Eric Young accessories adaptor,U-profile pipe adaptor installation guide,Windows® (eay@cryptsoftcom). decoder I-user license Environmental responsibility,: - Optional AXIS T9 I B mounts,AXIS T94A02L recessed mount,outdoor accessories RJ45 cable with premounted connector,AXIS T8133 Midspan axis.corn/environmental-responsibility 30 W I-port,repaintable skin covers,smoked dome,Axis 10-pin push-pull system connector Axis multicable C I/O audio power I r' m/5 m ©2019 2021 Axis Communications AB.AXIS COMMUNICATIONS,AXIS,ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks of A Axis AB in various jurisdictions.All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.We reserve the right to Aki introduce modifications without notice. COMMUNICATIONS Data's11eet ATTACH M ENT 04 AXISA Coll MU NI CATIONS AXIS Q6315-LE PTZ Network Camera , High-end outdoor-ready HDTV 1080p PTZ camera with quick-zoom and laser focus AXIS Q63I5-LE is a high-speed PTZ camera offering HDTV I084 resolution. It features IR illumination and'day/night functionality for surveillance in pitch darkness. With 31x optical zoom, laser focus for precise focus and quick-zoom functionality, it allows you to easily follow fast-moving objects. It includes orientation aid and autotracking 2 with click and track functionality Privacy masking with mosaic lets you pixelate whole areas of the scene. Plus,with chameleon masking, it automatically changes the color in the masking depending on the background color of the image. Further- more,the TPM module ensures secure storage of all cryptographic keys and certificates. > 1/2" sensor with 31x optical zoom > IR illumination, D/N functionality > Autotracking 2 and orientation aid > Laser focus for precise focus with quick-zoom <1 sec zoom speed > TPM, FIPS 140-2 level 2 certified 1q a • _. _ , k J umtply tg\ FW 'r L � n _ OnVtF I00© HDTV NETWORK VIDEO ATTACHMENT ,04 AXIS Q6315-LE. PTZ Network Camera Models AXIS Q6315-LE 50 Hz Speed dry AXIS Q6315-LE 60 Hz Event conditions Device status:above operating temperature,above or below I dCamera t_ 1 operating temperature,below operating temperature,fan failure, Image sensor 1/2"progressive scan CMOS IP address removed,network lost,new IP address,shock detected, Lens Focal length:6.91-214.64 mm,F1.36`F4.6 storage failure,system ready,within operating temperature g Edge storage:recording ongoing,storage disruption Horizontal field of view:60.6°-2.0° I/O•manual trigger virtual input Vertical field of view.36.5°-1 1° , MQTT subscribe Laser focus,autofocus,P-iris PTZ:PTZ malfunctioning,PTZ movement,PTZ preset position Zoom speed:<I sec between any zoom value reached,PTZ ready Day and night Automatically removable infrared-cut filter Scheduled and recurring scheduled event Minimum Color 0.06 lux at 30 IRE,F1.36 Video:average bitrate degradation,day-night mode,live stream illumination B/W:0.001 lux at 30 IRE,F1.36,0 lux with IR illumination on open Color 0.09 lux at 50 IRE,F 1.36 Event actions Record video:SD card and network share B/W 0.008 lux at 50 IRE,F1.36,0 lux with IR illumination on Upload of images or video clips:FTP SFTP HTTP I-ITTPS,network share Shutter speed 1/1 1 1000 s to 1/2 s with 50 Hz Pre- anndd and email I/1 1 1000 s to I/2 s with 60 Hz post-alarm video or image buffering for recording or upload Pan/Tilt/Zoom Pan:360°endless,0.05°-550°/s Notification:email,HTTP HTTPS,TCP and SNMP trap Tilt:+20 to-90° 0.05°-500°/s PTZ.PTZ preset,start/stop guard tour Zoom:3 Ix optical, 12x digital,Total 372x zoom Overlay text,day/night mode Quick-zoom,nadir flip,300 preset positions,tour recording WDR mode (max 10,max duration 16 minutes each),guard tour(max 100), IR illumination control queue,on-screen directional indicator,set new pan 0° MQTT publish adjustable zoom speed,speed dry Data streaming Event data [System on chip(SoC).. i Analytics r. • , ,-, Model ARTPEC-7 Compute Machine learning processing unit(MLPU) Compute Machine learning processing unit(MLPU) capabilities capabilities AXIS Object Object classes: humans,vehicles I-Video . , .. . f-=—1 Analytics Trigger conditions: line crossing,object in area Video H.264(MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)Baseline,Main and High Profiles Up to 10 scenarios compression H.265(MPEG-H Part2/HEVC)Main Profile Metadata visualized with color-coded bounding boxes Motion JPEG Polygon include/exclude areas Perspective configuration Resolution 1920x)080(HDTV I O80p)to 320x180 ONVIF Motion Alarm event Frame rate Up to 50/60 fps(50/60 Hz)in all resolutions I Applications Included Video streaming Multiple,individually configurable streams in H.264,H.265 and AXIS Object Analytics Motion JPEG AXIS Video Motion Detection,AXIS OSDI Zone,Orientation Aid Axis Zipstream technology in H.264 and H.265 PTZ,advanced gatekeeper autotracking 2 Controllable frame rate and bandwidth Support for AXIS Camera Application Platform enabling installation of third-party applications,see axis.com/acap VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265 Video streaming indicator r eneral Image settings Compression,color brightness,sharpness,white balance, Casing I IP66- IP67 NEMA 4X-and.IK10-rated exposure control,exposure zones,image freeze on PTZ,scene Color white NCS S 1002-B profiles,rotation,electronic image stabilization(EIS),defogging Repaintable metal casing(aluminum),hard coated Polycarbonate Contrast,local contrast,autofocus,Forensic WDR:Up to (PC)clear dome with Sharpdome technology 120 dB depending on scene,32 individual polygon privacy masks Sustainability PVC free including mosaic and chameleon privacy masks 1 Memory 1024 MB RAM,512 MB Flash Network • Power ' Axis High PoE 60 W SFP midspan 1-port: Security Password protection,multi-level user,IP address filtering,HTTPSa 100-240 V AC,max 1.5 A encryption,IEEE 802.Ix(EAP-TLS)a network access control, IEEE802.3bt Type 3 Class 6 user access log,digest authentication,centralized certificate Camera consumption:typical 17 W(no IR),max 51 W management,brute force delay protection,signed firmware, secure boot,protection of cryptographic keys with FIPS 140-2 Connectors RJ45 I OBASE=T/I00BASE-TX/1000BASE T certified TPM 2.0 module RJ45 Push-pull Connector(IP66) Supported IPv4,IPv6 USGv6,HTTP HTTPSa QoS Layer 3 DiffServ,FTP IR illumination OptimizedlR with power-efficient,long-life 850 nm IR LEDs protocols CIFS/SMB,SMTP Bonjour,UPnPo SNMP vl/v2clv3(MIB-11),DNS, Range of reach 300 m(984 ft)or more depending on the scene DynDNS,NTP RTSP,RTP SRTP,SFTP TCP RTCP DHCP SOCKS, Storage Support for SD/SDHC/DXC card SSH,NTCIP MATT v3.I 1,Syslog a Support for SD card encryption(AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit) IPv4,IPv6 USGv6,ICMPv4/ICMPv6,HTTP HTTPS QoS Layer 3 Support for recording to network-attached storage(NAS) DiffServ,FTP CIFS/SMB,SMTP Bonjour UPnP® SNMP vl/v2clv3 For SD card and NAS recommendations see axis.cem (MIB-11),DNS/DNSv6,DDNS,NTP,RTSP,RTP SRTP SFTP TCP RTCP DHCP SOCKS,SSH,NTCIP CDP MQTT v3.1.1,Syslog, Operating -50°C to 50°C(-58°F to 122°F) Link-Local address(ZeroConf) conditions Maximum temperature according to NEMA TS 2(2.2.7):74°C System integration _ (1 Arctic.65° ctic Yernperature Control:Start-up as low as-40°C(-40°F) Application Open API for software integration,including VAPIX®and I Start-up temperature:-40°C(-40°F) Programming AXIS Camera Application Platform;specifications at oxis.com Humidity 10-100%RH(condensing) Interface One-Click Cloud Connection Storage -40°C to 70°C(-40°F to 158°F) j ONVIF®Profile G,ONVIF®Profile S,and ONVIF®Profile T specification at onviforg conditions Humidity 5-95%RH(non condensing) Onscreen IR illumination Approvals EMC controls Quick-zoom EN 55032 Class A,EN 55035,IEC 62236-4,EN 61000-3-2, Enable/disable all privacy masks EN 61000-3-3,EN 61000-6-I, EN 61000-6-2, ATTA C H I\/I E N T 04 TI0I54500IEN/M6.2/21 I S �s��ww.axis.com FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A ICES-3(A)/NMB-3(Aj, Optional AXIS T91/T94 Mounting Accessories VCCI Class A RCM ASINZS CISPR 32 Class A CISPR 35,EAC, accessories AXIS T8415 Wireless Installation Tool EN 50121-4,KC KN32 Class A KC KN35 AXIS Surveillance Cards Safety For more accessories,see oxis.com IEC/EN/UL 62368-I CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-I, Video AXIS Companion,AXIS Camera Station,video management IEC/EN/UL 60950-22,C C22.2 No. 60950-22, management software from Axis Application Development Farmers available 2,IEC 6 IEC/EN 62471 risk group IEC 0825-1 Class 1 software at axis.com/vms Environment IEC/EN 622621K10,IEC/EN 60529 IP66,NEMA 250,Type 4X, Languages English,German,French,Spanish,Italian,Russian,Simplified NEMATS 2(2.2.7-2.2.9),IEC 60068-2-1,IEC 60068-2-2, Chinese,Japanese,Korean,Portuguese,Polish,Traditional Chinese IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-14,IEC 60068-2-27,IEC 60068-2-78,ISO 21207(Method B) Warranty 5-year warranty,see axis.com/worranty Network a.This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the NIST SP500-267 OpenSSL Toolkit.(openssLorg),and cryptographic software written by Eric Young Dimensions Height 261 mm(10.3 in) (eay@cryptsoftcam). With weather shield:0 239 mm(9.4 in) Without weather shield:0 192 mm(7.6 in) Environmental responsibility: Weight 4 800 g(10.6 Ib) axis.com/environmental-responsibility Included Installation guide,Windows®decoder I-user license,60 W accessories Midspan(including power cable),IP66 rated network connector repaint template,paint paper @2020 2021 Axis Communications AB.AXIS COMMUNICATIONS,AXIS,ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks of Axis AB in various jurisdictions.All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.We reserve the right to 4 X I introduce modifications without notice. COMMUNICATIONS IiIhiIi1 ` ATTACHMENT 05 \ CISCO . , ,: „--,,,,-- , , , , ,, V . b I . ` fl: , ,r 1 ,wr ., If g Q owrrri1......., _ r , l` r.L _ ` fL -„' . y� G: .ri..r�� LC'02.LuT— w ...L pYY' i C Get?a-.r`!t `'• s.P1 ,'. - _ "� .. r_ l Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide' Last Updated:January 13,2020 c n Cisco Systems, Inc. www cisco corn Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www cisco com/go/offices. - Text Part Number OL-32138-01 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.ALL STATEMENTS,INFORMATION,AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE.IF YOU,ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is-operated in a commercial enviroimnent.This equipment generates,uses,and can radiate radio-frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,may cause harmful interference to radio communications.Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,users are encouraged to try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California,Berkeley(UCB)as part of UCB's public domain version of the UNIX operating system.All rights reserved.Copyright©1981,Regents of the University of California. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN,ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED AS IS' WITH ALL FAULTS.CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION,T DOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING,USAGE,OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL,OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL,EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S.and other countries.To view a list of Cisco trademarks,go to this URL.www.cisco.com/go/trademarks.Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners.The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company (1721R) Any Internet Protocol(IP)addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers.Any examples,command display output,network topology diagrams,and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only Any use of actual IP,ddresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental. / ©2014-2017 Cisco Systems,Inc.All rights reserved. ;il tiY66ir,. t, .:�: r. `L i.— 1 r .,l t1:_�.l i ,+,'- .r., -.3,,�.r 4- _] _I ,Fg opiex 4�ico4 1 ? ' IP. t �= `i' • ,:' y "... "4ti" ii C4 a lase ri. 9 4 1 i _--fir{ c .sue...' 1_. t , l'r)t14ee� jJ ' 11�i 1,' _. �]I� �? £1] 4_ ,,yy''Yews asoa®s s amF -v,1teii4;�Y _ ti r,f;+ � ipi' f�l;x �. :: . '�m�� = .-fie ti 4. 7tB ,, =-. ,o4h. -` -_mow ..__n ;4 —u: 31i .e..:_m _72 C' tic =9 ._rlitui 1 w.eta ::.0"�_...�v�r�i' _..�.:.� .. - �-__� _- �L- ��. - ,-- T`.� Preface ix Objectives ix Audience ix Organization x Conventions x Related Documentation xvi Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request iii-xvii CHAPTER 1 Product Overview 1-i Access Point Models 1-1 Product IDs and Supported Regulatory Domains 1-2 Parts of each Access Point Model 1-4 Face of the AP 1-4 Back of the AP 1-6 Head of the AP 1-7 Base of the AP 1-10 Left.Side ofthe AP 1-13 Right Side of the AP 1-14 i CHAPTER 2 ' Preparing for Installation 2-1 Safety Warnings 2-2 FCC Safety Compliance Statement 2-4 Safety Precautions 2-4 Access Point Installation Guidelines 2-4 Site Surveys 2-s Before Beginning the Installation 2-6 Safety Precautions when Installing Antennas 2-6 , Safety Instructions for Antennas and Radios 2-7 Avoiding Damage to Radios in a Testing Environment 2-7 Safety Instructions for Powering the Access Point 2-8 Translated Safety Warnings 2-9 , r 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 a Contents CHAPTER 3 Mounting the Access Point 3-1 Unpacking the Access Point 3-2 AP5721C Package Contents 3-2 AP1572EC Package Contents 3-2 AP1572EAC Package Contents 3-2 Optional AP Hardware 3-3 Tools and Hardware Common For All Mounting Options 3-3 Typical Access Point Installation Components 3-4 Choosing the Mounting Kit 3-5 Strand Mount Kit 1 3-7 Strand Mounting Using SMK1 3-7 Strand Mount Kit 2 3-9 Strand Mounting Using SMK2 3-10 Strand Mount Kit 3 3-14 , Strand Mounting Using SMK3 3-15 Pole Mount Kit 1 3-19 Pole Mounting Using PMK1 3-20 Pole Mount Kit 2 3-23 Pole Mounting Using PMK2 3-29 Vertically Mounting Without Pivot Bracket For 4 to 8 inches Vertical Pole 3-37 Wall Mounting Using PMK2 3-40 Pole Mount Kit 3 3-41 Pole Mounting Using PMK3 3-43 Wall Mounting Using PMK3 3-50 CHAPTER 4 Installing Other Components 4-1 Supported Antennas 4-2 AP15721 Internal Antennas 4-2 AP1572E External Antennas 4-2 Non-Cisco Antennas 4-3 Antenna Configurations 4-3 Installing External Antennas 4-4 Antenna N-Type Connector Locations 4-5 External Antenna Mounting Configurations 4-6 Omni Antennas 4-6 AIR-ANT2513P4M-N= 4-6 AIR-ANT2588P3M-N= 4-7 AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= and AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= 4-7 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 0L-32138-01 I Contents Weatherproofing the Type N Connector Joint 4-8 Detailed Documentation for all Supported External Antennas 4-9 Installing a Lightning Arrestor 4-10 Installation Considerations 4-10 Installation Notes 4-10 Installing the Lightning Arrestor Outdoors 4-10 Cable for the Lightning Arrestor 4-11 Grounding the Access Point 4-12 Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP 4-13 Powering the Access Point 4-16 Power-over-Cable 4-16 AC Power Supply 4-17 DC Interface 4-17 PoE-Input 4-17 Restrictions on Features under Different Operating Conditions 4-18 Connecting a Power Injector 4-20 Connecting an Ethernet Cable to the Access Point 4-2o Connecting a DC Power Cable to the Access Point 4-22 Connecting Streetlight AC Power 4-25 Connecting an AC Power Cable to the Access Point 4-27 Installing AC Power Plug on AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE= 4-28 Procedure for Connecting AC power Cable to Access Point 4-28 Connecting PoC Power to the Access Point 4-29 Installing the GPS Antenna 4-30 Installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts 4-34 Installing an Attenuator Plug4-34 Using a Signal Test Probe 4-34 Installing a Fuse or Shunt 4-34 Handling the AP when installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts 4-34 What to do after hardware installation 4-35 CHAPTER 5 Troubleshooting 5-1 Finding the Product Serial Number 2 Guidelines for Using the Access Points 5-3 Important Notes 5-3 Convergence Delays 5-3 Bridge Loop 5-4 Controller DHCP Server 5-4 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 ' ' Contents MAP Data Traffic 5-4 Controller MAC Filter List 5-4 Using DHCP Option 43 5-4 Monitoring the Access Point LEDs 5-s Verifying Controller Association 5-6 Changing the Bridge Group Name 5-7 Access Point Power Injector 5-7 Monitoring the Power Injector LEDs 5-9 Using the Reset Button 5-9 Resetting the Access Point 5-9 APPENDIX A Access Point Tech Specs References A-1 Access Point Data Sheet A-1 Radio Channels and Power Levels A-1 Power Distribution Budget A-2 Access Point Operating Temperature Specifications A-3 IX'APPENDX B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information B-1 Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement 'B-2 Industry Canada B-3 Canadian Compliance Statement B-4 European Community,Switzerland, Norway, Iceland,and Liechtenstein B-6 Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Ft Medical Directive 93/42/EEC B-6 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure B-9 United States B-9 Canada B-9 European Union B-9 Australia B-10 Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan B-11 Japanese Translation B-11 English Translation B-11 VCCI Statement for Japan B-12 Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan a-12 Chinese Translation B-12 English Translation B-13 - Chinese Translation B-13 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 l 11, Contents I English Translation B-13 Statement 371—Power Cable and AC'Adapter B-14 English Translation B-14 EU Declaration of Conformity B-14 Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil B-14 Access Point Models B-IA Regulatory Information B-15 Portuguese Translation B-15 English Translation B-15 APPENDIX C Access Point Pinouts c-i APPE ND IX D Configuring DHCP Option 43 D-1 Overview D-2 Configuring Option 43 for 1570 Series Access Points D-2 i I Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide l 0L-32138-01 r �T 3 I as5cep Lr i, 1 's:y(� I.1 7,..cs,., Y i I' _ {'t',:e,ICt ! # 4;1 l { F - f`,, ' •§....>la�''^. '' s �.� m mm=°'". .C4- " � �� '" SS .�:: /rs.sz5aa7 .i +4 ! %,��,(( g- �'*N,.s..:m..wm. mwuace Vim. ; ,'iga e1773'�F - n3�. r..Y•��y,_�� .L:tF4.:donam� ��w �•� � 5_ \._.., l ~ _I r Preface This section describes the objectives, audience, organization, and conventions of the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide. Objectives This publication explains the steps for installing the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point (called the access point, or abbreviated as AP in this document). The access point is available in an internal antenna model with cable modem (AP1572IC), an external antenna AC model (AP1572EAC) and an external antenna model with cable modem(AP1572EC).` The 1570 series is a dual-radio platform that supports dual-band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) operation. Audience This publication is for the person installing and configuring an access point for the first time. The installer should be familiar with network structures,terms, and concepts. A Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace,or service this equipment. Statement 1030 A Warning This equipment must be installed in restricted access locations in Norway, Finland,and Sweden. Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment as instructed in this installation guide. K Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 r ■ Organization This guide contains the following sections: Chapter ' Title Description Chapter 1 Product Overview Describes the major components and features of the access point Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Provides the safety warnings, guidelines and related information which you must follow before starting with the installation of the access point Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Describes what's in the product package. Provides access point mounting information. Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Contains information on AP accessories and instructions on installing antennas, grounding the AP, and powering the AP Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Provides basic troubleshooting procedures for the access point. Appendix A Access Point Tech Specs References Indicates how to access the documents that list the technical specifications for the access point, and the access point radio channels and maximum power levels supported by the world regulatory domains. Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Describes the regulatory conventions to which Regulatory Information the access point conforms and provides guidelines for operating access points in Japan. Appendix C Access Point Pinouts Describes the connector pinouts for the access point. Appendix D Configuring DHCP Option 43 Describes the procedure to configure DHCP Option)43 Conventions Notes use the following conventions. Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual. Cautions use the following conventions. Ax Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. Warnings use the following conventions. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 0L-32138-01 i I ) ■ A Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided ,at the end .of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk'letsel kan veroorzaken.Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken,dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling,van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt raadplegen. BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES Varoitus TARKEITA TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA Tama varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa.Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja.Ennen kuin kasittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sahkopiirien kasittelemiseen liittyvat riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkaisytapoihin.Turvallisuusvaroitusten kaannokset loytyvat laitteen mukana toimitettujen kaannettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa nakyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla. SAILYTA NAMA OHJEET Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SECURITE Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entrainer des blessures ou des dommages corporels.Avant de travailler sur un equipement,soyez conscient des dangers lies aux circuits electriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procedures couramment utilisees pour eviter les accidents.Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de securite traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil, referez-vous au numbro de l'instruction situe a la fin de chaque avertissement. CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen fuhren kann.Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Gersten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen and den iiblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfallen vertraut. Suchen._Sie mit der am Ende jeder _ Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen•Ubersetzung in den iibersetzten Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerat ausgeliefert wurden. BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 0L-32138.01 r i • Avvertenza IMPORTANT! ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per'la prevenzione di incidenti. Utilizzare it numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle awertenze riportate in questo documento. CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER Dette advarseissymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan fore til skade p5 person. For du begynner a arbeide med noe av utstyret, ma du vaere oppmerksom p5 farene forbundet med elektriske kretser,og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for 5 forhindre ulykker Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for a finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten. TA VARE PA DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE Aviso INSTRUcOES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANgA Este simbolo de aviso.significa perigo. Voce esta em uma situacao que podera ser causadora de lesoes corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilizacao de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidds no manuseio de circuitos eletricos e familiarize-se com as praticas habituais de prevencao de acidentes. Utilize o numero da instrucao fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua traducao nos avisos de seguranca traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUcOES iAdvertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD Este simbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad fisica. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente electrica y familiaricese con los procedimientos estandar de prevencion de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrara el numero que le ayudara a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompana a este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES yarning! VIKTIGA SAKERHETSANVISNINGAR Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utfor arbete p5 nagon utrustning maste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och karma till vanliga forfaranden for att forebygga olyckor Anvand det nummer som finns i slutet av varje yarning far att hitta dess oversattning i de oversatta sakerhetsvarningar som medfoljer denna anordning. SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR 1 Fl Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 • ■ Figyelem FONTOS BIZTONSAGI ELOIRASOK Ez a figyelmezeto jel veszelyre utal. Seri.ilesveszelyt rejto helyzetben van. Mielott _ i barmely berendezesen munkat vegezte, legyen figyelemmel az elektromos aramkorok\ okorta kockazatokra, es ismerkedjen mega szokasos balesetvedelmi eljarasokkal. A kiadvanyban szereplo figyelmeztetesek fordftasa a kesziilekhez mellekelt biztonsagi figyelmeztetesek kozott talalhat6, a fordftas az egyes figyelmeztetesek vegen Iathat6 szam alapjan keresheto meg. ORIZZE MEG EZEKET AZ UTASITASOKAT! I1peAynpe,ic,geHwe BA>KHbIE Li1HCTPYKLU,1Li1 no CO6JII0,[I,EHLIIIO TEXHL,IKL,1 6E3OnACHOCTL,1 3TOT CHMBO.n npe,Qynpe>K,QeHHff o603Ha'-IaeT onacHOCTb.To eCTb HMeeT MeCTO CHTya Hff,B KOTopoa: -I c.ne.QyeT onacaTbCff Te.necHblX noepe>K,QeHHItI.nepe.Q 3Kcn.nyaTa Heltl o6opy.QoBaHHff BbIffCHHTe,KaKHM onacHOCTffM MO>KeT no,QBepraTbCff no.nb3OBaTe.nb npH HCnO.nb30BaHHH 3.neKTpH'-18CKHX ene. -i,H O3HaKOMbT8Cb C npaBH.naMH TeXHHKH 6e3onacHOCTH,Q.nff npe,QOTBpa1.J.1eHHff BO3MO>KHbIX H8C'-IaCTHbIX c.ny'-IaeB.Bocno.nb3YI1T8Cb HOMepoM 3affB.neHHff, npHBe,QeHHbIM B KOH e Ka>K,Qoro npe,Qynpe>K,QeHHff,'-ITO6bI HaItITH ero nepeee,QeHHblltI eapHaHT B nepeBO,Qe npe,Qynpe>K,QeHHltl no 6e3onaCHOCTH, npH.naraeMOM K,QaHHOMY ycTpOItICTBy COXPAHLIITE 3TLI1 Li1HCTPYKL.1Li1Li1 4 --mIT F. — I -am m • * I M. — m' - --# • •wM •tt *I - m• • • mffl % w•tt i.)1 §a{J i- I'iW i J la{JIJIiIX*- i� r Jj:J (7)•o*t t o .A.!I}$tt:a.-'f Iln-t t. 6b(1), ia•rl ultc. n ""Ct.,*""to 7)Jf1(LH&t.,W :a:- fi -3 C. 1;1:, @1 (7) j-t11=,1 a 1, -I!-t'If.Jtc:i •ttlln 1=m•1 "C<1:3, (7) ootn.&1,1 , , ia$!J[(7)ffi 'a." I=,@ I={t (7)rTranslated Safety WarningsJ 'a " 1 1"(<t:3. '0 ;sal a2E! XI 01 !.I. JI.2. -'f-IaI UEf LICf gjJ.JJf t.!XII ! S2 4- 5.1e -'f-IgjeJ OH 5 JgLICf IJI 011 gj 4-g!J cifJI II 011 II JI 2-1 2f -2:1-E:1.§1 -f-1 J:I of :!J. H. gj -2:1-I J:I of 01 Af :iJ. J lof AI.2 2,f i I I DfJ I ! OJI 5./e :IL§ 2 J of()j 01 J 12f g])jl Xil E §- 011 iJ §OIIA--IoH § S2 AI2 01 XI AI AF z fit►oF^AA AI 2 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 0L-32138-01 Aviso INSTRUcOES IMPORTANTES DE'SEGURANcA Este simbolo de aviso significa perigo. Voce se enc.ntra em uma situacao em que ha risco de lesoes corporais. Antes de trabaihar corn qualquer equip.mento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos eletricos e familiarize-se corn as praticas .adraa de prevencao de-acidentes. Use o numero da declaracao fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua traducao nos avisos de seguranca traduzidos que acompanham o dispositi o. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUcOES Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarseissymbol betyder fare. Du befinder d g i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse. For du begynder arbejde pa dstyr, skal du vaere opmaerksom pa de involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredslob, g du skal saette dig Ind i standardprocedurer til undgaelse of ulykker Brug erklaeringsnummeret of er hver advarsel for at finde oversaettelsen i de oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed. GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER r..�. AoLD11 jLo�'1 of�I Wj I .J.4.31 .uVL 4r VeJ 1 A-c .19 65-4 6;5 J+I9.0 .1 caw?I:149)X a4'1 I-ib.J7?:t i1114.) V t999 agl 41.94z1.1"e;,..L�c11 ufsl�-'.�f L?(°lc ulc 6S9 iLuL.3)gSll ula.l3dJ oq}a:.1111=313co.A10 jlgxJl e3 0313 k di Aqt jttl uy_•.i.,y.I.5 Aia+vj 65;4 1tJ.tU 4:L4.3 IS}+f 6;s ag..T,1 jLu11�9> Upozorenje VA2NE SIGURNOSNE NAPOMENE Ovaj simbol upozorenja predstavlja opasnost.Nalazite se u situaciji koja mole prouzro&iti tjelesne ozljede.Prije rada s bilo kojim uredajem,morate razumjeti opasnosti vezane uz elektriene sklopove,to biti upoznati sa standardnim nadinima izbjegavanja nesreca.U prevedenim sigurnosnim upozorenjima,prilozenima uz uredaj,moiete prema broju koji se nalazi uz pojedino upozorenje pronaci i njegov prijevod. SACUVAJTE OVE UPUTE ' F t � Upozorneni ' DCJLE2ITE BEZPECNOSTNI POKYNY Tento upozornujici symbol oznacuje nebezpeci.Jste v Situaci,ktera by mohla zpOsobit nebezpeci urazu.Pied praci na jakemkoliv vybaveni si uvedomte nebezpeci souvisejici s elektrickjrmi obvody a seznamte Se se standardnimi opatrenjmi pro pr"edchaazeni urazum. Podle&Isla na konci kaideho upozornnn vyhledejte jeho preklad v preloienj►ch bezpednostnich upozornenich,ktera jsou pfilozena k zarizeni. USCHOVEJTE TYTO POKYNY Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 j • npoEIOOTTOir]Or], EHMANTIKEE ODHf IEE AEcD MEIAE AuT6 TO npo£1 OoTTO1 rJTIK6.aup oAo aripafv£1.Kfvouvo.BpfaKrnT£a£Kmaarnari nou pnop£f va TTp0K❑AEO£1Tpaupm10p6.nply£pyaaT£1T£O£OTT0100 TTOT££OTTA10p6,va£X£T£UTTO4Jr]am, TOU<; Klvouvouc; nou axnf ovml p£.rn rJ1'EKTp1Ka KUKAwparn KOi va £X£T£ £O1K£1w8£f p£TI<;auv 8£1c; TTp❑KTIKE<;y1a Tr]V OTT0q>uy OTUXr]pctTWV Xpr]OIpOTT0l OT£Thy ap18p6 0 AWOrJ<; TTOU TTOP£X£T01 OTO TEAoc; Kct8£npo£loonofriaric;,yia va£VTOTTfa£T£ TrJ pnaq>paa TrJ<;OT1c;'pnaq>paaptv£c; TTpO£1OOTT0I0£1<;aaq>aA£fac; TTOU OUVOO£000V Tr]OUOK£U c1YAAETE AYTEE TIE OAHDIEE iY"'Ii1TN. n1::i.uun nm•o::i. n11n1i'I "TI'Y ❑IJ "T[IIJn\II '197 .iIIJ'Y97 017 7 717 VII :I.YYI:I N.Ym ilnN. 1100 7YIOYI HT 117i1TN. IYI'O 0'7:lij7Y1i1 0'701 nN. 7'Ji171 0"7Y1\IIn 0"7 IJYI:I( nlJ17Ji1 nID07 iJ"TIYI n1'117 7'711 ,1i1\I17J 01 7ni1 nN 7nN.7 "TJ 11711TN. 7J 7\II i1910:1 j7910Y1i1 i1N.71i1i1 79on:i II'Ylnlllil .mJ1N.n n11•rn1 1j7n117 n1971YY1\II nir1A7lnYlil mn'IJ:lil n1711TN.:1 i'Ia,N n1N,1i'I ,m1U O"pomena BA)I{Hv1 6E36EAHOCHv1 HAnATCTBv1JA C1t1M6onoT 38 npe,D,ynpe,D,yBalbe 3H84lt1 onacHOCT Ce HaoraTe BO CIt1TY8L.\Itija WTO MO>Ke/J,8 npe,D,1t13B1t1Ka TenecH1t1 nOBpe,D;1t1 npe,D„D,a pa6ornTe co onpeMaTa, 61t1,D,eTe cBecHltl 3a p1t131t1KOT wrn nocTO1t1 Kaj eneKTpit14H1t1Te Kona 1,1 Tpe6a,D,a r1t1 no3HaBaTe CTaH,D,ap,D,H1t1Te nocranKltl 3a cnpeYyBalbe Ha ` Hecpel<H1t1 cny4a1,1 v1cKop1t1creTe ro 6pojoT Ha 1,13jaBaTa wrn ce Haora Ha KpajoT Ha ceKoe npe,D,ynpe,D,yBalhe 3a,D,a ro Haj,D,ern HeroB1t10T nep1t10,D, BO npeBe,D,eH1t1T8 6e36e,D,HOCH1t1 npe,D,ynpe,D,yBaiha wrn ce 1t1cnopaYaH1t1 co ype,D,OT LIYBAJTE 1111 OBv1E HAnATCTBv1JA • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 01-32138-01 ■ Ostrzeienie WA2NE INSTRUKCJE DOTYCZACE BEZPIECZENSTWA Ten symbol ostrzeienia oznacza niebezpieczer stwo.Zachodzi sytuacja,ktora mote powodowac obraienia ciata.Przed przystgpieniem do prac przy urzgdzeniach naleiy zapoznac sig z zagroieniami zwigzanymi z uktadami elektrycznymi oraz ze standardowymi srodkami zapobiegania wypadkom.Na koricu kaidego ostrzeienia podano numer,na podstawie ktorego mozna odszukac ttumaczenie tego ostrzeienia w dotgczonym do urzgdzenia dokumencie z ttumaczeniami ostrzeier . NINIEJSZE INSTRUKCJE NALEZY ZACHOWAC Upozornenie DOLEZITE BEZPEONOSTNE POKYNY Tento varovnjr symbol oznacuje nebezpecenstvo.Nachadzate sa v situacii s nebezpecenstvom I razu.Pred pracou na akomkol'vek vybaveni si uvedomte nebezpecenstvo stivisiace s elektrickjrmi obvodmi a oboznamte sa so standardnjrmi opatreniami na predchadzanie drazom. Podfa cisla na konci kaideho upozornenia vyhl'adajte jeho preklad v preloienych bezpecnostn}rch upozorneniach,ktore sti priloiene k zariadeniu. USCHOVAJTE SITENTO NAVOD Related Documentation To access this guide and other related documentation online from Cisco.com. Step 1 Go to the Product/Technology Support page on Cisco.com, at the following URL. http.//www.cisco.com/cisco/web/psa/default.html?mode=prod&level0=278875243 Step 2 Using the listing columns under Browse Products and Technologies, browse to Products >Wireless >Outdoor Wireless > Cisco Aironet 1570 Series. Step 3 Click on Cisco Aironet 1570 Series or on the models listed. This opens the corresponding product/model support page which has links to all related guides and software downloads. For information on deploying this access point in a network, see the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Access Point Deployment Guide, at: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/technology/apdeploy/8-0/AP_1570_DG/b_Aironet_AP 1570 DG.html Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 01-32138-01 t Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request � -1 Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information on obtaining documentation, using the Cisco Bug Search Tool (BST), submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see What's New in Cisco Product Documentation at:http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.htm 1. Subscribe to What's New in Cisco Product Documentation, which lists all new and revised Cisco technical,documentation as an RSS feed and delivers content directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 _. Iv . 11 5 :,' 9 �.: ! I o l�c.ua — 'n 1i ,I 1 ,O'' 1�11 1,. -- ...tf tw, :m ;yretrAl§ 't=� its, r / \ _ 'v - _ -,,�' _ Product Overview The Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point(hereafter called the access point or AP)Lis a wireless outdoor access point which is designed for use in a variety of network configurations. The access point can be configured, monitored, and operated through a Cisco wireless LAN controller '(hereafter called a controller). The controllers use a browser-based management system, a \command-line interface (CLI), or the Cisco Prime Infrastructure (PI) network management system to manage the controller and the associated access points.The access point supports hardware-based advanced encryption standard (AES) encryption between wireless nodes to provide end-to-end security The access point can also be deployed in an autonomous mode and be configured via the CLI. Access Point Models The Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point is available in three models: AP1572IC, AP1572EC, and AP1572EAC. The features of these models are described in the following table: Model AP1572IC AP1572EC AP1572EAC Antennas Internal antennas External antennas Input power options • Power-over-Cable,via. • Power-over-Cable, via • AC Power Cable Modem Cable Modem • DC • DC • DC • PoE-In (Standard UPoE or AIR-PWRINJ1500-2 power I injector) Output power — PoE-Out (supporting up to 802.3at devices). Not available when options PoE-In voltage is present. Radio 4Tx-4Rx: 3 Spatial Streams (Simultaneous,dual-band radio consisting of an 802.11ac Wave 1 4x4.3 5 GHz radio and 4x4.3 802.11n 2.4 GHz radio.) Equivalent The maximum allowed by regional regulatory laws, is provided. Isotropically Capable of 34/36 dBm Capable of 36/38 dBm Radiated Power (EIRP) I Backhaul Cable Modem, Ethernet, Fiber, and Mesh Ethernet, Fiber, and Mesh Installation Options Cable Strand, Pole, and Wall mounting options are possible for all models. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 1 , Chapter 1 Product Overview I al Product IDs and Supported Regulatory Domains J Model AP1572IC AP1572EC AP1572EAC Global Positioning Available on all models. Works only with the optionally available GPS antenna. System (GPS) location module External Module To support possible future modules, the AP has a dedicated port that allows connection of an external option module to the AP's internal UART interface. Product IDs and Supported Regulatory Domains Figure 1-1 Product ID Nomenclature of Access Point Models • - r AIR-AP1572lCy-z-K9,where: AIR-AP1572ECy-z-K9,.where: AIR-AP1572EAC-z-K9, where: I: Internal antennas E: External antennas E: External antennas C: Cable Modem C: Cable Modem AC: AC power y Cable Modem(CM)Diplex Filter y Cable Modem(CM)Diplex Filter z: Country Regulatory Domain C1 NA 5-42/ 88-1000 MHz ' C1 NA 5-42/ 88-1000 MHz C2: NA 5-85/108-1002 MHz C2: NA 5-85/108-1002 MHz C3: EU 5-65/108-1002 MHz C3: EU 5-65/108-1002 MHz C4: JP 5-65/108-1002 MHz C4. JP 5-65/108-1002 MHz N z: Country Regulatory Domain z: Country Regulatory Domain -- The 1570 series access points have product IDs in the format AIR-AP1572xyy-z-K9, where: • x indicates the type of antennas. The options are: — I—indicating internal antennas. — E—indicating external antennas. • yy indicates the cable modem type. The models with cable modems can be powered by Power-over-cable or DC power The options are: — C1—Indicates Power-over-cable with North American domain (N4) cable modem supporting 5-42/ 54-1000 MHz Diplex Filterf and 8x4 or 16x4 channel bonding options. — C2—Indicates Power-over-cable with North American domain(N8)cable modem supporting 5- 85/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x8 or 24x8 channel bonding options. — C3—Indicates Power-over-cable with European domain(E8)cable modem supporting 5- 65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options. — C4—Indicates Power-over-cable with Japanese domain (18) cable modem supporting 5-65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options. — AC—indicates AC power supply,applicable only to external antenna models. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 � i Chapter 1 Product Overview Product IDs and Supported Regulatory Domains 1.1 • z indicates the regulatory domain. The supported regulatory domains are: — A, B, C, D, E, F, H, K, M, N, QR, S, T, Z Click this URL to browse to a list of countries and'regulatory domains supported by the 1570: www.cisco.com/go/aironet/compliance Product IDs of Access Point Models in the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series The following table shows the nine product IDs based on radios, antenna types and powering options: Product ID Description of Radios,Antenna Types,Power options With External Antennas and powered by AC power AIR-AP1572EAC-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with external antennas • AC, DC, or PoE input power With External Antennas and powered by Power-over-Cable AIR-AP1572EC1-z-K9- • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with external antennas • Power-over-cable with North American domain (N4) cable modem supporting 5-42/ 54-1000 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 channel bonding options AIR-AP1572EC2-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with external antennas • Power-over-cable with North American domain (N8) cable modem supporting 5-85/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x8 or 24x8 channel bonding options AIR-AP1572EC3-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with external antennas • Power-over-cable with European domain (E8) cable modem supporting 5-65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options AIR-AP1572EC4-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with external antennas • Power-over-cable with Japanese domain (J8) cable modem supporting 5-65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options With Internal Antennas and powered by Power-over-Cable AIR-AP1572IC1-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with internal antennas • Power-over-cable with North American domain (N4) cable-modem supporting 5-42/ 54-1000 MHz Diplex Filter,and 8x4 or 16x4 channel bonding options AIR-AP1572IC2-z-K9 • ,Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with internal antennas • Power-over-cable with North American domain (N8) cable modem supporting 5-85/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x8 or 24x8 channel bonding options AIR-AP 1 572IC3-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with internal antennas • Power-over-cable with European domain (E8) cable modem supporting 5-65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options AIR-AP1572IC4-z-K9 • Two radios (4x4.3 5 GHz and 4x4.3 2.4 GHz) with internal antennas • Power-over-cable with,Japanese domain (J8) cable modem supporting 5-65/108-1002 MHz Diplex Filter, and 8x4 or 16x4 or 24x8 channel bonding options Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview I II Parts of each Access Point Model Parts of each Access Point Model The parts, ports, and connectors of each side of each AP model is illustrated in the following sections. Face of the AP The Face of the access point has the recognizable Cisco logo on it. It is devoid of any ports and connectors. For AP1572EC and AP1572EAC models, the face of the AP has screw holes on it (see Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3), which support mounting an external module in future applications. Figure 1-2 Face of the AP, on AP1572EC and AP1572EAC models Int in ® O U ollQ0ooQ0o O 111 .� 1 Cisco logo 2 Screw holes for future external module support. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 1-4 OL-32138-01 I 1 ` I Chapter 1 Product Overview Parts of each Access Point Model IN Figure 1-3 Face of the AP, on AP15721C model NI! 1 1 1 � I O Ir; oop000himat fl it 1 !I I I li 1 ;: !I I I I I l I 1 Cisco logo r Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview I 1. Parts of each Access Paint Model Back of the AP The Back of the access point is identifiable by the radiation fins, and also the screw holes that are used when mounting the AP on the supported mounting kits. The back of the AP faces upwards when the AP is mounted in a horizontal orientation. The back of the AP on AP1572IC and AP1572EC(see Figure 1-4) is different from that of AP1572EAC (see Figure 1-5). Figure 1-4 Back of the AP on AP15721C and AP1572EC ?...g. IMM.II L 1 Art ti,„__ii ri, 'iii ® �1L ]'• C 0 iii; r u u w O I" <l 1, '.. I iiii, I11111 C` CD III ... -- , -ii III oci- i - ii, c"'= 1, 41 = r, 64 - r 1 Four screw holes for M8 xl6mm bolts used to fasten 12 Port for GPS antenna connector the AP onto mounting kits. 3 Spot for mounting the GPS antenna. 4 Screw covering Fuse/Shunt port,labeled"8" Fuse/Shunt port is provided only in AP1570IC and AR1570EC models.Not provided in AP1570EAC model. 5 Screw covering Cable RF Attenuator, labeled"7" Cable RF Attenuator provided only in AP1570IC and _ AP1570EC models.Not provided in AP1570EAC_ ' model. , I Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 C I Chapter 1 Product Overview u Parts of each Access Point Model ,IN Figure 1-5 Back of the AP on AP1572EAC , ' Pl 1 >` �l CAI, it< 0 I' Ii it ` — 1 r' 0 ' 1' i _, r i tz,' _ 1 , ,� 19 �;I — I �1 NIj IUI 1 E 11, it I 11 -I.1 N :_ ■ m 1 Port for GPS antenna connector 2 Spot for mounting the GPS antenna. 3 Four screw holes for M8 x16mm bolts used to fasten the AP onto mounting kits. Head of the AP The Head of the AP faces upwards hen the AP is mounted in 1 v a vertical orientation. The head of the AP for the internal antenna model is devoid of any ports and connectors (see Figure 1-6), and is different from that of the external,antenna models (see Figure 1-7). I s Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview I Parts of each Access Point Model Figure 1-6 Head of the AP, on AP1572!C mode! (4r N M Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 r Chapter 1 Product Overview Parts of each Access Point Model � Figure 1-7 Head of the AP, on AP1572EC and AP1572EACmodels I it 4111 ® • ANT ANT5 (r-s* ANT 4 '4" f T 3, r Ell' e •. r 211:3 ail O \ram j , + t I 10- � ` • rlll 1 Spot for mounting the GPS antenna(here, showing the 2 Antenna port labeled"3" on the AP GP antenna mounted). 3 Antenna ports labeled"4" on,the AP 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview I Parts of each Access Point Model --- Base of the AP The Base of the AP is identifiable by the four LED status lights and the Reset button on it. The base of the AP faces downwards when the-AP is mounted in a vertical orientation. The base for different AP models is shown in Figure 1-8,Figure 1-9,and Figure 1-10 Figure 1-8 Base of the AP on AP15721C model O 1, , 1,, (0) II RRESETi O "`Iyyy (7==i7iiiertrip $ I _, - i 1� '� � , � III, 111, III, 2 3 1 Cable stinger port for Power-over-Cable. 2 Unused port slot 3 Ethernet port 4 SFP port 5 Stinger trim measure for cutting any non-Cisco cable 6 Screw covering Reset Button stinger to size 7 Status LEDs labeled "A" to "D"1 1. The LEDs are visible when AP is installed in both horizontal and vertical,orientations. • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide -1 0 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 1 Product Overview Parts of each Access Point Model II -- Figure 1-9 Base of the AP on AP1572EC model 1 EfO2 (® c0) 1 ANT 171 0 I\ /0-/---`,,, 'Tie) ' .7.-.:4.-", ( ) (f3:'. ----- e \ 0 0 ANT 2 osive) ._..) 0 fi , A B C D HI R�T � 1 2 \ 0 A — Ill— ll__ N 1 Status LEDs labeled "A" to "D"' 2 Antenna N-type connector port 2 3 SFP port 4 Ethernet port) 5 Cable stinger port for Power-over-Cable. 6 Stinger trim measure for cutting any non-Cisco cable stinger to size 7 Screw covering Reset Button 8 Antenna N-type connector port 1 1 The LEDs are visible when AP is installed in both horizontal and vertical orientations. , , 7 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Num I OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview li Parts of each Access Point Model I Figure 1-10 Base of the AP1572EAC model (il am' )O _` CPC6)\ 6 »OO/ I 1 rev ' s U ANT 9 �—`' ANT 2 o l-1 1 RT ,tip, ,l: .,1 O , ' 0 l I1!f III V .. 'Ill III I 1 1 Screw covering Reset Button , 2 AC Port 3 Ethernet port 4 SFP port 5 Antenna N-type connector port 2 6 Antenna N-type connector port 1 7 Status LEDs labeled "A" to "D"1 1 The LEDs are visible when AP is installed in both horizontal and vertical orientations. , l 1 - 1. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 1-12 OL-32138-01 Chapter 1 Product Overview Parts of each Access Point Model II Left Side of the AP The Left side of the access point is devoid of any ports and connectors. The left side of the AP is similar across all AP models (see Figure 1-11). Figure 1-11 Left Side of the AP — -.-R 111 l-'11 �1 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 1 — Chapter 1 Product Overview ■ Parts of each Access Point Model I Right Side of the AP The Right side of the access point is also called the Ground side, because it has the metal surface with , the ground strap screw holes. The right side of the AP for the internal antenna model (see Figure 1-12) is different from that of the external antenna models (see Figure 1-13) Figure 1-12 Right side of the AP, on AP15721C model 1 06 6n 21 � I�' 'll. r`!=d 1 rift a 1 I J I I I I J'1' 1 DC power port, labeled "6" on the AP 2 Console port, labeled "5" on the AP' 3 Metal plate for attaching grounding lug 4 Labels showing Product ID and port numbering scheme 1 The console interface is via an RJ-45 port. ( ■ Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide -1 4 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 1 Product Overview Parts of each Access Point Model Figure 1-13. Right side of the AP, on AP1572EC and AP1572EAC models U ?U O ((g) or 1,," IIIr 2s1i III ( ,�v�l! 6�� — Ili _ / 1 Label showing Product ID and port numbering scheme 2 DC power,port, labeled"6" on the AP 3 Serial port, labeled "12" on the AP 4 Console port, labeled "5" on the AP' 5 Metal plate for attaching grounding lug 1 The console interface is via an RJ-45 port. , 1 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 4:12.51P r I i 'PoL4'.0;110 : mop 51, (7e , NC H APTER2 Preparing for Installation This chapter provides the safety warnings, guidelines and related information which you must follow before starting with the installation of the access point. These sections are included in this chapter. • Safety Warnings, page 2-2 • FCC Safety Compliance Statement, page 2-4 • Safety Precautions, page 2-4 • Access Point Installation Guidelines, page 2-4 • Safety Precautions when Installing Antennas, page 2-6 • Safety Instructions for Antennas and Radios, page 2-7 • Avoiding Damage to Radios in a Testing Environment, page 2-7 • Safety Instructions for Powering the Access Point, page 2-8 • Translated Safety Warnings, page 2-9 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation I 1. Safety Warnings Safety Warnings To see translated versions of all safety warnings, browse to the document on Cisco.com, see Translated Safety Warnings,page 2-9 for instructions. A Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment,be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS A Warning This equipment is to be installed by trained and qualified personnel,as per these installation instructions. The installer is responsible for obtaining any required local or national safety inspections of the structural integrity of the installation by the local authority/inspection department. A Warning Do not operate the unit near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Statement 364 1 A Warning The cables specified in ,this installation guide that are used with the specified cable glands provide protection against ingress of moisture for a Type 4/IP67 classified enclosure. If substitute cable are used,the installer must ensure-that the size (OD) of the cable meets the acceptable range allowed by the cable gland. A Warning This equipment must be externally grounded using a customer-supplied ground wire before power is applied. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 366 A Warning Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to the power source. Statement 1004 A Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations., Statement 1040 Caution All installation methods for mounting an access point on any wall surface is subject to the acceptance of local jurisdiction. A Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment. Statement 1030 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Safety Warnings r- A Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 A Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 A Warning In order to comply with radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, see Appendix B, "Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information", to find the safe operating distance as required for your local regulatory domain. Statement 339 A Warning Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Statement 1001 A Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. Statement 1022 A - Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 A Warning To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Statement 1023 A Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit.Statement 1028 A Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment. Statement 1030 A Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage(SELV) requirements in IEC 60950 based safety standards.Statement 1033 A Warning When installing or replacing the unit,the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.Statement 1046. A Warning Do not locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can come into contact with such circuits.When installing the antenna, take extreme care not to come into contact with such circuits, because they may cause serious injury or death. For Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation I 1.1 FCC Safety Compliance Statement proper installation and grounding of the antenna, please refer to national and local codes (for example, U.S.:NFPA 70, National Electrical.Code,Article 810, Canada. Canadian Electrical Code, Section 54).Statement 1052 Caution Before connecting or disconnecting a power cord, you must remove power from the power cord using a suitable service disconnect. J FCC Safety Compliance Statement The FCC,,with its action in ET Docket 96-8, has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to RF electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-certified'equipment. When used with approved Cisco Aironet antennas,Cisco Aironet products meet the uncontrolled environmental limits found in OET-65 and ANSI C95 1„1991 Proper operation of this radio device according to the instructions in this publication results in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Safety Precautions For safety and to achieve a good installation, please read and follow these safety precautions: • Select your installation site with safety, as well as performance in mind.Remember electric power lines and phone lines look alike.For safety, assume that any overhead line can kill. • Call your electric power company Tell them your plans,and ask them to come look at your proposed installation. ' • Plan your installation carefully and completely before you begin. Successful raising of a mast or tower is largely a matter of coordination. Each person should be assigned to a specific task and should know what to do and when to do it. One person should be in charge of the operation to issue instructions and watch for signs of trouble. • When installing the access point and antennas, remember — Do not use a metal ladder — Do not work on a wet or windy day — Do dress properly—shoes with rubber soles and heels, rubber gloves, long sleeved shirt or jacket. • Use a rope to lift the access point. If the assembly starts to drop, get away from it and let it fall. • If any part of the antenna system should come in contact with a power1line, do not touch it or try to remove it yourself. Call your local power company They will remove it safely If an accident should occur, call for qualified emergency help immediately Access Point Installation Guidelines Personnel installing the access point must understand wireless access points and bridging techniques and grounding methods. Because the access point is a radio device, it is susceptible to common causes of interference that can reduce throughput and range. Follow these basic guidelines to ensure the best possible performance: Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 2-4 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Access Point Installation Guidelines � 1 • Review the FCC guidelines for installing and operating outdoor,wireless LAN devices at http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/products/collateral/routers/3 200-series-rugged-integrated-services-r outers-isr/data_sheet_c78-647116.html • Perform a site survey before beginning the installation. • Install the access point in an area where structures,trees, or hills do not obstruct radio signals to and from the access point. 1, • The access points can be installed at any height, but best throughput is achieved when all the access points are mounted at the same'height. We recommend installing the access points no higher than 40 feet to allow support for wireless clients on the ground. Note To calculate path loss and to determine how far apart to install access points, consult an RF planning , expert. Site Surveys Every network application is a unique installation. Before installing multiple access points, you should perform a site survey to determine the optimum use of networking components and to maximize range, coverage,and network performance. Site surveys reveal problems that can be resolved before the network is operational.Because 802.11a/b/g/n/ac operates in an unlicensed spectrum, there may be sources of interference,from other 802.1la wireless devices (especially in multi-tenant buildings) that could degrade your 802.11 signals. A site survey can determine if such interference exists at the time of deployment. A proper site survey involves temporarily setting up mesh links and taking measurements to determine whetheryour antenna calculations are accurate.Determine the correct locations and antenna types before you drill holes and route cables and mounting equipment. Consider the following operating and environmental conditions when performing a site survey. • Data rates—Sensitivity and range are inversely proportional to data bit rates. The maximum radio range is achieved at the lowest workable data rate. A decrease in receiver sensitivity occurs as the radio data increases. • Antenna type and placement—Proper antenna configuration is a critical factor in maximizing radio range.As a general rule,range increases in proportion to antenna height.However, do not place the antenna higher than necessary, because the extra height also increases potential interference from other unlicensed radio systems and decreases the wireless coverage from the ground. • Physical environment—Clear or open areas provide better radio range than closed or filled areas. • Obstructions—Physical obstructions such as buildings,trees,or hills can hinder performance of wireless devices. Avoid locating the devices in a location where there is an obstruction between the sending and receiving antennas. • How far is your wireless link? • Has a previous site survey been conducted? • Do you have a clear Fresnel zone between the access points.or radio line of sight? • What is the minimum acceptable data rate within the link? • Do you have the correct antenna (if more than one antenna is being offered?) • Do you have access to both of the mesh site locations? J Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Safety Precautions when Installing Antennas • Do you have the proper permits, if required?. • Are you following the proper safety procedures and practices? • Have you configured the access points before you go onsite? It is always easier to resolve configurations or device problems'first. • Do you have the proper tools and equipment to complete your survey Before Beginning the Installation Before you begin the installation process: • Ensure that a site survey has been performed. • Ensure that your network infrastructure devices are operational and properly configured. • Ensure that your controllers are connected to switch trunk ports. • Ensure that your switch is configured with untagged access ports for connecting your access points. ' • Ensure that a DHCP server with Option 43 configured is reachable by your access points, or manually configure the controller information in the access point (for additional information, refer to the"Configuring DHCP Option 43"section on page D-1). • Become familiar with the access point installation components. Safety Precautions when Installing Antennas' A Warning Do not locate the antenna hear overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can come into contact with such circuits.When installing the antenna, take extreme care not to come into contact with such circuits, as they may cause serious injury or death. For proper ' installation and grounding of the antenna, please refer to national and local codes (e.g. U.S. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code,Article 810,Canada:Canadian Electrical Code, Section 54). Statement 280 1. Before you install an antenna, contact your Cisco account representative to explain which mounting method to use for the size and type of antenna that you are about to install. 2. Select your installation site with safety, as well as performance, in mind. Remember that electric power lines and phone lines look alike. For your safety, assume that any overhead line can kill you. 3. Contact your electric power company Tell them your plans and ask them to come look at your proposed installation. 4. Plan your installation carefully and completely before you begin.Each person involved in an installation should be assigned to a specific task and should know what to do and when to do it. One person should be in charge of the operation to issue instructions and watch for signs of trouble. 5. When installing your antenna, follow these guidelines: — Do not use a metal ladder — Do not work on a wet or windy day — Do dress properly—wear shoes with rubber soles-and heels, rubber gloves, and a long-sleeved shirt or jacket. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138.01 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Safety Instructions for Antennas and Radios MI 6. If the assembly starts to drop, move away from it and let it fall. Because the antenna, mast, cable, and metal guy wires are all excellent conductors of electrical current, even the slightest touch of any of these parts to a power line completes an electrical path through the antenna and the installer 7 If any part of the antenna system should come in contact`with a power line, do not touch it or try to remove it yourself. Call your local power company to have it removed safely 8. If an accident should occur with the power lines, call for qualified emergency help immediately Safety Instructions for Antennas and Radios Warning In order to comply with radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, see Appendix B, "Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information", to find the safe operating distance as required for your local regulatory domain.Statement 339 A Warning Do\not locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can come into contact with such circuits.When installing the antenna, take extreme care not to come into contact with such circuits, because they may cause serious injury or death. For proper installation and grounding of the antenna, please refer to national and local codes (for example, U.S. NFPA 70, National Electric Code, Article 180, Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Section 54). Statement 1052 A Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment. Statement 1030 Avoiding Damage to Radios in a Testing Environment The radios on outdoor units (bridges) have higher transmit power levels than radios on indoor units (access points).When you test high-power radios in a link,you must avoid exceeding the maximum receive input level for the receiver At levels above the normal operating range, packet error rate (PER) performance is degraded. At even higher levels, the receiver can be permanently damaged. To avoid' receiver damage and PER degradation,you can use one of the following techniques. • Separate the omnidirectional antennas by at least 2 ft(0.6 m)to avoid receiver damage or by at least 25 ft(7.6 m)to avoid PER degradation. Note These distances assume free space path loss and are conservative estimates. Required separation distances for damage and performance degradation levels in actual deployments are less if conditions are not non-line-of-sight. • Reduce the configured transmit power to the minimum level. • Use directional antennas, and keep them away from each other • Cable the radios together using a combination of attenuators, combiners,or splitters to achieve a total attenuation of at least 60 dB. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Safety Instructions for Powering the Access Point llor a radiated test bed,the following equation describes the relationships among transmit power, antenna gain, attenuation, and receiver sensitivity. txpwr + tx gain + rx gain - [attenuation due to antenna spacing] < max rx input level Where txpwr = Radio transmit power, level tx gain = transmitter antenna gain rx gain = receiver antenna gain For a conducted test bed, the following equation describes the relationships among transmit power, antenna gain, and receiver sensitivity. txpwr - [attenuation due to coaxial components] < max rx input level Caution Under no circumstances should you connect the antenna port from one access point toithe antenna port of another access point without using an RF attenuator If you connect antenna ports, you must not exceed the maximum survivable receive level of 0 dBm. Never exceed 0 dBm, or damage to the access point can occur Using attenuators, combiners, and splitters having a total of at least 60 dB of attenuation ensures that the receiver is not damaged and that PER performance is not degraded. J Safety Instructions for Powering the Access Point A Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 A Warning This equipment must be externally grounded using a customer-supplied ground wire before power is applied. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 366 Warning Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Statement 1001 A Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 A Warning This equipment must be externally grounded using a customer-supplied ground wire before power is applied. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 366 ti s Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 0L-32138-01 ( Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Translated Safety Warnings III A Warning Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Statement 1001 A Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage(SELV) requirements in IEC 60950 based safety standards. Statement 1033 A Warning To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Statement 1023 L Caution Power injectors must be used indoors only Do not place a power injector in an unprotected outdoor environment because water could•get into the power injector and cause a short circuit and possible fire. Caution 'When the access point is installed outdoors or in a wet or damp location, the AC branch circuit that is powering the access point should be provided with ground fault protection(GFCI), as required by Article 210 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). Translated Safety Warnings The document containing the Translated Safety Warnings for Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Points is provided on the following page on Cisco.com. http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/products/col lateral/wireless/bulletin-c25-73 5595.html Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 $$ ita YYy&PY tan :1 ems. ''- L I ...`.`: i. . t �, ',a$9f � y S Y 1"� :; �" 't F a ecau 1111 yyy mow'�rwa. .,_1f 3`--•y ' ag'8s g9- :Y a` �. wY'v i.i-y, -b:�p. '`�44>i1i143 i[.-.- `::'. 'd Sa Ytr4l Mounting the Access Point This chapter describes how to install the 1572 access point and contains the following sections. • Unpacking the Access Point, page 3-2 • Tools and Hardware Common For All Mounting Options, page 3-3 • Choosing the Mounting Kit, page 3-5 • Strand Mount Kit 1, page 3-7 • Strand Mount Kit 2, page 3-9 • Strand Mount Kit 3, page 3-14 • Pole Mount Kit 1, page 3-19 • Pole Mount Kit 2,page 3-23 • Pole Mount Kit 3, page 3-41 1 f J � Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point U Unpacking the Access Point Unpacking the Access Point To unpack the access point, follow these steps. Step 1 Open the shipping container and carefully remove the contents. Step 2 Return all packing materials to the shipping container, and save it. Step 3 Ensure that all items listed in the following sections are included in the shipment. If any item is damaged or missing,notify your authorized Cisco sales representative. AP1572IC Package Contents • One AP1572IC series access point • Grounding Lug kit containing#6 AWG grounding wire with grounding lug(having two holes),and two M4 0 x 10mm screws • Oxide inhibitor paste • Cisco product documentation pointer card AP1572EC Package Contents • One AP1572EC series access'point • Grounding Lug kit containing#6 AWG grounding wire with grounding lug(having two holes),and two M4 0 x 10mm screws • Two M5.0 x 10mm screws 1 • Four 10 inch environmental seal tape • Oxide inhibitor paste • One PG13.5 cable gland • Cisco product documentation pointer card AP1572EAC Package Contents • One AP1572EAC series access point • Grounding Lug kit containing#6 AWG grounding wire with grounding lug(having two holes),and two M4.0 x 10mm screws • Four 10 inch environmental seal tape • Oxide inhibitor paste 1 • Two PG13.5 cable glands • DC Connector (Cisco Part Number 29-100226-01) Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 01-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Optional AP Hardware MI • Cisco product documentation pointer card Optional AP Hardware Depending on,your requirements, you can order the following optional equipment from Cisco as part of your shipment: • Strand mounts kits, • Pole mount kits • External antennas • GPS antenna Tools and Hardware Common For All Mounting Options The tools and hardware required for each mounting option, is listed in the corresponding sections. The following tools and materials are required during various stages of installing the AP, for all mounting options: • 10 mm open end or box wrench, for M6 bolts • 13 mm box-end wrench or socket sets, for M8 bolts • Adjustable wrench with opening up to 33 mm and 28 mm socket. ,• 0.5 inch or 13 mm wrench (for bort plugs) • Ground lug crimping tool (Panduit CT-720 with CD-720-1 die) • 6-AWG copper ground wire • Small flat-screwdriver for DC power connector • Optional shielded outdoor-rated Ethernet (CAT5e or better) cable with 0.20 to 0.35 in (0.51 to 0.89 cm)diameter • Optional Ethernet RJ-45 connector and installation tool • Optional shielded outdoor-rated DC power cable with 0.20 to 0.35 inch(.0.51 to 0.89 cm) diameter, rated at 10 amp, 10-16 V DC cable. • Optional ground rod, as required by local regulations • Optional ladder, power lift, rope, or other tools as required • 5/16" socket wrench (alternative to M8 bolts) for PMK1 mount clamp • Installation tool for the steel band straps (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=) for fastening the strap brackets when using PMK2 and PMK3 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Typical Access Point Installation Components t ' Typical Access Point Installation Components The access point is designed to be installed in an outdoor environment, such as on exterior walls, off cable strands, and on vertical and horizontal poles, such as streetlight poles. Carefully review Figure 3-1 to become familiar with the system components,connectors,indicators, cables,system interconnection, and grounding. Note The illustrations in this document show all available connections for the access point. Unused connections are capped with a connector plug to ensure the watertight integrity of the access point, except for the AC power entry connector on the in AP 1572EAC version access point. Liquid-tight adapters are provided for connector openings,which can be installed before or after deploying the access point. ti When not using the AC input connector to power the in AP1572EAC version(for example when powering using the Cisco power injector), it is important to cover the AC power entry connector The correct cap is Remke part number 75-0086(http://www.remke.comf).This cap is included with theAlR- PWRINJ1500-2=power injector If you are using PoE directly from a switch or powering via DC,then you will need to order AIR-ACC15-AC-CAP= Figure 3-1 Components in a Typical Access Point Installation � --•:.._gym. 1 I � ® 10 0 I O ® Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide' OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Choosing the Mounting Kit MI ' 1 Pole or wall on which AP is vertically / 6 Ground mounted. 2 Shielded outdoor-rated Ethernet 7 AC power cord2 (CAT5e or better) cable' , 3 Water drip loop 8 Power injector3 4 6-AWG copper grounding wire' 9 Shielded Ethernet (CAT5e or better) cable' 5 Ground rod' 10 Controller (through a switch) 1 User supplied. 2. The safety ground wire in the AC power cord must have a ground path to a grounding rod. 3. The shielded Ethernet cable has a ground path through the power injector and the safety ground wire in the AC power cord. Si Note The access point is designed with consideration for resistance to effects of lightning effects on the access point electronics. The access point employs lightning arrestor circuitry on the Ethernet and power ports. On the input Ethernet port, Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) are used for the Power Entry Module (PEM) to mitigate lightning effect. On the AC power, GDTs are also used alon with fuses to mitigate high-current condition. For the DC power, a fuse is used to mitigate high current condition. While not a common practice, the user may want to consider using lightning protection at the antenna ports for added protection.To meet EN/IEC60950-22(Clause 4.2) requirements, the installer must ensure that additional protection is provided external to this equipment to reduce transient surges from Overvoltage IV to Overvoltage Category II at the AC power input of the access point. The over-voltage and fault-current protection components used to achieve this protection must comply with the IEC 61643 series of standards. To meet CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-22-07/UL60950-22 requirements,the installer may use alternative components to provide this additional protection. Those components may comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.11,CSA Certification Notice No.516,CSA C22.2 No. 1, or UL 1449 Suitability of the components for the application must be determined for the intended installation.(For example, some devices are suitable for installation on the load side of the service entrance only, and some are suitable for use with cord-connected equipment only) Choosing the Mounting Kit Personnel installing the access point must understand wireless access points and bridging techniques and grounding methods. Note • When mounting an access point horizontally or vertically, ensure that the base of the access point, with the LED indicators, is visible from the ground below the access point. • Ensure that the access point is mounted in such a way so that all antenna ports and the console port are accessible for future use. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Choosing the Mounting Kit Depending on the particular AP version, the 1570 Series Access Point can be strand,wall, or pole mounted. From the following tables, choose a mounting kit for you access point version based on your mounting scenario. Table 3-1 Mounting Kits for AP15721C AP Orientation AP1572IC is always mounted in a horizontal orientation. Kit for Strand Mount without Cable Bundle Strand Mount Kit 1 [AIR-ACCSMK1570-1] Kits for Strand Mount with Cable Bundle Strand Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCSMK1570-2] Strand Mount Kit 3 [AIR-ACCSMK1570-3] Kit for Wall, Vertical Pole, Horizontal Pole and Pole Mount Kit 3 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-3=] Off-Angle Pole Table 3-2 Mounting Kits for AP1572EC AP Orientation AP1572EC"can be mounted in horizontal and vertical orientations. However, Strand Mount Kit 1 is not supported. Kits for Strand Mount with Cable Bundle ' Strand Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCSMK1570-2] Strand Mount Kit 3 [AIR-ACCSMK1570-3] Kit for Vertical Pole Pole Mount Kit 1 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-1] (poles of diameter 2 to 6 inches) Pole Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-2=] (poles of diameter 2 to 16 inches) Kit for Wall, Horizontal Pole, and Off-Angle Pole Pole Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-2=] Kit for Wall, Vertical Pole, Horizontal Pole and Pole Mount Kit 3 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-3=] Off-Angle Pole Table 3-3 Mounting Kits for AP1572EAC AP Orientation , AP1572EAC is always mounted in a vertical orientation.It is not mounted on cable strands. Kit for Vertical Pole Pole Mount Kit 1 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-1] (poles of diameter 2 to 6 inches) Pole Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-2=] (poles of diameter 2 to 16 inches) Kit for Wall, Horizontal Pole, and Off-Angle Pole ` Pole Mount Kit 2 [AIR-ACCPMK1570-2=] Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 L Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Strand Mount Kit 1 � Strand Mount Kit 1 The Strand Mount Kit 1 (abbreviated as SMK1) is for mounting the AP directly to a cable strand, when there is no cable bundle. SMK1 consists of two single-piece clamps, which clamp the cable strand across the back of the access point.As the cable strand runs directly across the back surface of the AP,there is no space left between the back surface of the AP and the cable strand. For instructions on mounting an AP using SMK1, see Strand Mounting Using SMK1, page 3-7 Strand Mounting Using SMK1 v When mounting the access point on a cable strand where you don't have to accommodate a cable bundle, you can use the SMK1 strand mount kit. Note The access point must be installed on a cable strand by a professional cable installer Table 3-1 lists the materials you,need to strand mount the AP using SMK1 Table 3-1 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using SMK1 Material Needed In Kit? SMK1 strand mount kit Yes Four M8 xl6mm button-head bolts, and its washers , Yes 5 mm hex wrench No To,mount the access point, follow these steps: Step 1 Hold the AP's back surface up against the support cable,and ensure that the cable runs through one of the three sets of cable grooves. When installing external antennas, which are mounted on the AP using an additional antenna bracket, the AP may tilt to one side due to the uneven weight distribution. To counteract this tilt, three sets of cable grooves are provided on the back surface of the AP This allows you to run the cable through different sets of the grooves so as to adjust the cable's position against the AP's back surface,and thereby counter the tilt. 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I ill Strand Mount Kit 1 Figure 3-2 AP Back,Surface with Cable Strand in Cable Grooves 1 ` n �`J _10-,, '-'11.,A % ",�` til \ ,, ,,,4 104,10,C\ # )04v44141, '2 ' .', , lkl 4,0$_I..,4 , 1 k(!(4/ 411411Thrii_ 1%144 VA, . A,,A, N p1 co co f 1 4 1 Cable Strand/Support Cable running 2 Screw holes'for the M8 xl6mm button-head though center cable grooves. bolts, to fasten the SMK1 cable-clamp to the AP 3 SMK1 cable clamp,already installed, 4 Two M8 xl6mm button-head bolts used to with supporting cable running through fasten each SMK1 cable clamp. center groove. Step 2 Clamp the cable using the SMK1 cable clamps. Secure each clamp with two M8 xl6mm bolts (with lock washers)on the back surface of the access point(see Figure 3-2).Hand-tighten the bolts to 13 to 15 ft.lbf (17.6 to 20.3 Nm). % Note The strand support cable and the SMK1 kit together provide the grounding for the access point. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Strand Mount Kit 2 NI Step 3 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other components." Strand Mount Kit 2 The Strand Mount Kit 2 (abbreviated as SMK2) can accommodate a 1 75 inch cable bundle between the support cable strand and the back surface of the AP The SMK2 allows a distance of 2.42 inches from the back surface of the AP to the center of the cable strand(see Figure 3-4). The SMK2 consists of these parts. • Strand mount cable brackets (see Figure 3-5) • Cable clamps (see Figure 3-5) • 5/16"-18 bolt for fastening the cable clamps to the strand mount cable bracket (see Figure 3-5) For instructions on mounting an AP using SMK2, see Strand Mounting Using SMK2, page 3-10 )Figure 3-3 SMK2 Cable Clamps and Cable Bracket Assembly Dimensions in inches(and millimeters] 11 dir01161 188.4 3.48 [61.572 1 r 2.42 =•iE�1� [io3.21 0 [63.5 4.06 2.50 ) Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 •� Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Strand Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-4 AP Mounted Using SMK2 - Dimensions in inches (and millimeters] I� 1 I OH I 'I . ■ 1 - f 61.6 2.42 ItA F piij ! roj0 , 139311 [200.7 7.90 v � Strand Mounting Using SMK2 When mounting the access point on a cable strand where you need to accommodate a cable bundle also, you must use SMK2 strand mount kit. Note The access point must be installed on a cable strand by a professional cable installer Table 3-2 lists the materials you need to strand mount the AP using SMK2. Table 3-2 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using SMK2 Material Needed In Kit? SMK2 strand mount kit Yes Four M8 xl6mm button-head bolts, and its washers Yes 5 mm hex wrench No 13 mm box-end wrench No To mount the access point, follow these steps. • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-10 0L-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Strand Mount Kit 2 1. step i Assemble the cable clamps to the cable bracket, on both cable brackets (see Figure 3-5). You should hand-tighten the nuts sufficiently enough to only prevent them from falling off. , Figure 3-5 Assembling Cable Clamps on Cable Bracket 1 III' Ill a wirrooso .11101.1l1111114%%7il t0 1 ' 5/16"-18 bolt 2 Cable Clamps 3 5/16"-18 nut 4 ,M8 xl6mm bolt 5 Cable Bracket Step 2 Secure each cable bracket with two M8 x1¢ bolts (with lock washers) on the back surface of the access point. (Figure 3-7).Hand-tighten the bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). p Tip When installing-external antennas, which are mounted on the AP using\an additional antenna bracket, the AP may tilt to one side due to the uneven weight distribution.To counteract this tilt,elongated M8x16 bolt holes are provided on the cable bracket. This allows you to adjust,the cable brackets' position against the AP's back surface,to cancel the tilt. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 0L-32138-01 i Chapter3 Mounting the Access Point I 1.1 Strand Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-6 Cable Brackets Attached to Back Surface of Access Point 0 >4.1.0% ' , }) Ili 4 r -- rt ,--" wry• ,. ' ''..° llirili--114." 7. t ----_____ 1 ,( 0,, 0.6. _ , 11111..H..-- N m 1 5/16"-18 bolt, flange washer, and cable 2 Cable bracket assembly clamps on the cable bracket 3 Elongated M8x16 bolt holes for tilt 4 M8 xl6mm button-head bolts, which fasten adjustment the cable bracket assembly to the AP r , • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide' 3-12 1 OL-32138-01 I I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Strand Mount Kit 2 Step 3 Place the cable bracket, attached to the AP,on the cable strand,with each pair of cable clamps clamping on to the cable strand. Then,tighten the cable clamps by tightening the two 5/16"-18 nuts to 13 to 15 lb.ft (17.6 to 20.3 Nm). See Figure 3-7 Figure 3-7 Attaching the Cable Mount Brackets to the Cable Strand - , U U U rttAlk 61.11, 4 >A r1� i�� asje a r /1-=„rIty , is, 1 _ (0 ,, r-s-, • "fc, 1 Cable Strand/Support Cable running 2 Cable bracket assembly though center cable grooves 3 5/16"-18 bolt, flange washer, and 4 M8 xl6mm button-head bolts,which fasten the cable clamps,which clamp the cable bracket assembly to the AP support cable to the cable bracket Note During installation, the cable strand/support cable might have to be pulled away from the fiber or cable bundle. Be sure to resecure the cable after installation. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point II Strand Mount Kit 3 Note The strand support cable and the SMK2 kit together provide the grounding for the access point. Step 4 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." Strand Mount Kit 3 The Strand Mount Kit 3 (abbreviated as SMK3) is used when you have large external antennas mounted to the AP using external antenna mounts such as AIR-ACCAMK1= The SMK3 can accommodate a 3.6 inch cable bundle between the support cable strand and the back surface of the AP (see Figure 3-9). The SMK3 can also accommodate up to 10 degrees of strand/cable droop. The SMK3 consists of these parts: • Height-adjustable strand mount cable brackets (see Figure 3-10) • Cable clamps (see Figure 3-10) • Fasteners (see Figure 3-10) For instructions on mounting an AP using SMK3, see Strand Mounting Using SMK3, page 3-15 Figure 3-8 SMK3 Cable Clamps and Cable Bracket Assembly Dimensions in inches(and millimeters] A ♦1111.1 e� 01.141111:1 era% • �♦ (r .11 [118.4 -80.3] O 4.66-3.16 CO) [91 4-53.3] 1 3.60-2.10 Onal v ��IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII�I�1_ IIIIII�1-1111111� [128.2] 5.05 [82.8] 3.26 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-14 OL-32138.01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Strand Mount Kit 3 � Figure 3-9 AP Mounted Using SMK3 - Dimensions in inches [and millimeters] r li�1 1,;. % [91.4-53.3] 3.60-2.10 A/ III I 1•♦714rI1�Pi1111 i;l'1lI11111 iIit: 'l` l nn158 [200.7 �,%I a 5 o v I III 7.90 1=111.111l ]7♦M A Strand Mounting Using SMK3 Wheh mounting the access point on a cable strand where you need to accommodate a cable bundle also, you must use SMK3 strand mount kit. Note The access point must be installed on a cable strand by a professional cable installer Table 3-2 lists the materials you need to strand mount the AP using SMK3 Table 3-3 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using SMK2 Material Needed In Kit? SMK3 strand mount kit Yes Four M8 xl6mm button-head bolts, and its washers Yes 5 mm hex wrench No 13 mm box-end wrench No To mount the access point, follow these steps. step I Assemble the cable clamps to the cable bracket, on both cable brackets (see Figure 3-10). Set the height of the cable brackets as required. You should hand-tighten the cable clamp nuts sufficiently enough to only prevent them from falling off. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I I Strand Mount Kit 3 Figure 3-10 Assembling Cable Clamps on Cable Bracket 1 61:Ott&- f 11%- IIII 5\ k.W. 1r / 51_ ; f - ai COO /0.--`*101111 ! 1 141F - 000001111 / 7:;40,141.4) fr.:)4 11 .. o liiii g th 1 5/16"-18 bolt 2 Cable Clamps 3 5/16"-18 nut with washer 4 M8 xl6mm bolt 5 5/16"-18 bolt and nut for the height-adjustable cable bracket i Step 2 Secure each cable bracket with two M8 x16 bolts (with lock washers) on the back surface of the access point. (Figure 3-12).Hand-tighten the bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). i P Tip When installing external antennas, which are mounted on the AP using an additional antenna bracket, the AP may tilt to one side due to the uneven weight distribution.'To counteract this tilt,elongated M8x16 bolt holes are provided on the cable bracket. This allows you to adjust the cable brackets' position against the AP's back surface,to cancel the tilt. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide , 3-16 0L-32138-01 I L Chapter3 MountingtheAccessPoint Strand Mount Kit 3 •1.1 Figure 3-11 Cable Brackets Attached to Back Surface of Access Point 0 0 �lr'el y 1 COv., _ @ ►�1r- 1 ."11111111111111 00. 40 1 Height-adjustable cable brackets. 2 5/16"-18 bolts and holes'used for adjusting and the height of the cable brackets. 3 4 M8x16 mm button-head bolts in 5 5/16"-18 bolt,flange washer,and cable elongated holes for tilt adjustment. clamps on the cable bracket. These fasten the cable bracket assembly to the AP n Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I III Strand Mount Kit 3 Step 3 Place the cable bracket,attached to the AP,on the cable strand,with each pair of cable clamps clamping on to the cable strand.Then,tighten the cable clamps by tightening the two 5/16"-18 nuts to 13 to 15 lb.ft (17.6 to 20.3 Nm). See Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12 Attaching the Cable Mount Brackets to the Cable Strand - O 3 ` c -r--11 H . fai ,.N. r tea' 0 ' • 1i'lr111111011* - VCO t10-1*Irlit:i I Cftftiftimiumerno - Yr co .:, 1 5/16"-18 bolt,flange washer, and 4 5/16"-18 bolt and nut for the height-adjustable , cable clamps, which clamp the cable bracket support cable to the height-adjustable cable bracket 2 Cable bracket assembly 5 M8 xl6mm button-head bolts,which fasten the cable bracket assembly to the AP 3 Cable Strand/Support Cable running 6 5/16"-18 bolt and1nut for the height-adjustable though center cable grooves cable bracket Note During installation, the cable strand/support cable might have to be pulled away from the fiber • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-1 8 OL-32138-01 I I, Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 1 1. or cable bundle. Be sure-to resecure the cable after installation. Note The strand support cable and the SMK2 kit together provide the grounding for the access point. step 4 , Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." Pole Mount Kit 1 The Pole Mount Kit 1 (abbreviated as PMK1) can be used to vertically mount the AP on a vertical poie. > Poles of diameter-ranging from 2 to 6,inches (50 to 152 mm) are supported. PMK1 consists of a one-piece pole moucnt bracket, and two adjustable steel band straps. Figure 3-13 shows the one-piece pole mount bracket PMK1 kit. Note PMK1 maintains a very low profile with only a 1 0 inch clearance between the pole and the AP Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 01-32138-01 1 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Pole Mount Kit 1 Figure 3-13 ;PMK1 One-Piece Pole Mounting Bracket O 4111111141 ®— 4444441 ,p/ t )1111j f b 1 and 3 Key hole slots for the four M8 x 12mm hex 2 and 4 Slots for passing the steel band straps through. head bolts,using which the AP is mounted on PMK1 For mounting the AP using PMK1, see Pole Mounting Using PMK1, page 3-20 Pole Mounting Using PMK1 You can use PMK1 for vertically mounting the AP on vertical poles,with diameters ranging from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 152 mm).Ensure that you have the materials listed in Table 3-4 to mount the AP Table 3-4 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using PMK1 Material Needed In Kit? One PMK1 pole mount bracket Yes Four M8 xl2mm hex head bolts with built-in washers Yes Two stainless steel band straps(adjustable to fit poles of 2—6 Yes inches, 50-152 mm). These band straps have a pull-lock-tighten system. 13 mm box-end wrench No 5/16 socket head wrench for tightening the steel band straps No • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-20 01-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 1 1.1 A typical installation using PMK1 is show in Figure 3-15 To mount the access point onto a vertical pole\or streetlight pole, follow these steps: 1 - i Step 1 Select a mounting location on the pole to mount the access point. Note If you will be using a streetlight power tap adapter, position the access point within 3 ft(1 m) of the outdoor light control. The AC/DC adapter must be used with street light power tap. Step 2 Slide the two band straps through the top and bottom set of mounting slots on the mounting brackets, and then hold the bracket up against the pole. Step 3 Wrap the band straps around the pole, lock them and then lightly tighten the clamps using the 5/16 socket head wrench. Only tighten them enough to keep the bracket from sliding down the pole. Step 4 Screw a M8 x 12mm hex head bolt into each of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point._ Do not screw the bolt in all the way Leave a gap of about 0 13 inch (3.3 mm). Refer Figure 3-14 Step 5 Position the four bolts on the access point into the bracket's keyhole slots. Check to be sure that the access point is properly seated in the slots.Refer Figure 3-14 Note Ensure that the access point should be positioned with its base facing the ground so that the LEDs on the base can be viewed from the ground. - Step 6 Using a 13 mm wrench,tighten the four M8 bolts that connect the access point to the bracket to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 7 Tighten the band straps with the wrench so that the access point does not slide on the pole. Ensure that the straps are tight enough to not let the AP move.Refer Figure'3-15 Step 8 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." ti ' 1 7- Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I I Pole Mount Kit 1 Figure 3-14 Exploded view of PMK1 used to Vertically Mount an AP1572E07 4tli a k h, •- O�ti i� 1. I lit 1I , i. 0 1 I s 69 MO )‘C, ,,____"...,.., 1,I4 ''. 0111 ;;��;. pilt 4 f MI TO M 1 PMK1 2 M8 x 12mm hex head bolt 3 Stainless steel band straps r S r I L i • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-22 01-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 U Figure 3-15 AP1572E Vertically Mounted on Vertical Pole with PMK1 �Tn'• Q 0 filo 0 1 � f 1 Stainless steel band straps 2 M8 x 12mm hex head bolt 3 Vertical pole 4 PMK1 Pole Mount Kit 2 The Pole Mount Kit 2 (abbreviated as PMK2) can be used to vertically mount the AP on a vertical pole, a horizontal pole, or on an off-angle pole. Poles of diameter ranging from 2 to 16 inches are supported. This kit can also be used to vertically mount the AP on a wall. The PMK2 consists of these parts: • A wall mount bracket, for vertical mounting on walls (see Figure 3-17) • A pivot bracket(see Figure 3-18) • Two strap brackets (see Figure 3-19) • Two adjustable steel band straps The Pivot Bracket-and the Strap Brackets, are used only when mounting the AP on poles. By itself,the Wall Mount Bracket,is used for vertical mounting on the AP on walls.For more information, see Wall Mounting Using PMK2, page 3-40 When mounting the AP on poles, the Wall Mount Bracket is used along with the Pivot Bracket and the Strap Brackets. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I • Pole Mount Kit 2 When all three pieces of the PKM2 kit are assembled (see Figure 3-20), the pivot bracket attached to the wall mount bracket allows reorienting the PMK2 mount assembly by up to 90 degrees from vertical. This allows the AP to be vertically mounted on horizontal poles and off-angle poles: The pivot bracket also provides three sets of bolt holes for the strap brackets to attach, thereby supporting three pole diameter ranges. 2 to 6,6 to 11, and 11 to 16 inches(see Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19). For more information on vertically mounting the AP on poles, see Pole Mounting Using PMK2, page 3-29 , You can choose to discard the pivot bracket and attach the strap brackets directly to the wall mount bracket.However, this assembly can be used for vertically mounting the.AP only on vertical poles,with diameter ranging from 4 to 8 inches. See Vertically Mounting Without Pivot Bracket For 4 to 8 inches Vertical Pole,page 3-37 > , I , Figure 3-16 PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket Dimensions in inches(and millimeters] [139.60 • w 5.50 [104.14] 4 10 4 x 0.35 [63.50] 4— [29 46] 4 x fb.33 2.50 1 16 -LT/ 1 1 _ WALL MGM 11, ARROW UP jJ 1 I .`. I I L04-eelJ /d.U3 [215.901][2.88 ] r. C , [239.52] 8.50 9 43 i _ % [77.79] MOMS i 3.06 r r , P V , m n , I • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide i 3-24 ,, 01-32138-01 • 1 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 II Figure 3-17 PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket 0 r / d ;, /cj oci . -1, II 4.477 r� /PM © n c m )1/ - elf, , i-, hiii g 0 1 Key hole slots for the four M8 x 12mm hex 2 Curved slots for pivot bracket and head bolts,using which the AP is mounted on M8 x 12mm hex head bolts,which allows 4 PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket rotating the wall mount bracket against the pivot bracket. 3 Screw holes for fasteners to be used when and attaching PMK2 WaI Mount Bracket to a wall 5 , it 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Elm I OL-32138-01 r Chapter3 Mounting the Access Point -I • Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-18 Pivot Bracket with Adjustment Hole Locations 1- 24IN 0 6-11 IN I 0 11-76ON (7) 0 r ti 1 Pole diameter indicators 2 Bolt holes for pole diameters (11 to 16 inches indicated) Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-26 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the—Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 J Figure 3-19 Strap Brackets assembled on the Pivot Bracket i W > I I ,„ _.,._,______, i 1,,„L,„.. 'Iiy 1 02-6IN- i* 6-11 1N i - 011-16IN ,s, F. V� i 1 itr I ) ! a ,ex O l ` 0 C qi 1 i� 1 M8 x16mm bolts 2 Pivot bracket 3 Strap bracket(shown positioned for 11 to 16 inch diameter pole) 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01) Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point a Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-20 All Three Parts of PMK2 Assembled 5 0 fie) I � : JiJLkkti:j 0 1 PMk2 wall mount bracket 2 Key hole slots for the four M8 x 12mm hex head bolts, using which the AP is mounted on PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket 3 M8 xl6mm bolts, used to mount the strap 4 Strap brackets mounted on the pivot bracket brackets on to the pivot bracket (shown positioned for 6 to 11 inch diameter pole) 5 The axis around which the wall mount bracket 6 Pivot bracket can rotate on the pivot bracket.This allows for mounting on off-angle poles. 7 Key hole slots for the four M8 x 12mm hex 8 M8 xl6mm bolts, used to mount the wall head bolts,using which the AP is mounted-on mount bracket on to the pivot bracket PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-28 01-32138-01 4' 1 ' Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 III i Pole Mounting Using PMK2 You can use PMK2 for vertically mounting the AP on vertical poles,horizontal poles, and off-angle poles of diameter ranging from 2 to 16 inches.For more information, see Pole Mount Kit 2, page 3-23 Table 3-5 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using PMK2 Material Needed In Kit? One PMK2 wall mount bracket Yes Two PMK2 strap brackets Yes One PMK2 pivot bracket Yes Four M8 xl2mm hex head bolts Yes Eight M8 xl6mm bolts (with lock washers) Yes 13 mm box-end Trench and/or socket No Steel Band Strap banding tool (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=) No Tip If you need to vertically mount the AP on vertical poles of diameter ranging from 5 to 8 inches (127 to 203 mm),you can use PMK2 without the pivot bracket. See Vertically Mounting Without Pivot Bracket For 4 to 8 inches Vertical Pole To mount the AP using PMK2, follow these steps. step 1 Position the strap brackets on the pivot bracket according to the diameter of the pole. Secure each strap bracket with two M8 x16 bolts (with lock washers) and M8 nuts (Figure 3-21). Tighten'the bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 2 Select a mounting location on the pole to mount the access point. — For vertical poles,position the strap and pivot brackets assembly as shown in Figure 3-24 The pivot bracket is oriented vertically — For horizontal poles, position the strap and pivot brackets assembly as shown in Figure 3-25 The pivot bracket is oriented horizontally Note If you will be using a streetlight power tap adapter, position the access point within 3 ft (1 m) of the outdoor light control Step 3 Mount the strap and pivot brackets assembly at the mounting location on the pole, using the two band straps(refer Figure 3-23), as follows. — For pole diameters more than 3.5 inch (89 mm), loop each metal band strap twice through the slots on the strap brackets (see Figure 3-22). Follow the instructions provided with the band strap tool(BAND IT)(AIR-BAND-INST-TL=). — For pole diameters equal to or less than 3.5 inch (89 mm), loop each metal band strap twice through the slots on the strap brackets and also through the narrow space between the pole clamp bracket and the strap brackets(see Figure 3-22).This ensures maximum holding strength, especially for extreme environments. Following the instructions provided with the band strap tool (BAND IT) (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 r Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point 'I I. Pole Mount Kit 2 Caution Do not loop the metal band straps through the large open area between the pole clamp bracket and the strap brackets (see Figure 3-22), because this does not properly secure the access point. L Caution Position the strap and pivot brackets assembly on the pole as needed before tightening the metal band straps.After the metal band straps are tightened to the full tension, the strap and pivot brackets assembly's position on the pole cannot be adjusted unless the metal band straps are cut or disassembled. Step 4 Tighten the metal band straps using the banding strap tool (BAND IT) (Cisco AIR-BAND-INST-TL=) by following the operating instructions in the box with the tool. Ensure that the metal band straps are as tight as possible. Step 5 Hold the wall mount bracket against the pivot bracket such that the curved slots and the bolt holes line up. Step 6 Insert and hand-tighten four M8 x16 bolts'(with(flat and lock washers) into the bolt holes. Do not over tighten. Step 7 For off-angle poles, you can now rotate the mounting bracket as required. Rotate to ensure that the AP will be oriented vertically and that the LEDs on the base of the AP will be visible from the ground. Note The wall mount bracket can be rotated to up to 45°from the vertical,while attached to the pivot bracket. This allows you to compensate for the tilt of off-angle poles, such as tilted streetlight arms. Step 8 Make final adjustments, if needed, to the top edge of the wall mount bracket so that it is horizontal. Ensure such that the AP will be oriented vertically and that the LEDs on the base of the AP will be visible from the ground. Then tighten the bolts four bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 9 Screw an M8 bolt into each of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point. Do not screw the bolt in all the way Leave a gap of about 0 13 inch(3.3 mm). Step 10 Position the four bolts on the access point into the bracket's keyhole slots. Check to ensure that the access point is properly seated in the slots. (see Figure 3-26) Step 11 Using a 13 mm open-end or socket wrench, tighten the four bolts that connect the access point to the ( bracket to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 12 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." • 7 n • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-30 OL-32138-01 ti I, Chapter3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 1.1 , Figure 3-21 Strap Brackets attached to Pivot Bracket r v 2 T _ ...„.,-7,Q ram- ---, -: i ,. 02-6IN- f I 0 el 1 -0 611 IN t iI i _ il-i61N ��p I .y i 0 j 1 "4- ® i ;:: '1 I o 1 C p (!) r 1:!) ,5 1M8 x 16mm bolts (with lock washers) 3 Strap bracket (shown positioned for 11 J to 16 inch diameter pole) 2 Pivot bracket 9 1 l r Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 •� / Chapter3 Mounting the Access Point I li Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-22 Spaces and Slots for Looping Band Straps i MI Immil ., \� i C II El) 1l!� - M 1I I 1 Narrow space for looping metal band straps 2 Slots on Strap Brackets. To be used for through. To be done for poles of diameter looping metal band straps through, when 3.5 inches or less. mounting on poles of diameter more than , 3.5 inches. 3 Large open space which is not to be used for looping. • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-32 OL-32138-01 1 ' Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point 1 Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-23 Strap Bracket,-Pivot Bracket Assembly Mounted on Pole with Band Straps 2 3 } q;t I` O i A N - 2 3 4 1 Pivot bracket ,3 Metal band straps 2 Strap slot in Strap bracket i 4 Pole 1 • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 •� 1 r Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I I. Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-24 Wall Bracket Attached to Strap Bracket-Pivot Bracket Assembly for Vertical Pole O , am, 11' 4.�*'11�� © r • I*) m • 1 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap 2 Pole brackets to the pivot bracket.The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter, and the pivot bracket is in vertical orientation. 3 Metal band straps 4 Wall mount bracket, mounted on strap bracket-pivot bracket assembly 5 M8 xl6mm bolts, used to mount the wall mount bracket on to the pivot bracket • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-34 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 1.1 Figure 3-25 Wall Bracket attached to Strap Bracket-Pivot Bracket Assembly for Horizontal Pole 0 0 s" III I'• 1 Pole 2 Metal band straps 3 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap 4 M8 xl6mm bolts, used to mount the wall brackets to the pivot bracket. The strap 'mount bracket on to the pivot bracket brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter,and the pivot bracket is in horizontal orientation. 5 Wall mount bracket, mounted on strap bracket-pivot bracket assembly Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I 111 Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-26 AP1572E Vertically Mounted on Vertical Pole using PMK2 Kit tri 0 I ri I I I II11 /l r rl ' I 1 M8x12mm bolts, used to fasten the AP to the 2 Pole PMK2 wall mount bracket 3 Metal band straps 4 Pivot bracket 5 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap brackets to the pivot bracket.The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter, and the pivot bracket is in vertical orientation. J Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-36 OL-32138-01 I` I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 2 • Vertically Mounting Without Pivot Bracket For 4 to 8 inches Vertical Pole If you need to vertically mount the AP on vertical poles of diameter ranging from 4 to 8 inches (102 to 203 mm),you can use PMK2 without the pivot bracket. In this case, you fix the PMK2 strap brackets directly to the PMK2 wall mount bracket. Step 1 Position the strap brackets on the wall mount bracket as shown in Figure 3-27 Step 2 Secure each strap bracket with two M8 x16 bolts (with lock washers). Tighten the bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft (17'.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 3 Select a mounting location on the pole to mount the access point. Step 4 Mount the strap and wall-mount brackets assembly to the pole using the two metal band straps (refer Figure 3-28). Ensure such that the AP will be oriented vertically and that the LEDs on the base of the AP will be visible from the ground. Loop each band strap twice through the slots on the strap bracket, and then tighten the band straps using the band strap tool (BAND IT) (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=). Follow the operating instructions provided by tool's manufacturer to tighten the metal bands to full tension. Note Installing and final tightening of the band straps are done together After the metal bands are tightened to full tension,,the position of the AP on the pole cannot be adjusted unless the metal bands are cut or disassembled. Step 5 ScreW an M8 x 12 mm bolt into each of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point. Do not screw the bolt in all the way Leave a gap of abqut 0 13 inch(3.3 mm). Step 6 Position the four bolts on the access point into the bracket's keyhole slots. Check to ensure that the access point is properly seated in the slots. (refer Figure 3-28) Step 7 Using a 13mm wrench, tighten the four bolts that connect the access point to the bracket to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 8 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." C ti Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point 1 • Pole Mount Kit 2 Figure 3-27 PMK2 Strap Brackets directly attached to PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket 0 � O 6 . C � 3 1 M 1 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap 2 PMK2 wall mount bracket brackets to the wall mount bracket 3 PMK2 strap brackets • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-38 OL-32138-01' i Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point - Pole Mount Kit 2 Ill Figure 3-28 Exploded view of PMK2 mount without Pivot Bracket for 4 to 8 inches Vertical Pole i y5 alIH! _` l ' 9 ! . //1_.:_,.1 -1... ) ------, -_ 101 cSt Aii I 0 i i 1 '-141 _ <<i' 0 Ilk1010-411111111,-.- A i...... , 0 N ,r m ,., N 0, U M \ 1 PMK2 wall mount bracket 2 M8x12mm bolts,used to fasten the AP to the PMK2 wall mount bracket 3 M8x16mm bolts used to attach`the strap 4 Band straps brackets to the wall mount bracket ,- l F , Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Pole Mount Kit 2 Wall Mounting Using PMK2 - To vertically mount the AP on a wall,you can use PMK2 without the pivot bracket and the strap brackets. Using only the PMK2 wall mount bracket,you can vertically mount the AP on a wall.For more information about PMK2, see Pole Mount Kit 2,page 3-23 Table 3-6 Materials Needed to Mount the AP on a Wall using PMK2 Material Needed In Kit? One PMK2 wall mount bracket 1 Yes Four M8 xl2mm hex head bolts Yes The mounting hardware and tools required to secure the No PMK2 Wall Mount Bracket,to wall or vertical surface, depends on the material of the wall or vertical surface. The mounting surface,attaching screws,and optional wall anchors you may use, must be able to support a 50-lb (22.7 kg) static weight. 13 mm box-end wrench No Caution The mounting surface, attaching screws, and optional wall anchors must be able to support a 50-lb (22.7 kg) static weight, and should conform to all local codes and regulations. To mount the access point on a vertical wall, follow these instructions: Step 1 Use the wall mount bracket as a template to mark four screw hole locations on your mounting surface. The recommended screw hole locations are shown in Figure 3-17 The dimensions of the wall mount bracket are shown in Figure 3-16 Step 2 _ Using four screws and optional screw anchors, attach the wall mount bracket to the wall.Ensure that the four screws are fully tightened. S, I Note If necessary, use suitable screw anchors and an exterior-grade plywood backboard to mount the access point to stucco, cement, or drywall. Step 3 Screw an MS bolt into each of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point. Do not screw the bolt in all the way Leave a gap of about 0 13 inch(3.3 mm). Step 4 Position the four bolts on the access point into the bracket's keyhole slots. Check to be sure that the access point is properly seated in the slots. Step 5 Using a 13mm wrench, tighten the four bolts that connect the access point to the bracket to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 6 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-40 ' 01-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 3 Pole Mount Kit 3 The Pole Mount Kit 3 (abbreviated as PMK3) can be used to horizontally mount the AP on a vertical pole, a horizontal pole, or on an off-angle pole, that has a diameter of 2 to 16 inches. This kit can also be used to horizontally mount the AP on a wall. The PMK3 consists of these parts. • A wall mount bracket for horizontal mounting (see Figure 3-30) • A pivot bracket, same as that in PMK2 (see Figure 3-18) Two strap brackets, same as those in PMK2.(see Figure 3-19) • Two adjustable steel band straps Figure 3-18 illustrates the pole diameter indicators and bolt holes on the pivot bracket. The Pivot Bracket and the Strap Brackets, are used only when mounting the AP on poles. By itself,the PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket,is used for horizontally mounting on the AP on walls.For more, information, see Wall Mounting Using PMK3, page 3-50 When mounting the AP on poles, the Wall Mount Bracket is used along with the Pivot Bracket and.the Strap Brackets. When all three pieces of the PKM3 kit are assembled, the pivot bracket attached to the wall mount bracket allows reorienting the PMK2 mount assembly by up to 90 degrees from vertical. This allows the AP to be vertically mounted on horizontal poles and off-angle poles. The pivot bracket also provides three sets of bolt holes for the strap brackets to attach, thereby supporting three pole diameter ranges: 2 to 6, 6 to' 11, and 11 to 16 inches (see Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19). For more information on horizontally mounting the AP on poles, see Pole Mounting Using PMK3, page 3-43 Figure 3-29 PMK3 Wall Mount Brackett Dimensions in inches[and millimeters] [215.90] 8.50 167.60] 6.60 [63.50] 2.50 ] 4 x 0.35 4x 95.33 / III_.. /O ' • [73.03] 0 [141.47] 2.88 5.57 [98.70] 3.89 Ci [33.34] 1.31 Ili• M [104.14] 4.10 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Inn OL-32138-01 1 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Pole Mount Kit 3 Figure 3-30 PMK3 ball Mounting Bracket for Mounting AP Horizontally 0 (4) \ 0 1 Key hole slots for three of the four M8 x 2 ' Screw holes for fasteners to be used when 12mm hex head bolts, using which the AP is and . attaching PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket to a mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. 4 wall. 3 Curved slots for pivot bracket M8 x 12mm hex 5 Screw hole for one of the four M8 x head bolts,which allows rotating the wall 12mm hex head bolts,using which the AP mount bracket against the pivot bracket. is mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. When this bolt alone fastens the AP to the wall mount bracket,then it can be used to as pivot to rotate the AP outwards for easy access to ports 7 and 8: • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-42 OL-32138-01 I , I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 3 1.1 Pole Mounting Using PMK3 You can use PMK3 for horizontally mounting the AP on vertical poles,horizontal poles,and on off-angle poles of diameter ranging from 2 to 16 inches. For more information about PMK3, see Pole Mount Kit 3,page 3-41 Table 3-7 Materials Needed to Mount the AP using PMK3 Material Needed In Kit? One PMK3 wall mount bracket Yes Two PMK3 strap brackets Yes One PMK3 pivot bracket Yes Four M8 xl2mm hex head bolts Yes Eight M8 xl6mm bolts (with lock washers) Yes. Two 0 75 inches (19 mm) stainless steel band straps Yes (adjustable 2—6 inches, 50-406 mm) 13 mm box-end wrench No Steel Band Strap banding tool (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=) No To mount the AP using PMK3, follow these steps. Step 1 Position the strap brackets on the pivot bracket according to the diameter of the pole. Secure each strap bracket with two M8 x(16 bolts (with lock washers) and M8 nuts (Figure 3-21). Tighten the bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 2 Select a mounting location on the pole to mount the access point. — For vertical poles, position the strap and pivot brackets assembly as shown in Figure 3-32. The pivot bracket is oriented vertically — For horizontal poles, position the strap and pivot brackets assembly as shown in Figure 3-33 The pivot bracket is oriented horizontally Note If you will be using a streetlight power tap adapter, position the access point within 3 ft(1 m) of the outdoor light control Step 3 Mount the strap and pivot brackets assembly at the mounting location on the pole,'using the two band straps,as follows. — For pole diameters more than 3.5 inch (89 mm), loop each metal band strap twice through the slots on the strap brackets (see Figure-3-22). Follow the instructions provided with the band strap tool(BAND IT) (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=). — For pole diameters equal to or less than 3.5 inch (89 mm), loop each metal band strap twice through the slots on the strap brackets and also through the narrow space between the pole clamp bracket and the strap brackets(see Figure 3-22).This ensures maximum holding strength, especially for extreme environments. Following the instructions provided with the band strap tool(BAND IT) (AIR-BAND-INST-TL=). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 t � Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I MI Pole Mount Kit 3 L Caution Do not loop the metal band straps through the large open area between the pole clamp bracket and the strap brackets (see Figure 3-22), because this does not properly secure the access point. Caution Position the strap and pivot brackets assembly on the pole as needed before tightening the metal band straps.After the metal band straps are tightened to the full tension, the strap and pivot brackets assembly's position on the pole cannot be adjusted unless the metal band straps are cut or disassembled. Step 4 Tighten the metal band straps using the banding strap tool (BAND IT) (Cisco AIR-BAND-INST-TL=) by following the operating instructions in the box with the tool. Ensure that the metal band straps are as tight as possible. Step 5 Hold the PMK3 horizontal wall mount bracket against the pivot bracket such that the curved slots and the bolt holes line up. Step 6 Insert and hand-tighten four M8 x16 bolts (with flat and lock washers) into the bolt holes. Do not over tighten. Step 7 For off-angle poles, you can now rotate the mounting bracket as required. Rotate to ensure that the AP will be oriented vertically and that the LEDs on the base of the AP will be visible from the ground. 2 Note The horizontal wall mount bracket can be rotated to up to 45° from the vertical, while attached to the pivot bracket. This allows you to compensate for the tilt of off-angle poles, such as tilted streetlight arms. Step 8 Make final adjustments, if needed, to the top edge of the horizontal wall mount bracket so that it is horizontal. Ensure such that the AP will be oriented vertically and that the LEDs on the base of the AP will be visible from the ground. Then tighten the bolts four bolts to 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 9 Screw M8 bolts into three of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point (Screw holes 1, 4, and 5 in Figure 3-31) Do not screw in the bolts all the way Leave a gap of about 0 13 inch (3.3 mm). Step 10 Position the three bolts on the access point into the wall mount bracket's keyhole slots.Check to ensure that the access point is properly seated in the slots. (see Figure 3-34) Step 11 Screw in the fourth M8 x 12mm hex head bolt into the non-keyhole type screw hole (Screw hole 6 in Figure 3-31). Using a 13 mm open-end or socket wrench,tighten all four M8 x 12mm hex head bolts to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Step 12 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-44 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the AccessPOint Pole Mount Kit 3 Figure 3-31 Keyhole type Screw Holes and the Non-keyhole type Screw Hole 0 II © (' ® ,' • C0 IV"), IL r c 1 1,4, Keyhole type slots for three of the four M8 2 AP's GPS antenna connector port and x 12mm hex head bolts,using which the AP 5 is mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. 3 Spot for mounting GPS antenna on the back 6 Screw hole for one of the four M8 x 12mm of the AP hex head bolts, using,which the AP is mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. When this bolt alone fastens the.AP to the wall mount bracket,then it can be used to as pivot to rotate the AP outwards for easy access to ports 7 and 8. n Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Elm OL-32138-01 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I • Pole Mount Kit 3 Figure 3-32 Wall Bracket Attached to Strap Bracket-Pivot Bracket Assembly for Vertical Pole (- ---- 0 1 ," /ATV ti\ �m� Ifi)�� o7 ,.._.0\i00.0 3 o- 6 1 #7.4 _, c — , n , ,N„._ ,._ , 5 I _ , 1 Key hole slots for three of the four M8 x 2 Pole 12mm hex head bolts, using which the AP is mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. 3 Metal band straps 4 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap brackets to the pivot bracket. The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter, and the pivot bracket is in vertical orientation. 5 M8 xl6mm bolts, used to mount the wall 6 Screw hole for one of the four M8 x 12mm mount bracket on to the pivot bracket hex head bolts, using which the AP is mounted on PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket. When this bolt alone fastens the AP to the wall mount bracket,then it can be used to as pivot to rotate the AP outwards for easy access to ports 7 and 8. 1 r 9 II Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-46 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 3 1 III Figure 3-33 Wall Bracket attached to Strap Bracket-Pivot Bracket Assembly for Horizontal Pole Q o , % _ ,,N, \c,1 40/ 1111111111111111 —_ 0I) 'ZA` • ( , It /--",19- 6 . co cp co co co 1 PMK3 wall mount bracket 2 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap brackets to the pivot bracket.The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter, and the pivot bracket is in i horizontal orientation. 3 Pole 4 Metal band straps 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 3-47 t Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I I. Pole Mount Kit 3 Figure 3-34 AP15721 Horizontally Mounted on Horizontal Pole using PMK3 Kit 0 1 , 0 , . --; -- Iii, e 11,11, \\ II 0 ..,:i_1:0, 'r--'• N o 1 Pole 2 Metal band straps r 3 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap 4 PMK3 wall mount bracket brackets to the pivot bracket. The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter,and the pivot bracket is in horizontal orientation. \ 1 I • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-48 OL-32138-01 sI I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point f Pole Mount Kit 3 1.1 f I , Figure 3-35 AP15721 Horizontally Mounted on Vertical Pole using PMK3 Kit 1 / 1 2 < Q y, \ QT !, - / - 111.1111.1 . e 0 �l �� .III .,\ 0 7.,. .. ) 1 PMK3 wall mount bracket 2 M8x16mm bolts used to attach the strap brackets to the pivot bracket.The strap brackets are set for pole of 6 to 11 inches diameter, and the pivot bracket is in horizontal orientation. 3 Pole 4 Metal band straps i r V Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 01.-32138-01 3-49 Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point I Pole Mount Kit 3 ): Wall Mounting Using PMK3 To horizontally mount the AP on a wall,you can use PMK3 without the pivot bracket and the strap brackets. Using only the PMK3 wall mount bracket, you can horizontally mount the AP on a wall. For more information about PMK3,see Pole Mount Kit 3, page 3-41 Table 3-8 Materials Needed to Mount the AP on a Wall using PMK2 Material Needed In Kit? One PMK2 wall mount bracket Yes Four M8 xl2mm hex head bolts Yes Four M8 x1.25x16 bolts (with lock washers) Yes 10 mm box-end wrench 1 No The mounting hardware and tools required to secure the No PMK3 Wall Mount Bracket,'to wall or vertical,surface, depends on the material of the wall or vertical surface. The mounting surface,attaching screws,and optional wall anchors you may use, must be able to support a 50-lb (22.7 kg)static weight. lA Caution The mounting surface, attaching screws, and optional wall anchors must be able to support a 50-lb (22.7 kg) static weight, and should conform to all local codes and regulations. To mount the access point on a vertical wall, follow these instructions: Step 1 Use the wall mount bracket as a template to mark four screw hole locations on your mounting surface. ( The recommended screw hole locations are shown in Figure 3-30 The dimensions of the PMK3 wall mount bracket is shown in Figure 3-29 Step 2 Using four screws and optional screw anchors, attach the wall mount bracket to the wall.Ensure that the four screws are fully tightened. Note If necessary, use suitable screw anchors and an exterior-grade plywood backboard to mount the access point to stucco, cement,or drywall. Step 3 Screw M8 bolts into three of the four bolt holes on the back side of the access point (Screw holes 1, 4, and 5 in Figure 3-31). Do not screw in the bolts all the way Leave a gap of about 0 13 inch (3.3 mm). Step 4 Position the three bolts on the access point into the wall mount bracket's keyhole slots.Check to ensure that the access point is properly seated in the slots. (see Figure 3-34) , Step 5 Screw in the fourth M8 x 12mm hex head bolt into the non-keyhole type screw hole (Screw hole 6 in Figure 3-31). , Using a 13 mm open-end or socket wrench,tighten all four M8 x 12mm hex head bolts to a torque of 13 to 15 lb.ft(17.6 to 20.3 Nm). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 3-50 ) OL-32138-01 I Chapter 3 Mounting the Access Point Pole Mount Kit 3 I Step 6 Continue with installing antennas, connecting the data cables, grounding the access point, and powering the access point. For information on these, see Chapter 4, "Installing Other Components." Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 1 I ( ^�ill f 1 1 1p{ ;'t0.l,rai M ( g.( dr iijr 4di ,.,v- r V E" M ..._ '} I ilpAtaii5 [ t r1 -.fir r ,: , , .4....4 z. 3 1!1 °t —,a, F a S sc4iR y S d ... .="4=,.--e L-_.yam_ ^—'--", P:-r Iza Yip,d ., _ - - e- './ 1 1 -. \\x_FI. A P T<E R J. s{'° �, r Ors -ti .`Y'�^-, ._,pa,• ,r-/ , Y' Installing Other Components This chapter contains information on AP accessories and instructions on installing antennas, grounding the AP, and powering the AP It contains the following sections: L • Supported Antennas, page 4-2 • Installing External Antennas, page 4-4 , • Grounding the Access Point, page 4-12 • Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP, page 4-13 • Powering the Access Point, page 4-16 • Installing the GPS Antenna, page 4-30 • Installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts, page 4-34 • What to do after hardware installation, page 4-35 7 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-1 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I Supported Antennas Supported Antennas All versions of 1570 series access points have 4x4.3 2.4 GHz radios and 4x4.3 5 GHz radios. J V AP1572I Internal Antennas , AP1572I has four internal dual band antennas. The maximum 2.4 GHz gain is 4 dBi. The maximum 5 GHz gain is 6 dBi. AP1572E External Antennas AP1572E has four dual band antenna ports, to which external antennas can be mounted to or connected / to, as specified in Table 4-1 Note When operating in the 5GHz UNII-1 band, all Omni Directional antennas should be installed vertically, and all directional antennas should be installed with the main beam aimed parallel to or tilted down toward the horizon. r Table 4-1 Supported External Antennas for AP1572E Operating Peak No.of No.of Frequency Gain in Ports Antennas Antenna Band Range (MHz) dBi Type Required Supported Mounting AIR-ANT2568VG-N= Dual 2400 - 2490 6 (2G) Omni 1 4' Mounted directly 5250 - 5925_ 8 (5G) on AP AIR-ANT2547VG-N Dual 2400 - 2483 4 (2G) Omni 1 4 Mounted directly 5150 - 5875 7 (5G) Ion AP AIR-ANT2588P3M-N= Dual 2400 - 2500 8 (2G) Directional 3 11 I Not mounted .on 5150 - 5900 8 (5G) the AP'Mounted separately and then connected to the AP via coaxial cables. AIR-ANT2513P4M-N Dual 2400 - 2500 13 (2G) Directional 4 1 Not mounted on 5150 - 5900 13 (5G) the AP Mounted separately and then connected to the AP via coaxial cables. AIR-ANT2420V-N 2.4 GHz 2400 - 2500 2 Omni 1 2 Mounted directly on AP AIR-ANT2450V-N 2.4 GHz 2400 - 2484 5 , Omni 1 2 Mounted directly on AP AIR-ANT2480V-N 2.4 GHz 2400 - 2484 8 Omni 1 2 Mounted directly on AP Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-2 OL-32138-01 I ` , I I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Supported Antennas Operating Peak No.of No.of Frequency Gain in Ports Antennas Antenna Band Range (MHz) dBi Type Required Supported Mounting AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= 2.4 GHz 2400 - 2500 13 Directional 2' 1 Mounted on the AP `, using AIR-ACCAMK1= AIR-ANT5140V-N 5 GHz 5250 - 5875 4 Omni 1 12 Mounted directly on AP AIR-ANT5180V-N 5 GHz 4900 - 5850 8 Omni 1 2 Mounted directly on AP AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= 5 GHz j 5150 - 5900 14 Directional 2 1 Mounted on the AP using AIR-ACCAMK1= AIR-ANT5114P-N= 5 GHz 5150 - 5900 14 Directional 2 2 Not mounted on the AP Mounted separately and then connected to the AP via coaxial cables. Non-Cisco Antennas Cisco does not support any third-party antennas.RF connectivity and compliance of third party antennas is the customer's responsibility Cisco does not recommend any third-party antennas, and Cisco Technical Assistance Center will not be able to provide any support for third-party antennas. Cisco's FCC Part 15 compliance is only guaranteed with Cisco antennas or antennas that are of the same design and gain as Cisco antennas. Antenna Configurations All versions of the 1570 series access points contain a 4x4.3 2.4 GHz radio and a 4x4:3 5 GHz radio, which are connected to physical antennas/antenna ports numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4. These radios can be configured for both dual-band (both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz signals coming from the same antenna ports) and single band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz signals coming from different antennas / antenna ports). The 2.4 and 5 GHz radios connected to these antennas/antenna ports are user configurable as follows: • The maximum number of active Tx/Rat antennas/antenna ports paths for both the 2.4 and 5 GHz '4x4 radios is restricted to the modes of operation set forth in Section 3.2.7 • The allowable configurations for the 5 GHz radio are: Active Antennas/ Ports \ Mode 1 2 3 4 2x2 Single Band Yes Yes 2x2 Dual Band Yes Yes 3x3 Dual Band Yes Yes Yes 4x4 Dual Band Yes Yes Yes Yes r Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 01-3213S-01 4-3 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I Installing External Antennas • The allowable configurations for the 2.4 GHz radio are: Active Antennas/ Ports Mode 1 2 3 4 2x2 Single Band Yes Yes 2x2 Dual Band Yes Yes 3x3 Dual Band Yes, Yes Yes 4x4 Dual Band Yes Yes Yes Yes Installing External Antennas Note Before connecting power to the access point, ensure that the antennas are attached to the access.point See the section "Supported Antennas" section on page 4-2 for details of the antennas supported by the 1572 series access points. For installation instructions and detailed information on an antenna, refer to that particular antenna's document located at: http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/wireless/aironet-antennas-accessories/products-installation-guid es- list.html Follow all safety precaution's when installing the antennas. For information on safety, refer to "Safety Precautions when Installing Antennas" section on page 2-6. Note Omnidirectional antennas are vertically polarized and should be mounted vertically Not When operating in the 5GHz UNII-1 band, all Omni Directional antennas should be installed vertically, and all directional antennas should be installed with the main beam aimed parallel to or tilted down toward the horizon. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-4 OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing External Antennas � Antenna N-Type Connector Locations The AP 1572E access point version has two N-type antenna connectors located on the base and two N-type antenna connectors on the head of the access point. The N-type connectors support variety of the Cisco Aironet antennas. For detailed information on these antennas, refer to Antenna Configurations, in chapter 1 Figure 4-1 shows the antenna port locations on the AP Figure 4-1 Antenna Port Locations-AP Face View ' 3 4 0 , o //��70D.(�a00c II / 0 •I NN m 1 2 1 Antenna port 1- Type N connector(with cap) 2 Antenna port 2 - Type N connector(with cap) 3 Antenna port 3 - Type N connector(with cap) 4 - Antenna port 4 - Type N connector(with cap) Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 4-5 e ' Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing External Antennas External Antenna Mounting Configurations Omni Antennas Omni antennas can be mounted directly to the access point(see Figure 4-2). The supported omni antennas are: • AIR-ANT2547V-N • AIR-ANT2547VG-N • AIR-ANT2568VG-N • AIR-ANT2440V-N • AIR-ANT2450V-N • AIR-ANT2480V-N • AIR-ANT5140V-N • AIR-ANT5180V-N The AP should always be operated with four omni antennas attached for best performance. If you decide to use less than four antennas,ensure that the unused antenna ports are properly covered with an appropriate N-male connector cap (Cisco provides a kit of 10 such caps in AIR-ACC15-N-CAP=). Figure 4-2 AIR-CAP1572EAC-x-K9 with AIR-ANT2547VG-N I I l � � s AIR-ANT2513P4M-N= The AP1572 can be used with a directional antenna that connects via cables (either directly attached to the antenna or with separate cables). See Figure 4-3 AIR-ANT2513P4M-N= comes with its own mounting kit that will allow it to be mounted to the same pole or wall where the AP1572 is also mounted.Four N-male to N-male cables (such as AIR-CAB005LL-N=) are required to connect the antenna to the AP Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing External Antennas � Figure 4-3 AIR-CAP1572EAC-x-K9 with AIR-ANT2513P4M-N= 4 `. ' 9 r a all ! I AIR-ANT2588P3M-N= The AIR-ANT2588P3M-N=comes with its own mounting kit which allows,it to be mounted to the same pole or wall where the AP1572 is mounted. Three N-male to N-male cables (such as AIR-CABOOSLL-N=) are required to connect the antenna to the AP Connect the cables to Ports 1,2, and 3 and install an N-male cap on Port 4 See Figure 4-4 Figure 4-4 AIR-CAP1572EAC-x-K9 with AIR-ANT2588P3M-N= cCa 4 te' ' ' 1111H1Y1' 1i1E 1'44 / Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I 01-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I IN Installing External Antennas AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= and AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= The AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= and AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= antennas come with their own mounting kits which will allow them to be mounted on the same pole or wall where the AP1572 is mounted. These antennas come with two attached cables to connect directly to the AP The AP should be placed in single band antenna mode and AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= should be\connected to Antenna Ports 1 and 2, and AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= should be connected/to Antenna Ports 3 and 4 on the AP See Figure 4-5 Using an optional antenna mounting bracket kit,the directional antennas AIR-ANT2413P2M-N andAIR- ANT5114P2M-N can also be mounted directly on the AP1572EC access point in a strand mount orpole mount environment. The antenna bracket kit contains four bracket sections and fasteners that you can assemble in multiple configurations to position and aim the directional antenna in a range of positions. For more information on mounting the antenna with the optional mounting bracket, refer to Installing Directional Antenna Mounting Kits on Cisco 1550 Series Outdoor Mesh Access Points, at the following URL. http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/access j,oint/1550/quick/guide/1550antbracket.html Figure 4-5 AIR-CAP1572EAC-x-K9 with AIR-ANT2413P2M-N= and AIR-ANT5114P2M-N= to 6 � 0 1 "A' 1 i', IlLd—hi IBM 1 Weatherproofing the Type N Connector Joint Note The following is a general procedure for weatherproofing a Type N connector joint. Step 1 Ensure that the type N connectors are clean and dry Step 2 Apply the oxide inhibitor paste with a Q-tip to each connector pin and the receptacle interiors of both the connectors. This ensures an airtight and watertight seal between the connectors. 2 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-8 OL-32138-01 I 1 I -Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing External Antennas Step 3 Fasten the antenna cable's N-type male connector to the access point's N-type male connector and tighten as directed in the antenna guide. Step 4 Wipe away any excess oxide inhibitor paste. Step 5 Tightly wrap the fastened connectors with two layers of electrical tape, such that the wrapping extends 1 inch past each end of the connection. Step 6 Tightly wrap the electrical tape layers with two layers of butyl mastic tape, such that the wrapping extends 1 inch past each end of the electrical tape wrapping. ' Your RF connection can now stay clean and dry for a long time. i Detailed Documentation for all Supported External Antennas For detailed information on supported antennas, refer the following links. • Cisco Aironet Dual-Band Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT2568VG-N) http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2568vgn.html • Cisco Aironet Dual-Band Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT2547VG-N) http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2547vgn.html • Cisco Aironet 2.4-GHz/5-GHz 8-dBi Directional Antenna(AIR-ANT2588P3M-N) http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant25 8 8p3 m-n.html • Cisco Aironet Four-Port Dual-Band Polarization-Diverse Array Antenna (AIR-ANT2513P4M-N) http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2513p4mn.html • Cisco Aironet 5-dBi Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT2450V-N) http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2450v.html • Cisco Aironet 8-dBi Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT2480V-N) http://www.cisco:com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2480v.html • Cisco Aironet 2.4-GHz 13-dBi Directional Antenna(AIR-ANT2413P2M-N) http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant2413 p2m-n.htm 1 • Cisco Aironet 4-dBi Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT5140V-R) http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant5140v.html • Cisco Aironet 8-dBi Omnidirectional Antenna(AIR-ANT5180V-N) http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant5180v.html • Cisco Aironet 5-GHz 14-dBi Directional Antenna(AIR-ANT5114P2M-N) http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/antenna/installation/guide/ant5114p2m-n.html • Cisco Aironet 14-dBi Patch Antenna(AIR-ANT5114P-N) http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wire less/antenna/installation/guide/ant5114P.html � e Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-9 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I 1.1 Installing a Lightning Arrestor Installing a Lightning Arrestor Overvoltage transients can be created through lightning static discharges, switch processes, direct contact with power lines, or through earth currents. The Cisco Aironet AIR-ACC245LA-N Lightning Arrestor limits the amplitude and duration of disturbing interference voltages and improves the over voltage resistance of in-line equipment,systems,and components.A lightning arrestor installed according to these mounting instructions balances the voltage potential,thus preventing inductive interference to parallel signal lines within the protected system. Installation Considerations Cisco recommends that you bulkhead mount the lightning arrestor so it can be installed as a wall-feed through on the wall of the protected space. The importance of obtaining a good ground and bonding connection cannot be overstressed. Consider these points when grounding the lightning arrestor • Connect the lightning arrestor components directly to the grounding point. • The contact points of the ground connection must be clean and free of dust and moisture. • Tighten threaded contacts to the torque specified by the manufacturer Installation Notes This lightning arrestor is designed to be installed between the antenna cable that is attached to an outdoor antenna and the Cisco Aironet wireless device. You can install the lightning arrestor either indoors or outdoors.It can be connected directly to a wireless device having an external N connector It can also be mounted inline or as a feed-through.Feed-through installations require 5/8 in.(16 mm)hole to accommodate the lightning arrestor Note This lightning arrestor is part of a lightning arrestor kit. The kit contains a lightning arrestor and a grounding lug. Note When you install the lightning arrestor, follow the regulations or best practices applicable to lightning protection installation in your local area. i Installing the Lightning Arrestor Outdoors If you install the lightning arrestor outdoors, use the supplied ground lug and a heavy wire (#6 solid copper)to connect it to a good earth ground, such as a ground rod. The connection should be as short as possible. 1 c Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-10 OL-32138.01 I l Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing a Lightning Arrestor 1.1 Figure 4-6 (Lightning Arrestor Details ii, , , i� lip z , - r /, cc At riA,„ ,. , c),,, ,,,...) aer , , , „3, ef ,... . IIIII ow 1 Nut 4 Unprotected side (to antenna) 2 Lockwasher 5 Protected side (to wireless device) 3 Ground lug Cable for the Lightning Arrestor Coaxial cable loses efficiency as the frequency increases, resulting in signal loss. The cable should be kept as short as possible because cable length also determines the amount of signal loss (the longer the run,the greater the loss). Cisco recommends a high-quality, low-loss cable for use with the lightning arrestor r l Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-1 1 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I Grounding the Access Point Grounding the Access Point The access point must be grounded before connecting power A Warning This equipment must be externally grounded using a customer-supplied ground wire before power is applied. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available.Statement 366 In all outdoor installations, you must follow these instructions to properly ground the case: Step 1 If using insulated 6-AWG copper ground wire, strip the insulation as required for the grounding lug. Step 2 Use the appropriate crimping tool to crimp the bare 6-AWG copper ground wire to the supplied grounding lug. S r Note The grounding lug and hardware used must comply with local and national electrical codes. Step 3 Open the anti-corrosion sealant(supplied), and apply a liberal amount over the metal surface where the ground strap screw holes are located(see Figure 4-7 below). Figure 4-7 Ground Strap Screw Holes Located on the Right Side of the AP ` 1 2 , © 6 sal l.� 0 , 0 2,1 ) i �...d..■ ! —JJ 1 DC power port, labeled"6" on the AP 3 Metal plate with screw holes for attaching the grounding lug 2 Console port, labeled "5" on the AP Step 4 Connect the grounding lug to the access point grounding screw holes using the supplied two Phillips head screws (M4 x10 mm)with lock washers. Tighten the grounding screw to 22 to'24 lb-in(2.49 to 2.71 Nm). ' • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-1 2 OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP III Step 5 Connect the other end of the ground wire to a reliable earth ground, such as a grounding rod or an appropriate grounding point on a metal streetlight pole that is grounded. - Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP The Cisco supplied fiber-optic kit enables the access point to support fiber-optic network connections. Your require the following materials for connecting the fiber-optic cable to the AP. • Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceiver module • SFP module adapter • SC or Duplex LC fiber-optic cables. The outer diameter of the fiber optic cable should be 0.24-0.47 inches(6-12 mm). • Cable gland. The cable gland cannot hold a cable with diameter more than 0 47" (12 mm). • Adjustable wrench You can connect the fiber-optic networking cable to the SFP port(labeled'4' on the base of the AP). The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceiver module is used to connect the cable to the SFP port. The SFP port provides both Power-over-Cable and backhaul over fiber options. To install the SFP transceiver module and the cable,follow this procedure: Step 1 Ensure that all power sources have been disconnected from the access point. Step 2 Remove the covering plug from the SFP port by following the guidelines given in this step!i The SFP port covering plug is designed to be removed only once, and then be replaced with the SFP adapter The plug does not have a rubber 0-ring, but is fixed in place using a sealant on the threads at manufacturing.While removing the plug,you need to ensure that its hex bolt-head does not get stripped. For this. a. Place the AP on it's back(resting on the heat,fins)on a solid,but padded surface,to avoid scratching the paint. b. Pressing down with your hand on the face of the AP and holding the AP firmly in place,proceed to the next step. c. Use a 5/8" (16 mm) 6-point socket wrench to loosen the hex bolt-head SFP port plug. Firmly and carefully, turn the socket wrench counter-clockwise to loosen the plug. This requires a torque of 25 ft-lb(34 Nm). Though not ideal, a 5/8" (16 mm) 12-point socket wrench can be used too. A crescent wrench is to be used only if the socket wrenches are not available. Do not use a pipe or monkey wrench for this task,as it will strip,the hex bolt-head. Step 3 Insert the SFP module into the SFP port, and ensure that it latches properly Step 4 Loosen the cable gland's nut(round end of the cable gland) by turning counterclockwise, but do not remove. Step 5 Thread the fiber optic cable, from its unterminated end, into the cable gland. See Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP Thread the cable through the gland all the way till the gland is near the SC or LC optic fiber connectors. The cable gland's nut must remain loose at this time. Note The SC or LC optic fiber connectors are too big to pass through the cable gland. That is the reason why you need to thread the cable through the gland from the unterminated end(even if the cable is quite long). Step 6 Insert the SC or LC optic fiber connector-end of the cablee, into the SFP module adapter Do not attach the cable gland to the adapter yet. See Figure 4-10 Step 7 Insert the SC or LC optic fiber connector into the SFP module and ensure that it latches into place. See Figure 4-10 Step 8 Add sealant or tape around the adapter's pipe thread, and then it screw into the AP chassis. Step 9' Keeping the cable gland nut loose, carefully screw the threaded end of the cable gland into the SFP module adapter and hand-tighten. Use an adjustable wrench to tighten the threaded end of the cable gland to 6-7 lb.ft(8.1 to 9.5 Nm). Step 10 Tighten the cable gland nut until it is properly fastened around the fiber optic cable. Use an adjustable or open-end wrench to tighten to 2.7 to 3.2 lb.ft(3 66 to 4.34 Nm). Caution When removing this SFP assembly it is absolutely imperative that you proceed in the reverse order of this installation. Start by loosening the cable gland's nut. Figure 4-8 SC Fiber-optic cable 475"MAX 3.00"MAX This end goes into the cable gland 1 2 1 SC optic fiber connector 2 Optic fiber cable Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-14 P OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 In`stalling Other Components Connecting a Fiber-optic Cable to the AP 1.1 Figure 4-9 Duplex LC Fiber Optic Cable 3.35"MAX 0 475' MAX 1 F cEa= I I10 cEa= A T A This end goes into the cable gland 1 0 O m 1 Duplex LC optic fiber connector 2 Optic fiber cable t Figure 4-10 Exploded View of Connecting Fiber-optic Cable to AP r'' _ : ' _ .,„. , -i 1,0 IR ) r-, i d - / 01i ® 7- -4 -4iir1 -1-1 -111(.11 00 .T . ,,,,,,,,,,..., t,.4._z' n- i,"11c-iii, ,-/i _ c,--„\---), ......e•C`41. 1111111111111 i''-*' fill 1(i'' ( i' fr ( , 5 "O1()1, -h).-01,i-�� ' � I ,_ O. co 1 Cable gland 3 Duplex LC Fiber-optic cable , 2 SFP module adapter 4 SFP transceiver module l 1 i\ 1 i Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide i OL-32138-01 4-15 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I I Powering the Access Point Figure 4-11 Fiber-optic Cable Successfully Connected to AP r ,```I r�l141.11111114"1.11•0ftric,it )1,11 ii- I:: /aril.hkllIllhlki v, (iswedilftil ..,04! tn 460 el Powering the Access Point The external antenna versions (AP1572E versions)support power over Ethernet input(on the AC version only),power over Ethernet output supporting up to 802.3at devices,internal AC or power over cable power supply options. If multiple power sources are available, the access point will,select the power source which is higher on the following prioritization list. If a power source is removed, access point will automatically switch to the next available power source, as per this list: 1. Power-over-cable or AC (whichever is available on your AP) 2. External DC input 3. PoE (available in AC powered versions of AP) Power-over-Cable All versions of AP15721 and some versions of AP1572E are equipped with a power-over-cable (PoC) power supply The power supply can accept quasi-AC signals in the 40 to 90,V RMS range. 1 Versions of the AP that have a PoC power supply, also have a shunt/fuse interface providing direct in-line access to the PoC AC signal.The AP comes with a shunt in the shunt/fuse\location.By removing the shunt or fuse, field technicians can immediately remove power to the AP for service and repairs, and then restore power by re-installing the shunt or fuse.You can install a fuse in the shunt/fuse location to limit the maximum sustained current supplied to the AP to prevent damage to the AP or to the cable plant. Fuses of various amperage are available, and so you can select the appropriate fuse rating depending on the configuration and operating voltage. For connecting a PoC power supply to the access point,see Connecting,PoC Power to the Access Point, page 4-29 • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-16 - 01-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point � AC Power Supply Non PoC versions of the AP come equipped with an AC power supply The power supply is designed to accept AC voltage from 100 V to 277 V RMS. The following AC power cords are supported. Product ID Description AIR-CORD-R3P-40NA= Power cord, 40 ft, North American Plug AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE= Power cord, 40 ft, European Harmonized, Unterminated AIR-PWR-ST-LT-R3P= Power cord,4 ft,Street Light Tap For connecting Streetlight AC power to the access point,see Connecting Streetlight AC Power, page 4-25. For connecting an AC power supply to the access point, see Connecting an AC Power Cable to the Access Point, page 4-27 DC Interface All versions of the AP have an externally accessible DC input connector The DC input accepts voltages in the 10 to 16Vrange.To check the power distribution budget,see https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/access_point/1570/installation/guide/1570hig/1570 a xa.html. For connecting a DC power supply to the access point, see Connecting a DC Power Cable to the Access Point,page 4-22. PoE-Input AC powered versions of AP1572EAC can be powered by UPOE compliant power sourcing equipment. In addition to being powered by UPOE sources,the access point can also be powered by the AIR-PWRINJ1500-2 power injector , The access point also supports an Ethernet uplink port(PoE-In).The access point Ethernet uplink port uses an R1-45 connector (with weatherproofing) to link the access point to the 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T or 1000BASE-T network.The Ethernet cable is used to send and receive Ethernet data and to optionally supply inline power from the power injector or a suitably powered switch port. Tip The access point senses the Ethernet and power signals and automatically switches internal circuitry to match the cable connections. The Ethernet cable must be a shielded outdoor rated Category 5e (CAT5e) or better cable. The access point senses the Ethernet and power signals and automatically switches internal circuitry to match the cable connections. Depending on the version of the AP, a 1572 series access point supports these power sources: • Power-over-Cable on AP1572IC and AP1572EC versions • AC power on AP1572EAC version Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Emu I OL-32138-01 , i d \ Chapter 4 Installing Other Components al Powering the Access Point The 1572EAC access point can be powered via the PoE input froth an in-line power injector or a suitably powered switch port. The AIR-PWRINJ1500-2=power injector can be used. Caution Do not place the power injector in an unprotected outdoor environment because water could get into the power injector and cause a short circuit and possible fire. A Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the Safety Extra-Low Voltage(SELV) requirements in IEC 60950 based safety standards Statement 1033 For connecting the AIR-PWRINJ1500-2 power injector, see Connecting a Power Injector, page 4-20. For connecting an Ethernet cable to the access point, see Connecting an Ethernet Cable to the Access Point,page 4-20 Restrictions on Features under Different Operating Conditions To limit the maximum power consumption and ensure thermal integrity of the access point, there are factory-defined restrictions on the features that are active under a given operating condition. This is different for different versions of the AP The following restrictions are applicable to all versions under all operating conditions. C • The cable modem will be disabled when the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) port is enabled. — If an SFP device is detected on startup, the cable modem will be disabled and remain disabled until the AP is rebooted. — If no SFP device is detected on startup, the SFP port will be disabled and remain disabled until the AP is rebooted. — If no SFP device is detected at startup anddthe cable modem is connected,then the cable modem will be used as the uplink. The SFP will not be disabled. However, if an SFP device is plugged in later,the AP'will require a reboot to choose the SFP port as the uplink. • You cannot disable any Ethernet ports. • The power available on the PoE output port can be 802.3at, 802.3af,or disabled depending on other configuration options. • PoE-Output is disabled when PoE-Input voltage is present. • If the AP is powered by,other means and then switches to UPOE, the AP will automatically reconfigure itself as required. • The access point has protection mechanisms to prevent overheating by reducing certain functionalities, if internal temperatures exceed factory-defined limits. Protection measures include reducing the number of active transmit paths on one or more radios. The number of active transmit paths will return to the user's selected configuration when the overheating condition subsides. However, if the protection measures do not sufficiently reduce the temperature, then the AP will ultimately power down,with the LEDs flashing yellow at flashes per second. When the overheating condition subsides,the AP will power up automatically The following tables show the maximum radio transmission paths for various versions of the AP depending on the kind of input power, cable modem status, and SFP port status. • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-1 8 01-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point Note The AP supports all modes described in the following tables, in ambient temperatures of-40°C to+45°C in all supported orientations,with a solar loading of 753 Watts/m2.For details on the operating temperature ranges of the access point, see Access Point Operating Temperature Specifications, page A-3 _ Table 4-1 Radio Transmission Paths on AP1572IC powered by PoC or DC Maximum 5G TX Paths Maximum 2.4G TX Paths Cable Modem Active? SFP Device Inserted? 4 4 Yes No 4 4 No Yes Table 4-2 Radio Transmission Paths on AP1572EC powered by PoC or DC Maximum 2.4G TX Maximum 5G TX Paths Paths Cable Modem Active? SFP Device Inserted? 802.3 PoE Output Mode 4 4 Yes No AF 4 0 (Disabled) ) Yes No AT 2 2 Yes No AT 0 (Disabled) 4 Yes No AT 4 4 No Yes AF 4 0 (Disabled) No Yes AT 2 2 No Yes AT 0 (Disabled) 4 No Yes AT Table 4-3 Radio Transmission Paths on AP1572EAC Maximum 2.4G TX Power Source Maximum 5G TX Paths Paths 802.3 PoE Output Mode AC or DC 4 4 AT AC or DC 4 0 (Disabled) AT AC or DC 2 2 AT AC or DC 0 (Disabled). 4 AT UPOE Input 4 4 Disabled UPOE Input 4 0 (Disabled) Disabled UPOE Input 2 2 Disabled UPOE Input 0 (Disabled) 4 'Disabled Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-19 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I 1.1 Powering the Access Point Connecting a Power Injector The 1570 Series Access Points supports the AIR-PWRINJ1500-2= (100-240 VAC input, indoor use only) power injectors.The power injector provides (AIR-PWRINJ1500-2=) 56 VDC to the access point over the Ethernet cable and supports a total end-tend Ethernet cable length of 100 m (328 ft)from the switch to the access point. When your access point is powered by an optional power injector, follow these steps to complete the installation. Step 1 Before applying PoE to the access point, ensure that the access point is grounded (see the "Grounding the Access Point" section on page 4-12). Step 2 Review\Figure 3-1 to identify the components needed for the installation. Note The 1500 power injector can only be used in an indoor environment, therefore, the cable from the injector must travel from the protected location to the outside mounted access point. Step 3 Connect a CATSe or better Ethernet cable from your wired LAN network to the power injector A Warning To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Statement 1023 r Note The installer is responsible for ensuring that powering the access p'oint from this type of power injector is allowed by local and/or national safety and telecommunications equipment standards. p Tip To forward bridge traffic, add a switch between the power injector and controller Refer to the Cisco Wireless Mesh Access Points, Design and Deployment Guide, Release 7 0 for more information. Step 4 Ensure that the antennas are connected and that a ground is attached to the access point before you apply power to the access point. Step 5 Connect a shielded outdoor-rated Ethernet(CAT5e or better) cable between the power injector and the PoE-in connector of the access point. Step 6 Connect the Ethernet cable to the access point PoE-In port (see "Connecting an Ethernet Cable to the Access Point"section on page 4-20). Connecting an Ethernet Cable to the Access Point You need to supply these tools and materials. • Shielded outdoor-rated Ethernet (CAT5e or better) cable with 0.2 to 0.35 in. (0.51 to 0.89 cm) diameter 1.1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-20 0L-32138-01 I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point IN • RJ-45 connector and installation tool • Adjustable Wrench or 0.875 inch open-end wrench • 0.5 inch or 13 mm wrench To connect the shielded Ethernet cable to the access point, follow these steps: Step 1 Disconnect power to the power injector,,and ensure all power sources to the access point are turned off. Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit. Statement 1028 Step 2 Ensure that access point is properly grounded as described in\"Grounding the Access Point" section on page 4-12. Step 3 Use a 0.5 inch or 13 mm wrench to remove the Ethernet connector cover plug which covers the Ethernet port labeled '3' on the base of the access point. See Base of the AP, page 1-10 for more information on where the port is located. Do not discard the plug and rubber seal unless you are certain that the'port will not have to be re-plugged. Step 4 Loosen the sealing nut of the cable gland, which is at its round end (see Figure 4-12), by turning it counter clockwise, but do not remove it. Note Verify that the cable gland has a rubber gasket and ensure that it is not damaged. A Warning Failure to install the cable gland and rubber gasket properly will cause the cable grip to leak. Figure 4-12 Cable Gland 0\10- • 6)x-,1 Thread end 2 Round end Step 5 -Insert the unterminated end of the Ethernet cable through the sealing nut end of the\cable gland (see Figure 4-12), and pull several inches of cable through the cable gland. Step 6 Install an RJ-45 connector on the unterminated end of the Ethernet cable using your Ethernet cable installation tool. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point A Warning To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Statement 1023 A Warning When installing the RJ-45 connector,ensure that cable gland and the rubber gasket are present and installed properly, to avoid water leakage into the enclosure. See Figure 4-12. Step 7 Carefully insert the RJ-45 cable connector into the`Ethernet port opening on the access point, and connect to the internal Ethernet connector Step 8 Slide the cable gland with the rubber gasket towards the access point, and screw the threaded end of the body into the access point, and hand-tighten. Step 9 Use an adjustable wrench or a 0.875 inch wrench to tighten the threaded end of the body into the enclosure. Tighten to 15 lb.ft. Step 10 Use an adjustable wrench and tighten the thread-lock seal nut to 6 to 7 lb.ft (8.1 to 9.5 Nm). Step 11 Turn on power to the power injector Connecting a DC Power Cable to the Access Point When powering the access point with DC power, you must ensure that DC power can be conveniently removed from the unit. The power should not be removed by disconnecting the DC power connector on the unit. A Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. Statement 1022 A Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage(SELV) requirements in IEC 60950 based safety standards. Statement 1033 To connect a DC power cable, you need these tools and material. • Shielded outdoor-rated DC power cable(minimum 18 AWG)with outside cable diameter of 0.20 to 0.35 inch(0.51 to 0.89 cm). • Adjustable wrench or 0.875 inch open-end wrench • Small flat-head screw driver • Two-pin DC terminal block connector (use only the Cisco supplied DC connector Cisco Part Number 29-100226-01) • 0.5 inch or 13mm wrench I' To connect the DC power cable to the access point, follow these steps: Step 1 Before connecting DC power to the access point, ensure that the ground is connected to the access point (see the"Grounding the Access Point"section on page 4-12). Step 2 Turn off all power sources to the access'point, including the DC power source. • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-22 OL-32138.01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point I A Warning This unit,might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit. Statement 1028 r it caution When installing DC power to the access point, always connect the access point end of the cable FIRST When removing the DC power connector, always disconnect the access point end of the cable LAST Step 3 Use a 0.5 inch or 13 mm wrench to remove the DC connector cover plug from the access point. The DC power port is located on the right side of the access point and is labeled '6' See Right Side of the AP, page 1-14 for more information on where the port is located. Do not discard plug and rubber seal unless you are certain that the port will not have to be re-plugged. Step 4 Loosen the thread-Lock sealing nut of the cable gland by turning it counter clockwise, but do not remove \ (see Figure 4-13). S Note Verify that the cable gland has a rubber gasket and ensure that it is not damaged. A Warning Failure to install the cable gland and the rubber gasket properly will cause the cable grip to leak. i Figure 4-13 Cable Gland 0 t `ti 4 2 N 1 Thread end 2 Round end Si Note The cable gland can accept cables of diameter from 0.20 to 0.35 in. (0.51 to 0.89 cm). Step 5 Insert a bare end of the DC power cable into the rounded end of the cable gland (see Figure 4-13), and pull approximately 6 inches of cable through the adapter c , Warning When installing the DC power cable, ensure that cable gland and the rubber gasket are present and installed properly,to avoid water leakage into the enclosure. Step 6 Strip the DC cable jacket back by about 1 inch to expose the wires and then strip the insulation by abort 0.5 inch (or 12 mm) from each wire. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point Step 7 Push in the orange colored spring-loaded securing tabs and insert the wire (see Figure 4-14) all the way into the two-position terminal block connector (Cisco Part Number 29-100226-01, Figure 4-15), and then release the tabs. Tug on the wire to ensure that it is properly secured. Figure 4-14 Push in the securing tab, and wire, as the arrow shows Figure 4-15 Two-Position Terminal Block Connector O 0 1 Securing tabs 3 Ground (DC return) 2 DC+ 1 Step 8 Insert the terminal block connector into the DC power opening in the access point case, and carefully push the terminal block connector into the internal connector Note Ensure that the polarity of the terminal block connector properly matches the polarity markings on the enclosure - see Figure 4-15 Useonly the Cisco supplied block connector 29-100226-01 Step 9 Slide the cable gland with the rubber seal towards the access point, and screw the threaded end of the bodynto the access point, and hand-tighten. Step 10 Use an adjustable wrench or a 28 mm wrench to tighten the threaded end of the body to 15 lb.ft. Step 1t Use an adjustable wrench and tighten the thread-lock seal nut to 6 to 7 lb.ft(8.1 to 9.5 Nm). Step 12 Ensure that the antennas are connected to the access point before you apply power to the access point. • CiscoAironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-24 OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point 1.1 Step 13 Turn on the DC power at the designated circuits. Connecting Streetlight AC Power The access point can be installed on,a streetlight pole and powered from a streetlight outdoor light control using the optional streetlight power tap adapter (AIR-PWR-ST-LT-R3P). See Figure 4-16. Caution The access point can be powered by a light pole twist-lock outdoor light control that provides 100-to 277-VAC 50/60 Hz power Do not connect to an outdoor light control powered by higher voltages. L When powering the access point with AC power other than the streetlight power tap adapter, you must ensure that the following conditions are observed. 1. AC power can be conveniently removed from the.unit. The power should not be removed by disconnecting the AC power connector on the unit. A Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated'in the fixed wiring. Statement 1022 Caution Before connecting or disconnecting a power cord,you must remove AC power from the power cord using a suitable,service disconnect. 2. You must protect any AC power plugs and AC receptacles from water and other outdoor elements. You can use a UL-listed waterproofing enclosure suitable for covering the AC receptacle and AC power plug that supplies power to the unit as described in Article 406 of the NEC. y 3. When you install the access point outdoors or in a wet or damp location,the AC branch circuit that powers the access point should have ground fault protection (GFCI), as required by Article 210 of the National Electrical Code(NEC). A Warning Be very careful when connecting the streetlight adapter to Category 3 pole-top power If you are not careful,you may electrocute yourself or fall. Statement 363 To install an access point on a streetlight pole, follow these steps: Step 1 Before beginning the installation, ensure the AC power to the streetlight pole is turned off. Step 2 Turn off power to the AC power source at the designated circuits. A Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection.-All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit.Statement 1028 Caution For your safety,when connecting the access point AC power connector, always connect the access point end of the cable FIRST When removing the AC power connector, always disconnect the access point end of the cable LAST Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-25 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I Powering the Access Point Step 3 When using the streetlight power tap adapter (AIR-PWR-ST-LT-R3P=), ensure that the access point is mounted within 3 feet(1 m)of the outdoor light control. Step 4 Ensure that a 6-AWG ground wire is attached to the access point and connected to the streetlight pole (for instructions see Grounding the Access Point,page 4-12). Step 5 Ensure that the streetlight power tap adapter,which uses a 3-pronged LC-10 twist-lock adapter, is placed between the outdoor light control and its fixture. The LC-10 twist-lock adapter is designed to be used with LC-10-listed outdoor light controls operating at 100 to 277 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz. Step 6 Disconnect the outdoor light control from its fixture. Step 7 Verify that the voltage available at the fixture is between 100 and 277 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz. Step 8 Turn off power to the fixture at the designated circuits. L Caution When installing the streetlight power tap adapter to the access point AC power connector,always connect the access point end of the cable FIRST When removing the streetlight power tap adapter, always disconnect the access point end of the cable LAST Note Ensure that your antennas are connected to the access point before you apply power to the access point. Step 9 Connect the streetlight power tap adapter to the access point. Step 10 Plug the streetlight power tap adapter into the outdoor light control fixture. Step 11 Plug the outdoor light control into the streetlight power tap adapter Step 12 Turn on the power to the outdoor light control fixture at the designated circuits. Figure 4-16 Connecting Streetlight AC Power 0 0 4_74 Aullimmimmmil i N f7 LC-10 twist-lock adapter 3 6-AWG ground wire 2 Streetlight power tap adapter cable Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-26 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point , , Connecting an AC Power Cable to the Access Point When powering the access point with AC power other than the streetlight power tap adapter, you must ensure that the following conditions are observed. • AC power can be conveniently removed from the unit. The power should not be removed by disconnecting the AC power connector on the unit. Note Before connecting or disconnecting a power cord, you must remove AC power from the power cord using a suitable service disconnect. • You must protect all AC power plugs and AC receptacles from water and other outdoor elements. You can use a UL-listed waterproofing enclosure suitable for covering the AC receptacle and AC power plug that supplies power to the unit as described in Article 406 of the NEC. • When you install the access point in a wet or damp location, the AC branch circuit that powers the access point should have ground fault protection (GFCI), as required by Article 210 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The AP1572EAC supports the,following AC power cables and connectors available from Cisco AC Power Cord, Connector Dimensions Description AC Power Cord Diameter This cord is for installations in the US and AIR-CORD-R3P-40NA= 0 4 to 0 413 in. Canada,and comes with pre-installed (10.2 mm to 10.5 mm) connectors at both ends. The three prong plug is limited to 120 VAC. Internal wiring is rated at 600 VAC insulation Length. protection. 40-ft (12.2-m) AC Power Cord , Diameter ` This cord for installations in the European x Union. This cord comes with a pre-installed AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE= 0 4 to 0 413 in. c connector for connecting to the AP's AC port. (10.2 mm to 10.5 mm) You will need to source and install a country- specific connector to the blunt cut end of the Length. cable.For information on installingan AC 40-ft (12.2-m) power plug, see Installing AC Power Plug on AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE=, page 4-28. Power cord rating is 100'to 480 VAC.Internal wiring is 16,AWG. Field-installable Cable Diameter This is a kit of five field terminable Connector Supported. connectors. For these connectors you will AIR-ACC15-AC-PLGS= 9 to 14 mm need to source an appropriate 3-wire AC cable. This connector supports a cable of 330 VAC, 13 Amps rating. The wiring size supported is 12 to 16 AWG. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 4-27 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I NI Powering the Access Point Installing AC Power Plug on AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE= When using a user-supplied AC power plug on the AIR-CORD-R3P-40UE= power cord, ensure that the plug is certified for outdoor use and that it has a minimum IP67 rating, such as Interpower 84131251 or Hubbell HBL316P6W (IEC/EN 60309) pin-and-sleeve type connectors. The power cord plug pinouts are listed in Figure 4-17 Figure 4-17 Plug Pinouts (1:1_ 11111111111 ® n Pin Description Conductor Color Pin Description Conductor Color 1 Ground Green/Yellow 3 Neutral Blue 2 Live Brown Procedure for Connecting AC power Cable to Access Point To connect an AC power cable to the access point, perform these steps: Step 1 Prior to applying AC power, ensure the access point is grounded (see Grounding the Access Point, page 4-12). Step 2 Turn off power to the AC power source at the designated circuits. A Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit. Statement 1028 Caution When connecting the access point AC power connector, always connect the access point end of the cable FIRST When removing the AC power connector, always disconnect the access point end of the cable LAST i Step 3 Align the numbered holes in the AC power cable connector with the pins in the access point AC power port(on the base of the 1572EAC. See Figure 1-10), and push the cable connector into the access point connector • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide- 4-28 0L-32138-01 I I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Powering the Access Point III Step 4 When the connector is fully seated in the AC port, hand tighten the cable connector ring by turning it clockwise. Connecting PoC Power to the Access Point The Power-over-Cable (PoC) configuration contains a cable modem, RF splitter (within the AP), and a cable stinger connector The cable stinger port for Power-over-Cable connections is labeled'1'on the base of the AP (see Base of the AP,page 1-10). Note To ensure system performance,with respect to immunity from external electromagnetic fields,use a well shielded coaxial cable,preferably a quad-shield'cable. Note The AP1572IC and AP1572EC versions of the AP are classified as a type "Hazardous Voltage Secondary" circuit as per the UL/IEC/EN 60950-1 safety standard. The cable distribution network used with this versions must provide transient reduction to the level for this type of circuit classification (that, is, 500V transient/lightning surge). To connect cable PoC power to the access point, follow these steps. step 1 Ensure that all power sources have been disconnected from the access point and that the AP is properly grounded. See Grounding the Access Point,page 4-12. A Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the unit.Statement 1028 Step 2 Remove the attenuator plug (port labeled '7'), and the Shunt plug (port labeled '8') from their ports on the back of the AP Follow your cable company's procedures to measure the cable signal strength and possibly adjust signal attenuation externally to the access point or on the RF splitter For more information on the attenuator and shunt ports, see Installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts, page 4-34 Step 3 The Cisco-supplied cable stinger connector pin is 29-100357-01 If you are using a third-party'cable stinger connector pin, then cut it down to the correct length using the trim measure provided'right next to the Power-over-Cable port(labeled '1'on the base of the AP). The cable stinger connector pin must be 1 70± 0.05 inch (43 1 t 1.2 cm) in length, but your are encouraged to use the trim measure on the AP as the scale of measure. Step 4 Insert the cable stinger connector pin into thee Power-over-Cable port. The Power-over-Cable port is equipped with a spring-loaded stinger seizing mechanism. Hence, push the stinger all the way in until the threads hit. Step 5 Thread the cable stinger connector ring into the PoC connector opening. Use an adjustable wrench to tighten the connector to 6 to 7 ft lbs (8.1 to 9.5 Nm). Step 6 Connect the cable company's PoC cable to cable stinger plug as per their specifications. Step 7 Turn on cable PoC power Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 4-29 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I 1.1 Installing the GPS Antenna I 1 � Step 8 Reinstall the RF splitter.shunt plug, and the attenuator plug. Installing the GPS Antenna All models of the 1570 Series support location information when the optional GPS antenna 1 (AIR-ANT-GPS-1) is installed and connected. The AP has two mounting positions for the GPS antenna, on the head of the AP and on the back of the AP,which need to be used depending on whether the AP is horizontally,or vertically oriented when deployed (see Figure 4-19 and Figure 4-20). Note Ensure that the GPS antenna always has a clear unobstructed view of the sky, for proper functioning. 1 r To install the GPS antenna: Step 1 Remove the protective cap covering the access point's GPS antenna connector port. Step 2 Screw down the GPS antenna connector onto the AP's GPS antenna connector port,just enough so that it doesn't fall off. Step 3 If the AP is mounted horizontally,screw down the GPS antenna at the designated spot on the back of the AP(see Figure 4-19). If the AP is mounted vertically, screw down the GPS antenna at the designated spot on the head of the AP(see Figure 4-20). Step 4 The GPS antenna is fixed to the AP using two M3.5x0.6x8 mm Pan Head Phillips stainless steel screws. Step 5 Fully tighten the GPS antenna connector onto the access point's GPS antenna connector port. n • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-30 OL-32138-01 I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I - InstallingtheGPSAntenna lil Figure 4-18 GPS Antenna and its connector T T .., •i't.,Apr \':':1-1111111.#. 4 8 4 stiti is gotiiiiiti, `' \ O, II %- W® ®® � ) ``OO ,,c, c 0 4 , 4- ijit...4) as/ 1 GPS antenna 1connector 2 and 4 M3.5x0.6x8 mm Pan Head Phillips stainless steel screws, used to fasten the GPS antenna to the AP 3 GPS antenna c Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 1 OL-32138-01 4-31 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I II Installing the GPS Antenna ' Figure 4-19 GPS antenna installed on a horizontally oriented AP1572EC , O r Iiii 4 1, ---- -, `-.--'\:.-7____two --• l.......-7i/ L-111101*- 1 - 0.11. - ( I■ __:17._ __,,.:46,,,,r'.\6::st , ___ ,,.:410i);; 1411,, ,ti‘ 41. V • (-i'i v °I L'''\1*A k\ -N\ 1 GPS antenna installed on the back of the AP 2 GPS antenna connector plugged into AP's antenna connector port f ' J / • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-32 OL-32138-01 I S 1 I Chapter 4 Installing Other Components Installing the GPS Antenna Figure 4-20 GPS antenna installed on a vertically oriented AP1572EC � 1 ltJ 1 r L IIP *Viet- 9� �I , (e,1 41140. GPS antenna installed on the head of the AP 2 GPS antenna connector plugged into AP's antenna connector port Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 1 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I 1.1 Installing Attenuators,Fuses,and Shunts Installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts Installing an Attenuator Plug You can install an attenuator plug on the RF splitter, in port 8 on the back of the access point (see Figure 1-4). Plug-in attenuator pads produce flat(even) loss across the forward and reverse frequency spectrum. Pads are used during station balancing to adjust signal levels as needed. The loss (in dB)produced is equal to the pad value printed on the top of the pad. / Using a Signal Test Probe You can use test probes (such as the Communication Associates CA0O8927)to measure the DS signal level directly from the attenuator plug-in interface in port 8 on the back of the access point (see Figure 1-4). You need to remove any installed attenuator pads,which will disconnect the cable modem from the HFC network. You can then insert the test probe into the plug-in interface, providing an F-connector interface to directly measure downstream signal levels. Based on the measured signal level,you can decide on an attenuator value and then plug in the corresponding attenuator pad into the port. Installing a Fuse or Shunt You can install a power fuse or a power shunt in port 7 on the back of the access point(see Figure 1-4). Fuses with different fuse ratings are available from Cisco. Note By default a 20 A fuse is provided as shunt. Handling the AP when installing Attenuators, Fuses, and Shunts u To access port 7 or port 8 (see Figure 1-4): • For strand mounted APs, you can access ports 7 and 8, without having to dislodge the AP from its mount. • For pole and wall mounted APs, you can following one of the following procedures, depending on your mounting kit, For pole mounted and wall mounted APs,mounted using PMK1 or PMK2, to access port 7 or port 8. Step 1 Slide the AP up, off the wall mount bracket's key hole slots. Step 2 Remove the four M8 x 12mm hex head bolts from the back of the AP, and then fix them on the face of i the AP in the screw holes intended for future external module support(see Face of the AP,page 1-4).Do not fully tighten the bolts. � Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-34 ( OL-32138-01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components What to do after hardware installation II Step 3 With the face of the AP aligned to the wall mount bracket, slide bolts on the face of the'AP, down into the key hole slots on the wall mount bracket. Step;4 Unscrew the protector cap of the port and proceed with your task. When you are done with your task, retrace your steps to mount the AP back properly See the following sections to ensure that you have properly mounted the AP — Pole Mount Kit 1, page 3-19 — Pole Mount Kit 2, page 3-23 For pole mounted and wall mounted APs, mounted using PMK3, to access port 7 or port 8 Step 1 Remove the three M8 x 12mm hex head bolts, used in the key hole type screw holes on the PMK3 wall mount bracket, as marked in Figure. Step 2 You can now rotate the AP outwards from the mount, using the remaining one bolt as the pivot. Rotate the AP out just enough access port 7 or 8. Note You many need to loosen this bolt just enough to rotate the AP out. Step 3 Unscrew the protector cap of the port and proceed with your task. When you are done with your task, retrace your steps to mount the AP back properly See Pole Mount Kit 3, page 3-41 to ensure liar you have properly mounted the AP What to do after hardware installation Once your AP and its accessories are installed, power up the AP The following operating modes are supported by the 1570 series access points. • Unified Modes — Local — Flexconnect — Bridge — Flexconnect with Bridge Mode — Monitor - Spectrum Expert — Sniffer Rogue Detector • Autonomous Mode After the AP is powered up you can proceed with configuring the access point. For more information, see the following documents. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138.01 Chapter 4 Installing Other Components I What to do after hardware installation / • For information on configuring a Lightweight Access Points and Mesh Access Points, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, release 8.0 or newer The release 8.0 guide is available at: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/control ler/8-0/configuration-guide/b_cg80.html • For Access Points in autonomous mode, see the Cisco IOS Configuration Guide for Autonomous Aironet Access Points Cisco IOS Release 15.3(3)JAB, or newer The 15.3(3)JAB guide is available at: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/wireless/access_point/15-3-3/configuration/guide/cg 15-3-3 html • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 4-36 , OL-32138-01 I, Y 1 _ IT i t 1,1?7i �r ...epi _ ?Y Y .n 7.+ (u ,• 111,sa (` k v 4 1 s` P �^ F' ttx >Sy,. r Y, r �� "ls ' : �°.,i f.ptetdi X& '* ., ww„�'"s�w�.-�'--.� K�M3 .�4 me�� _ -_'—-•__ — ...-`z�fit-ntiaf _=^ "f''• -`P "L, .+t,^fit 0. '-. • ..�.—_.._.""-- ...... �::�� • _•: ; i' ' . t CHAP'T--7E _ Troubleshooting i This chapter provides troubleshooting procedures for basic problems with the access point. For the most _ up-to-date,detailed troubleshooting information,refer to the Cisco Technical Support and Documentation website at the following URL. http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html Sections in this chapter include: • Guidelines for Using the Access Points,l page 5-3 • Controller MAC Filter List, page 5-4 • Using DHCP Option 43, page 5-4 t Monitoring the Access Point LEDs, page 5-5 • Verifying Controller Association, page 5-6 • Changing the Bridge Group Name, page 5-7 • Access Point Power Injector, page 5-7 • Using the Reset Button, page 5-9 J Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting I Finding the Product Serial Number The access point serial number is on the right side of the access point (refer to Figure 1). Figure 1 Location of Serial Number Label IVO O _ _ I r c) 1i1n11k goco ) ) , c 0 ■ L 1 The access point serial number`label(labeled '1' in the figure above) contains the following information:' • Model number, such as AIR-AP1572EAC-x-K9, where x is the regulatory domain. • Serial number, such as WCN0636279B (11 alphanumeric digits). • Access point MAC address, for example 68BDABF54600 (12 hexadecimal digits). It is located under the serial number • Safety Warnings • Ports and their identification numbers You need your product serial number when requesting support from the Cisco Technical Assistance Center Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Guidelines for Using the Access Points Guidelines for Using the Access Points You should keep these guidelines in mind when you use the access points: • The access point only supports Layer 3 CAPWAP communications with the controllers. In Layer 3 operation,the access point and the controller can be on the same or different subnets. The access point communicates with the controller using standard IP packets. A Layer 3 access point on a different subnet than the controller requires a`DHCP server on the access point subnet and a route to the controller The route to the controller must have destination UDP ports 12222 and 12223 open for CAPWAP communications.'The route to the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers must allow IP packet fragments. • Before deploying your access points, ensure that the following has been done: — Your controllers are connected to switch ports that are,configured as trunk ports. — Your access points are connected to switch ports that are configured as untagged access ports. — A DHCP server is reachable by your access points and has been configured with Option 43 Option 43 provides the IP addresses of the management interfaces of your controllers. Typically, a DHCP server can be configured on a Cisco switch. — Optionally, a DNS server can be configured to enable CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER. Use local domain to resolve to the IP address of the management interface of your controller — Your controllers are configured and reachable by the access points. — Your controllers are configured with the access point MAC addresses and the MAC filter list is enabled. — Your switch must forward DHCP requests. • After the access points are associated to the controller, you should change the bridge group name (BGN)from the default value.With the default BGN,the mesh access points (MAPs)can potentially try to connect with other mesh networks and slow down the convergence of the network. Important Notes Convergence Delays During deployment, the access points can experience convergence delays due to various causes. The following list identifies some operating conditions that can cause convergence delays. • A root access point (RAP) attempts to connect to a controller using any of the wired ports (cable, fiber-optic,PoE-in).If the wired ports are operational,the RAP can potentially spend several minutes on each port prior to connecting to a controller • If a RAP is unable to connect to a controller over the wired ports, it attempts to connect using the wireless network.This results in additional delays when multiple potential wireless paths are available. • If a MAP is unable to connect to a RAP using a wireless connection, it then attempts to connect using any available wired port. The access point can potentially spend several minutes for each connection method, before attempting the wireless network again. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting I I Controller MAC Filter List • To minimize convergence delays, if a device is connected to your wired ports, make sure Ethernet Bridging is enabled on the AP This can be enabled from the WLC GUI under Wireless > Access Points>AP_Name>Mesh>Ethernet Bridging. Bridge Loop The access point supports packet bridging between wired and wireless network connections. The same network must never be connected to multiple wired ports on an access point or on two bridged access points.A bridge loop causes network routing problems. Controller DHCP Server The controller DHCP server only assigns IP addresses to lightweight access points and wireless clients associated to an access point. It does not assign an IP address to other devices, including Ethernet bridging clients on the mesh access points. MAP Data Traffic If the signal on the access point backhaul channel has a high signal-to-noise ratio, it is possible for a MAP to connect to the controller, via parent node, but not be able to pass data traffic, such as pinging the access point. This can occur because the default data rate for backhaul control packets is set to 6 Mb/s,and the backhaul data rate set to auto by the user Controller MAC Filter List Before activating your access point,you must ensure that the access point MAC address has been added to the controller MAC filter list and that Mac Filter List is enabled. Note The access point MAC address and barcode is located on the bottom of the unit. When two MAC addresses are shown,use the top MAC address. To view the MAC addresses added to the controller MAC filter list,you can use the controller CLI or the controller GUI. • Controller CLI—Use the show macfilter summary controller CLI command to view the MAC addresses added to the controller filter list. • Controller GUI-,og into your controller web interface using a web browser, and choose SECURITY>AAA>MAC Filtering to view the MAC addresses added to the controller filter list. Using DHCP Option 43 - You can use DHCP Option 43 to provide a list of controller IP addresses to the access points, enabling the access point to find and join.a controller Refer to the product documentation for your DHCP server __ for instructions on configuring DHCP Option 43 For additional information, refer to the "Configuring DHCP Option 43"section on page D-1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Monitoring the Access Point LEDs Monitoring the Access Point LEDs If your access point is not working properly, look at the LEDs on the base of the unit. You can use them to quickly assess the status of the unit. Note It is expected that there will be small variations in LED color intensity and hue from unit to unit. This is within the normal range of the LED manufacturer specifications and is not a defect. The access point's LEDs are located next to the Reset button, on the base of the AP See Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Access Point LEDs labeled A to D 1 2 0 ABCD RESET , 1 Reset Button 2 LEDs labeled A to D The access point LED signals are listed in the following table. A RF-2 LED—Status of the 5 GHz MIMO C Uplink LED—Ethernet, cable, or fiber status backhaul radio B RF-1 LED—Status of the 2.4 GHz MEMO D Status LED—access point and software access radio status The color and the meaning of the access point LED signals are described in Table 5-1 Table 5-1 Access Point LED Signals LED Calory 2'3 Meaning Status Black No power applied or LED off. Steady green Access point is operational. Blinking green Download orupgrade of Cisco IOS image file in progress. Steady amber Mesh neighbor access point discovery in progress. Blinking amber Mesh authentication in progress. Blinking red /green/amber CAPWAP discovery in progress. Steady red Firmware failure. Contact your support organization for assistance. Uplink Black All network ports down or LED off. Steady green Uplink port is operational (cable, fiber optic, or Ethernet). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 111 Verifying Controller Association Table 5-1 Access Point LED Signals (continued) LED Color1,2,3 Meaning RF-1 Black Radio turned off or LED off. Steady green Radio is operational, network is good. Steady red Firmware failure. Contact your support organization for assistance. RF-2 Black Radio is turned off or LED off. Steady green Radio is operational,.network is good. ' Steady red Firmware failure. Contact your support organization for assistance. 1. If all LEDs off,the access point has no power. 2. When the access point power supply is initially turned on,all LEDs are amber. If the power supplied in insufficient,then all LEDs blinking amber at 1 second intervals. Supply sufficient power to remedy this. 3 If the temperature of the AP exceeds its working temperature range,then the AP shuts down,with all LEDs blinking amber at 0.5 sec intervals.The Wireless LAN Controller is also notified'The AP reboots automatically when the temperature gets back within the working range. Verifying Controller Association To verify that your access point is associated to the controller, follow these steps: Step 1 Log into your controller web interface using a web browser You can also use the controller CLI show ap summary command from the controller console port. Step 2 Click Wireless, and verify that your access point MAC address is listed under Ethernet MAC. Step 3 Log out of the controller, and close your web browser Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 [ Chapter 5 Troubleshooting ■ Changing the Bridge Group Name Changing the Bridge Group Name The bridge group name (BGN) controls the association of the access points to a RAP BGNs can be used to logically group the radios to avoid different networks on\the same channel from communicating with each other This setting is also useful if you have more than one RAP in your network,in the same area. If you have two RAPs in your network in the same area (for more capacity), we recommend that you configure the two RAPs with different BGNs and on different channels. The BGN is a string of ten characters maximum. A factory-set bridge group name (NULL VALUE) is assigned during manufacturing. It is not visible to you;but allows new access point radios toijoin a network of new access points. The BGN can be reconfigured from the Controller CLI and GUI. After configuring the BGN,the access point reboots. After the access points are deployed and associated to the controller, the BGN should be changed from the default value to prevent the MAPs from attempting to associate to other mesh networks. The BGN should be configured very carefully on a live network. You should always start with the most distant access point(last node) from the RAP and move towards the RAP If you start configuring the BGN in a different location,then the access points beyond this point(farther away) are dropped, as they have a different BGN To configure the BGN for the access points using the controller GUI, follow these steps: Step 1 Log into your controller using a web browser Step 2 Click Wireless. When access points associates to the controller,the access point name appears in the AP Name list. Step 3 Click on an access point name. Step 4 Find the Mesh Information section, and enter the new BGN in the Bridge Group Name field. Step 5 Click Apply Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each access point. Step 7 Log out from your controller, and close your web browser Access Point Power Injector Thee power injector(AIR-PWRINJ1500-2=)has three LEDs on the front end of the case(see Figure 5-3). For-detailed information on the power injector, see the Cisco Aironet 1550 Series Outdoor Access Point Power Injector Installation Instructions. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 1 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting ll Access Point Power Injector , 1 Figure 5-3 Power Injector Connectors and LEDs ) ii-, ,.•.....„, _,,,,,,,rcy ,_,_,,,_....„,-„,,,,,,, , ,,,,.,..._ -,,,.. ._ __ i --z----,r_,=_-,,,,,— .,-, „-...„..,, „- _ ,...........___,.... --,.....1.7.1"„amE- ,..i:v"..,;,-... - -..a.Cirr^- , , ...iria..... , Aa__:ate ....1_. �` t4•27',:. ,i) , t �Ij'I,, t Mi + .-t 1 •N ll 4:',147"411114)40.1170 :"1-11 ,' 1/; UG p f 11Jtlh C'�' omill&'. ��,��yquv �1ri_ \\1101111 4''.0.4 4'�I'I� r5� 1..... i, ` avPno�,dJ?'W f' f' , tlian \\, ' y KY] 11 Z. iiataktio ' N i 1 Y L I , ,r ' I N 1I, T 3 4 5 6 1 1 Mounting tabs 4 AC POWER LED 2 AP POWER LED 5 TO AP Ethernet connector (RJ-45) to access point (10/100/1000BASE-T) 3 FAULT LED 6 TO SWITCH—Ethernet connector (RJ-45) to switch (10/100/1000BASE-T) Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I I Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Using the Reset Button Monitoring the Power Injector LEDs You can use the power injector LEDs to check the power injector status.The LEDs provide the following status information. • AP POWER—Turns solid green after successful discovery; indicates that power injector is supplying power to the access point. • FAULT—Turns solid red when a fault occurs during discovery mode or power-up. Check Ethernet cables and connections before contacting your support organization for assistance. • AC POWER—Turns solid green when power injector is receiving AC power and is ready to provide power to the access point. Using the Reset Button The access point has a reset button located on the base(see Base of the AP,page 1-10),'positioned beside the status LEDs. The reset button is recessed in a small hole that is sealed with a screw and a rubber gasket. Resetting the Access Point The Reset button reboots the access point. To use the Reset button. Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the reset button screw Ensure that your do not to lose the screw and the rubber gasket. Step 2 To press the Reset button, use a straightened paper-clip or a small screwdriver or a pen. Step 3 Inspect the gasket. If the gasket has any signs of damage, it should be replaced to avoid water leakage into the unit. Step 4 Close the recess with the screw and the gasket. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw to 1.8 to,2 lb.ft(2.49 to 2.71 Nm). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide ,!� OL-32138-01 l Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 1 In Using the Reset Button I I 1 , l r I / L • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide 5-10 OL-32138-01 J f fl fP. @., D µ f` 1 vte c �'" �_�..,Z i y::l ;ii '1j 1 a r- 1 -1 r ge,ftioi � 1 ' f I r.'.y ['l!I IF-4) f i r .m.-...., ; ,,u,, tilt-" i I ;1t z t sewwa� u..a. 'I PI.'i'Y �^' relit F rP x ;�-}, g�' 1. 7 � r '"� C.-w.▪ .nwro sms ��.yy,, +fie T 'K»'�.*c` :� $, " ' ` — a. W"tl ... Vlatl ": -1--..'.;'.{ i• ..awwwrwro was®u a-n'�''.'_. g4 tl 3tllh -'! ,;.8 ...."-. cY �' r.j, ' LL w '• `„ a ,{ .,. .... r i ,.. vas. Access Point Tech Specs References Access Point Data Sheet The detailed technical specifications for the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Points are available at the following URL. ,r \ ' http://www.cisco.com/c/dam/en/us/products/collateral/wireless/aironet-1570-series/datasheet-c78-732 348.pdf You can also download a copy of the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Data Sheet from the above URL for offline use. 11 Radio Channels and Power Levels - For channel and maximum power level settings, refer to the Channels and Maximum Power Settings for Cisco Aironet Lightweight Access Points and Bridges document available at: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/wireless/aironet-15 70-series/products-installation-guides-list.ht ml Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 A-1 Appendix A Access Point Tech Specs References IN Power Distribution Budget Power Distribution Budget Table A-1 lists the power distribution budget for AP1572IC access point configurations. Table A-1 Power Distribution Budget for the API5721C Access Point Condition Typical Power Maximum Power (Watts) (Watts) Power using power-over-cable (90V) 38 41 Power using 12VDC input 31 36 With SFP 26 28 Table A-2 lists the power distribution budget for AP1572EC access point configurations. Table A-2 Power Distribution Budget for AP1572EC Access Point Condition Typical Power Absolute Max Power (Watts) (Watts) Power using power-over-cable (90V) 38 42 Power using 12 VDC input 31 35 With SFP 26 30 With 30W PoE-out 76 80 Table A-3 lists the power distribution budget for AP1572EACaccess point configurations:' Table A-3 Power Distribution Budget for AP1572EAC Access Point Condition Typical Power Absolute Max Power (Watts) (Watts) Power using AC input (100VAC) 25 31 Power using AC input (277VAC) 25 31 Power using 12VDC input 20 24 Power using PoE input 23 27 (injector or UPoE, 42-57V) With SFP, AC power 24 28 With 30W PoE-out, AC power 65 72 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I A-2 OL-32138-01 ) Appendix A Access Point Tech Specs References Access Point Operating Temperature Specifications � Access Point Operating Temperature Specifications , Temperature condition Value Operating Temperature Range -40 to 65°C (-40 to 149°F) without solar loading Maximum Operating Temperature for 45°C (AP will be fully operational with 4Tx) AP1572EC,with. If temperature continues to increase, the number • PoE-Out active of transmitters is decreased to 2Tx, and then to • Cable Modem active 1Tx at 55°C. • Full throughput on all Tx channels • Mounted horizontally Maximum solar loading • Deployed in a high-power regulatory domain Maximum Operating Temperature for >45°C • AP1572IC, AP1572EAC • AP1572EC without all features active,or mounted vertically (aids better air flow over the radiating fins on the back of the AP) C Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 A-3 ` :•Z$,i 7. 1 + ' � � I i ' yir, rrt i s- !In1' .l ::E:REEL , a�f 7 ,�ti fea r'3 y Ahf}sncxs6nct�4 ., tips bawl ' aN A P PE NYD,LX c j A . Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information This appendix provides declarations of conformity and regulatory information for the Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Points. This appendix contains the following sections. • Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement, page B-2 • Industry Canada, page B-3 • European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein, page B-6 • Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure, page B-9 • Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan, page B-11 • VCCI Statement for Japan, page B-12 • Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan, page'B-12 • EU Declaration of Conformity, page B-14 � r Cisco,Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations ofConformity and Regulatory Information Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement 1 Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement , FeTested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Models: FCC Certification number. AIR-AP1572EAC-B-K9 LDK102093P \ AIR-AP1572EC1-B-K9 > AIR-AP1572EC2-B-K9 AIR-AP1572IC1-B-K9 AIR-AP1572IC2-B-K9 I Manufacturer. Cisco Systems, Inc. c 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 i' USA This device complies with Part 15 rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. i. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device,pursuant , to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment.-,This equipment generates, uses,and radiates radio frequency energy,and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one of the following measures. • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase separation between the equipment and receiver •r Connect the equipment,to an outlet on a circuit different from which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Industry Canada IIII L Caution The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency when using Cisco-supplied antennas. Any changes or modification to the product not expressly approved by Cisco could void the user's authority to operate this device. Caution To meet regulatory restrictions, the access point must be professionally installed. Requirements of operator to register the RLAN device operating Outdoors in the 5150-5250 MHz band and addressing possible interference issues in this band. Section 15 407(j) of the rules established filing requirements for U=NII operators that deploy a collection of more than 1000 outdoor access points with the 5 15-5.25 GHz band, parties must submit a letter to the FCC lab acknowledging that, should harmful interference to licensed services in this band occur, they will be required to take corrective action. Corrective actions may include reducing power, turning off devices, changing frequency bands, and/or further reducing power radiated in the vertical direction. This material shall be submitted to Federal Communications Commission Laboratory Division,Office of Engineering and Technology 7435 Oakland Mills Road, Columbia,MD, 21046 Attn. U-NII Coordination, i or via website at https.//www.fcc.gov/labhelp use subject line U-NII Filing Industry Canada Models: IC Certification Number AIR-AP1572EAC-A-K9 2461B-LDK102093P AIR-AP1572EC1-A-K9 AIR-AP1572EC2-A-K9 AIR-AP1572IC1-A-K9 AIR-AP1572IC2-A-K9 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Industry Canada Canadian Compliance Statement This Class B Digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. This device complies with Class B Limits of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: i. This device may not cause harmful interference, and I � 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et(2) l'utilisateur de 1'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Cisco Aironet Access Points are certified to the requirements of RSS-210 The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the Canadian regulations.For further information,contact your local Industry Canada office. This device has been designed to operate with antennas having a maximum gain of 13 dBi for 2.4 GHz and 14 dBi for 5 GHz. Antennas having a gain greater are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. Conformement a la reglementation d'Industrie Canada, le present emetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal(ou inferieur)approuee pour l'emetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de reduire les risques de brouillage radioelectrique a l'intention des autres utilisateurs, it faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnee equivalente(p.i.r e)ne depasse pas l'intensite necessaire a l'etablissement d'une communication satisfaisante. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type ' indicated.Antenna types not included in this list,having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le present emetteur radio a ate approuve par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne enumeres ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et?impedance require pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est superieur au gain maximal indique, sont strictement interdits pour?exploitation de l'emetteur Dual Band Omni Max Antenna Gain 7dBi Single Band Omni Max Antenna Gain 8 dBi I- Single Band Directional Max Antenna Gain 14dBi Dual Band Directional Max Antenna Gain 8 dBi Antenna Impedance in all cases is 50 Ohms Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide B-4 OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Industry Canada � Users are advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Les utilisateurs etes avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., quills ont la priority)pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. r This system has been evaluated for RF exposure for,Humans in reference to ANSI C 95 1 (American National Standards Institute)limits.The evaluation wasrbased on RSS-102 Rev 2.To maintain compliance,the minimum separation distance for antennas that have 8 dBi to 14 dBi gain, is 23.6 inches (60 cm) from general bystanders. The minimum separation distance from antennas that have less than 8 dBi gain to general bystanders is 9.8 inches (25cm). Ce systeme a gig evalue pour l'exposition aux RF pour les humains en reference a la norme ANSI C 951 (American National Standards Institute) limites. L'evaluation a ete basee sur RSS-102 Rev 2. La distance minimale de separation de l'antenne de toute personne est de 7.9 "(20 cm)pour les gains d'antenne jusqu'a 8 dBi et 20"(50 cm)pour les gains d'antenne de 14 dbi pour assurer le respect. This access point is also compiiant to EN 50835 for RF exposure. Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information 1.1 European Community,Switzerland,Norway,Iceland,and Liechtenstein European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein Access Point Models: AIR-AP1572EAC7E-K9 AIR-AP1572EC3-E-K9 AIR-AP1572IC3-E-K9 Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC & Medical Directive 93/42/EEC This declaration is only valid for configurations (combinations of software, firmware, and hardware) provided and supported by Cisco Systems. The use of software or firmware not provided and supported by Cisco Systems may result in the equipment no longer being compliant with the-regulatory requirements. J r Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 ] Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC&Medical Directive 93/42/EEC � Rizrapexii Iona o6opynnane()Tromps na ci uec feline u3ncl:Balnul n nplmoxamti unay3n na ' [Bulgarian] Aupeicniea 1999/5/EC. Cesky Toto zafizeni jc v souladu se zakladniini poiadavky a ostatnimi odpovidajicimi ustanovenilni [Czech]: Smarnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de v esentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i [Danish]: Direktiv I999/5/EF Deutsch Dieses Gerat entspricht den gnlndlegenden Anfordeningen and den weiteren entsprechenden [German]: Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Eesti See seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EU olulistele nauetele ja teistele asjakohastele s5tetele. [Estonian]: English: This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant\provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.' Espatlol Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la [Spanish]: Directiva I999/5/CE. E1atl�1laj Aur6S o 4ordaoµbS civw oc.crupii6perocni pc Tic ouaub&tS artarn octc Hat&)J.ag Rau* [Greek]: Stat:lk me tic OStp/iaS 1999/5/EC. r Francais Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et mix autres dispositions pertinentes de [French]: la Directive 1999/5/EC. [I a[Icelandic]: tmki cr samkva:mt gmmnkrdfum og Obrum vii5cigandi akva:Ount Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. [Icelaanddic]: Italian Questo apparato 6 conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva [Italian]: 1999/5/CE. Latvie8u gi ieklirta atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK bfitiskaj5m prasiblm un citiem ar to saistitajlein [Latvian]: noteikluniem. / Lietuvitl 8is[renginys tenkina 1999/5/EB Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus it kitas gios drektyvos [Lithuanian]: nuostatas. 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide �r OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information II Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC&Medical Directive 93/42/EEC Naderlands Dit apparaat voldoct aan de essentiele eisen en andere van tocpassingzijnde bepalingen van de [Dutch] Richtlijn 1999/5/EC Malti Dan 1-apparat huwa konformi ma1-htigiet essenzjali u 1-provedimenti 1-ohra rilevanti tad- [Maltese] Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Margyar Ez a keszalek teljesiti az alapvet6 kOvetelmenyekct es mas 1999/5/EK iranyclvbcn [Hungarian]: meghatarozott vonatkozo rendelkezeseket. Norsk Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende Irav og andre relevante bestemmelserli EU- [Norwegian] direktiv 1999/51EF Polski Urzgdzenie jest zgodne z ogolnytiti wymaganiami oraz szczegOlnymi warunkami olaetlonymi [Polish]: Dyrektywq UE. 1999/5/E , Portugues Este equipamento esta em conformidade coin os requisitos essenciais e outras provisUes [Portuguese] relevantes da Directiva I999/5/EC. Slovensko Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi pogoji Direktive [Slovenian]: 1999/5/EC. Slovcnsky Toto zariadenic je v zhode so zakladnymi poziadavkami a inymi prislit nymi nariadeniami [Slovak] direktiv 1999;5/EC. Suomi Tama laite tayttaa direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siina asetcttujen muiden [Finnish]: laitetta koskevien mtlaraysten mukainen. Svenska Denna utrustning fir i Overensstammelse med de vasentliga kraven och andra relevanta [Swedish]: bestammelser i Direktiv I999/5/EC N n The following standards were applied. EMC—EN 301 489-1 v1.8.1, EN 301 489-17 v2.1 1 Health & Safety—EN60950-1 2005, EN 50385 2002 Radio—EN 300 328 v 1 7 1, EN 301.893 v 1.5 1 The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 4/and Annex III of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed. This device also conforms to the EMC requirements of the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC. \ Note This equipment is intended to be used in all EU and EFTA countries. Outdoor use may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation. For more details, contact Cisco Corporate Compliance. The product carries the CE Mark: ( Eo Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I j Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure 11 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure The following is the declaration of conformity for RF exposure for the United States, Canada,European Union and Australia. United States This system has been evaluated for RF exposure for Humans in reference to ANSI C 95 1 (American National Standards Institute) limits. The evaluation was based on ANSI C 95 1 and FCC OET Bulletin 65C rev 01 01 To maintain compliance, the minimum separation distance for antennas that have: • 8.1 dBi to 14,dBi gain, is 23.6 inches (60 cm) from general bystanders. • 6 1 dBi to 8 dBi gain, is 9.8 inches (25cm) from general bystanders. • 6 dBi gain or less, is 7.9 inches (20cm) from general bystanders Canada This system has been evaluated for RF exposure for Humans in reference to ANSI C 95 1 (American National Standards Institute)limits.The evaluation was based on RSS-102 Rev 2.To maintain compliance, the minimum separation distance for antennas that have 8 dBi to 14 dBi gain, is 20 inches (50 cm) from general bystanders. The minimum separation distance from antennas that have less than 8 dBi gain to general bystanders is 10 inches(25 cm). Ce systeme a ate evalue pour l'exposition aux RF pour les humains en reference a la norme ANSI C 951 (American National Standards Institute) limites. L'evaluation a die basee sur RSS-102 Rev 2. La distance minimale de separation de l'antenne de toute personne est de 10 "(25 cm)pour les gains d'antenne jusqu'a 8 dBi et 20"(50 cm)pour les gains d'antenne de 14 dbi pour assurer le respect. European Union This system has been evaluated for RF exposure for Humans in reference to the ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) limits. The,evaluation was based on the EN 50385 Product Standard to Demonstrate Compliance of Radio Base stations and Fixed Terminals for Wireless Telecommunications Systems with basic restrictions or reference levels related to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields from 300 MHz to 40 GHz.To maintain compliance,the minimum separation,distance for antennas that have 8 dBi to 14 dBi gain, is 23.6 inches (60 cm) from general bystanders. The minimum separation distance from antennas that have less than 8 dBi gain to general bystanders is 9.8 inches (25cm). Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information I 1.1 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure Australia This system has been evaluated for RF exposure for Humans as referenced in the Australian Radiation Protection standard and,has been evaluated to the ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) limits. To maintain compliance, the minimum separation distance from antennas that have less than 8 dBi gain to general bystanders is 9.8 inches (25cm) and antennas with 8 dBi gain shall have 50cm separation. Antennas with greater than 8 dBi gain are not supported in Australia. j II Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide B-1 U OL-32138-01 I 1 � Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan 1.1 Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan This section provides guidelines for avoiding interference when operating Cisco Aironet access points in Japan. These guidelines are provided in both Japanese and English. Lightweight Access Point Model. AIR-AP 1572EAC-Q-K9 AIR-AP 1572EC4-Q-K9 AIR-AP 1572IC4-Q-K9 Japanese Translation i zoo igoftJJlJagtt elt, 2+ V4o)S • #4 • 1l#01411; o) /3N 2t�}o) ilea-f .* W-tf »t -C 64 ICZE 111o)#11rfif P (Jr t•Nt� MOP) at1; t/Jv t M (#tA NLtd0J# P-M) 4-co*t"r �041116VVIlt6141z, < z4 f1f Ri11101i fTtttOZ/Jva JaftaftitAvrotd `c tam Lz� 2 Ti—, za) 5bN645hi 9JJtio)#11p4 fIz Lz RT60 4lblit Utz**I::It,11af lz:M IM J c -4" b Rlt' ; a M VIM Lt_- �. 261:l ot_aJofaff409Jz1g, 4 i a ,:io'aJfftsErz-Doti giL-cFt6�, 3 i-Ofth, a)f M h hf RIMOMZii‘la Niti IZX 1.,z221+60) illbtytJL� t- At� Ef7frti�9o) ea It, %1eo) 3t trp7 *b1 y' F C o me* 03-6434-6500 03 r- English Translation This equipment operates in the, same frequency bandwidth as industrial, scientific, and medical devices such as microwave ovens and mobile object identification(RF-ID)systems(licensed premises radio stations and unlicensed specified low-power radio stations) used in factory production lines. i. Before using this equipment,make sure that no premises radio stations or specified low-power radio stations of RF-ID are used,in the vicinity 2. If this equipment causes RF interference to a premises radio station of RF-ID, promptly change the frequency or stop using the device;contact the number below and ask for recommendations on avoiding radio interference, such as setting partitions. 3. If this equipment causes RF interference to a specified low-power radio station of RF-ID, contact the number below Contact Number 03-6434-6500 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide ilmill OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan VCCI Statement for Japan e Warning This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. 17-o)42(t. 77A'It ##tti et. *1lErtirlz1SVIE11-Z 0 A �I LJ V4-o VCCI-A Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan This section provides administrative rules for operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan. The rules are provided in both Chinese and English. Chinese' Translation =1 • Alt *I 44- CIA Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point,Hardware Installation Guide B-12 OL-32138-01 Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan � English Translation Administrative Rules for Low-power Radio-Frequency Devices Article 12 For those low-power radio-frequency devices that have already received a type-approval, companies, business units or users should not change its frequencies,increase its power or change its original features and functions. Article 14 The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the conditions that no harmful interference is paused to aviation safety and authorized radio station, and if interference is caused, the user must stop operating the device immediately and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear The authorized radio station means a radio-communication service operating in accordance with the Communication Act. The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the interference caused by the operation of an authorized radio station, by another intentional or unintentional radiator, by industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, or by an incidental radiator Chinese Translation 4.7 * .% 4.7 6 ift4 tifeati-4: x Q (p 4.7 7 L I oR, f si-I4 01� 4 rot 4 if a 'h , 44n'K tl it tc ro English Translation Low-power Radio-frequency Devices Technical Specifications 47 Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure 47.6 The U-NII devices shall accept any interference from legal communications and shall not interfere the legal communications. If interference is caused,the user must stop operating the device immediately,and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear i Cisco Aironet 1570 Series OutdoorAccess Point Hardware Installation Guide I 0L-32138.01 i f Appendix B Declarations.of Conformity and Regulatory Information I Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil 477 Manufacturers of U-NIII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency stability such that an emission is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the user manual. Statement 371—Power Cable and AC Adapter #�0,17--y711., may;{1.$a— I}-. A�C79'19, '��/DTI)—ttd:Ea py(i M t if iztrG f Id7B GG"L�::{tlr]< t:::t • 77[7G Pit P. -0SGG" - WifIlf:td: Lte -Vo fFTTJA, "3:OlgElLta9 to fit_ Z.51,111 L), WoiA0)0 (PSE a— hl: aEE) zta< UL ark' (UL t_-lz CSA 75s — f`iza E) o :iJ$'7--/A,itt$ iAriZt � "AL:I � ;zi1�111�TtaL�t- �i < t_c�L'o I r English Translation When installing the product,'please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/AC adapters. Using any other cables/adapters could cause a malfunction or a fire. Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law prohibits the use of UL-certified cables(that have the"UL" shown on the code)for any other electrical devices than products designated by CISCO The'use of cables that are certified by Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law(that have"PSE"shown on the code)is not limited to CISCO-designated products. EU Declaration of Conformity All the Declaration of Conformity statements related to this product can be found at the following location. http.//www.ciscofax.com 1 / Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil This section contains special information for operation of Cisco Aironet access points in Brazil. Access Point Models AIR-AP1572 EAC-Z-K9 AIR-AP1572EC1-Z-K9 AIR-AP1572EC2-Z-K9 AIR-AP1572EC3-Z-K9 AIR-AP1572IC1-Z-K9 • AIR-AP1572IC2-Z-K9 • Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide B-14 OL-32138-01 I � I Appendix B Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil � AIR-AP1572IC3-Z-K9 Regulatory Information Figure B-1 contains Brazil regulatory information for the access point models identified in the previous section. Figure B-1 Brazil Regulatory Information , A.NATEL 0492-15-1086 (01)07898362234446 Portuguese Translation Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tern direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial, mesmo de estaroes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario. English Translation This equipment operates on a secondary basis and consequently must accept harmful interference, including interference from stations of the same kind.This equipment may not cause harmful interference to systems operating on a primary basis. r ' Cisco Aironet 1570 S_eries Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide Emil OL-32138-01 J "l i- ' F !Ili 11T (1? f �j�':�,� ^mot,, "` t ptteea, Ilium 1 1- s r - •:��N : '�J Inntrn / Access Point Pinouts This appendix describes the pin signals of the access point Ethernet connectors, and the power injector input and output connectors. Table C-1 describes the pin signals of the access point LAN connector Table C-1 Access Point LAN Connector Pinouts Pin Number Signal Name 1 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) 2 3 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) 6 4 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) 5 7 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) 8 Shield Chassis ground Table C-2 describes the pin signals for the access point PoE-in Ethernet connector The Pinouts given in this table are applicable to AIR-POWERINJ1500.Not all PoE power sources follow these pinouts. Table C-2 Access Point PoE-In Ethernet Connector Pinouts for AIR-POWERINJ1500 Pin Number Signal Name 1 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) and DC return 2 3 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) and DC (+) 6 4 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) and DC (+) 5 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 Appendix C Access Point Pinouts I • Table C-2 Access Point PoE-In Ethernet Connector Pinouts for AIR-POWERINJ1500 Pin Number Signal Name 7 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) and DC return 8 Shield Chassis ground Table C-3 describes the pin signals for the power injector input connector (To Switch). Table C-3 Power Injector Input Connector(To Switch) Pinouts Pin Number Signal Name 1 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) 2 3 Ethernet signal pair 10/100/1000BASE-T) 6 4 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) 5 7 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) 8 - Shield Chassis ground Table C-4 describes the RJ-45 pin signals for the power injector output connector(To AP).The Pinouts given in this table are applicable to AIR-POWERINJ1500 Not all PoE power sources follow these pinouts. Table C-4 Power Injector AIR-POWER1NJ1500 Output Connector (To AP) Pinouts Pin Number Signal Name 1 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) and DC return 2 3 Ethernet signal pair (10/100/1000BASE-T) and DC (+) 6 4 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) and DC (+) 5 7 Ethernet signal pair (1000BASE-T) and DC return 8 r Shield Chassis ground Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 I 7_4 i, :5; 14'Ik„-4'.1 ,,: , •, ^pa!pin in -:,',,:,;•.t.:..",,. , .... --„, -,-,4- <,_,„;., ..4"---77—::: :2 -}i----- ----,..-:--:4:-..,----.,f--,,—,..:7-..::::.:-______.22. ''' ' / '''',N ,7-APPENDIX-4 -- ----aizi-A -,../.--;" ' Configuring DHCP Option 43 • , 7 This appendix describes the steps needed to configure DHCP Option 43 on a DHCP server, such as a Cisco Catalyst 3750 series switch, for use with Cisco Aironet Access Points. This appendix'contains these sections: • Overview, page D-2 , A • Configuring Option 43 for 1570 Series Access Points, page D-2' , r , A i - , r 7 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide I OL-32138-01 D-1 ) , _ Appendix D Configuring DHCP Option 43 Overview Overview For up-to-date information on how to use DHCP Option 43 and to see sample configurations for DHCP Option 43 for lightweight Cisco Aironet access points (LAPs), go to this URL. http.//www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/docs/wireless-mobility/wireless-lan-wlan/97066-dhcp-option-43 -00.html The following section contains a DHCP Option 43 configuration example on a DHCP server for use with Cisco Aironet Access Points. For other DHCP server implementations, consult DHCP server product documentation for configuring DHCP Option 43 In Optionz43, use the IP address of the controller management interface. Note DHCP Option 43 is limited to one access point type per DHCP pool. You must configure a separate DHCP pool for,each access point type. Cisco Aironet 1570 series access points use a type-length-value (TLV) format for DHCP Option 43 DHCP servers must be programmed to return the option based on the access point DHCP Vendor Class Identifier (VCI) string (DHCP Option 60). The VCI strings for Cisco access points that can operate in lightweight mode are listed in Table D-1 Table D-1 Lightweight Access Point VCI Strings Access Point Vendor Class Identifier(VCI) Cisco Aironet 1570 series Cisco AP c1570 The following is the format of the TLV block: • Type: Oxfl (decimal 241) • Length. Number of controller IP addresses * 4 • Value: List of WLC management interfaces Configuring Option 43 for 1570 Series Access Points To configure DHCP Option 43 for Cisco Aironet 1570 series access points in the embedded Cisco IOS DHCP server,follow these steps. Step 1 Enter configuration mode at the Cisco IOS CLI. Step 2 Create the DHCP. pool, including the necessary parameters such as default router and name server The commands used to create a DHCP pool are as follows: ip dhcp pool pool name network IP Network Netmask default-router Default router dns-server DNS Server Where pool name is the name of the DHCP pool, such as AP1570 IP Network is the network IP address where the controller, resides, such as 10 0 15 1 I , Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide D-2 0L-32138.01 n Appendix D Configuring DHCP Option 43 Configuring Option 43 for 1570 Series Access Points � Netmask is the subnet mask, such as 255 255 255 0 Default router is the IP address of the default router, such as 10 0 0 1 DNS Server is the IP address of the DNS'server, such as 10 0 10 2 Step 3 Add the Option 60 line using the following syntax: option 60 ascii "VCI string" For the VCI string, use the value from Table D-1 The quotation marks must be included. Step 4 Add the Option 43 line using the following syntax: option 43 hex hex string The hex string is assembled by concatenating the TLV values shown below Type +Length+ Value Type is always fl(hex) Length is the number of controller management IP addresses times 4 in hex. Value is the IP address of the controller listed sequentially in hex. For example,suppose that there are two controllers with management interface IP addresses, 10 126.126.2 and 10 127 127.2. The type is fl(hex) The length is 2 *4 =8 = 08 (hex) The IP addresses translate to 0a7e7e02 and 0a7f7f02. Assembling the string then yields f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02 The resulting Cisco IOS command added to the DHCP scope is listed below option 43 hex f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02 I � 1 1 r- 1 l l 1 Cisco Aironet 1570 Series Outdoor Access Point Hardware Installation Guide OL-32138-01 D-3 e t. ;�._. .t. .- . '' '' 4- . -. - :': . Attachment 06 Lif%‘ ,:- ::„,-:- .. ' ',N.r ' 1, , .,i,. li„ 4("61-:4_,,,114.2- :,.* 1 1, ,,....,...,:.::„.„.- .._ .::,...1... ,,.. L.,10,0;;.1.. „..,,,, A44..‘-.1„.., _ . - ,1,,,, , ,t fi ,, i k n'..**"' ''''''''., ,r,-.11,.......: t '— r. A-,, a s r 1 • ", ` ,. . .r ., . :%-----r;r:::- ...„.",.,,i_• , -, J ,. ''-- :.,,T1 :''' . __' I,::;,A,L, ! .1 i' 1.::...z--4.:,L-i-cl'I,_.- .thi..._____ ___ . _ _____ ____:___ Smart-UPS Industrial 13.00VA & 2000VA . Trusted Power Protection Solution for ' a Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) • 4= ,.2:: =*1 ' ; ea—" ` .-- Challenges Intelligent transportation systems (ITS) are using innovative traffic management technology such as adaptive signal controls, emergency vehicle preemption and incident monitoring to help citizens use roadways in a efficient manner As more intelligent devices are installed in roadside cabinets, Preventing equipment failures from power events becomes increasingly critical. Solution Designed to operate in harsh environments,APCTM Smart-UPSTM Industrial not only provide high-density, double- conversion online power protection and advanced management for ITS, but also ensure backup time during power outages when used with external batteries. Smart-UPS Industrial are perfect solutions to protect your systems from power outages and prevent unnecessary maintenance calls due to power fluctuations Benefits OImprove Intersection Safety While Reducing Operating ® Maintain ITS Network Security Costs • Imbedded Network Management Card allows for secure Clean power with double-conversion on-line remote monitoring'&control of a UPS via web browser, CLI,SNMP(v1/v2c/v3),Modbus TCP and BACnet/IP - Lowers maintenance costs by reducing service calls to reset Adopts the latest network communication protocols for signal operation improved security Reduces risk due to dark/flashing intersections by improving signal uptime • Extends battery life by lowering cycle count CO Eliminate Maintenance Headaches • Extends battery life by handling many power quality issues • Field replaceable fan/filter for easy replacement electronically Quick troubleshoot with user-friendly LCD screen ® Remotely manage your UPS Fleet with Certainty • 24/7 support from Schneider Electric's established service& Configure,receive notifications,review event logs,run support team diagnostics test&check battery runtime status • Manage the entire system with detailed battery information and ® Outperform Roadside Environments early fault warnings Conformally coated for humidity&pollution tolerance • EcostruxureTM IT integration:collect&distribute critical alerts with Designed for-37°C to+74°C(-40°F to 165°F)operating a unified view of physical infrastructure environments from temperatures with integrated temperature compensated anywhere on the network L charging system What do customers say about Smart-UPS Industrial? 1 "The 1300VA power management unit takes everything that makes APC great in the server room and puts it on street in intelligent transportation systems. The power protection and battery backup features are a great fit for an intersection, while the remote monitoring capabilities and versatility allow for easy deployment in anytraffic cabinet." -Eric from City of Sevierville, Tennessee 1 www.apc.com/secure-ups Life Is On APC by Schneider electric Smart-UPS Industrial On-Line 120VAC Output Overview . 3 6 Wa'y1'ar 3 .5 L.7` rant,, .. 11 o HaPMLwrm HHP pc:;aI • Rum ...,a « �+KI o l eattary LH,ESR ••,oo}�fS` _, OVta'U71tC VAC,30.lGMx RiPVF tIO VAC.MOH.Hx. • � aFF ox l 4 j 18 Irc 120veanery546v • o l ' out:120v Load:. 949v:, u QQ C y 11816 • • Onbne •Rela 4-.-.- 1 a r• I i a.... RFan• Botiary lnpul,NVHC O® �. d+ I 0 B x, ' I. i10 y v o � �" '- 19 +v -.Ma+ L N L N 17 15 14. 0 Easily Replaceable Filter o Battery Communication Connector ® Easily Replaceable Fan Assembly ® External bypass box interface (RS485 and +24 VDC power) A Serial port to communicate ® Input AC Circuit Breaker to with the Smart-UPS Industrial connects/disconnects AC power O External Battery Circuit Breaker to o AC Input Connector connects/disconnect battery power o USB Port ® AC Output Connector oUniversal I/O Port to connect optional o Relay Input Connector environmental monitoring accessories oReset Button to restart the Network Battery Test Points Management Interface o Relay Output Connector O Ethernet Port for network communication 0 Battery Temperature Sensor Connector (Sensor cable and mating connector are 0 Status LEDs supplied with the battery harness kit) oLCD for real-time status updates 0 Battery Connector and UPS control (Cables are not provided along with the UPS) LCD Display Features f;° --N LCD display screen Configuration (b Accurately provides real-time •Output voltage,frequency status updates in your choice •Language,brightness,contrast of basic or advanced menus •Alarm volume •IP address •ie00 )i ®1 UPS status (scrolling) •Output voltage Test and diagnostics In: 1 20v Battery: 54.6v •Input voltage •Initiate battery and runtime out:120v Load: 949 VA •Output frequency calibration tests •Runtime Online Relay 4-0-0- •Load About . •Battery health •UPS serial number,battery part ESC A Control number •UPS and outlet group •Battery install and suggested OK v settings replacement dates •Bypass control Smart-UPS Industrial On-Line 120VAC Output Main applications .'.- .Traffic Signals • Public Transportation Field Controls • Ramp.Metering • . • Tolling,Systems - . • • 'Roadside Monitoring,Systems ' • Tunnel'Control Systems ' • Dynamic Message Signs . • Rail Crossings Signals ,,.,,:5 No_...w. - 7t4.,,r,,..0.,—....,...._, ,...4-,:.,. '. ...-'i it,. ''',. .-P.,.,.,-.„,.t.",-_,1•''1.•;' "--;,-.4•-,----« ,:'—:.04f'.. t,-,7,..:..-,-7,,-,-:,,,,:„.,T: : ''''.I.‘°-...r� .C _,�..,,.. :'i o; " +'•zt 7'.i] ' .tr..-r+.r ``^__ `L�, n r;".'^�•f.j'( j. .r_"'- i„' _ ..ems-.a..r..- e„:...0",-,-,--:- ',. r:, „t i,.,. Y-.%a \,1 i*-1. - •� -1 ,' f)Ltf!1t'l 1-., , :_t ', - `:rr ',,' '_ •?, , Accessories Battery Harness Kit (required) Battery Heater Mat Connect the 48V battery string to the product to enable Allows battery use in extreme temperatures— the use of multiple battery strings. 2 sizes available.256 and 365 sq in 4 Part numbers: Part numbers: XHXXS7A4F -SBS75 Cabinet Accessory 4 ft XM050DXXXA-Battery Heater Mat 256 Sq In 120VAC XHXXS7A8F-SBS75 Cabinet Accessory 12 ft XM102DXXXA-Battery Heater Mat 365 Sq In 120VAC Extended Temperature Batteries Environmental Monitoring Accessories Long backup times available with up to eight 100 Optional accessories to increase environmental Ah lead-acid batteries. Extend temperature with control through sensors. batteries best suited for harsh environments. Part numbers: Part numbers: AP9335TH -Temperature/humidity sensor XB102XX1XS -Battery 100Ah 12VDC AP9810-Relay input/output connector-supports XBO50XX1XS -Battery 50Ah 12VDC , two input contacts and one output relay Service Bypass Unit with Generator Input Service Bypass Unit Removes the UPS for service without disrupting the Removes the UPS for service without disrupting the operation of the traffic signal while allowing for operation of the traffic signal generator input power Part number:XS30ALLXXR2G Part number:XS30ALLXXR2 linIMIN Trusted power protection for Intelligent Transportation Systems • 9. '�" :;/ `� " --, T'— .,`'� 1 — • _ -"..:fir-, L }{ � ..,; •,o '."'...,S x /'µ'' me,,. .- _. ..' e .,,. , ` • • 4: I { I- -'� ,/, { .~F lq....; r J�—d{{ \' !- \Y e `, !ems ; 1. s Technical Specifications ' . . - -$- Product SKU XU1 K3LLXXRCC . • XU2KOLLXXRCC ` ' Output Output Topology — _ — — — ;i — —J — -Double Conversion On-Line `a Nominal Output Voltage 120 VAC Output Power Rating _— —— — — ^^ 11 _ 1300W,1300VA —� j' 1800W,20dQVA —. Output Voltage Regulation(static) i' +1% -- -_ _._ ) _ — - — - - _- _ - _ - __a Output Frequency(nominal) 11 50/60 Hz±3 Hz j -a.,-_. __- - ---_1-- - - 1 'Output Waveform '— __ ____.— .__ _—___._____ I ----- -- ---�--� - —Pure Sinewave I Input Nominal Input Voltage i, 120 VAC - -11 Input Voltage Range 1 ---85 to 155 VAC Input Frequency �j! =---40 to 70 Hz y4 1 Input Connection — Single phase,3 wire(Line,Neutral and Ground) Communication and Management i Interface.Ports I' Ethernet via Embedded Network Management Card(NMC)&USB I i High-resolution graphical LCD display alarm on battery j Control Panel and Audible Alarms 1 distinctive low battery alarm and configurable delays Environment !Temperature-Operation i — -40 to 74°C(-40 to 165° F) Temperature-Storage(without batteries) I -40 to 85°C(-40 to 185°.F) ! --- -- - --- - - --Maximum Elevation-Operating i� 0 to 3,000 m(0 to10,000 ft) Maximum Elevation-Storage ! 0 to 15,000 m(0 to 50,000 ft) '-` I Humidity — -- 0%to 95%relative humidity non-condensing Physical Unit Weight without Packaging — — 10 kg(22.05 lb) Unit Weight with Packaging AIL 12 kg(26.5 lb) Unit Dimensions without Packaging — ---; __----432 mm x 260 mm x 88 mm —— Width x Depth x Height — — i — — (17.01 in x 10.3 in x 3.5 in) j Unit Dimensions with Packaging 535 mm x 370 mm x 186 mm Width x Depth x Height (21 1 in x 14 6 in x 7.3 in) Conformance `Warranty — _ — — — — — _] — 3-year factory warranty with optional extended warranty I External Batteries -, SKU !, XB050XX1XS XB102XX1XS 1 t______._, 100 Ah,,12 VDC__-_,___. Rating ___ _ :_ - — — 50 Ah 12_VDC °;I i Maintenance-free sealed lead-acid battery 4 Battery Type 1 with suspended electrolyte;leak proof Typical Backup Time at Varying Load Conditions Please refer to www.apc.com for runtime charts Battery Harness Kit SKU — -- — — — — — i — — XHXXS7A4F -- '' ---- XHXXS7A8F —I Descriptions v_- _ — — _ SBS75 cabinet accessory_4 ft -SBS75 cabinet accessory 12 ft m Life Is On APC by Schneider Electric 1 Technical Specifications — Service Bypass Unit , PtOduct SKU XS30ALLXXR2G XS30ALLXXR2 Output Nominal Output Voltage I - 120 Vac #.of Outlets . . —?- _ �- -r 1 , _ - j t I� _ • .i Outlets Connection type i. 4,pole PP45 power pole connector ___.. �—�TM � �� `�Overload protection I No `k Input 1 Nominal Input Voltage 11 —�12. Vac l Current Rating — — ii— 30A Max s Input Frequency ��I 50.to 60 Hz � _. Recommended.Input circuit Breaker 30A,Dual pole branch rated Generator'Input 120 VaO• —II N/A i� _ -_ _ _. it ��___. __.__ _ __ -. Environment I Temperature-Operation I -40 to 74°C(-40-to 165°'F,) �i Temperature-Storage(withoutbatteries) —, b^.-40 to 85°C(-40 to 185°F)� � �— — �— - — — I.Maximum,Elevation-'Operating � O. 3,000 m(0.to10;000 ft) I :Maximum Elevation-Storage l 0 to 15,000 m 1(0.to 50,000.ft) t 1.--: _e — — _ _ may,--- _ _ n I.Humidity t - .0%'to 95%relative humidity, [Protection Class .,. ., • . .. ., , —4 IP20 Physical f Unit Weight without Packaging 1i ^E2.2 kg(4.9 Ib) �1_ 1'.25 kg(2.8 lb) I 1 Unit Weight with Packaging 5.7 kg.(12:6 lb) C 4.5 kg(9.91b) --'i a Unit Dimensions without Packaging i 432mmz100mmx88rum-- 280mmx72mmx88mm ,Width x Depth x.Height C (17 in x 3.93 in x 3.5 in) I •(11 in x 2.8 in x 3.5 in) i _i—_ Unit Dimensions with Packaging • 535 mm x 370 mm x 186 mm 1' 460 mm x 295 mm x 190:mm Width x Depth.x.Height (21 1 in x 14.6 in x 7.3 in)- j, (18.1 in x 11.6 in x 5.9 in) Conformance Safety -_ M UL-1778(CSA 107.3 for Canada) `'CALTRANS CaltransSSpecification1(TEES),March 12,-,.2009version t Warranty.. !' 3-year factory warranty_, t Life Is On • ' by Schneider Electric ' � P I _ y Life Is On by Schneider Electric www.apc.com/secure-ups 132 Fairgrounds Rd West Kingston,RI 02892 Phone:+01 (401)789-5735 www.schneider-electric.com ©2019 Schneider Electric.All rights reserved.All trademarks are owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. tiffs x m1116111 . ATTACHMENT 07 C I S C o Data Sheet Cisco Industrial Ethernet 4000 Series Switches Developed specifically to withstand the harshest industrial manufacturing environments, these switches offer today's most flexible and scalable industrial Ethernet platform that will grow with your network. Product Overview The Cisco®Industrial Ethernet(IE)4000 Series is the latest addition to our ruggedized switching platforms and provides superior high-bandwidth switching and proven Cisco 10Se Software-based routing capabilities for industrial environments.The IE 4000 Series delivers highly secure access and industry-leading convergence using the Cisco Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP)and is built to withstand extreme environments while adhering to overall IT network design,compliance,and performance requirements. The IE 4000 Series is ideal for industrial Ethernet applications where hardened products are required,including factory automation,energy and process control, intelligent transportation systems(ITS), oil and gas field sites,city surveillance programs,and mining.With improved overall performance,greater bandwidth,a richer feature set, and enhanced hardware,the Cisco IE 4000 Series complements the current industrial Ethernet portfolio of related Cisco industrial switches,such as the Cisco IE 2000 and IE 3000. The Cisco IE 4000 can easily be installed in your network.Through a user-friendly web device manager,the Cisco IE 4000 provides easy out-of-the-box configuration and simplified operational manageability to deliver advanced security,data,video,and voice services over industrial networks. Features and Benefits Table 1 Features and Benefits of Cisco IE 4000 Feature Benefit Robust Industrial Design • Built for harsh environment and temperature range(-40 to 70 C). • Hardened for vibration,shock and surge,and noise immunity. • Resilient dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. • Complies with multi-industry specifications for automation,ITS,and substation environments. • Improves uptime,performance,and safety of industrial systems and equipment. • Fitted with compact,PLC(Programmable Logic Control)style DIN rail compliant form factor ideal for industrial deployment. - Covers a wide range of Power over Ethernet(PoE)application requirements. User-Friendly GUI Device •Allows easily configuration and monitoring via a web browser. Manager • Eliminates the need for more complex terminal emulation programs. • Reduces the cost of deployment SwapDrive:"Zero-Config" - Simple switch replacement in case of a failure. Replacement - No networking expertise required. • Helps ensure fast recovery. High-Density Industrial - Reduces cpmplexity with one cable for both connectivity and power. Power over Ethernet - Controls costs by limiting wiring,distribution panels,and circuit breakers. (PoE) Creates space and reduces heat dissipation. •5 Enables ready-to-use PoE devices like IP phones and wireless access points. • Supports(on select models)maximum HD camera deployments. 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 1 of 11 Feature Benefit Full Gigabit Ethernet ' Connects new wireless access point(802.11n and 802.11ac). Switch • Enables new HD IP Cameras and new PLC(Programmable Logic Control). Allows SCADA(Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition)connectivity. Provides introduction of new bandwidth-hungry applications in the indugtrial space. Supports very-delay-sensitive applications and time-sensitive networks. Delivers multiple rings,redundant ring topology for new network configurations. Extends geographical scalability where longer distance connectivity is required. Your Ruggedized Choice for Industrial Environments / The Cisco Industrial Ethernet(IE)4000 Series offers: • Bandwidth and capacity to grow with your networking needs:20-Gbps nonblocking switching capacity with up to 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports per switch - High-density industrial PoE/PoE+support providing in-line power to up to 8 power devices, including IP cameras and phones,badge readers,wireless access points, etc. - Cisco IOS Software features for smooth IT integration and policy consistency • Robust resiliency enabled by dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP), Parallel Redundancy Protocol(PRP), PROFINET—Media Redundancy Protocol(MRP), Etherchannel and Flexlink support, redundant power input,dying gasp,etc. - True zero-touch replacement for middle-of-the-night or middle-of-nowhere failure - Line-rate, low-latency forwarding with advanced hardware assist features(such as NAT, IEEE1588) - Simplified software upgrade path with universal images - Support of Industrial automation protocols EtherNet/IP(CIP)and PROFINET,MRP(IEC 62439-2) Figure 1 shows switch models,Table 2 shows all the available Cisco IE 4000 Series models,Table 3 list the SW license PIDs and Table 4 lists the power supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. Figure 1. IE 4000 Models r: I a3 .IE-4000-16T4GE ; IE-4000-4S8P4G-E 1 IE-4000-4T4P4GE IE-4000-8S4G-E , ;IE-4000-4TC4G-E i IE-4000-.16GT4G-E p• IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E i I IE-4000-8GT4G-E r IE-4000-8GS4G-E IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E I I IE-4000-8T4G=E 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 2 of 11 Table 2. Cisco IE 4000 Series Models Product Number Total Ports GE Combo Additional RJ-45 Copper SFP Fiber PoE/PoE+ Default Software Uplinks(4G)1 Combo Ports Ports(T) Ports(S) Ports(P,GP) IE-4000-4TC4G-E 8 4(FE) 1Er4000-8T4G-E 12 8(FE) IE-4000-8S4G-E \ 12 8(FE) i IE-4000-4T4P4G-E 12 I I. +4(FE) ( (4(FE) IE-4000-16T4G-E , 20 '16(FE) IE-4000-4S8P4G:E '16 All models have 4 4(FE) 8(FE) All models ship 7 GE combo uplink - with LAN Base IE.4000.8GT4G-E 12 ports 8(GE) image2 IE 4000-8GS4G-E 12 8(GE) IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E 12 4(GE) 4(GE) IE-4000-16GT4G-E .20 16(GE) IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E 20 8(GE) 8(GE) IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E 16 4(GE) 8(GE) 1 Combo ports provide one copper and one fiber physical port and only one can be activated at a time. 2 Can be upgraded to IP Services at a fee. Table 3. Cisco IE 4000 SW License and Accessories PIDs Description L-IE4000-RTU= ) 1E4000 Electronic software license upgrade from LAN base to IP Services I LIC-MRP-Manager MRP ring manager license LIC-MRP-Client MRP ring dient license LIC-MRP-MULTI-MGR Multiple MRP manger license STK-RACKMNT-2955= 19'DIN Rail mount kit STK-RACK-DINRAIL= 19'DIN Rail mount kit All copper Gigabit Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100/1000 mbps and duplex negotiation.All copper Fast Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100 mbps and duplex negotiation. I Table 4. Power Supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches Product Number Wattage Rated Nominal Input Supported Power PoE/PoE Use Case Scenario Operating Range Input Voltage Output +Support Operating Range PWR-IE170W-PC-AC= 170W AC 100-240V/2.3A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 54VDC/3.15A Yes Maximum.PoE/PoE+port or or support in a AC or high DC 125-250V/2.1A DC 106-300V DC environments‘ PWR-IE170W-PC-DC= 170W •,) DC 12-54V/23A DC 10.8-60V 54VDC/3.15A Yes Maximum PoE/PoE+.port support in a DC environment' PWR-IE50W-AC= 50W AC\100-240V/1.25A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 24VDC/2.1A No No PoE/PoE+support or or needed in an AC or DC DC 125-250V/1.25A 'DC 106-300V environment ,PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC= 50W AC 100-240y/1.25A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 24VDC/2.1A No," No PoE/PoE+support needed'when IEC plug is desired 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 3 of 11 Product Number Wattage Rated Nominal Input Supported Power PoE/PoE Use Case Scenario Operating Range Input Voltage Output +Support Operating Range PWR-1E65W-PC-AC. 65W AC 100-240V/1.4A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 54VDC/1.2 A Yes Minimum(1-2 port)PoE or or support needed in an AC DC 125-250V/1.0A DC 106-300V or high DC environment2 PWR4E65W-PC-DC= 65W DC 24-48VDC/4.5A DC 18-60V - 54VDC/1.2 A Yes Minimum(1-2 port)PoE support needed in a DC environment2 The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 170W.A PoE port draws up to 15.4W of power,and a PoE+port draws up to 30W of power 2 The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 65W. Figure 2 shows a diagram to help you select a Cisco IE 4000 model. Figure 2. Cisco IE 4000 Model Selection Guide I Client Ports Rate? — Copper or Fiber? — Need of PoE? —Proposed 1E4000 Model 1" I _ - ' Non-PoE 8T4G or16T4G i(i _Mostly Copper Ports PoEf--111111=11211111111 • ., — Mostly Fiber Ports Non-PoE _ 8S4G I Need Mostly _ • PE Ports -- • • - — Copper and Fiber Ports PoE 4S8PG4G Can't Decide PoE 4T4P4G • .___._-- -- ---- ____ ---— -`-_ -- i— Non-PoE8GT4G,76GT4G, Mostly Copper Ports i PoE 8GT8GP4G 11 i Mostly Fiber Ports Non-PoE 8GS4G I Need',Mostly • , GE Ports i., — Copper and Fiber Ports PoE 4GS8GP4G ' Can't Decide PoE 4GC4GP4G i - --- O 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 4 of 11 1 Product Specifications Table 5 lists specifications,Table 6 gives information'about switch performance and scalability,Table 7 and 8 list important software features,Table 9 lists compliance specifications,and Table 10 gives information about management and standards of the Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. Table 5. Product Specifications Description Specification Hardware • 1GB DRAM - 128-MB onboard flash memory • 1-GB removable SD flash memory card • Mini-USB connector • RJ-45 connector Alarm •Alarm I/O:two alarm inputs to detect dry contact open or closed,one alarm output relay Power Input • Redundant DC input voltage with operating range:nominal 9.6 to 60VDC • Maximum DC input current 3.7A(IE-4000-4T4P4G-E,IE-4000-8T4G-E,IE-4000-8GT4G-E,IE-4000-16T4G-E), 4.3A(IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E,IE-4000-4TC4G-E,IE-4000-4S8P4G-E,IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E,IE-4000- 16GT4G-E,IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E),5A(IE-4000-8S4G-E,IE-4000-8GS4G-E) Power Consumption • IE-4000-4T4P4G-E,IE-4000-8T4G-E,IE-4000-8GT4G-E,and IE-4000-16T4G-E:35W • IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E,IE-4000-4TC4G-E,IE-4000-4S8P4G-E,IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E,and IE-4000-16GT4G- E:40W • IE-4000-8S4G-E,IE-4000-8GS4G-E:42W •These numbers are measured at 9.6V and do not include PoE power consumption Dimensions,(H x W x D) •All IE 4000 models have the following dimensions:6.12 x 6.12 x 5.09 in.(155.4 x 155.4 x 129.2 mm) • PWR-IE170W-PC-AC=5.93 x 3.72 x 5.60 in.(150.6 x 94.5 x 142.2) • PWR-IE170V11-PC-DC 5.93 x 4.47 x 5.75 in.(150.6 x 113.5 x 145.8) • PWR-IE50VV-AC 5.8 x 2.0 x 4.4 in.(147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-1E50VV-AC-IEC=•5.8 x 2.0 x 4.4 in.(147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-IE65W-PC-AC=•5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 in.(150 x 66 x 117 mm) • PWR-IE651IV-PC-DC 5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 in.(150 x 66 x 117 mm) Weight •All IE4000 models listed in Table 1.6.35 pounds(2.88 kg) • PWR-IE170W-PC-AC 3.88 pounds(1.76 kg) • PWR-IE170VV-PC-DC='3.7 pounds(1.67 kg) • PWR-IE50VV-AC=•1.4 lb(0.65.kg) • PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC=•1 4 lb(0.65 kg) • PWR-IE65W-PC-DC 2.6(1 18 Kg) • PWR-IE65W-PC-AC 2.7(1.24 Kg) Table 6. Switch Performance and Scalability Description Specification Forwarding rate Line rate for all ports and all packet sizes Number of queues 4 egress Unicast MAC addresses 16,000 IGMP multicast groups 1,000 Number of VLANs 1,000 IPv4 MAC security ACEs 1,000 with default TCAM Template NAT translation Bidirectional,128 unique subnet NAT translation entries,which can expand to tens of thousands of translated entries if designed property 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 5 of 11 Table 7 Cisco IE 4000 LAN BASE:Key Software Features LAN Base License Features (Default) Layer 2 Switching IEEE 802.1,802.3,802.3at,802.3af standard;VTPv2,NTP,UDLD,CDP LLDP Unicast Mac filter,Flexlink,Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP),Parallel Redundancy Protocol(PRP),VTPv3,EtherChannel,Voice VLAN,qinq tunneling Security SCP SSH,SNMPv3,TACACS+ RADIUS Server/Client,-MAC Address Notification,BPDU Guard,Port-Security, _ Private VLAN,DHCP Snooping,Dynamic ARP Inspection,IP Source Guard,802.1x,Guest VLAN,MAC Authentication Bypass,802.1x Multi-Domain Authentication,Storm Control,Trust Boundary Cisco TrustSec® supporting SGT inline tagging and SGACL,FIPS 140-2,_ Layer 2 Multicast IGMPv1 v2,v3 Snooping,IGMP filtering,IGMP Querier Management Fast Boot,Express Setup,Weti Device Manager Cisco Network Assistant1 Cisco Prime'"platform1 MIB, SmartPort,SNMP,syslog,Storm Control-Unicast,Multicast,Broadcast,SPAN Sessions,RSPAN,DHCP Server Customized TCAM/SDM size configuration,DOM(digital optical management) Industrial Ethernet CIP Ethemet/IP Profinet v2 MRP(IEC 62439-2),IEEE 1588 PTP v2,NTP to PTP translation,CIP Time Sync Quality of Service Ingress Policing,Rate-Limit,Egress Queueing/shaping,AutoQoS,Modular QoS CLI(MQC) Layer 2 IPv6 _ IPv6 Host support,HTTP over IPv6,SNMP over IPv6 Layer 3 Routing IPv4 Static Routing Industrial Management Layer 2 switching with 1.1 static Network Address Translation(NAT) _ 1 Utility Power Profile,dying gasp,GOOSE messaging,SCADA protocol classification,MODBUS TCP/IP utility SmartPort macro,BFD,Ethernet OAM,IEEE 802.3ah,CFM(IEEE 802.1 ag) Support after product General Availability Table 8. Cisco IE 4000 IP Services:Key Software Features IP Services License Additional Features IP Multicast PIM sparse mode(PIM-SM),PIM dense mode(PIM-DM),and PIM sparse-dense mode Industrial Management Embedded Event Manager(EEM) IP Unicast Routing OSPF EIGRP BGPv4,IS-IS,RIPv2,Policy-Based Routing(PBR),HSRP Protocols Cisco Express Hardware routing architecture delivers extremely high-performance IP routing Forwarding IPv6 Routing RIPng,OSPFv6,and EIGRPv6 support 'Security IEEE 802.1AE MACsec,Security Group Access Control Lists((SGACL) Virtualization VRF-lite To enable PROFINET MRP(IEC 62439-2)functionalities on the lE4000 switches the relevant SW license, listed in table 3 should be ordered. Table 9. Compliance Specifications Type Standards Electromagnetic FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emissions EN 55022A Class A VCCI Class A AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A CISPR 11 Class A CISPR 22 Class A ICES 003 Class A CNS13438 Class A KN22 Electromagnetic EN55024 Immunity CISPR 24 AS/NZS CISPR 24 ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 6 of 11 Type Standards KN24 EN 61000-4-2 Electro Static Discharge EN 61000-4-3 Radiated RF EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic Fast Transients N 61000-4-5 Surge EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF EN 61000-4-8 Power Frequency'Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-9 Pulse Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 AC.Power Voltage EN 61000-4-18 Damped Oscillatory Wave EN-61000-4-29 DC Voltage Dips Industry Standards EN 61000-6-1 Light Industrial EN 61000-6-2 Industrial EN 61000-6-4 Industrial EN 61326 Industrial Control EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers Substation KEMA(IEEE 1613,IEC 61850-3) NEMA TS-2(EMC,environmental,mechanical) IEEE 1613 Electric Power Stations Communications Networking IEC 61850-3 Electric Substations Communications Networking EN50155 Railway-Electronic Equipment on Rolling Stock(EMC,ENV Mech) EN50121-4 Railway-Signaling and Telecommunications Apparatus EN50121-3-2 Railway-Apparatus for Rolling Stock ODVA Industrial EtherNet/IP PROFINET conformance B IP30(per EN60529) Safety Standards and Information Technology Equipment: Certifications UUCS 60950-1 EN 60950-1 CB to IEC 60950-1 with all country deviations NOM to NOM-019-SCFI(through partners and distributor) Industrial Floor(Control Equipment): UL 508 CSA C22.2,No 142 Hazardous Locations: ANSI/ISA 12.12.01'GSA C22.2 No 213 IEC 60079-0,-15 IECEx test report EN 60079-0,-15 ATEX certification(Class I Zone 2)Cabinet enclosure required Operating Environment Operating Temperature:-40C to+75C -40C to+70C(Vented Enclosure Operating) --40C to+60C(Sealed Endosure Operating) --34C to+75C(Fan or Blower equipped Enclosure Operating) EN 60068-2-1 EN 60068-2-2 EN 61163 Altitude:up to 15,000 feet Storage Environment Temperature:-40 to+85 degrees C Altitude:15,000 feet IEC 60068-2-14 Humidity Relative humidity of 5%to 95%non-condensing IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30 Shock and Vibration IEC 60068-2-27(operational shock,50G,11ms,Half Sine) IEC 60068-2-27(Non-Operational Shock,65-80G,9ms,Trapezoidal) IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-64,EN 61373(Operational Vibration) IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-64,EN 61373(Non-operational Vibration) 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 7 of 11 I Type Standards Corrosion ISO 9223:Corrosion class C3-Medium class C4-High EN 60068-2-52(Salt Fog) EN 60068-2-60(Flowing Mixed Gas) Others RoHS Compliance China RoHS Compliance TM(Government) CE(Europe) Warranty Five-year limited HW warranty on all IE-4000 PIDs and all IE Power Supplies(see table 3 above).See link below for more details on warranty Mean Time Between IE-4000-4TC4G-E:578,730 Hours Failure(MTBF) IE-4000-8T4G-E:591,070 Hours IE-4000-8S4G-E:583,700 Hours IE-4000-4T4P4G-E:562,300 Hours IE-4000-16T4G-E 1558,310 Hours r IE-4000-4S8P4G-E.535,880 Hours IE-4000-8GT4G-E:591 240 Hours IE-4000-8GS4G-E:583,700 Hours IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E:550,940 Hours IE-4000-16GT4G-E:558,630 Hours IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E:519,190 Hours IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E:536,220 Hours Table 10. Management and Standards Description Specification IEEE Standards • IEEE 802.1 D MAC Bridges,STP • IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet • IEEE 802.1 p Layer2 COS prioritization - IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus • IEEE 802.1q VLAN • IEEE 802.3ah 100BASE-X SMF/MMF only • IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning-Trees • IEEE 802.3x full dyplex on 10BASE-T ' IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning-Tree ' IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification • IEEE 802.1x Port Access Authentication • IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX specification - IEEE 802.1AB LLDP • IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T specification - IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation(LACP) • IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X specification ' IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet provides up to • IEEE 1588v2 PTP Precision Time Protocol 15.4W DC power to each end device IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet provides up to 25.5W DC power to each end device RFC Compliance - RFC 768:UDP • RFC 1305:NTP - RFC 783:TFTP • RFC 1492:TACACS+ RFC 791•IPv4 protocol • RFC 1493:Bridge'MIB Objects , • RFC792:ICMP - RFC 1534:DHCP and BOOTP interoperation ' RFC 793:TCP ' RFC 1542:Bootstrap Protocol RFC 826:ARP - RFC 1643:Ethernet Interface MIB RFC 854:Telnet • RFC 1757•RMON ' RFC 951:BOOTP - RFC 2068:HTTP RFC 959:FTP • RFC 2131,2132:DHCP • RFC 1157.SNMPv1 ' RFC 2236:IGMP v2 • RFC 1901 1902-1907 SNMPv2 ' RFC 3376:IGMP v3 ' RFC 2273-2275:SNMPv3 • RFC 2474:DiffSery Precedence • RFC 2571 SNMP Management ' RFC 3046:DHCP Relay Agent Information Option • RFC 1166:IP Addresses ' RFC 3580:802.1x RADIUS • RFC 1256:ICMP Router Discovery ' RFC.4250-4252 SSH Protocol r r 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 8 of 11 Description Specification SNMP MIB Objects ' • BRIDGE-MIB • CISCO-SNMP-TARGET-EXT-MIB CALISTA-DPA-MIB, ' CISCO-STACK-MIB • CISCO-ACCESS-ENVMON-MIB • CISCO-STACKMAKER-MIB • CISCO-ADMISSION-POLICY-MIB •CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB • CISCO-AUTH-FRAMEWORK-MIB •CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB • CISCO-BRIDGE-EXT-MIB • CISCO-TCP-MIB, • CISCO-BULK-FILE-MIB • CISCO-UDLDP-MIB • CISCO-CABLE-DIAG-MIB • CISCO-VLAN-IFTABLE-RELATIONSHIP-MIB • CISCO-CALLHOME-MIB •CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB •CISCO-CAR-MIB •CISCO-VTP-MIB CISCO-CDP-MIB ' ENTITY-MIB • CISCO-CIRCUIT-INTERFACE-MIB • ETHERLIKE-MIB • CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB i • HC-RMON-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB • IEEE8021-PAE-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB • IEEE8023-LAG-MIB • CISCO-DATA-COLLECTION-MIB • IF-MIB CISCO-DHCP-SNOOPING-MIB • IP-FORWARD-MIB • CISCO-EMBEDDED-EVENT-MGR-MIB • LLDP-EXT-MED-MIB CISCO-ENTITY-ALARM-MIB • LLDP-EXT-PNO-MIB • CISCO-ENTITY-VENDORTYPE-OID-MIB • LLDP-MIB CISCO-ENVMON-MIB • NETRANGER • CISCO-ERR-DISABLE-MIB • NOTIFICATION-LOG-MIB • CISCO-FLASH-MIB •OLD-CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB • CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB •OLD-CISCO-CPU-MIB • CISCO-IF-EXTENSION-MIB • OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB • OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MIB • CISCO-IMAGE-MIB/ • OLD-CISCO-IP-MIB CISCO-IP-STAT-MIB •OLD-CISCO-MEMORY-MIB • CISCO-LAG-MIB •OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB< • CISCO-LICENSE-MGMT-MIB • OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB • CISCO-MAC-AUTH-BYPASS-MIB • OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB • CISCO-MAC-NOTIFICATION-MIB •OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB • CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB • RMON-MIB • CISCO-PAE-MIB • RMON2-MIB • CISCO-PAGP-MIB • SMON-MIB • CISCO-PING-MIB • SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB CISCO-PORT=QOS-MIB • SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB 'CISCO-PORT-SECURITY-MIB • SNMP-MPD-MIB •CISCO-PORT-STORM-CONTROL-MIB • SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB •CISCO-PRIVATE-VLAN-MIB • SNMP-PROXY-MIB • CISCO-PROCESS-MIB • SNMP-TARGET-MIB •CISCO-PRODUCTS-MIB • SNMP-USM-MIB • CISCO-RESILIENT-ETHERNET-PROTOCOL-MIB • SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB •CISCO-RTTMON-ICMP-MIB • SNMPv2-MIB •CISCO-RTTMON-IP-EXT-MIB •TCP-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-MIB • UDP-MIB •CISCO RTTMON-RTP-MIB 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 9 of 11 l r Table 11 SFP Support Part Number Specification SFP Type Max Distance Cable Type Temp Range` DOM Support GLC-FE-100FX-RGD= 100BASE-FX FE 2km MMF IND Yes GLC-FE'-100LX-RGD 100BASE-LX10 'FE 10km SMF IND Yes GLC-FE-100FX= 100BASE-FX FE 2km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100LX= 10OBASE-LX10 FE 10km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100EX= 100BASE-EX FE " 40km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100ZX= 100BASE-ZX — FE 80km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100BX-D= 100BASE-BX10 FE 10km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100BX-U= 100BASE-BX10 FE 10km SMF COM Yes GLCS - 1 X-MM-RGD= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF IND Yes GLC-LX-SM-RGD= 11000BASE-LX/LH I GE 1550m/10km I MMF/SMF I IND I Yes GLC-ZX-SM-RGD= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF IND Yes a GL'C-BX40-U-I= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km , SMF IND Yes GLC-BX40-D-I= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX40-DA-1= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX80-U-1= 1000BASE-BX80 GE 80km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX80-D-1= 1000BASE-BX80 GE 80km •SMF IND Yes GLC-SX-MMD= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF EXT Yes GLC-LH-SMD= 1000BASE-LX/LH GE. 550m/10km MMF/SMF EXT Yes GLC-EX-MMD= 1000BASE-EX GE 40km SMF EXT Yes GLC-DC-MMD= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF EXT Yes GLC-BX-D= 1000BASE-BX10 GE 10km SMF COM Yes GLC-BX-U= 1000BASE-BX10 GE r 10km SMF COM Yes CWDMSFP-xxxx=(8 freq) CWDM 1000BASE-X GE SMF COM Yes DWDMSFP-xxxx=(40 freq) DWDM 1000BASE-X GE SMF COM Yes l SFP-GE-S= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF EXT Yes SFP-GE-L= 1000BASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10km MMF/SMF EXT Yes SFP-GE-Z= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF EXT Yes GLCSX-MM= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF COM No GLC-LHSM= 1000BASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10km MMF/SMF COM No GLC-ZX-SM= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF COM Yes GLC-TE= 1000BASE-T GE 100m Copper EXT NA GLC-T= 1000BASE-T GE 100m Copper .COM NA. Note: Not all SFPs supported in all SW versions. For first software,release supporting SFP refer to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products device support tables list.html If non industrial(i.e.,EXT,COM)SFPs are used the switch operating temperature must be derated. MMF=multi-mode fiber SMF=single-mode fiber 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 10 of 11 Warranty Information Warranty information for the IE 4000 is available'on htto.//www.cisco-servicefinder.com/warrantvfinder.aspx. Cisco Capital Financing to Help You Achieve Your Objectives Cisco Capital can help you acquire the technology you need to achieve your objectives and stay competitive.We can help you reduce CapEx.Accelerate your growth. Optimize your investment dollars and ROI. Cisco Capital financing gives you flexibility in acquiring hardware,software,services,and complementary third-party equipment. And there's just one predictable payment.Cisco Capital is available in more than 100 countries. Learn more. ( CISCO, Americas,Headquarters Asia Pacific Headquarters Europe Headquarters Cisco Systems.Inc. Cisco Systems(USA)Pte.Ltd. Cisco Systems International BV-Amsterdam. San Jose,CA Singapore The Netherlands Cisdo has more than 200 offices WorldWide:Addresses.phone numbers,and fax numbers are listed'on the Cisco Website at Anivw.cisco.coiii/go%officee. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademar'kscr registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S.and other countries.To view a list of Cisco trademarks, La go to this URL.www.cisco.com/go/trademarks.Third party trademarks mentioned-are the property of.their respective owners.The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company.(1110R) Printed in USA C78-733058-08 08/16 0 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 11 of 11 � ATTACHMENT 07 C I S C O Data Sheet Cisco Industrial Ethernet 4000 Series Switches Developed specifically to withstand the harshest industrial manufacturing environments; these switches offer today's most flexible and scalable industrial Ethernet platform that will grow with your network Product Overview The Cisco®Industrial Ethernet(IE)4000 Series is the latest addition to our ruggedized switching platforms and provides superior high-bandwidth switching and proven Cisco IOS®Software-based routing capabilities for industrial environments.The IE 4000 Series delivers highly secure access and industry-leading convergence using the Cisco Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP)and is built to withstand extreme environments while adhering to overall IT network design,compliance,and performance requirements. The IE 4000 Series is ideal for industrial Ethernet applications where hardened products are required, including factory automation,energy and process control,intelligent transportation systems(ITS),oil and gas field sites,city surveillance programs,and mining.With improved overall performance,greater bandwidth,a richer feature set, and enhanced hardware,the Cisco IE 4000 Series complements the current industrial Ethernet portfolio of related Cisco industrial switches,such as the Cisco IE 2000 and IE 3000 The Cisco IE 4000 can easily be installed in your network.Through a user-friendly web device manager,the Cisco IE 4000 provides easy out-of-the-box configuration and simplified operational manageability to deliver advanced security,data,video,and voice services over networks. Features and Benefits Table 1 Features and Benefits of Cisco IE 4000 Feature Benefit Robust Industrial Design • Built for harsh environment and temperature range(-40 to 70 C). • Hardened for vibration,shock and surge,and noise immunity • Resilient dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. • Complies with multi-industry specifications for automation,ITS,and substation environments. • Improves uptime,performance,and safety of industrial systems and equipment. • Fitted with compact,PLC(Programmable Logic Control)style DIN rail compliant form factor ideal for industrial deployment. • Covers a wide range of Power over Ethernet(PoE)application requirements. User-Friendly GUI Device •Allows easily configuration and monitoring via a web browser. Manager •;Eliminates the need for more complex terminal emulation programs. , • Reduce the cost of deployment. SwapDrive:"Zero-Config" • Simple switch replacement in case of a failure. Replacement • No networking expertise required. • Helps ensure fast recovery High-Density Industrial, -• Reduces complexity with one cable for both connectivity,and power Power over Ethernet • Controls costs by limiting wiring,distribution panels,and circuit breakers. (PoE) • Creates space and reduces heat dissipation. • Enables ready-to-use PoE devices like IP phones and wireless access points. •Supports(on select models)maximum HD camera deployments. ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 1 of 11 1 / , f i Feature Benefit Full Gigabit Ethernet • Connects new wireless access point(802.11 n and 802.11ac). Switch • Enables new HD IP Cameras and new PLC(Programmable Logic Control). •Allows SCADA'(Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition)connectivity r •provides introduction of new bandwidth-hungry applications in the industrial space. • Supports very-delay-sensitive applications and time-sensitive networks. • Delivers multiple rings,redundant ring topology for new network configurations. • Extends geographical scalability where longer distance connectivity is required. Your Ruggedized Choice for Industrial Environments The Cisco Industrial Ethernet(IE)4000 Series offers: • Bandwidth and capacity to grow with your networking needs:20-Gbps honblocking switching capacity with up to 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports per switch • High-density industrial PoE/PoE+support providing in-line power to up to 8 power devices, including IP cameras and phones,badge readers,wireless access points,etc. • Cisco IOS Software features for smooth IT integration and policy consistency • Robust resiliency enabled by dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP),Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP), PROFINET—Media Redundancy Protocol(MRP), Etherchannel and Flexlink support, redundant power input,dying gasp,etc. • True zero-touch replacement for middle-of-the-night or middle-of-nowhere failure • Line-rate,low-latency forwarding with advanced hardware assist features(such as NAT, IEEE1588) • Simplified software upgrade path with universal images I • Support of Industrial automation protocols EtherNet/IP(CIP)and PROFINET, MRP(IEC 62439-2) Figure 1 shows switch models,Table 2 shows all the available Cisco IE 4000 Series models,Table 3 list the SW license PIDs and Table 4 lists the power supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. ' Figure 1 IE4000 Models J ..__. __ __. _ i--- w. _ ", _ � f t I r 1 c II ` 1 I ` I ` I i I3 i 3 L I I i di .__i 1____. _____:_. ____ ______ ________ ___________'[ T IE-4000=-16T4G-E ' 1E-4000-4SBP4G-E IE4000-4T4P4G-E} i , IE-4000-884G-E i IE-4000-4TC4G,E IE-4000-16GT4G-E ` IE-4000-4GSSGP4G-E IE-4000=8GT4G-E I ' IE-400078GS4G-E IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E i IE-4000=8T4G-E' _-___ _ -- --__, i ._.--- ----- ---- - - ----- --- ---- ------------------- - - --- ---- --- 1 --- - - --- ------ --------- i 1 ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 2 of 11 • Table 2. Cisco IE 4000 Series Models Product Number Total Ports GE Combo Additional RJ-45 Copper SFP Fiber PoE/PoE+ Default Software Uplinks(4G)' Combo Ports Ports(T) Ports(S) Ports(P,GP) IE-4000-4TC4G-E 8 4(FE) IE-4000-BT4G-E 12 8(FE) IE-4000-8S4G-E 12 8(FE) IIE-4000-4T4P4G-E (12 I , 14(FE) l 14(FE) IE-4000-16T4G-E 20 16(FE) IE-4000-4S8P4G-E 16 All model have 4 4(FE) 8(FE) All models ship GE combo uplink with LAN Base IE-4000-8GT4G-E 12 ports 8(GE) image2 i IE-4000-8GS4G-E 12 8(GE) IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E 12 4(GE) 4(GE) IE-4000-16GT4G-E 20 16(GE) IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E 20 8(GE) 8(GE) IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E 16 4(GE) 8(GE) 1 Combo ports provide one copper and one fiber physical port and only one can be activated at a time. 2 Can be upgraded to IP Services at a fee. Table 3. Cisco IE 4000 SW License and Accessories PIDs License Description L-IE4000-RTU= 1E4000 Electronic software license upgrade from LAN base to IP Services LIC-MRP-Manager MRP.ring manager license LIC-MRP-Client MRP ring client license LIC-MRP-MULTI-MGR Multiple MRP manger license STK-RACKMNT-2955= 19 DIN Rail mount kit STK-RACK-DINRAIL= 19 DIN Rail mount kit All copper Gigabit Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100/1000 mbps and duplex negotiation.All copper Fast Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100 mbps and duplex negotiation. Table 4. Power Supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches Product Number Wattage Rated Nominal Input Supported Power PoE/PoE Use Case Scenario Operating Range Input Voltage Output +Support Operating Range PWR-IE170W-PC-AC= 170W AC 100-240V/2.3A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 54VDC/3.15A Yes Maximum PoE/PoE+port or or support in a AC or high DC 125-250V/2.1A DC 106-300V DC environment' PWR-IE170W-PC-DC= 170W DC 12-54V/23A DC 10.8-60V 54VDC/3.15A Yes Maximum PoE/PoE+port support in a DC environment' PWR-IE50W-AC= 50W AC 100-240V/1.25A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 24VDC/2.1A No No PoE/PoE+support or or needed in an AC or DC environment DC 125-250V/1.25A DC 106-300V PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC= 50W AC 100-240V/1.25A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 24VDC/2.1A No No PoE/PoE+support needed when IEC plug is desired • ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 3 of 11 Product Number Wattage Rated Nominal Input Supported Power PoE/PoE Use Case Scenario Operating Range Input Voltage Output +Support Operating Range PWR-IE65W-PC-AC= 65W AC 100-240V/1 4A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V 54VDC/1.2 A Yes Minimum(1-2 port)PoE or or support needed in an AC DC 125-250V/1.0A DC 106-300V or high DC environment2 PWR-IE65W-PC-DC= 65W DC 24-48VDC/4.5A DC 18-60V 54VDC/1.2 A Yes Minimum(1-2 port)PoE support needed in a DC environment2 1 The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 170W A PoE port draws up to 15.4W of power,and a PoE+port draws up to 30W of power i ' 2 The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 65W Figure 2 shows a diagram to help you select a Cisco IE 4000 model. Figure 2. Cisco IE 4000 Model Selection Guide Client Ports Rate? — Copper or Fibei? — Need of PoE? _ —Proposed IE4000.Model ' ' Non-PoE' 8T4G or 16T4G Mostly Copper Pprts I PoE 4T4P4G • _I Mostly Fiber.Ports ,Non-PoE 8S4G I.Need Mostly .. - 'FE PortS I . { Copper and Fiber:Ports+ • PoE __ :4S8PG4G Can't Decide PoE _ 4T4P4G Non-PoE '8GT4G,16GT4G Mostly Copper Ports (= �. PoE :.f 6GTSGP4G Mostly Fiber.P.orts Non-PoE 8GS4G ' I Need.Mostly ` ..... • GE Ports I .. I Copper and'Fiber Porte • PoE ' 4GS8GP4G ' . . , . . Can't Decide, PoE ' 4GC4GP4G ' , ti 1 , ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 4 of 11 Product Specifications Table 5 list's specifications,Table 6 gives information about switch performance and scalability,Table 7 and 8 list important software features,Table 9 lists compliance specifications,and Table 10 gives information about management and standards of the Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. Table 5. Product Specifications Description Specification Hardware • 1GB DRAM • 128-MB onboard flash memory • 1-GB removable SD flash memory card • Mini-USB connector • RJ-45 connector Alarm •Alarm I/O:two alarm inputs to detect dry contact open or closed,one alarm output relay Power Input • Redundant DC input voltage with operating range:nominal 9.6 to 60VDC • Maximum DC input current:3.7A(IE-4000-4T4P4G-E,IE-4000-8T4G-E,IE-4000-8GT4G-E,IE-4000-16T4G-E), 4.3A(IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E,IE-4000-4TC4G-E,IE-4000-4S8P4G-E,IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E,IE-4000- 16GT4G-E,IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E),5A(IE-4000-8S4G-E,IE-4000-8GS4G-E) Power Consumption • IE-4000-4T4P4G-E,IE-4000-8T4G-E,IE-4000-8GT4G-E,and IE-4000-16T4G-E:35W' • IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E,IE-4000-4TC4G-E,IE-4000-4S8P4G-E,IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E,and IE-4000-16GT4G- E:40W • IE-4000-8S4G-E,IE-4000-8GS4G-E:42W •These numbers are measured at 9.6V and do not include PoE power consumption Dimensions,(H x W x D) •All IE 4000 models have the following dimensions:6.12 x 6.12 x 5.09 in.(155.4 x 155.4 x 129.2 mm) • PWR-IE170W-PC-AC=•5.93 x 3.72 x 5.60 in.(150.6 x 94.5 x 142.2) • PWR-IE170W-PC-DC=•5.93 x 4 47 x 5.75 in.(150.6 x 113.5 x 145.8) • PWR-IE50W-AC.:5.8 x 2.0 x 4 4 in.(147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC=•5.8 x 2.0 x 4.4 in.(147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-IE65W-PC-AC=•5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 in.(150 x 66 x 117 mm) i • PWR-IE65W-PC-DC=•5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 in.(150 x 66 x 117 mm) Weight •All 1E4000 models listed in Table 1 6.35 pounds(2.88 kg) 1 • PWR-IE170W-PC-AC=•3.88 pounds(1 76 kg) • PWR-IE170W-PC-DC=•3.7 pounds(1.67 kg) • PWR-IE50W-AC=•1 4 lb(0.65 kg) • PWR-1E50W-AC-IEC=•1 4 lb(0.65 kg) • PWR-IE65W-PC-DC=•2.6(1 18 Kg) • PWR-IE65W-PC-AC=•2.7(1.24 Kg) Table 6. Switch Performance and Scalability Description Specification Forwarding rate Line rate for all ports and all packet sizes Number of queues 4 egress Unicast MAC addresses 16,000 IGMPmulticastgroups 1,000 Number of VLANs 1,000 'IPv4 MAC security ACEs .1,000 with default TCAM Template NAT translation Bidirectional,128 unique subnet NAT translation entries,which can expand to tens of thousands of translated entries if designed properly ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 5 of 11 Table 7 Cisco IE 4000 LAN BASE:Key Software Features LAN Base License Features (Default) Layer 2 Switching IEEE 802.1 802.3,802.3at,802.3af standard,VTPv2,NTP UDLD CDP LLDP Unicast Mac filter,Flexlink,Resilient Ethernet Protocol(REP),Parallel Redundancy Protocol(PRP),VTPv3,EtherChannel,Voice VLAN,qinq tunneling Security SCP SSH,SNMPv3,TACACS+,RADIUS Server/Client,MAC Address Notification,BPDU Guard,Port-Security Private VLAN,DHCP Snooping,Dynamic ARP Inspection,IP Source Guard,802.1x,Guest VLAN,MAC Authentication Bypass,802.1x Multi-Domain Authentication,Storm Control,Trust Boundary Cisco TrustSec® supporting SGT inline tagging and SGACL,FIPS 140-2 Layer 2 Multicast IGMPv1 v2,v3 Snooping,IGMP filtering,IGMP Querier Management Fast Boot,Express Setup,Web Device Manager,Cisco Network Assistant' Cisco Prime"platforml MIB, SmartPort,SNMP syslog,Storm Control-Unicast,Multicast,Broadcast,SPAN Sessions,RSPAN,DHCP Server Customized TCAM/SDM size configuration,DOM(digital optical management) Industrial Ethernet CIP Ethernet/IP Profinet v2JIRP(IEC 62439-2),IEEE 1588 PTP v2,NTP to PTP translation,CIP Time Sync Quality of Service Ingress Policing,Rate-Limit,Egress Queueing/shaping,AutoQoS,Modular QoS CLI(MQC) Layer 2 IPv6 IPv6 Host support,HTTP over IPv6,SNMP over IPv6 Layer 3 Routing IPv4 Static Routing Industrial Management Layer 2 switching with 1.1 static Network Address Translation(NAT) - Utility Power Profile,dying gasp,GOOSE messaging,SCADA protocol'classification,MODBUS TCP/IP utility SrhartPort macro,BFD,Ethernet OAM,IEEE 802.3ah,CFM(IEEE 802.1ag) 1 Support after product General Availability Table 8. Cisco IE 4000 IP Services:Key Software Features IP Services License Additional Features IP Multicast PIM sparse mode(PIM-SM),PIM dense mode(PIM-DM),and PIM sparse-dense mode Industrial Management Embedded Event Manager.(EEM) IP Unicast Routing OSPF,EIGRP,BGPv4 IS-IS,RIPv2,Policy-Based Routing(PBR),HSRP Protocols Cisco Express Hardware routing architecture delivers extremely high-performance IP routing Forwarding IPv6 Routing RIPng,OSPFv6,and EIGRPv6 support Security IEEE 802.1AE MACsec,Security Group Access Control Lists(SGACL) Virtualization VRF-lite To enable PROFINET MRP(IEC 62439-2)functionalities on the 1E4000 switches the relevant SW license,listed in table 3 should be ordered. Table 9. Compliance Specifications Type Standards Electromagnetic FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emissions EN 55022A Class A VCCI Class A AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A CISPR 11 Class A CISPR 22 Class A ICES 003 Class A CNS13438 Class A KN22 Electromagnetic EN55024 Immunity CISPR 24 AS/NZS CISPR 24 ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 6 of 11 Type Standards KN24 EN 61000-4-2 Electro Static Discharge EN 61000-4-3 Radiated RF EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic Fast Transients N 61000=4-5 Surge EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF EN 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-9 Pulse Magnetic Field EN 61 0 0 0-4-1 1 AC Power Voltage EN 61000-4-18 Damped Oscillatory Wave n EN-61000-4-29 DC Voltage"Dips Industry Standards EN 61000-6-1 Light Industrial EN 61000-6-2 Industrial EN 61000-6-4 Industrial EN 61326 Industrial Control EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers Substation'KEMA(IEEE 1613,IEC 61850-3) NEMA TS-2(EMC,environmental,mechanical) IEEE 1613 Electric Power Stations Communications Networking IEC 61850-3 Electric Substations Communications Networking EN50155 Railway-Electronic Equipment on Rolling Stock(EMC,ENV Mech) EN50121-4 Railway Signaling and Telecommunications Apparatus EN50121-3-2 Railway Apparatus for Rolling Stock ODVA Industrial EtherNet/IP PROFINET conformance B IP30(per EN60529) Safety Standards and Information Technology Equipment Certifications UUCSA 60950-1 EN 60950-1 CB to IEC 60950-1 with all country deviations NOM to NOM-019-SCFI(through partners and distributor) 'Industrial Floor(Control Equipment): UL 508 CSA C22.2,No 142 Hazardous Locations: ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 CSA C22.2 No 213 IEC.60079-0, 15 IECEx test report EN 60079-0, 15 ATEX certification(Class I Zone 2)Cabinet enclosure required Operating Environment Operating Temperature:-40C to+75C • -40C to+70C(VentedEnclosure Operating) • -40C to+60C(Sealed Enclosure Operating) •-34C to+75C(Fan or Blower equipped Enclosure Operating) EN 60068-2-1 EN 60068-2-2 EN 61163 Altitude:up to 15,000 feet Storage Environment Temperature:=40 to+85 degrees C Altitude:15,000 feet IEC 60068-2-14 Humidity Relative humidity of 5%to 95%non-condensing IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30 Shock and Vibration IEC 60068-2-27(operational shock,50G,11 ms,Half Sine) IEC 60068-2-27(Non-Operational Shock,65-80G,9ms,Trapezoidal) IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-64,EN 61373(Operational Vibration) IEC 60068-2-6,IEC 60068-2-64 EN 61373(Non-operational Vibration) ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 7 of 11 Type Standards Corrosion ISO 9223:Corrosion class C3-Medium class C4-High EN 60068-2-52(Salt Fog) EN 60068-2-60(Flowing Mixed Gas) Others RoHS Compliance China RoHS Compliance TAA(Government) CE(Europe) Warranty Five-year limited HW warranty on all IE-4000 PIDs and all IE Power Supplies(see table 3 above).See link below for more details on warranty Mean Time Between IE-4000-4TC4G-E:578,730 Hours Failure(MTBF) IE-4000-8T4G-E:591 070 Hours IE-4000-8S4G-E:583,700 Hours IE-4000-4T4P4G-E:562,300 Hours IE-4000-16T4G-E:558,310 Hours , IE-4000-4S8P4G-E:535,880 Hours IE-4000-8PT4G-E:591 240 Hours IE-4000-8GS4G-E:583,700 Hours IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E:550,940 Hours IE-4000-16GT4G-E:558,630 Hours •IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E:519,190 Hours IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E:536,220 Hours Table 10. Management and Standards 1 i Description Specification IEEE Standards • IEEE 802.1 D MAC Bridges,STP • IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet • IEEE 802.1 p Layer2 COS prioritization • IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus • IEEE 802.1q VLAN •\IEEE 802.3ah 100BASE-X SMF/MMF only • IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning-Trees • IEEE 802.3x full duplex on 10BASE-T • IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning-Tree • IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification • IEEE 802.1x Port Access Authentication • IEEE 802.3u 100BASE TX specification • IEEE 802.1AB LLDP • IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T specification • IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation(LACP) • IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X specification , • IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet provides up to • IEEE 1588v2 PTP Precision Time Protocol 15.4W DC power to each end device • IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet provides up to 25.5W DC power to each end device RFC-Compliance • RFC 768:UDP • RFC 1305:NTP •RFC 783:TFTP • RFC 1492:TACACS+ • RFC 791 IPv4 protocol • RFC 1493:Bridge'MIB Objects. • RFC 792:ICMP • RFC 1534:DHCP and BOOTP interoperetion • RFC 793:TCP • RFC 1542:Bootstrap Protocol • RFC 826:ARP • RFC 1643:Ethernet Interface MIB • RFC 854 Telnet • RFC 1757'RMON • RFC 951 BOOTP • RFC 2068:HTTP • RFC 959:FTP • RFC 2131 2132:DHCP • RFC 1157•SNMPv1 • RFC 2236:IGMP v2 • RFC 1901 1902-1907 SNMPv2 • RFC 3376:IGMP v3 • RFC 2273-2275:SNMPv3 • RFC 2474:DiffSeiv Precedence • RFC 2571 SNMP Management • RFC 3046:DHCP Relay Agent Information Option • RFC 1166:IP Addresses • RFC 3580:802.1x RADIUS • RFC 1256:ICMP Router Discovery • RFC 4250-4252 SSH Protocol ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 8 of 11 Description Specification SNMP MIB Objects • BRIDGE-MIB •CISCO-SNMP-TARGET-EXT-MIB • CALISTA-DPA-MIB • CISCO-STACK-MIB - • CISCO-ACCESS-ENVMON-MIB • CISCO-STACKMAKER-MIB • CISCO-ADMISSION-POLICY-MIB • CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB • CISCO-AUTH-FRAMEWORK-MIB • CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB • CISCO-BRIDGE-EXT-MIB • CISCO-TCP-MIB • CISCO-BULK-FILE-MIB • CISCO-UDLDP-MIB • CISCO-CABLE-DIAG-MIB • CISCO-VLAN-IFTABLE-RELATIONSHIP-MIB • CISCO-CALLHOME-MIB • CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB • CISCO-CAR-MIB • CISCO-VTP-MIB • CISCO-CDP-MIB • ENTITY-MIS • CISCO-CIRCUIT-INTERFACE-MIB • ETHERLIKE-MIB • CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB • HC-RMON-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB • IEEE8021-PAE-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB • IEEE8023-LAG-MIB • CISCO-DATA-COLLECTION-MIB • IF-MIB • CISCO-DHCP-SNOOPING-MIB • IP-FORWARD-MIB • CISCO-EMBEDDED-,EVENT-MGR-MIB • LLDP-EXT-MED-MIB • CISCO-ENTITY-ALARM-MIB • LLDP-EXT-PNO-MIB • CISCO-ENTITY-VENDORTYPE-OID-MIB • LLDP-MIB • CISCO-ENVMON-MIB • NETRANGER • CISCO-ERR-DISABLE-MIB • NOTIFICATION-LOG-MIB • CISCO-FLASH-MIB • OLD-CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB • CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB • OLD-CISCO-CPU-MIB • CISCO-IF-EXTENSION-MIB • OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB • CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB • OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MIB • CISCO-IMAGE-MIB • OLD-CISCO-IP-MIB • CISCO-IP-STAT-MIB • OLD-CISCO-MEMORY-MIB • CISCO-LAG-MIB • OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB< • CISCO-LICENSE-MGMT-MIB • OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB • CISCO-MAC-AUTH-BYPASS-MIB OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB • CISCO-MAC-NOTIFICATION-MIB • OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB • CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB • RMON-MIB • CISCO-PAE-MIB • RMON2-MIB • CISCO-PAGP-MIB • SMON-MIB • CISCO-PING-MIB • SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB • CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB • SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB • CISCO-PORT-SECURITY-MIB • SNMP-MPD-MIB • CISCO-PORT-STORM-CONTROL-MIB • SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB • CISCO-PRIVATE-VLAN-MIB • SNMP-PROXY-MIB • CISCO-PROCESS-MIB • SNMP-TARGET-MIB • CISCO-PRODUCTS-MIB • SNMP-USM-MIB • CISCO-RESILIENT-ETHERNET-PROTOCOL-MIB • SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-ICMP-MIB • SNMPv2-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-IP-EXT-MIB •TCP-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-MIB • UDP-MIB • CISCO RTTMON-RTP-MIB o " ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 9 of 11 r J • Table 11 SFP Support Part Number Specification SFP Type Max Distance Cable Type Temp Range DOM Support GLC-FE-100FX-RGD= 100BASE-FX FE 2km MMF IND Yes GLC-FE-100LX-RGD 100BASE-LX10 FE 10km SMF IND Yes GLC-FE-100FX= 100BASE-FX FE 2km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100LX= 100BASE-LX10 FE 10km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100EX= 100BASE-EX FE 40km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100ZX= 100BASE-ZX FE 80km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100BX-D= 100BASE-BX10 FE 10km SMF COM No GLC-FE-100BX-U= 100BASE-BX10 FE 10km SMF COM Yes GLC-SX-MM-RGD= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF IND Yes GLC-LX-SM-RGD= 11000BASE-LX/LH I GE 1550m/10km I MMF/SMF I IND I Yes GLC-ZX-SM-RGD= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX40-U-I= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km SMF IND Ye's GLC-BX40-D-1= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX40-DA-I= 1000BASE-BX40 GE 40km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX80-U-1= 1000BASE-BX80 GE 80km SMF IND Yes GLC-BX80-D-I= 1000BASE-BX80 GE 80km SMF 1 IND Yes 4 � GLC-SX-MMD= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF EXT Yes f GLC-LH-SMD= 1000BASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10kin MMF/SMF EXT Yes GLC EX-MMD= 1000BASE-EX GE 40km SMF EXT Yes GLC-ZX-MMD= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF EXT Yes GLC-BX-D= 1000BASE-BX10 GE 10km SMF COM Yes GLC-BX-U= 1000BASE-BX10 GE 10km SMF COM Yes CWDM-SFP-xxxx=(8 freq) CWDM 1000BASE-X GE SMF COM Yes DWDM-SFP+xxxx=(40 freq) DWDM 1000BASE-X GE SMF COM Yes SFP-GE-S= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF EXT Yes c SFP-GE-L= .1000BASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10km MMF/SMF EXT Yes r SFP-GE-Z= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km , SMF EXT Yes GLCSX-MM= 1000BASE-SX GE 550m MMF COM No GLC-LH-SM= 10DOBASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10km MMF/SMF COM No GLC-ZX-SM= 1000BASE-ZX GE 70km SMF COM Yes GLC-TE= 1000BASE-T GE 100m Copper EXT NA •GLC-T= 1000BASE-T GE 100m Copper , COM NA Note: Not all SFPs supported in all SW versions. For first software release supporting SFP refer to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products device support tables list.html If non industrial(i.e.,EXT,COM)SFPs are used the switch operating temperature must be derated. MMF=multi-mode fiber SMF=single-mode fiber , ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 10 of 11 Warranty Information Warranty information for the IE 4000 is available on http://www.cisco-servicefinder.com/warrantvfinder.asox. Cisco Capital Financing to Help You Achieve Your Objectives Cisco Capital can help you acquire the technology you need to achieve your objectives and stay competitive.We can help you reduce CapEx.Accelerate your growth Optimize your investment dollars and ROI.Cisco Capital financing gives you flexibility in acquiring hardware,software,services,and complementary third-party equipment. And there's just one predictable payment. Cisco Capital is available in more than 100 countries. Learn more. 7 CISCO. Americas.Headquarters Asia Pacific Headquarters Europe Headquarters Cisco Systems,Inc. Cisco Systems(USA)Pte.Ltd. Cisco Systems International BV Amsterdam, r San Jose.CA Singapore The Netherlands Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide.Addresses,phone numbers,.and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco Website at www.cisco.corri/go/offices. L 'Cisco and the Cisco'logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S.and other countries.To view a list of Cisco trademark's; "'go to this URL.www.cisco.com/go/trademarks.Third.party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners.The use of the word partner does not imply,a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company.(1110R) Printed in.USA C78-733058-08 08/16 ©2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates.All rights reserved.This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 11 of 11 i REVISIONS 13 k. 13 I __Mbillil DETAIL E (4 SCALE 0.500 ATTACHMENT 08 49 a.5' NOTE3 13I ,` ti /SECTION C-C -..„,,. 1 - 13.50 - 5.25 - �� - 6.75NOTE 5 13/1.00-5.33 —A13 V NOTE 4 Imo_ 4 __ - ° _Ig 4 { um---------- mile) Q nTY a : A . _ I 131/ NOTE 1 pj EE DETAIL E - li 7 I pi -: o NOTE 2 i ! 13I .50-2.69 i M °i ..c 1.50 13I NOTE 5 50.48 �'" TMPr Ill I al QTY3 0 I I 0 3TMP 37.59 - _� 21.47 4 I 4111�r 1TYP C i C ! i I I NOTE 3 1� / 13�/1.00-7.55 tilt °� 8.59 _ (' SECTION 4 A -D A-A 2.00 TYP " —SECTION D-D 24.0016.00 r%.414; �� J .25I1.00-4.85 NOTE 5 EE VIEW F 12I1.00-8.75 NOTES: as a aevng_nenfnegnan_Fratetn_ xn u?.agv - En:- 1.TYPICAL(4)PLACES,ALL SIDES WELDED. 2.TYPICAL(6)PLACES,5X.50"TACKS NOTE 3 NOTE 3 3.TYPICAL(4)PLACES .25 4.TYPICAL(3)PLACES 5.TYPICAL(2)PLACES M1enN hN.popMdN o-pwMmemn Trmc Fxtlum.ln.enC 1 a 0mdmme,l WeepeebmeammJdZ,BIip.mt.r ee°u IIII nwmpW MxMkar W°na M ux°NenY WSW..aPnrMw Wl b,wluc°Nxbse6 13I1.00-11.43 0 BROWNIronic Pro-Jun;Ine. �•1 p.p.ea n».® �..e VIEW F 13 NOTE 3 p..,E.w....w 0 ., ®.p.! SCALE 0.375 _ re. SECTION'B-B SHELL WELD,EL762TX1 °' E 'E i ' ,°e% PROE °' , D e csa.0,,s 1 2 I .... -..-/ ---"--,...„:„.......,,„ ,........... ,,t NOTE 4 ---•t-D ' 3 't.. .... ......, ....., 7 I- .. B .."..„,.."'"--...„...., „...• 5QTY 4 re•T` 13 I/ NOTE 1 , ,•,-- ,-7-- 8.‘' ... I I - I , - -,..V. I . — • ., „ ./ i .... 50 48 / ,..., 1 . -1. ... ...„ QTY 3 "9 , ..... .." ,r - _,, 37 59 ‘..... , 1.7% . •,,, „•-'" .,,,,, i:- ..47,:::>'•,,,- ,/ ... ..• . 1 ''',. --.'S",-c.• _1',...„, 20 97 . ''' `.'".... ....,. --.„ 1- 8.59 i____ - -,..4 - - .1.. 1;11 I..::::,. ...",-.„ i I . k.,.,.. ;7. .. -......, . . ..s. .'. . . i., I .1'1' 1 -•-., ---...,- •• ,,...... .s.„.. ,......1 ..,-,,p7" NOTE 3 1 L.D _ r:k.z.,."... . ...,. .....„... . , -....:,.. i.:- 1 1 16 00 ... :/-,,,, : ". SEE VIEW F NOTES 1 TVIDICsAl MN IDI ArsPC Al I Cinrc 1A=I 1-1M-1 • ATTACHMENT 09 • TxDOT Workzone and Traffic Control Standards • BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION <BC> STANDARD SHEETS GENERAL NOTES WORKER SAFETY NOTES 1. The Barricade and Construction Standard Sheets (BC sheets> are intended 1 Workers on foot who are exposed to traffic or to construction equipment to show typical examples forplacement of temporary traffic control within the right-of-way shal I wear high-visibi I ity safety apparel meeting YP P P Y the requirements of !SEA "American National Standard for High-Visibi I ity devices, construction pavement markings, and typical work zone signs OqJ Apparel, or equivalent revisions, and labeled as ANSI 107-2004 standard The information contained in these sheets meet or exceed the requirements c shown in the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD1 performance for Class 2 or 3 risk exposure Class 3 garments should be cbo considered for high traffic volume work areas or night time work oL LC 2 The development and design of the Traffic Control Plan (TCP> is the 00 responsibi I ity of the Engineer 2 Except in emergency situations, flogger stations shalI be iI luminated when flagging is used at night >J. 3 The Contractor may propose changes to the TCP that are signed and sealed by a I icensed professional engineer for approval The Engineer may develop, -rde: sign and seal Contractor proposed changes COMPLIANT WORKZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES O c.J O I/J I OJ t Only pre-qua I ified products shal I be used The "Comp I iant Work Zone oo� 4 The Contractor is responsible for instal I ing and maintaining the traffic control devices as shown in the plans The Contractor may not move or change Traffic Control Devices List" (CWZTCD> describes pre-qua I ified products c:,.go and their sources n the approximate location of any device without the approval of the Engineer ,uiiryg 2 Work zone traffic control devices shall be compliant with the Manual for coo 5 Geometric design of lane shifts and detours should, when possible, meet the c applicable design criteria contained in manuals such as the American Assessing safety Hardware <MASH> L 5)- Al sNi norPfGe terAie na$4 TIDIER9srta cir°§tQ tisci,alEhAN 91"Roadway 6'5 a L Design Manual" or engineering judgment 01 aaL °q 6 When projects abut, the Engineer(sl may omit the END ROAD WORK, TRAFFIC oC FINES DOUBLE, and other advance warning signs if the signing would be - g redundant and the work areas appear continuous to the motorists If the THE DOCUMENTS BELOW CAN BE FOUND ON-LINE AT Tar- adjacent project is completed first, the Contractor shal I erect the http://www txdot.gov Too necessary warning signs as shown on these sheets, the TCP sheets or as o"J directed by the Engineer The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES sign shal I be COMPLIANT WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES LIST (CWZTCD1 oclo revised to show appropriate work zone distance DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (DMS1 L U- O 7 The Engineer may require duplicate warning signs on the median side of MATERIAL PRODUCER LIST (MPL1 om°J divided highways where median width wi I I permit and traffic volumes •oo justify the signing ROADWAY DESIGN MANUAL - SEE "MANUALS (ONLINE MANUALS>" <D00 �o 8 Al I signs shal I be constructed in accordance with the detai Is found in the STANDARD HIGHWAY SIGN DESIGNS FOR TEXAS (SHSD1 �o "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas," latest edition Sign detai Is TEXAS MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (TMUTCD> a.9'° not shown in this manual shal I be shown in the plans or the Engineer shalI provide a detai I to the Contractor before the sign is manufactured TRAFFIC ENGINEERING STANDARD SHEETS Mt_c.- 9 The temporary traffic control devices shown in the i I lustrations of the o -"o BC sheets are examples As necessary, the Engineer wi I I determine the most appropriate traffic control devices to be used 10 Where highway construction or maintenance work is being undertaken, other than mobile operations as defined by the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, CSJ limit signs are required CSJ limit signs are shown on BC(21 The OBEY WARNING SIGNS STATE LAW sign, STAY ALERT TALK OR TEXT LATER and the WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE sign with plaque shal I be erected in advance of the CSJ I imits The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES, CONTRACTOR and END ROAD WORK signs shal I be erected at or near the CSJ I imits For mobile operations, CSJ I imit signs are not required 11 Traffic control devices should be in place only while work is actually in progress or a definite need exists 12 The Engineer has the final decision on the location of al I traffic control devices SHEET 1 OF 12 traffic 13 Inactive equipment and work vehicles, including workers' private vehicles T Safety must beparked awayfrom travel lanes Theyshould be as close to the 1 Texas Department of Transportation Division P P Standard right-of-way a le ib t ne possible, or located behind a barrier or guardrai I, o or as appr ed y g BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION GENERAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS BC(I)-21 +n.+: Do-n.agn oN 'ND)I <.Tx00TI Uw. 1,D01 lc.MOT IU1x001 IQ0v0m0Br LUOL wbl 505.1 .00 "wHlr Al rrvi n r. 4-03 7 13 9-07 8-14 N11 0"ttI NU. 5-10 5-21 t3..�i TYPICAL LOCATION OF CROSSROAD SIGNS BEGIN TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGN SIZE AND SPACING146 T-INTERSECTION WORK ROAD WORK ROAD • •G20-9TP ZONE END fEXTXMILESNEXTXMILES WORK¢ AHEAD TRAFFIC SIZESPACING ROAD WORK !Optional CW20-10 FINES see Note G20-101 DOUBLE co G20-2:j:j:\ 1 and 41 /1 1 Sign Posted Sign6 4' R20-5oTP Conventional Expressway/ b _.<,o T ROAD WORK Number Speed Spacing 1 Rood Freeway ❑ END J t,NEXT X MILES or Seriesco°ai -F G202bT WORK ZONE G20-IbIL Feet 4LC orCROSSROAD X X CW20 MPH CApprx,I S*- < >I< >1 CW21 ooL g + INTERSECTED 1000'-1500' Hwy CW22 48' x 48' 48' x 48' 30 120 z - -,L ROADWAY 1 Block - City CW23 35 160 ti o ROAD 1< CW25 40 240 0.- c ROAD WORK WORK t,NEXT X MILES ROAD WORK," 45 320 I o AHEAD NEXT X MILES¢ Ga)-IbTR NEXT X MI ES¢ CSJ CWI, CW2, 60 END 0 50 400 G20. ' 1oT END Limit CW7 CW8, 36' x 36' 48' x 48' a--ail. I ICW20-1D IOptional ROADWORK BEGIN BEGIN min. WORK ZONE G20-2br• 55 500E see Note G20-2:j:j: -ROW-WORK CW9, CWI1 4LR 41 WORK G20-5T -RO 0. . and 41 NEXT X MILES C0 S •*G20-9TP oc ZONE .1W14 60 6002 g :j:j:Moy be mounted on bock of'ROAD WORK AHEAD'CCW20-1D1 si n with approval of Engineer TRAFFIC 000REss 65 001 I: g pP g G20-6T cUTCW3, CW4, o !See note 2 below) • *1220-5T FINES STATEoitiijt CW5, CW6, 46' x 48' 48' x 48' c pio I, The typical minirrun signing on o crossroad approach should be a 'ROAD WORK AHEAD' CCW20.1DIsi n and a DOUBLE COIRRACTOR 9 9 PP 9 END CW8-3, 75 9001 4 : IG20-21 'END ROAD WORK' sign, unless noted otherwise in plans. I I ROAD ` R20-5oTP _ 80 1000' 11'ORA CW1D, CW12 "'o:• 2. The Engineer moy use the reduced size 36' x 36' ROAD WORK AHEAD ICW20-1DI sign mounted bock to bock ajoa1 G20-2 * * o x at with the reduced size 36' x 18' 'END ROAD WORK' CG20-21 sign on low volume crossroads<see Note 4 under x.- L .? 'Typical Construction Warning Sign Size and Spacing"), See the 'Standard Highway Sign Designs for • •o Texas' monuol for sign detoi Is,The Engineer moy omit the advance warning signs on low volume CH c OU crossroads.The Engineer will determine whether a rood is low volume as per TMUTCD Port 5. This CSJ LIMITS AT T-INTERSECTION *For typical sign spacings on divided highways,expressways and freeways, information shall be shown in the plans. see Port 6 of the"Texas Manual on Uniform Troffic Control Devices' t:a2 3. Based on existing field conditions,the Engineer/Inspector moy require additional signs such as FLAGGER 1 The Engineer wi I I determine the types and location of any additional traffic control devices, CTMUTCDI typical application diagrams or TCP Standard Sheets. 0 AHEAD, LOOSE GRAVEL, or other appropriate signs. When additional signs ore required, these signs will such as a flogger and accompanying signs, or other signs, that should be used when work is be considered port of the minirrun requirements, The Engineer/Inspector will determine the proper being performed at or near on intersection 6 Minirrun distance from work area to first Advance Warning sign nearest the L ai work area and/or distance between each additional sign. QICJL location and spacing of any sign not shown on the BC sheets, Traffic Control Pion sheets or the Work 2,If construction closes the rood at a T-intersection,the Contractor shot I place the 'CONTRACTOR g�a, Zone Standard Sheets. •:i+_ 4 The 'ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES' CG20.1oTlsign shol I be required at high volume crossroads to advise NAME"CG20-6TI sign behind the Type 3 Barricades for the rood closure<see BCC101 also!. GENERAL NOTES - a motorists of the length of construction in either direction from the intersection. The Engineer The 'ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES' left orrowCG20-1bTLI and 'ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES' right arrow I, Special or larger size signs may be used as necessary •oi= wi11 determine whether a roadway is considered high volume. CG20-1bTR1' signs shot I be replaced by the detour signing col led for in the plans. o 5. Additional traffic control devices may be shown elsewhere in the plans for higher volume crossroads. 2. Distance between signs should be increased as required to hove 1500 feet ei 6. When work occurs in the intersection area, appropriate traffic control devices, as shown elsewhere in advance worning, a,>o the plans or as determined by the Engineer/Inspector shal I be in place <osoo 3. Distance between signs should be increased as required to hove 1/2 mile c 5' WORK AREAS IN MULTIPLE LOCATIONS WITHIN CSJ LIMITS SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SIGNING FOR WORK BEGINNING AT THE CSJ LIMITS or more advance worning. 'o °° •o k •0 . `G20-9TP BEGIN 4. 36'x 36'"ROAD WORK AHEAD' ICW20-1 Dlsigns may be used on low volume R,IP'6 A SPEED WORK crossroads at the discretion of the Engineer as per TMUTCD Port 5. See cc: u>o+- ZONE Note 2 under 'Typical Location of Crossroad Signs' IE:t Eu> BEGIN DO D LIMIT •R20-5T TRAFFIC W tYG yP g -gamy.) •*G20-5T ROAD WORK R41 PlOsTs FINES :I c`c NEXT X MILE$ CWH cos AHEAD X X DOUBLE SIGNS 5. Only diamond shaped warning sign sizes ore indicated '0+. ROAD WORK- CW20-10 ROAD XX oppropriotel STATE LAW c ADDRESS CW13-IP • R20-5oTP TALK OR TEXT LATER o A0 CITY CW20-10 R2-1• ❑ 6. See sign size listing in 'TMUTCD' Sign Appendix or the "Standard Highway WORK M AHEAD SILTE 020-1 I"`\ R.O-31.1 Sign Designs for Texas• manual for complete I ist of ovoi 1 able sign design AHEAD 3X CONTRACTOR sizes. - TT/1= 111t11I1 Iype3Borricodeor 1 .1— X 4... '/ ,,, channelizing devices I< t >1 • / — LEGEND ." C / '. - >—< Type 3 Barricade 0 0 — f�� 000 Chonnel izing Devices 0 WORK _eginning of SPEED 71> —I< >I SPACE _-/• NO-PASSING R2-I LIMIT _ ENO J. Sign 3X Chomel izing CSJ Limit/ line should WORK ZONE G20-2b1 Devices Imo- RORAORE coordinate 00 XX See Typical Construction When extended distances occur between minimal work spaces, the Engineer/Inspector should ensure additional with sign Warning Sign Size and 'ROAD WORKAHEAD"CCW2O-lDlsigns ore placed in advance of these work areas to remind drivers they ore stilI G20-2•• location NOTES X Spacing chart or the within the project limits. See the applicable TCP sheets for exact location and spacing of signs and TMUTCD for sign channelizing devices. The Contractor shol I determine the appropriate distance spacing requirements. SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SIGNING FOR WORK BEGINNING DOWNSTREAM OF THE CSJ LIMITS to be placed on the G20-1 series signs and 'BEGIN ROAD "I k WORK NEXT X MILES"CG20-5Tlsign for each specific project. SHEET 2 OF 12 'G20.9TP STAY ALERT This distance shol I replace the 'X' and shol 1 be rounded BEGIN SPEED nunx OBEY to the nearest whole mi le with the approval of the Engineer Agrif ROAD ROAD ROAD • "G20-5T 109(ig LIMIT • •R20-5T FINES 19ARNING No decimals shol I be used. Division WORK WORK SIGNSI Texas Department of Transportation Standard CLOSED RI c-2 Type 3 AHEAD '12 MILE -61 X X DOUBLE TALK OR TEXT LATER STATE TLAW 0 Tp®1 YBgg1(�s INlA jlH;IUD-�gl IP Ifa, FiCo/ IF3d 2bT1 5oTP :C''.s II R2-I r trVr \ BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION �W2t1 X X PROJECT LIMIT 0{}l{ Borricode or CW13-IP CW20 ID X signs ore required outside the CSJ Limits, They inform the STATE motorist of entering or leaving a port of the work zone 1 in utside the C. Limits where traffic fines may double CONTRACTOR Ir v9or9cers ore present, BC e� 21 )izing --CSJ Limit .. CSJ limit signing is required for highway construction and <2>- mointenonce work, with the exception of mobile operations. I 0 Area for placement of'ROAD WORK AHEAD' ICVV20-1 Dlsign and other signs or devices as col led for on the Traffic RcO-6T Oio WO��QON�Ili20-2bT' ROAD WORK SPEED 001 ices C'20-2. • Control Pion. nu,. bc-21.dgn ON, ToDOT Cr.TXOOT ow. TOOT c, TOOT " XX 00 Contractor wiI I instol I a regulatory speed I i mit sign at ©TXDOI November 2002 CONr SECT JOB HIGHWAY -� the port of the work lone DIST COUHTT SHEET NO. sioNs I Block City 7-113 5-21 1000. 1500• - Hwy L2.LI <0 \, ,,, 0 % — - P 4L S CWI-4R GZp=�T -10 _ - \< 0 / '..\........, 4/ / . :• ::. i ,,,,. . _— / / .---------- 0 . a I 0 ---- 4- CWI-4L0 dE*G20 **R20 ievices evice l;zing E devices \l� 4Le,, I Chonne 1 T I CORK TYPICAL APPLICATION OF WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT SIGNS Work zone speed limits shall be reouiotory, established in accordance with the "Procedures for Estoblishino Speed Zones, &o and approved by the Texas Transportation Comnission, or by City Ordinance when within Incorporated City Limits Reduced speeds should only be posted in the vicinity o• w Signing shown for Signing shown for L Ql: g g - CSJ of work activity andnot throughout out the entire project . g g CSJ W-u one direction only one direction only otd see BC<21 for LIMITS Regulatory work zone speed signs CR2-1> shol I be removed See BC<2> for odditionol advance /LIMIT S z. I, additional advance L signing or covered during periods when they ore not needed signing c> a. ° 1 .O> 1 •,.jri me L 0 4tW I — cx° I P ii !o p p p b 1--P P P „AL c .. See General See General ""y— Note 4 See General Note 4 Note 4 o:.J d=x>- L \ „... (750' 1500'1 1, (750' - 1500'I . A o ' a G20-5oP oU S I ED �:..: E .. G20-5oP 9•• 1 r�7 jc�� br._ WIT • ED ZONE i� I D T WORK i •oa L V L' rT ZPEED R2-1 G20-5oP ZONE G20 5oP & 8pEMD R2-1 60 LIMIT SPEED°wu>_ cwas R2 1 R2-1 sL T LIMIT LIMIT R2 1 L 0 • • • . 0 . 6 0 R2-I 6 0 R2-1 00 c>t.w 1) cb L 0. - GUIDANCE FOR USE: LONG/INTERMEDIATE TERM WORK ZONE SPEED LIMITS GENERAL NOTES •B• ° Qrc This type of work zone speed limit should be included on the design of 1 Regulatory work zone speed limits should be used only for sections of construction o:u(«°O where speed control is of major importance La the traffic control plans when restricted geometrics with a lower design projects p -o �m'I speed- ore present in the work zone and modification of the geometrics to 2 Regulatory work zone speed limit signs shol I be placed on supports at a 7 foot minimum u1.:'oL a higher design speed is not feasible mounting height c m o J<0 3 Speed zone signs ore ii lustroted for one direction of travel and ore normally posted Long/Intermediate Term Work Zone Speed Limit signs, when approved as described above, should be posted and, visible to the motorist when work activity is present for each direction of travel Work activity may also be defined as a change in the roadway that requires 4 Frequency of work zone speed I imit signs should be a reduced speed for motorists to safely negotiate the work oreo, including 40 mph and greater 0 2 to 2 miles a> rough rood or damaged pavement surface 35 mph and less 0 2 to 1 mile bl substantial alteration of roadway geometrics (diversions> cl construction detours 5 Regulatory speed limit signs shol I hove block legend and border on a white reflective dl grade background (See "Reflective Sheeting"on BC(411 el width fl other conditions reodi ly apparent to the driver 6 Fabrication, erection and maintenance of the"ADVANCE SPEED LIMIT"(CW3-5lsign, As long as any of these conditions exist, the work zone speed I imit signs "WORK ZONE"(G20-5oP1 plaque and the "SPEED LIMIT"(R2-1 >signs shol I not be paid for should remain in place directly, but shol I be considered subsidiary to Item 502 7 Turning signs from view, laying signs over or down wil I not be allowed, unless as SHORT TERM WORK ZONE SPEED LIMITS otherwise noted under "REMOVING OR COVERING" on BC(41 This type of work zone speed limit may be included on the design of 8 Techniques that may help reduce traffic speeds include but ore not I imited to SHEET 3 OF 12 the traffic control plans when workers or equipment ore not behind concrete A. Low enforcement traffic barrier, when work activity is within 10 feet of the traveled way or actually B Flogger stationed next to sign T Safety n in the traveled waygg g 1 Texas De artment of Trans ortation SDtandard C Portable changeable message sign (PCMS> P P Standard Short Term Work Zone Speed Limit signs should be posted and visible to the D Low-power (drone> radar transmitter motorists only when work activity is present When work activity is not E Speed monitor troi lers or signs present, signs shol I be removed or covered 9 Speeds shown on detoi Is above ore for i I lustrotion only BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION (See Removing or Covering on BC(411 Work Zone Speed Limits should only be posted as approved for each project WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT 10 For more specific guidance concerning the type of work, work zone conditions and factors impacting al lowoble regulatory construction speed zone reduction see TxDOT form "1204 in the TxDOT e-form system B C<3>—2 1 w.e: °C•11.dgn °e•T,DOT I tti•T\D0 ow ToDOT Ic, 1\DOT iU Ixll01 Novemoer tuu[ roar sect JOB I w:lmvAr e1:v1 "' 9 07 8 14 °"a COUNTY SHEET HO. 7-13 5-21 `ef.S TYPICAL MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR LONG TERM AND INTERMEDIATE TERM SIGNS GENERAL FRK NE 1. Contractor NOTES sha OR I install and maintain signs in a straight and plurt, condition and/or as directed 1>y the Engineer 2. Wooden sign posts shall Ile painted white. 3. Barricades shalt NOT Ile used as sign supports. ROAD ROAD IEDA® 4. Al I signs shell Ile installed in accordance with the plans or as directed 1>y the Engineer Signs shat I Ile used to regulate,warn, and Nc m,r,mum !:(DES guide the traveling pal>I is safely through the work zone. OR ) omm from5. The Contractor may furnish either the sign design shown in the plans or in the 'Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas' <SHSDI.The 1 A�EfEngineer/Inspector may require the Contractor to furnish other work zone signs that are shown in the TMUTCD I>ut may have Ileen omitted °> 6' IIL> from the plans. Any variation in the plans shalt Ile documented 1>y written agreement between the Engineer and the Contractors NC t c miResponsible Person. Al I changes must Ile documented in writing before being implemented. This can include documenting the changes in o ** pm the Inspector's TxDOT diary and having both the Inspector and Contractor initial and date the agreed upon changes I 7 0+a 6. The Contractor shalI furnish sign supports 1 isted in the'Campi iant Work Zone Traffic Control Device List' <CWZTCDI for smal I roodside 3 + . o signs. Supports for temporary large roadside signs shat I meet the requirements detailed on the Temporary Large Roadside Signs <TLRSI 0 0. > 7.0' min. ow c 6' or u 7 0'min standard sheets.The Contractor shal I instal I the sign support in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If there is a question Ti. 0' •� '�� 9.0' max. X 6.0' regarding instat tat ionprocedures, the Contractor shat I furnish the Engineer a copyof the manufacturer's instat tat ion recommendations so greater `+. X 9.0' min 9 9 4-4- 0' max. I I I `. the Engineer can verify the correct procedures are being fol lowed. ▪�� + max I 7 The Contractor is responsible far instal I ing signs on approved supports and replacing signs with damaged or cracked substrates and/or damaged or marred ref lect i fever sheeting as directed I>y the Engineer/Inspector _ 8. Identification markings may Ile shown only on the back of the sign substrate.The maximum height of letters and/or company togas used a a• 1 Paved // \��/-�-//,t\"/.' Paved /c//%\\��"/. J t ,,LII * for identification shal I Ile I inch. 9. The ctor al I not le o' sheulder shoulder /\///\��% DURATION OFa WORK h losreplace def defined t vdamaged tne"T xasood posts. Ma uol oon damaged uniform Trafficposts Controll Devices spliced.Port 61 c.C- �I 'k When placing skid supports on unlevelground,the legpost lengths must Ile adjusted so the sign appears straight and plurt, I. The types of sign supports, sign mounting height,the size of signs, and the type of sign substrates can vary based on the type of U r 99 pP 9 P work being performed.The Engineer is responsible for selecting the appropriate size sign for the type of work being performed.The t Ill Objects shal I NOT Ile placed under skids as a means of leveling. Contractor is responsible far ensuring the sign support,sign mounting height and substrate meets manufacturer's recommendations in ci,cur° ** regard to croshworthiness and duration of work requirements. Cocs +- When plaques are placed on dual-leg supports, they should Ile attached to the upright nearest the travel tone. a. Long-term stationary- work that occupies a location more than 3 days. i=>- Supplemental plaques <advisory or distance)should not cover the surface of the parent sign. 1> Intermediate-term stationary-work that occupies a location more than one day I ight period up to 3 days, or nighttime work lasting 01OG> more than one hour b• L I c. Short-term stationary - daytime work that occupies a location for more than I hour in a single day I ight period. .o i Support ATTACHMENT FOR SIGN SUPPORTS Attachment to wooden supports d. Short, duration - work that occupies a location up to 1 hour Laie. Molli le - work that moves continuously or intermittently <stopping for up to approximately 15 minutes.I JOJL �,-1� shall not wit I be by bolts andnuts +�>" V 1 SIGN MOUNTING HEIGHT SVb EI protrude or screws. use TxDOT's or v�•c 57�,n� above \ 1. The bottom of Long-term/Intermediate-term signs shat I Ile at least 7 feet, 1>ut not more than 9 feet, above the paved surface, except +_._ LSV uV sign _ \ manufacturer's recoomended os shown for supplemental plaques mounted below other signs. 0 . //� procedures for attaching sign PP P q WS ; DRAM 2. The bottom of Short-term/Shea Duration signs shall Ilea minimum of 1 foot above the pavement surface I>ut no more than 2 feet above I substrates to other types of c�� ! sign 3. tg g9rn Intermediate-term Signs may Ile used in lieu of Short-term/Short Duration signing. off° rIRI me Support r � � \ supports 4. Short-term/Shart Duration signs shat I Ile used only during dayt ight and shat I Ile removed at the end of the workday or raised to c r'a p shall not ROAD0 \rt . . / appropriate Long-term/Intermediate sign height, -'Oct r{ t; a protrude 5. Regulatory signs shat I Ile mounted at least 7 feet, I>ut not more than 9 feet, above the poved surface regardless of work duration. I. o_ ` above sign rn o �Yj i i OR SIZE OF SIGNS .o DJ(Q 'BJI[ i �I�OW Noi IS ShOI I NOT I The Contractor shall furnish the sign sizes shewn an BC <21 unless otherwise shown in the ptons or as directed 1>y the Engineer. + ; ; be 011owed SIGN SUBSTRATES 0 o I� AHEAD!'CAQ \�// 1. The Contractor shal 1 ensure the sign substrate is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of sign c..= _��r�T Each sign support that is being used.The CWZTCD I fists each substrate that can Ile used on the different types and models of sign supports. + o - Sign supports shall iuunumn wmum+s :nc Sholl be attached 2. 'Mesh' type materials are NOT an approved sign substrate, regardless of the tightness of the weave. i36 than 3. Al I wooden individual sign panels fabricated from 2 or more pieces shal 1 have one or more plywood cleat, 1/2' thick 1>y 6' wide, 'W .o extend mare directly to the sign arc 1/2 way up the fastened to the back of the sign and extending fully across the sign.The cleat shal I Ile attached to the back of the sign using wood p�1RVu° support Multiple c back of the sign \ screws that do not penetrate the face of the sign panel. The screws shal I Ile placed on both sides of the splice and spaced at 6' utuT substrate. - F rr / signs shol I not be centers. The Engineer may approve other methods of spt icing the sign face. REFLECTIVE SHEETING e8sc FRONT ELEVATION joined or spliced by 1. Al I signs shal I Ile retrareflective and constructed of sheeting meeting the color and retro-reflectivity requirements of DMS-8300 v xo Wood, metal or any means Wood for rigid signs or DMS-8310 for roll-up signs.The well address for OMS specifications is shown on BC<ll. Filler Reinforced Plastic supports shall not be 2. White sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A, shal I Ile used for signs with a white background. 3. Orange sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type BrL or Type CFL shal I Ile used for rigid signs with orange backgrounds. Splicing embedded perforated square metal tubing in order to extend post extended or repoired height wit I only Ile at towed when the splice is made using four bolts, two SIDE ELEVATION by splicing or SIGN LETTERS above and two below the spice point.Splice must Ile located entirely behind I. Al I sign letters and nurt,ers shalt Ile clear and open rounded type uppercase alphabet letters as approved I>y the Federal Highway the sign substrate, not near the base of the support. Splice insert lengths Wood other means Administration<FHWAI and as pul>t ished in the 'Standard Highway Sign Design for Texas' manual. Signs, letters and nuroers Sha I I Ile of should Ile at least 5 times nominal post size, centered on the splice and first class workmanship in accordance with Department Standards and Specifications. of at least the same gauge material. REMOVING OR COVERING 1- When sign messages may Ile confusing or do not opply the signs shal I Ile removed or complete Iy covered. STOP/SLOW PADDLES CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTAINING PERMANENT SIGNS 2. Long-term stationary or intermediate stationary signs instat led an square metal tubing may Ile turned away from traffic 90 degrees when the sign message is not appl ical>le. This technique may not Ile used for signs installed in the median of divided highways or near any I.STOP/SLOW paddles are the primary method to control traffic WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS intersections where the sign may Ile seen from approaching traffic. 1>y floggers.The STOP/SLOW paddle size should Ile 24' x 24' 3. Signs instat led on wooden skids shat I not Ile turned at 90 degree angles roadway signscompletely 2. STOP/SLOWpaddles shal I Ile retroreftectarized when used at night. 1. Permanent signs are used to give notice of traffic laws or regulations, cal I 99 9 s to the These sheuld Ile removed or tom letel g covered when not required. 3. STOP/SLOWpaddles mayIle attached to a staff with a minimum attention to conditions that are potential ty hazardous to traffic operations, 4 When signs are covered,the material used shal I Ile opaque, such as heavy mi t black plastic, or other materials which wi 11 cover theentire length of 6' to the bottom of the sign. show route designations, dest i notions, direct ions, di stances, services, points 9 9 sign face and maintain their opaque properties under autamal>i le headlights at night, without damaging the sign sheeting. 4. AnyI fights incorporated into the STOP or SLOWpaddle faces of interest,and other geographical,recreational,specific service ILOGOI, or rP 5. Bur lap shat t NOT Ile used to cover signs. cultural information. Drivers proceeding through a work zone need the same, shat I only Ile as specifical ty described in Section 6E.03 6. Duct tape or other adhesive material shal I NOT Ile affixed to a sign face. Hand Signaling Devices in the TMUTCD. if not better route guidance as normally installed on a roadway without 7 Signs and anchar stubs shal I Ile removed and holes backf tiled upon compl et ion of work. construction. SIGN SUPPORT WEIGHTS 2. When permanent regulatory or warning signs conflict with work zone conditions, I. vvrte,e styli supput is require the use,of weights to keep from turning over, the use - SHEET 4 OF 12 remove or cover the permanent signs until the permanent sign message matches Ty� /F /) the roadway condition. Far detai is for covering large guide signs see the of sandbags with dry cohesiantess sand should Ile used. Traffic Safety TS-CD standard. 2. The sandbags will Ile tied shut to keep the sand from spi 11 ing and to maintain a 24" 5 constant weight. I Texas Department of Transportation Division O Ls- 3. When existing permanent signs are moved and relocated due to construction 3. Rock,concrete,iron, steel or other Sol id objects shal I not Ile permitted Standard WI j purposes, they shal I Ile visible to motorists at on times. for use as sign support weights. 4.4. If existing signs are to Ile relocated an their original supports, they shal I Ile Sandbags should weigh a minimum of 35 Ills and a maximum of 50 Ills. installed on crashworthy bases as shown on the SMD Standard sheets. The signs 5. Sandbags shat I Ile made of o durable meter iol that tears upon vehicular I< 24"---Ak_ 24' J shot I meet the required mounting heights shown on the BC Sheets or the SMD impact. Rul>I>er(such as tire inner tul>esi shall NOT Ile used. BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION 6. Rul>I>er 1>01 lasts designed for channelizing devices should not Ile used for Standards. This work should lie paid far under the appropriate pay item for I>al lost on portable sign supports. Sign supports designed and manufactured TEMPORARY SIGN NOTES BOCk0r-oun0 Reel Bocko,-ound Oronoe relacating existing signs. with rul>I> basesIle used when shown on the CWZTCD li st. Leoend & Border Mite Leoend& Bor-der- Block er may 5. If permanent signs are to Ile removed and relocated using temporary supports, 7 Sandbags shal I onl y Ile p I aced a I ong or I aid over the base supports of the SHEETING REQUIREMENTS <WHEN USED AT NIGHT> troff is contra)device and Sha I 1 not Ile suspended above ground I eve I or the Contractor Sha 11 use crashworthy supports as shown an the BC standard sheets, I USAGE COLOR SIGN FACE MATERIAL TLRS standard sheets or the CWZTCD I fist.The signs shal I meet the required mounting hung with rope, wire, chains or other fasteners. Sandbags shal I Ile placed along the I ength of the skids to weigh down the sign support. BC<A'-2 1 BACKGROUND RED TYPE B OR C SHEETING heights shown on the BC,or the SMD standard sheets during construction. This work 8. Sandbags shot I NOT Ile p I aced under the skid and shot t not Ile used to I eve t t`F should t>e paid for under the appropriate poy item for relocating existing signs. sign supports ptoced on slopes. FT E: bc-21.dgn w TxDOT1 en TxDOT I ow TxDOTI c„Tx00T BACKGROUND ORANGE TYPE B, OR C, SHEETING 6. Any sign or traffic control device that is struck or damaged 1>y the Contractor FLAGS ON SIGNS ©TxOOT November 2002 CUNT SECT JOB FRUHWA> LEGEND 8. BORDER WHITE TYPE B OR C SHEETING or his/her construction equipment shal I Ile replaced as soon as possible 1>y the REVISIONS Contractor to ensure proper guidance for the motorists. This wi 1 t Ile subsidiary I. Flags may Ile used to draw attention to warning signs. When used, the flag shal I LEGEND 8. BORDER BLACK ACRYLIC NON-REFLECTIVE FILM Ile 16 inches square or larger and shal I Ile orange or fluorescent red-orange in 9-07 8-14 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. to I tern 502. color Flogs shal 1 not Ile al lowed to cover any portion of the sign face. 7-13 5-21 21" I 2sa Q;€1, In ■ ■• C.• Oly,. O:y.. 0 t:› Moxirrun 4x4 ___ _ S pp,, ft.of /skid / Post / Post Po SQ. ft. of woodface j :I.� Posi ..//\ t2$5 x6 cif I rI \ \ sign face Post ZxFi \, 2 - ,2x6 s�4�e ■ ■• q .■ O .¢4 1I • V / ° ' NI �d 4x4 60' 4x4 max. : OeE iraDle �K' desirable 4 �h / /1 �� LI/ li i / 1. Ir(�QG? post 7 ' block J block 1,R 18 LC gI _ 34' min. to Optional z.eH Tap ""4x4 Length of skids may (b�aim.m strong soils, be increosed for 55' min.in � W-- Bose o wood . . 34' min. n weak sot Is. ; See the CWZTCD Post y'` a BCI41 post additional stobi I ity 11/2' larger strong so Is, a• c for sign Tap than sign 55' min.n for entedmant a,1u•- hei tft 24' /2x4 x 40' See BC141 1 post)x 16' 9 ■.. weak soi Is. Qi<AI 2 ' 2x4 brace Anchor Stub • o .> mill 2x6 for sign 11/4" 1 orger Anchor Stub l Qo) re uirement 6„..... height �o>u f� requirement —'3/or bolts 3 1/2' �G than sign 11/4' larger than oL �r�� or 3/8' x 3 1/2' • / post- post>alyn > ■■ p,Q,�j u - • 1min.Ilog UU screws OP 2 ° 4x4 bl a 4x4 block IPETIC�N I T g LYING CHANNEL g>I IA 40' 36' gg Dire m edmentl Anchor Stub) Anchor Stub arc tatUrcin Sleeve» p 6>o, Fr-ont Lap-splice/bow an Dctxr c a-'= • >�EAii OiiA'i'�a S TTiIiiF TAL TL7BIW SKID MOUNTED WOOD SIGN SUPPORTS GROUND MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS Q ; * LONG/INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY - PORTABLE SKID MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS Refer to the CWZTCD and the manufacturer's instol lotion procedure for each type sign support. ° >b The moxirrun sign square footage shot I adhere to the manufacturer's recommendation. oo� two post uistu1IVuulls Lull ue usea rut larger signs. v+- T� c t Sq. -t o' 16 SQ. ft. or less of any rigid sign C WEDGE ANCHORS L°'. IC/Tr,a:trudec substrate() iQ1�8D1'n sectRlc�AMId of Both steel andplastic Wedge Anchor Systems as shawn >oo Ir.inr:l I DI less- tgelPZ�L►OCC is 01ISM& g may y temporary on the SMD Standard Sheets be used as tem ora +' gigrl altY ostic sign supports for signs up to 10 square feet of sign • face. They may be set in concrete or in sturdy sot Is - � i f approved by the Engineer I See web address for I Idlll[. G11yllneellllg J[dIJUdlU JIICC[J LIII Ol.l ill. oLL er: , 0 3/8' x 3' gr 5 bolt �o 12 per support> joining OTHER DESIGNS • ill ,,, nd supports vioQ PMORE DETAILS OF APPROVED LONG/INTERMEDIATE AND fi>x o •_ SHORT TERM SUPPORTS CAN BE FOUND ON THE CWZTCD .66 1 a/4• x 1r. LIST SEE BC III FOR WEBSITE LOCATION. o nu�o° A - 12 90 post 3/4' x 11 foot - 1 9' ; WO M31 SPL GENERAL NOTES 114:-GUI,)U> ICE> 1 31 4 " x 1 3/4 " X 129" II ; s,3/g X 3' gr. I.No i Is may be used in the assent I y of wooden sign a•c U>- C_ • 1 :/: gaty, !hole to hole)12 go.supp II i' 5 bolt supports, but 3/8' bolts with nuts or 3/8' x 3 1/2' l" 8` writ: VIE' telescopes into sleeve 'i i; log screws must be used on every joint for final • round P 1 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 129' connection. o j1p • Or 1 S!i' °holes I it !hole to holel • Spj:re I.C• 1 /4' i' 12 go.squareill°• �i N2. No more than 2 sign posts shall be placed within a MST •� 13/4 13/i X 52' Chol a II I perforated w�„� 7 ft. c ire I e,except for specific mater i a Is noted on the Iblbtisfe>U b. re pe _ d 1 _ _ _ tubing upright �� CWZTCD Li st. c -ami t P � wT rr I�it o.0.”<> ��c III 3. When project is completed,al I sign supports and providerovelr_nl lbI 1 3r4 x 13ra x 32' imle �`• Completely welded foundations shall be removed from the project site. above f0 '.'IeI 1?SO. spucre{erfCrateC 2' x 2" x 59' around tubin inns art[[Le cuualleled auUawldiy[u Ilem J02. tQDirg :rcSO brttrc thole to hglel g 1 �• ®� s ".1 12 go, perforat d �ci ,^ tubing x 2' x 2' x 8' See BCI41 for definition of 'Work Duration. :,,,,_vocAlp 1' SISx�•I/iqr ' — Ihole to hole> µ*,011; I fe S pm IiYP I �� / J 12 go.square Wood sign posts MUST be one piece. Splicing wi ti � perforated NOT be al lowed.Posts shal I be pointed white. /� N tubing sleeve -''' welded to skid D See the CWZTCD for the IIIMIIIIIIIIIa pin Ot / ^ °• Itype of sign substrate angle • 60• that con be used for each approved sign support. needed to r•-, NY V V ,- e match sideslope ia• 0 • 36' . ' SG/1 i 6• F SHEET 5 OF 12 rYE 2.5• > Traffic Safety I S�to start on I Division / ° t e sides Texas Department of Transportation Standard C ing in opposite 1 f °Sections.Minirrund l�puddle. 48 212 go. x ! weld .::; • BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION RIO--—J 0„' �r 1 1 upright i 6fo0V r, III' • TYPICAL SIGN SUPPORT II —weld starts here ' •�1 1 Id •J __, c �+ e� SINGLE LEC BASE Ba<.7>t21 Side View L 32 J FILE. bc-21.dgn on T DOT cr.,T.xDOT an TxDOT c. TxOOT AV SKID MOUNTED PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL TUBING SIGN SUPPORTS OTx00T November 2002 COST SECT JOB f11CIA xhvrsluus ��• 9-07 8-14 rise COUNT( SI-WET NO A LAM b/INTY:KMKUl[hh TZKM b TAT IUNAKX - YUKTA1SL1.. D1CIU MU UNTE1) b1UPI SUYYUKTb 1-13 3-Li u..LJ WHEN NOT IN USE,REMOVE THE PCMS FROM THE RIGHT-OF-WAY OR PLACE THE PCMS RECOMMENDED PHASES AND FORMATS FOR PCMS MESSAGES DURING ROADWORK ACTIVITIES BEHIND BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL WITH SIGN PANEL TURNED PARALLEL TO TRAFFIC (The Engineer may approve other messages not specifically covered here ) ppOmuu CHANGEARLB M SgAGE SIG >,. l ...,,,g /1,.,N Fr of 11 YNrcv I ,,,...,3ay�.. �0�.1,.,,,r.L„teble co chongeollle message signs IPCMS> Phase 1: Condition Lists Phase 2. Possible Component Lists .6• 1. 2. Messages on PCMS should contain no more than 8 words lollout four to > eight characters per word> not including sill 1)le words such as 'TO .-o FOR, 'AT etc. Road/Lane/RampClosure List Action to Take/Effect on Travel Location Warning **Advance co n> 3. Messoges should consist of o single phase, or two phases that Other Condition List List List List Notice List 4L61. alternate.Three-phase messages ore not 01 lowed. Each phase of the - o+ message should convey o single thought,and must Ile under stoed by FREEWAY FRONTAGE ROADWORK ROAD MERGE FORM AT SPEED TUE-FRI O0``O itself. CLOSED ROAD XXX FT REPAIRS RIGHT X LINES FM XXXX LIM!T XX AM- 4. Use the word 'EXIT"to refer to on exit rcrnp on o freeway i.e. X MILE CLOSED XXXX FT RIGHT XX MPH X PM > 'EXIT CLOSED. Do not use the term "RAMP" -- - 1---c 5. Always use the route or interstate designation IIFi, US,SH,FM> ROAD ^ SHOULDER FLAGGER LANE DETOUR USE BEFORE MAXIMUM APR XX- along with the number when referring to o roadway CLOSED CLOSED XXXX FT NARROWS NEXT XXXXX RAILROAD SPEED XX • *s 6. When in use, the bottom of o stationary PCMS message panel should Ile AT SH XXX XXX FT XXXX FT X EXITS RD EXIT CROSSING XX MPH X PM-X AM �Qo o minimum 7 feet above the roadway where possible. o>1- 7 The message term 'WEEKEND" should Ile used only if the work is to ROAD RIGHT LN RIGHT LN TWO-WAY USE USE EXIT NEXT MINIMUM BEGINS start on Saturday morning and end by Sunday evening at midnight. o0 o Actual Cloys and hours of work should Ile displayed on the PCMS if work CLSD AT CLOSED NARROWS TRAFFIC EXIT XXX I-XX X SPEED MONDAY =11io is to begin on Friday evening and/or continue into Monday morning. FM XXXX XXX FT XXXX FT XX MILE NORTH MILES XX MPH e 8. The Engineer/Inspector moy select one of two options which ore ovoi I- - a�np ollle for displaying o two-phase message on o PCMS.Each phase moy Ile RIGHT X RIGHT X MERGING CONST STAY ON USE PAST ADVISORY BEGINS g'or displayed for either four seconds each or for three seconds each. LANES LANES TRAFFIC TRAFFIC US XXX I-XX E US XXX SPEED MAY XX W>= 9. Do not 'flash' messages or words included in o message. The message CLOSED OPEN XXXX FT XXX FT SOUTH TO I-XX N EXIT XX MPH o::i c°xQ should Ile steady burn or continuous whi I e di spl oyed. _- _ __ x>-L 10. Do not present redundant information on o two-phase message; i.e. CENTER DAYTIME LOOSE UNEVEN TRUCKS WATCH XXXXXXX RIGHT MAY X-X o- keeping two I Ines of the message the some and changing the third I in•e LANE LANE GRAVEL LANES USE FOR TO LANE XX PM - Q's 11. Do not use the word 'Danger" in message. L¢ >L 12. Do not display the message 'LANES SHIFT LEFT- or 'LANES SHIFT RIGHT- CLOSED CLOSURES XXXX FT XXXX FT US XXX N TRUCKS XXXXXXX EXIT XX AM oo on o PCMS. Drivers do not understand the message. - -- D+- 13. Do not display messages that scrol I horizontol ly or verticol ly across NIGHT I-XX SOUTH DETOUR ROUGH WATCH EXPECT US XXX USE NEXT AL the face of the sign. LANE EXIT X MILE ROAD FOR DELAYS TO CAUTION FRI-SUN 14. The fol lowing tollle I ists ollllrevioted words end two-word phrases that CLOSURES CLOSED XXXX FT TRUCKS FM XXXX 0 0 ore occeptoll le for use on o PCMS. Both words in o phrase crust Ile oQ' displayed together Words or phrases not on this list should not Ile crt <u VARIOUS EXIT XXX ROADWORK ROADWORK EXPECT PREPARE DRIVE XX AM :1.- ollllrevioted, unless shown in the TMUTCD. LANES CLOSED PAST NEXT DELAYS TO SAFELY TO 15. PCMS character height shauld Ile at least >8 inches for troi ler mounted •om least units. They should Ile visible from at least 1/2 1.5> mile and the text CLOSED X MILE SH XXXX FRI-SUN STOP XX PM should Ile legible from at least 600 feet ot night and 800 feet in - -- e doyl ight. Truck mounted units rrust hove o character height of 10 inches EXIT RIGHT LN BUMP US XXX REDUCE END DRIVE NEXT +- u and crust Ile legible from ot least 400 feet. CLOSED TO BE XXXX FT EXIT SPEED SHOULDER WITH TUE 'd 16. Each I i ne of text should Ile centered on the message lloord rather than CLOSED X MILES XXX FT USE CARE AUG XX -">00 left or right justified. o X' 17 If disabled, the PCMS shOuld default to on i I legible display that wi11 .66 MALL X LANES TRAFFIC LANES USE WATCH TONIGHT o i>p PCMS has malfunctioned.A pattern such as o series of horizontal solid DRIVEWAY CLOSED SIGNAL SHIFT OTHER FOR XX PM- . ma. Ilors is oppropriate. CLOSED TUE - FRI ROUTES WORKERS XX AM E51.1:. XXXX FT *Eu> co:C XX XX * SIAY a'S�'0+� IN ,n c WORD OR PHRASE ABBREVIATION WORD OR PHRASE ABBREVIATION CLOSED LANES SHIFT in Phase 1 must be used with STAY IN LANE in Phase 2. LANE ** See Appl i cot ion Guidelines Note 6. o .Per Access Rood ACCS Eli Major NIAJ Alternate ALI Mi les MI Avenue AVE Miles Per Hour MPH Best Route BEST RTE Minor NINE APPLICATION GUIDELINES #ORDING ALTERNATIVES Boulevard BLVD Monday MON I Only 1 or 2 phases ore to Ile used on o PCMS. 1. The words RIGHT LEFT and ALL con Ile interchanged as appropriate. Bridge BROG Normal NORM 2. The 1st phase or!loth)should Ile selected from the 2. Roadway designations IH,US,SH,FM and LP con Ile interchanged as Cannot CANT North N 'Road/LoneIR0111) Closure List' and the-other Condition List- oppropr i ate. Center C I N Northbound !route> N 3. A 2nd phase con Ile selected from the Act ion to Toke/Effect 3. EAST WEST NORTH and SOUTH (or 01lllreviotions E, W, N and SI con Construction CONSTAHD Porking PKING on Travel,Location,General Warning, or Advance Notice Ile i nterchonged as oppropriate. Ahead rt000 KU Phase Lists' 4. Highway names and numbers replaced as appropriate. CROSSING XING Right Lone -RT LN 4. A Location Phase is necessary only if o distance or location 5. ROAD, HIGHWAY and FREEWAY con Ile interchanged as needed. Detour Route DE1 UDR RIE Saturday SAT is not included in the first phase selected. 6. AHEAD may Ile used instead of distances if necessary Do Not UONI Service Rood SERV RD 5. If two PCMS ore used in sequence, they rrust Ile separated by 7 FT and MI, MILE and MILES interchanged as appropriate. East E Shoulder SHLDR o minimum of >000 ft. Each PCMS shol I Ile I imited to two phases, 8. AT BEFORE and PAST interchanged as needed. Eastbound !route> E SI ippery SLIP and should Ile understondollle by themselves. 9. Distances or AHEAD con Ile el iminoted from the message if o Emergency EMER South S 6. For advance notice,when the current dote is within seven days locotion phase is used. Emergency Vehicle EMER VEH Southbound !route>S of the actual work dote, calendar days shOuld Ile replaced with Entrance, Enter EN I Speed SPD clays of the week. Advance notification shOuld typicol ly Ile for Express Lone EXP LN Street ST no more than one week prior to the work. Expressway EXPWY1 Sunday SUN XXXX Feet XXXX F I Telephone PHONE SHEET 6 OF 12 Fog Ahead FUG AHD Temporary TEMP T.-fr... Freeway FRWY I-WY Thursday THURS PCMS SIGNS WITHIN THE R 0 W SHALL BE BEHIND GUARDRAIL OR j'" )4"- Safety FreewoyBIocked FWYBLKD To Downtown TO DWN fN A Texas Department Transportation Division Friday FRI Traffic IRAF CONCRETE BARRIER OR SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) P P Standard Hazardous Driving HAL DRIVING Travelers TRVLRS UPSECSM8FPIIIREC ;P1�UOSE (I ItElON Hazardous meter i o i HALMA I Tuesday TUES High-Occuponcy NOV Time Minutes lIME MIN OF TRAFFIC WHEN EXPOSED TO TWO WAY TRAFFIC THE FOUR DRUMS BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION Highway HWYUpperLevel UPR LEVEL Highway HR, HRS vehicles isi vtrt,vtria SHOULD BE PLACED WITH ONE DRUM AT EACH OF THE FOUR CORNERS OF THE UNIT PORTABLE CHANGEABLE Hour isi Worning WARN int ormotion INFO Wednesday WED FULL MATRIX PCMS SIGNS It IS I I b Weight Limit WTLIMIf MESSAGE SIGN <PCMS> Junction .IL i West V I.When FuI I Matrix RUMS signs ore used,the character height and legi!li I ity/visilli I ity requirements shol I Ile maintained as I isted in Note 15 under TOR(ABLE Lett LFI Westbound (route>W CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS' above. BC<6>-21 Len Lone LF I LN Wet Pavement WET PVMT 2. When symbol signs, such as the 'Flogger Symbol"ICW20-71 ore represented graphically on the Full Matrix PCMS sign and, with the approval of the Engineer it v V Lone Ldosed LN LLUStU WI 11 Not WON( shot I maintain the Iegilli 1 ity/visilli 1 ity requirement I isted above. rue cc-21.agu ON ISM Icii,ixlx)1)u.. Isuu! lc. IsIA/I Lowe! Levy! Lvvn LCV CL 3. When symbol signs ore represented grophicol ly on the Full Matrix PCMS, they shol I only supplement the use of the static sign represented, and shol I not substitute 01xOU1 November ZULU Lusr SECT .AB HIGHWAY •Maintenance MAIN I for or replace that sign. „I:el,t,n: Roodwoy 4. A ful I matrix PCMS may Ile used to sirrulote o flashing arrow board provided it meets the visilli I ity flash rote and dimming requirements on BC171, for the 9-07 8-14 slsr coo>>> sir>No.- designation• IH-nurt>er US-nurt>er SH-nurt>er FM-nurt>er some size arrow. 7-13 5-21 e1..M_1 I. Barrier Reflectors shol 1 be pre-quoI ified, and conform to the color and LOW PROFILE CONCRETE reflectivity requirements of DMS-8600. A I ist of prequel ified Barrier Arrow Boards may be located behind channelizing devices in place for a shoulder Reflectors con be found at the Material Producer Li st web address Barrier Reflector on BARRIER <LPCB> USED toper or merging toper otherwise they shol I be del ineoted with four 141 channelizing shown on BCII I. 16' tol I plastic bracket IN WORK ZONES devices placed perpendicular to traffic ontheupstream side of traffic. c 2. Color of Barrier Reflectors shol I be as specified in the TMUTCD. The LPCB is approved for use in work cost of the reflectors shal I be considered subsidiary to Item 512. zone locations, where theposted }, I The Flashing Arrow Boord should be used for al I lone closures on multi-lone roadways,or slow II, 16• speed is 45mph, or I ess. See moving maintenance or construction activities an the,travel lanes Roadway Standard Sheet LPCB. 211 . Flashing Arrow Boards should not be used on two-tone two-way roadways, detours, diversions 00 of or work on shoulders unless the 'CAUTION" display !see detoi I below> is used O ,2 3. The Engineer!Inspector Sha I I choose a I I oppropr i ate signs,borr icodes and/or other troff ic I..Qr.J of barrier Arrow Boord. 0+-0 Barrier MOx. SpOCin 20 feet. control devices that should be used in conjunctionwith the Flashing it ref lectors 4. The Flashing Arrow Boord should be able to display the following symbols: Ob,-_ Reflectors Attach the z. g manufacturer.d lre 01T111endotions. n , C> �1 LOW PROFILE CONCRETE BARRIER ILPCB> C o.r. • • Qiv5 • • • o c.J 98o CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER <CTB> .}71D • • • o'o c> See D &OM !VIAi - • • 0'S 0 3. Where traffic is on one side of the CTB, two 121 Barrier Reflectors ;,g shot •I be mounted in approximately the midsection of each section of CTB. �• • • OR • •t.tt An olternote mounting location is uniformly spaced at one end of each ` •11 • • c ITT CTB. This will allow for attachment of a barrier grapple without - v. domogi ngthe ref I ector. The Borr i er Ref I ector mounted on the side of • • • • c i- the CTB sholI be located directlybelow the reflector mounted on topof t �� minimum of _ • • • • Install a • • xal the bonier as shown in the detoi I above. Reflectors • • • o xci 3 Barrier C 4. Where CTB separates two-way traffic, three bonier ref lectors shol I be as per MOM focturer's • • .-' .o" mounted on eoch section of CTB. The reflector unit on topshol I hove Ions. ALTERNATING DIAMOND CAUTION • • I recanmendat 4 CORNER CAUTION 43-.' two yellow reflective faces IBi-Directionollwhi le the reflectors on eoch .c>1. side of the barrier shol I hove one yellow reflective face,as shown in • •• • •• • • • dam° the detoi I above. DELINEATION OF END TREATMENTS • • •• ••••• • • • • o 5. When CTB separates traffic traveling in the some direction, no barrier 'oOUI. reflectors will be required on top of the CTB. END TREATMENTS FOR c' I_ 6. Barrier Reflector units shol I be yellow or white in color to match • • • • • • the edgel the being supplemented. CTB'S USED • 0o C> 7 Maximum spacing of Barrier Reflectors is forty 1401 feet. IN WORK ZONES DOUBLE ARROW RIGHT/LEFT ARROW RIGHT/LEFT L Eli- 8. Pavement markers or temporary flexible-reflective roadway marker tabs <right arrow shown; SEQUENTIAL CHEVRON o shol I NOT be used as CTB del ineotion. End treatments used on CTB's in work zones left is simi lorl (right chevron shown; o u 0- 9. Attachment of Barrier Reflectors to CTB shal I be per manufacturer's Shall meet the opppropr i ate croshworthy left is simi lorl I. recommendot i ens. standards as defined in the Manual for g.-.. JO.Missing or damaged Barrier Reflectors shol I be replaced as directed Assessing Safety Hardware IMASHI. Refer 5. The 'CAUTION' display consists of four corner lamps flashing simultaneously or the Alternating by the Engineer to the CWZTCD List for approved end Diomond Cout ion mode as shewn. Nv oo 11.Single slope borri ers shol I be deli neoted as shown on the above detoi I. treatments and manufacturers. 6. The straight line caution display is NOT ALLOWED. x 7 The Flashing Arrow Boord shol I be capable of minimum 50 percent dimming from roted lamp voltage. °'-o The flashing rote of the lamps shal L not be less than 25 nor more than 40 flashes per minute 8. Minimum lamp'on time'shol I be approximately 50 percent for the flashing arrow and equal s us BARRIER REFLECTORS FOR CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER AND ATTENUATORS intervals of 25 percent for each sequential phase of the flashing chevron. el',o+ 9. The sequential arrow display is NOT ALLOWED a.J 0" 10. The flashing arrow display is the TxDOT standard; however the sequential chevrondi splay may be used during daylight operot i ens. 51-a-•- N,_��,c 11 The Flashing Arrow Board shall be mounted on a vehicle,trailer or other suitable support. WARNING LIGHTS 12. A Flashing Arrow Boord SHALL NOT BE USED to loterol ly shift traffic. o xo 13. A full matrix PCMS may be used to simulate a Flashing Arrow Boord provided it meets visibility I. Warning I ights shol I meet the requirements of the TMUTCD. flash rote and dimming requirements on this sheet for the some size arrow 0 2. Warning I ights shol I NOT be instol led on barricades. 14. Minimum mounting height of troi ler mounted Arrow Boards should be 7 feet from roadway 3. Type A-Low Intensity Flashing Warning Lights ore commonly used with drums. They ore intended to worn of or mark a potentiol ly hazardous to bottom of pone.' area. Their use shol I be as indicated on this sheet and/or other sheets of the plans by the designation 'FL The Type A Warning Lights shot I not be used with signs manufactured with Type BFL or CrL Sheeting meeting the requirements of Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300. 1 EQUI ' NTS 4. Type-C and Type D 360 degree Steady Burn Lights ore intended to be used in a series for delineotion to supplement other traffic control MINIMUM MINI MUM NUMBER MINIMUM 5. tgTrr g/fft p2s 8�I tfi ��SatgfloP' ct`l�e ea 4i h�p�dst As af�_Prr I I ht_.od��1.R f�Ind 'the traffic control devices. TYPE SIZE OF PANEL LAMPS VISIBILITY A2TENT=gyp WHEN NOT IN USE, REMOVE r6. When required by the Engineer the Contractor shol 1 furnish a copy of the warning I ights certification, The warning I ight manufacturer will DISTANCE certify thewarning I fights meet the requirements of the latest ITE Purchase Specifications for Flashing and Steady-Burn Warning Lights. B 30 x 60 13 3/4 mile Hashing Arrow Hoards THE ARROW BOARD FROM THE 7 When used to delineate curves, Type-C and Type D Steady Burn Lights should only be placed on the outside of the curve, not the inside. sholtI t ic equippedimindwevices. RIGHT-OF-WAY OR PLACE THE C 48 x 96 15 I mi le automat dimming devices. ARROW BOARD BEHIND CONCRETE 8. The location of warning I fights and warning reflectors on drums shot I be as shown elsewhere in the plans. TRAFFIC BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL. Type C Warning Light or WARNING LIGHTS MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS approved substitute mounted on a I.Type A flashing warning I ights are intended to worn drivers that they are approaching or are in a potential ly hazardous area.drum FLASHING ARROW BOARDS adjacent to the travel way 2.Type A random flashing waming lights ore not intended for del ineotion and shol 1 not be used in a series. 3. A series of sequential flashing warning I ights placed on channelizing devices to form a merging toper may be used for del ineotion. If used, the successive flashing of the sequential warning I ights shauld occur from the beginning of the toper to the end of the merging toper in order to identify the desired vehicle path.The rote of flashing for each I ight shol I be 65 flashes per minute, plus or minus 10 flashes. 4. Type C and D 'steady-burn warning I ights ore intended to be used in a series to del ineote the edge of the travel lone on detours, on lone SHEET 7 OF 12 01r changes, on lone closures, and on other simi for conditions. 1 5. Type A, Type C and Type D warning lights shal I be instol led at locations as detailed on other sheets in the plans. Traffic Safety 6. Warning I ights shal I not be instol led an a drum that hos a sign, chevron or vertical panel. Division 7 The maximum spacing for warning lights on drums should be identical to the channelizing device spacing. TRUCK-MOUNTED ATTENUATORS Texas Department of Transportation Standard WARNING REFLECTORS MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR TYPE C !STEADY BURN> WARNING LIGHTS I.Truck-mounted attenuators ITMAI used on TxDOT foci titles must meet the requirements out lined in the Manual for BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION I T I,A warning reflector or approved substitute may be mounted on a plastic drum as a substitute for a Type C steady burn warning light at the Assessing Safety Hardware IMASHI. 1 discretion of the Contractor unless otherwise noted in the plans. 2. Refer to the CWZTCD for the requirements of Level 2 or ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, The warning reflector shot I be yellow in color and shot I be manufactured using a sign substrate approved for use with plastic drums I fisted Level 3 TMAs. on the CWZTCD. 4. TMAs ore required on freeways unless otherwiseisenoted 3. Refer to the WZTCD for a li st of approved TMAs. WARNING LIGHTS & ATTENUATOR 3. The warning reflector shot I hove a minimum retroreflective surface area lone-side!of 30 square inches. Warning reflector may be round 4. Round reflectors shol I be fully reflectorized, including the area where attached to the drum. in the plans. 5. A TMA should be used anytime that it con be positioned or square. hove a el low 5.Square substrates must hove a minimum of 30 square inches of reflectorized sheeting. They do not hove to be reflectorized where it �� q Y 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure attaches to the drum. without adversely affecting the work performance. reflective surface area of at least - 30 square inches 6.The side of the warning reflector facing approaching traffic shall hove sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements for 6. The only reason a TMA should not be required is when a work DMS 8300-Type B or Type C. area is spread down the roadway and the work crew is on FILE. bo-2t.dgn o" TxDOT o TxDOTox TsDOT�c„Tx0OT 7 When used near two-way troff ic, both sides of the worni ng ref lector shol I be ref I ector t zed. extended distance from the TMA. ©TxOOT November 2002 CONT SECT AS HIGHS',,% 8. The warning reflector should be mounted on the side of the handle nearest approaching traffic. REVISIONS 9. The maximum spacing for warning reflectors should be identical to the channelizing device spacing requirements. 9-07 8-14 owl' couNn sner"o. _Li 3-'1 Ig 5-21 GENERAL NOTES I. For I ong term stat i onory work zones on freeways, druns shol I be used as Handle- the primary channelizing device. Top should- 2. For intermediate term stationary work zones on freeways, druns should be Top not 9/16' dio. <typl c used as the primary channelizing device but may be replaced in tangent al low collection for mounting 1 b° sections by vertical panels,or 42' two-piece cones.In tangent sections,one- of water or- I signs and ti.�' piece cones may be used with the approval of the Engineer but only debris o� warning I fights > if personnel ore present on the project at 011 times to maintain the ` 4' max r +-o. cones in proper position and location. o CO CS3. For short term stationary work zones on freeways,druns ore the preferred 4' min i.cQ" channelizing device but may be replaced in tapers,transitions and tangent 8' max Each drun ShOl I hove -°I-1-;;L- 9+-. ,t +- sections by vertical panels, two-piece cones or one-piece cones as (tYP) o minimun of 2 orange ( "1 "1 z ( approved by the Engineer - and 2 white stripes L 4. Druns and 011 related items shal I comply with the requirements of the using Type A or Type B 18' x 24' Sign 12' x 24' current version of the 'Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices' retroreflective <Moximun Sign Dimension) Vertical Panel o=c <TMUTCDI and the 'Compl iont Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List' 2' max - - — sheeting with the Chevron CWI-8, Opposing Traffic Lone mount with diagonals <tD+_ <CWZTCDI. (typ•) top stripe being Divider Driveway sign D70o, Keep Right sloping down towards o' c:• 5. Druns,bases,and re I oted mater i o Is shol I exhibit good workmonsh i p and orange. R4 series or other signs as approved travel way S", shol I be free from objectionable marks or defects that would adversely by Engineer cDu,rQ affect their appearance or serviceobi I ity O. u' 6. The Contractor shol I hove o maximun of 24 hours to replace any plastic In m 00, 7e. druns identified for replacement by the Engineer/Inspector The replace- Plywood, Aluninun or Metal sign II ment device must be on approved device •ii �o • substrates shal I NOT be used on - QI L GENERAL DESIGN QUIREMENTS plastic druns .2U>o O'0''U> Pre-quo I fled plastic druns shol I meet the fol lowing requirements: - Toper to al low w>Qo:i I. Plastic druns shol I be o two-piece design; the 'body' of the drun shol I for stocking o o XQ, be the top portion and the 'base' shall be the bottom. minimun of 5 4—See Ballast `' ;_ 2. The body and base sho I I I ock together in such o manner that the body druns J + Note 3 SIGNS, CHEVRONS, AND VERTICAL PANELS MOUNTED .o separates from the base when impacted by o vehicle traveling at o speed \ \ ON PLASTIC DRUMS 6 Sci, of 20 MPH or greater but prevents occidental separation due to normal v hondl ing and/or air turbulence created by passing vehicles. '+ 3. Plastic druns shot I be constructed of I ightweight flexible, and deformable materials. The Contractor shol I NOT use metal druns or single piece plastic druns as channel izotion devices or sign supports. 1 Signs used on plastic druns shol I be manufactured using $ c 4. Druns shol I present o profile that is o minimun of 18 inches in width substrates li sted on the CWZTCD. o'0a at the 36 inch height when viewed from any direction. The height of GLO drun unit !body instol led on base> shol I be o minimun of 36 inches and 2.Chevrons and other work zone signs with on orange background c1 o maximun of 42 inches. This detail is not intended sho I I be manufactured with Type BFL or Type CFL Orange 5. The top of the drun shol I hove o bui It-in handle for easy pickup and for fabrication. See note 3 sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements 90.•— shot I be designed to drain water and not collect debris. The handle and the CWZTCD list for of DMS-8300, 'Sign Face Mater iol, unless otherwise shot I hove o minimun of two widely spaced 9/16 inch diameter holes to providers of approved specified in the plans. + al low attachment of o warning I fight, warning reflector unit or approvedget mid)le Pedestrian u°oo comp!iont sign Borr icodes 3 vertical Panels shal I be manufactured with orange and white x+- 6. The exterior of the drun body shol I have o minimun of four alternatingsheeting meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A or Type B. '- '0 orange and white retroreflective circunferentiol stripes not less than Continuous smooth Diagonal stripes on Vertical Panels shot I slope down toward o Riv 4 inches nor greater than 8 inches in width. Any non-reflectorized 36 roi 1 for hand trailing the intended traveled lone. Qoospace between any two adjacent stripes shol I not exceed 2 inches in o:c� +2 Iiiilli 4 Other sia:••• cn width. gn messages<text or symbolic) may be used as A. u>u> 7 Bases shot I have o maximun width of 36 inches, o maximun height of 4approved by the Engineer. Sign dimensi ans sho)I not exceed ��'c inches, and o minimun of two footholds of sufficient size to al low base18 inches in width or 24 inches in height,except for the R9 fl series signs discussed in note 8 below to be held down while separating the drun body from the base. [..I•ssiis.s.... 0 ><a 8. Plastic druns shot I be constructed of ultra-violet stobi I ized,orange,high- 1. density polyethylene<HOPE> or other approved material. 5 Signs shol I be instol led using o 1/2 inch bolt <nominal> 9. Drun body shol I hove o maximun unbol lasted weight of I> lbs. 111' and nut,two washers, and one I ock ing washer for each 10.Drun and base shall be marked with manufacturer's name and model number connection. 1111, Detedob I e / 6 Mounting bolts and nuts shol I be fully engaged and RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING E4� ' adequately torqued.Bolts should not extend more than 1/2 inch beyond nuts. 1 The stripes used on druns sho I I be constructed of sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements of Departmental Materials Al 7 Chevrons may be placed on druns on the outside of curves, Specification DMS-8300,'SiQn Face Materials. Type A or Type B on merging tapers or on shifting tapers. When used in these reflective sheeting shot/ be supplied unless otherwise specified locot ions,theymaybeI aced on everydrun or spaced not in the plans. 2' Mox. p P more than on every third drun. A minimun of three <3> 2 The sheeting shol I be suitable for use on and shol I adhere to the drun should be used at each location col led for in the plans. surface such that, upon vehicular impact, the sheeting shol I remain DETECTABLE PEDESTRIAN BARRICADES adhered in-place and exhibit no delaninating, crocking, or loss of 8 R9-9,R9-10, R9-)I and R9-)rQ Sidewalk Closed signs which retroreflectivity other than that loss due to abrasion of the sheeting I. When existing pedestrian facilities ore disrupted, closed, or ore 24 inches wide may be mounted on plastic druns,with surface relocated in a TTC zone, the temporary facilities shol I be approval of the Engineer detectable and include accessibility features consistent with BALLAST the features present in the existing pedestrian foci lity Refer to WZ<BTS-2>for Pedestrian Control requirements for Sidewalk 1 Unbol lasted bases shol I be large enough to hold up to 50 lbs, of sand. Diversions, Sidewalk Detours and Crosswalk Closures SHEET 8 OF 12 h between 2. Where pedestrians with visual disabilities normally use the This base, when f i I led with the bollost mater i ol, should weigh closed sidewalk, a Detectable Pedestrian Barricade shol I be Traffic 35 lbs <minimunl and 50 lbs<maximunl.The bol lost may be sand in one to placed across the ful I width of the closed sidewalk instead Safety three sandbags separate from the base, sand in o sond-fi I led plastic of o Type 3 Barricade. Texas Department of Transportation Divisio base, or other bol lasting devices as approved by the Engineer Stocking 3 Detectable pedestrian barricades similar to the one pictured Standard of sandbags wi 11 be al lowed,however height of sandbags above pavement above, longitudinal channelizing devices, some concrete surface may not exceed 12 inches. barriers, and wood or chain link fencing with o continuous 2. Bases with bui It-in bol lost shol I weigh between 40 I bs. and 50 lbs.Built- detectable edging con satisfactorily del ineote a pedestrian in bolost con be constructed of on integral crumb rubber base oro sol path. BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION 4. Tope, rope, or plastic chain strung between devices ore not Id rubber base, 3. Recycled truck tire sidewol Is may be used for bol lost on druns approved detectable, do not comply with the design standards in the CHANNELIZING DEVICES - for this type of bol lost on the CWZTCD I 1st. "Americans with Disobi I ities Act Accessibi I ity Guide I ines IADAAG4. The bol lost shot I not be heavy water or anymaterial that >' and should not be used as o control for pedestrian objects, movements would become hazardous to motorists,pedestrians,or workers when the 5 Warning lights shal I not be attached to detectable pedestrian drun is struck by o vehicle. barricodes L BC<B>-^1 5 When used in regions susceptible to freezing, druns shol I hove drainage 6. Detectable pedestrian barricades should use 8' nominal barricade holes in the bottoms so that water wi 11 not collect and freeze becoming ro;is asshown on BC1101 provided that the top roil provides o hazard when struck by o vehicle. o smooth continuous roil suitable for hand trailing with no FILE: bc-21.dgn oN. TsDOTI cr.TaDOTI ow T.�DOTI c„Tx00T 6. Bal lost shal I not be placed on top of druns. splinters, burrs, or sharp edges MOOT November 2002 CONT soc' os HIGHWAY I.' 7 Adhesives may be used to secure base of druns to pavement. 4-03 8-14w sioNs CH'- 9-07 5-21 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. L7R0 ---1 8' to 12' 8° to 12" 12' 1 The chevron shal I be a vertical rectangle with a 8' to 12 6" to -112 minimun size of 12 by 18 inches. 1 1 1-- 1 --- 1 ��-A--r;, „ 2.Chevrons are intended to give notice of a sharp GENERAL NOTES change of alignment Tvith the direction of travel I. Work Zane channe 1 i zing elev ices i I lustrated on this sheet may be i nstal I eel Coc ) and provide additional emphasis and guidance far in close proximity to traffic and arel suitable far use an high or law o'Lo " ' c o' 18' vehicle operators with regard to changes in speed roadways.The Engineer/Inspector shal I ensure that spacing and lr, 0 4' } Min. horizontal 01 ignment of the roadway placement is uniform and in accordance with the 'Texas Manual on Uniform p See min ), See °E m 3. Chevrons,when used,Sha I 1 be erected an the out- Traffic Control Devices' ITMUTCDI. u o of note > 4° note N a side of a sharp curve or turn, or an the far side 2. Channel i zing elev ices shown an this sheet may have a Cir i veab I e, fixed or L 01, 45 % a of an intersection. They shal I be in I ine with portable base. The requirement far self-righting channelizing devices must �'cm g w and at right ang I es to approaching troll ic. be specified in the General Notes or other plan sheets. 0 ot.` 4• 4" 6 Spacing should be such that the motorist always 3. channelizing devices an self-righting supports shOuld be used in work zone z a § + has three in view, until the change in alignment areas where channelizing devices are frequent I y impacted by errant vehicles L VP-IL VP-1R -a� ,, Y- 0 eliminates its need or vehicle related wind gusts making alignment of the channelizing devices 'O difficult ta maintain.Locations of these devices shal I be detailed else- �4r+c Fixed Bose Surface7.........- c 4. Ta be effective,the chevron should be visible <rr• C: !Ri Rigid / •E 36' for at least 500 feet. where in the plans.These devices shal I conform ta the TMUTCD and the T�9r ./ App; :ed /Mount Roadway E r SUDptlrt—► 'Campi iant Wark Zane Traffic Control Devices List" ICWZTCDI. o c i u" 5\ / . Chevrons shal I be orange with a black nonrefleo- 4. The Contractor shall maintain devices in a clean condition and replace �' t i ve I egend.Sheeting far the chevron shal 1 be damaged, nanreflective, faded, or broken devices and bases as required by �n� Ad I .GIs Base/Surface F1� i� vr`47 ir�'� retrareflective Type Bn or Type Cn conforming ta the Engineer/Inspector.The Contractor shah I be required ta maintain proper . " r Departments I Mater i a l Specification DMS-8300, a o o• ' { P P elev ice spacing and al ignment. oc 0 1� I`r Self-righting 12' mininun o unless noted otherwise.The legend shal I meet the 5. Portable bases shal I be fabricated from virgin and/or recycled rubber The _n -- SupPQrt erroectnent -J— r i requirements of DMS-8300. portable bases shal I weigh a minimun of 30 lbs. 'o depth e"ij L Fixed Base w/ Approved Adhesive 6. For Lang Term Stat ianary use an tapers or 6. Pavement surfaces shal I be prepared in a manner that ensures proper bonding c°,n FIXED !Driveable Base, or Flexible transitions on freeways and divided highways, between the adhesives,the fixed mount bases and the pavement surface. o'o. o !Rigid or self-righting> V V SupPQrt can be used) self-righting chevrons may be used to supplement Adhesives shal I be prepared and applied according ta the manufacturer's vT DRIVEABLE pleat i c druns but not to rep lace plastic druns. recommendat i ens. o x SI 7 The ins ta I I at i an and remava I of channe I i zing elev ices shal I not cause 'li I. detrimental effects to the final pavement surfaces, including pavement u surface discoloration or surface integrity Driveable bases shal I not be Eon 1 Vertical Panels IVP"s1 are normally used to channelize CHEVRONS permittedpavementEngineer/InspectorPP a of an final surfaces. The shal l approve .c 00 traffic may divided daytimea lanesorigof traffic. al I a l icatian and removal procedures of fixed bases o�c 8' to 12• 2.VP"s be used in or nighttime situations. pp .a}-.- f4 I They may be used at the edge of shoulder drop-offs and .o ROB 44.__A_ other areas such as lane transitions where POSitive F.' daytime and nighttime delineatian is required.The boo Engineer/Inspector shal I refer to the Roadway Design oa Manual for additional requirements an the use VP's o.Ll.° 4 I for drop-offs. 24' See 3. VP's should be mounted back to back if used at the edge Mini1TNJm Suggested Moximun .o CO min, note 36' Desirable Spacing of 0 4, of cuts adjacent to two-way two lane roadways. Stripes Posted ForITN.E0 Topec*t*Ingths Chonneli zing b�+� I min, are ta be reflective orange and reflective white and Speed Devices b should always slope downward toward the travel lane. 1 p' r r y 2 v n c t o^0 4' 4.VP's used an expressways and freeways or other high Onc ,too speed roadways,may have more than 270 square inches Offse Offse Offse Toper Tongent c .o .61 of retroreflective area facing traffic. 30 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' .0 5 Self-righting supPQrts are available with portable base. 35 L=_WS 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' &oat o See'Comp I iant Work Zane Traffic Control Devices List' 60 a:. off ICWZTCDI. 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' - Ia),Eu> 6 Sheeting far the VP's shall be retrareflective Type A or 45 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' +o 1 \ Type B conformingto Departmental Material SpecificationDMS- .-c I I 8300,unless noted otherwise. p 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 7 Where the height of reflective material on the vertical 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 11 0' o c.d !Rigid or self-righting> panel is 36 inches or greater a panel stripe of 60 L=WS 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 6 inches shal I be used. LONGITUDINAL CHANNELIZING DEVICES <LCD> PORTABLE 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 1. LCDs are crashwarthy I ightweight, deformable devices that are highly visible, have good target value and 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' can be connected together They ore not designed to contain or redirect o vehicle on impact.VERTICAL PANELS (VPS> 2 LCDs may be used instead of o I ine of cones or druns. 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 3. LCDs shal I be placed in accordance ta application and instal lotion requirements specific ta the device, and 80 800' 880' 960' 80' 160' used only when shown on the CWZTCD I ist. 4. LCDs shOuld not be used to provide positive protection for obstacles, pedestrians or workers. "Toper Ienc;Ittis hove been I'sounded off. 5. LCDs shal I be supplemented with retroreflective delineation as required for temPQrary barriers L•Length of Toper (FT.) w•wiath of Offset (Fr.) on BCI71 when placed roughly parollel to the travel lanes. S•Postea speeaa> 1 OpPQsing Traffic Lane Dividers IOTLDI are 6. LCDs used as barricades placed perpendicular to traffic shauld have at least one raw of reflective de I i neat ion devices designed to cenver t a sheeting meeting the requirements for barricade rai Is as shown an BCIIOI. Place reflective sheeting SUGGESTEDMAXIMUM SPACING OF normal one-way roadway sect ion to two-way near the top of the LCD along the ful I length of the device. aperat ion.OTLD'a are used an temporary CHANNELi ZING DEVICES AND 12' CW6-4 center I i nes.The upward and downward arrows MINIMUM DESIRABLE TAPER LENGTHS an the sign's face indicate the direction of WATER BALLASTED SYSTEMS USED AS BARRIERS - Panels traffic on either side of the divider The mounted base is secured to the pavement with an 1. Water ballasted systems used as barriers shal I not be used solely to channelize road users, but also to protect the back to back adhesive or rubber weight to minimize movement work roadway speed and barroprriate Manualrier opp Ico i far Assessing Safety Hardware IMASHI croshworthiness requirements based on caused by a vehicle impact or wind gust. n. 2. Water ballasted systems used to channelize vehicular traffic shal 1 be supplemented with retroreflective delineatian SHEET 9 OF 12 18' 2.The OTLD may be used in combination with 42' or channelizing devices to improve daytime/nighttime visibi I ity They may also be supplemented with pavement markings. Traffic cones or VPs. 3. Water ballasted systems used as barriers shot I be placed in accordance to oppl icatian and instal lotion requirements T Safety Portable, specific to the device,and used only when shown on the CWZTCD I ist. 1 Texas Department of Transportation Standard 3136' Fixed or 3. Spacing between the OTLD shal I not exceed 500 4. Water ballasted systems used as barriers should not be used for o merging toper except in law speed !less than 45 MPH> Driveable Base feet.42' canes or VPs placed between urban areas. When used on o toper in o low speed urban area, the toper shol be delineated and the toper length mad'Wired, the OTLD's should not exceed 100 foot spacing. should be designed ta optimize road user operations considering the ovoi lable geometric conditions. on 4. The OTLD shal I be orange with a black non- re 5. When water bol losted systems used as barriers hove blunt ends exPQsed to traffic, they should be attenuated mounted as per manufacturer recommendations or flared ta a Point outside the clear zone. BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION flective legend. Sheeting far the OTLD shal I v �+;n druns. be retrareflectiven Type Bnor Type Cnconforming CHANNELIZING DEVICES ta Departmental Material Specification DMS-6300, If used to channelize pedestrians, longitudinal channelizing devices or water ballasted I I -'- 1 i unless noted otherwise.The legend shal I meet systems must have a continuous detectable bottom far users of long canes and the top the requirements of DMS-8300. of the unit shal I not be less than 32 inches in height. BC<9>-21 HOLLOW OR WATER BALLASTED SYSTEMS USED AS raE: bc-21.dgn or+ TxDOTI u.TxDOTI ow TxDOTI c,.'morn' OPPOSING TRAFFIC LANE DIVIDERS <OTLD> LONGITUDINAL CHANNELIZING DEVICES OR BARRIERS T©TxOOT November 2002 COW SECT JOB FROiI, REVISIONS 9-07 8.14 mSr COUNTS SHEET NO. 1 1'(7u 5-21 TYPE 3 BARRICADES Each roadway of a divided highway Shal 1 be ROAD ___ _ I. Where positive redirect ionol 1. Refer to the Comp!font Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List ICWZTCDI borricoded in the some manner. RI 1-2 Amass �_ _ _- _ copabi I ity is provided, drums CLOSED 020-6T ,___ - for detoi Is of the Type 3 Barricades and a I ist of 011 materials surf may be omitted. used in the construction of Type 3 Barricades. mamma,a, r c T0 2. Type 3 Barricades shol 1 be used at each end of construction M4-10L Gam!, r — r 2. Plastic construction fencing ,n projects closed to 011 traffic. �--� ` may be used with drums for . 1,' projects 3. Barricades extending across a roadway should hove stripes that slope -3 1 safety as required in the plans. ›c: downward in the direction toward which traffic rrust turn in detouring. IA' 10. 3. Vertical Panels on flexible support oc uNN When both right and I of t turns ore provided,the chevron striping may ' a r /!r d` i% may be substituted for drums when the r cN. slope downward in both directions from the center of the barricade. ��`sss--- 4 r' ��-;;i s / Typical shoulder width is less than 4 feet r-- Where no turns oreprovided at a c I osed rood,stripingshou Id s lope "r r i 11 '-t Plastic Drum o r�r ^� y 4. When the shau Icier width is greater downward in both direct ions toward the center of roadway '' S4„,,,,, --� L. �,* `_ / than 12 feet, steady-burn I i ghts Zoo 4. Striping of roi Is,for the right side of the roadway should slope — �, PERSPECTIVE VIEW may be omitted if drums ore used. >J. downward to the left.For the left side of the roadway striping should slope downward to the right �''" .✓ f 30 feet - These drums 5. Drums rrust extend the I ength a • _/ ore not re uired of the culvert widening. b c 5. Identification markings may be shown only on the bock of the : q =t•c barricade roi Is.The moxirrun height of letters and/or company logos -. — ,0 �� on one-way roadway c'>'A� used for identification shol I be 1 �� \ o c: 6. Borricodes shol I not be placed parallel to trofic unless on adequate PERSPECTIVE VIEW Detour LEGEND 1\il � c I ear zone is provided. Roadway !L w 7 Warning I ights shol I NOT be instal led on barricades. a. o 4b 8. Where barricades require the use of'weights to keep from turning over ____ D )( ® ® Plastic drum I, the use of sandbags with dry cohesionless sand is reconmended.The if----& �@ o a g it ,o sandbags will be tied shut to keep the sand from spilling and to The three roi Is on Type 3 borr i codes III fn ® PI ost i c drum with steady burn I fight i> maintain a constant weight Sand bogs shol I not be stocked in a manner shol I be reflectorized orange and " ® �QIffIII((( �' that covers any portion of a barricade roi Is reflective sheeting. reflective white stripes on one side or yellow warning reflector Si, Rock,concrete,iron, steel or other solid objects will NOT be facing one-way traffic and both sides �o c, >i F'" 1 B Steady burn warning I fight err, permitted. Sandbags should weigh a minirrun of 35 lbs and a moxirrun of for two-way traffic. �i z" E or yellow warning reflector o>?ci> 50 lbs.Sandbags shol I be mode of a durable material that tears upon Barricade striping should slant X . Whiaiilliba aganib rsFlbNPtblg9 kepf8 .9 ff )ors4Vbh rnib t3313eised downward in the direction of detour b v. o_ o�;r supports of the device and she I I not be suspended above ground leve I 2 ® Increase number of plastic drums on the 'c o0 or hung with rope, wire, chains or other fasteners c 5 x side of approaching traffic if thecrown I. Signs should be mounted on independent supports at a 7 foot width makes it necessary. Imin i rrun of 2 lor 9. Sheeting for barricades shol 1 be•retroreflective Type A or Type B mounting height in center of roadway The signs should be a 8' max. length Type 3 Barricades c D 0 I conforming to Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300 unless and moxirrun of 4 drums) minirrun of 10 feet behind Type 3 Barricades. .o.c:r_ otherwise noted. PLAN VIEW ,✓ ''` Barricades shol I NOT PLAN VIEW co be used as a sign support TYPE 3 BARRICADE <POST AND SKID> TYPICAL APPLICATION CULVERT WIDENING OR OTHER ISOLATED WORK WITHIN THE PROJECT Ll ITS a u co_ Minirrun ' s Width of •Po'd naninolAar " ' I SheRefleetin iva CONES 7 inches. 3 -4" WOO min. orange c�c'o TYPICAL STRIPING DETAIL FOR BARRICADE RAIL 2- min •�,o4 m,n: white o OW,-clic r 4' min. 8' max. 3"-4 4" min. orange u.l:• Ees T 1^I6" min. 2" min. , 2" max. - am'x> .,J ,l�i2" min. 4 }3" min. �i min. white u o'. T _ 4 min. / \ 6" min. to 6' w c 'IF- .. 42 2Thin. 2. o 46' i o 28'I. min. / \ 4' min. g^ min. /' ' I^_� min. 1 7 28' 28' Stiffener r, min min '\. Flot roi, A1 Stiffener may De inside or outside of support, Dut no more tnon 2 stiffene s shol I be Ol lowed on one oor icode. TYPICAL PANEL DETAIL Two—Piece cones One—Piece cones Tubular Marker FOR SKID OR POST TYPE BARRICADES AI ternote CJTD 28" Cones shol I hove a minimum weight of 9 1/2 lbs Al ternote 92" 2-piece cones shol I hove a minimum weight of Approx. Drums, vertical panels or 42' cones 01 Approx. \ 30 lbs including base at 50'moxirrun spacing 50' A \ 50' t IF 1 SHEET 10 OF 12 Min. 2 drums �` Min. 2 drums 1. Traffic cones and tubular markers shall be predominantly orange, and Traffic or 1 Type 3 t or 1 Type 3 meet the height and weight requirements shown above. T Safety barricade C'� \ barricade 2. One-piece cones hove the body and base of the cone molded in one consolidated 1 Texas Department of Transportation Division SiOCI(PILE unit. Two-piece cones have a cone shaped body and a separate rubber base, p p Standard or bol lost,that is added to keep the device upright and in place. • CJD//// 3. Two-piece cones may hove a handle or loop extending up to 8' above the minirrun height shown,in order to aid in retrieving the device. T�� 7��1 J�� _ A 4 Cones o tubulo ma ke s sholI hove white o white and o onQe eflective BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION On one-way roods ❑ 0 D ❑ bonds as shown above The reflective bonds shol I hove a smooth, sealed downstream drums Desirable outer surface and meet the reQuirements of Departmental Material CHANNELIZING DEVICES stockpile location Channelizing devices parallel to traffic Specificotion DMS-8300 Type A or Type B. or borricode may be is outside should be used when stockpile is 5. 28' cones and tubular markers ore generol ly suitable for short duration and omitted here clear zone. within 30'from travel lone. short-term stationary work as defined on BCI41. These should not be used V for intermediate-term or long-term stationary work unless personnel is on-site BC< 10> -21 to maintain them in their proper upright position. - 6. 42' two-piece cones, vertical panels or drums ore suitable for all work zone FILE bc-21.dgn ON i mOOM I ct:.,xDOIf OM: l WOT I:. ,xOO, durations. CS'1TXOOT November 2002 coNr SECT no ,"Cc1WAY 7 anon Cones r tubular markers used on each project should be of the some size 9-07 8 1 " TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR MATERIAL STOCKPILES 7-13 5-21 ow COVNtt wurNa Temporary Flexible-Reflective WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS Roadway Marker lobs DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS PAVEMENT MARKERS!REFLECTORIZED> DMS-4200 8° GENERAL TRAFFIC BUTTONS DMS-4300 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS In EPDXY AND ADHESIVES DMS-61 00 '0' I. The Contractor shol I be responsible for maintaining work zone and 1 Pavement markings that ore no longer oppl icoble,could create confusion TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW "C existing pavement markings, in accordance with the standard or direct a motorist toward or into the closed portion of the roadway BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS DMS-6130 gu• specif i cot i ans and special provisians, on al I roadways open to troff ic sho II be removed or obliteroted before the roadway is opened to troffic. �� / J I..oI:..I within the CSJ I imits unless otherwise stated in the plans. 1 K////.//�� PERMANENT PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS DMS-8240 2.The above shol I not apply to detours in place for less than three it 2. Color patterns and dimensions shall be in conformance with the days,where floggers and/or sufficient channelizing devices ore used 2" TEMPORARY REMOVABLE,PREFABRICATED DMS-6241 obz. i- 'Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices' !TMUTCD> in lieu of markings to outline the detour route. I PAVEMENT MARKINGS S TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE,REFLECTIVE r,I 3. Additional supplemental pavement marking detoi Is may be found in the 3.Pavement markings shol I be removed to the fullest extent possible, Fs— 4 i/4 —'I t ROADWAY MARKER TABS DMS-8242 ' �c plans or specifications. so as not to leave a discernoble marking.This shol I be by any method „°' ° approved by TxDOT Specification Item 677 for 'El iminoting Existing Adhesive pod `_1:Err 4. Pavement markings shot I be instol led in accordance with the TMUTCD Height of sheeting A I ist of prequel ified reflective raised pavement markers, u•�irr Pavement Markings and Markers' is usually more than non-reflective traffic buttons, roadway marker tabs and other 00I and as shown on the plans. 4. The removal of pavement markings may require resurfacing or seal I/4' and less than I pavement markings can be found at the Material Producer List 5. When short term markings ore required on the plans, short term coating portions of the roadway as described in Item 677 web address shown an BCIII. a.1''. markings shol I conform with the TMUTCD,the plans and detoi Is as �c 6,.. shown on the Standard PI on Sheet WZ!STPM> 5.Subject to the approval of the Engineer any method that proves to be l�o successful on a particular type pavement may be used. STAPLES OR NAILS SHALL NOT BE USED TO SECURE 6. When standard pavement markings ore not in place and the roadway '' is opened to troffic, DO NOT PASS signs shol I be erected to mark 6. Blast cleaning may be used but wi 11 not be required unless specificol ly TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE—REFLECTIVE ROADWAY MARKER s * the beginning of the sections where passing is prohibited and shown in the plans. TABS TO THE PAVEMENT SURFACE 6ox� PASS WITH CARE signs at the beginning of sections where passing �,o'i - is permitted. 7 Over-pointing of the markings SHALL NOT BE permitted. o 7 Al I work zone pavement markings shol I be instol led in accordance 8. Removal of raised pavement markers shol I be as directed by the with Item 662, 'Work Zone Pavement Markings. Engineer ,,.f,, cn I.Temporary flexible-reflective roadway marker tabs used as guidemorks .c, 9.Removal of existing pavement markings and markers will be paid for shol I meet the requirements of DMS-8242 o0 directly in accordance with Item 677 'ELIMINATING EXISTING PAVEMENT b4-F RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS MARK I NGS AND MARKERS, unless otherwise stated in the plans. 2. Tobs deto i I ed on this sheet ore to be inspected and accepted by the o Engineer or designated representative.Sampling and testing is not o.co0 b= 1. Raised pavement markers ore to be placed according to the patterns IQ.Block-out marking tape may be used to cover conflicting existing norma I I y required, however at the option of the Engineer either A' t..ai on BC!12> markings forperiods less than two weeks when approved bythe Engineer or 'B' below maybe imposed to assure quo it before placement on the �— 9 PP 9 P 9 Y Wt.. 2. All raised pavement markers used for work zone markings shall meet roadway o'" the requirements of Item 672, 'RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS'and Departmental A. Select five 151 or more tabs at random from eoch lot or shipment Material Specification DMS-4200 or DMS-4300. and submit to the Construction Division,Materials and Pavement 0 0° Section to determine specification compl ionce. ol..l. E6c'c B. Select five 15)tabs and perform the fol lowing test. Affix five PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS C 151 tabs at 24 inch intervals on on ospholtic pavement in a zo I. Removable prefabricated pavement markings shol I meet the requirements straight t ine.Using a medium size passenger vehicle or pickup, ' .O>-° of DMS-8241• run over the markers with the front and rear tires at a speed of No 6' '6° 2. Non-removable prefabricated pavement markings !foi I bock> shol I meet more 35 thant onean miles per hour four 141 times in eoch direction. II I out of the five 151 reflective surfaces shol I n uo the requirements of DMS-8240. be lost or displaced as a result of this test o::i1j0,- w..-oto 3. Small design variances may be noted between tab manufacturers. ubH'C MAINTAINING WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS q c_ - 4. See Standard Sheet WZISTPMI for tab placement on new pavements.See I.The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining work zone pavement Standard Sheet TCPI 7-11 for tab p 1 ocement on seal coot work. o ><o markings within the work I imits. ,2. Work zone pavement markings shol I be inspected in accordance with the frequency and reporting requirements of work zone traffic control device inspections as required by Form 599. 3. The markings shauld provide a visible reference for a minimum RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS USED AS GUIDEMARKS distance of 300 feet during normal doyl ight hours and 160 feet wheni I.Roi sed pavement markers used as gui demorks sho I I be from the approved 11 uminoted by outomobi le low-beam head I ights at night,unless sight product I ist, and meet the requirements of DMS-4200. distance is restricted by roadway geometrics. 2. Al I temporary construction raised pavement markers provided on a 4 Markings foi I ing to meet this criteria within the first 30 days ofter project shall be of the same manufacturer placement shal I be rep I oced at the expense of the Contractor as per 3. Adhesive for guidemorks shol I be bituminous material hot oppl ied or Specification Item 662. butyl rubber pod for 011 surfaces, or thermoplastic for concrete surfaces. Guidemorks shol I be designoted as: YELLOW-!two amber reflective surfaces with yellow body), WHITE-<one si Iver reflective surface with white body> SHEET 11 OF 12 Traffic { Safety 1 Texas Department of Transportation Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PAVEMENT MARKINGS BC (11) -21 III F. bo-21.dgn no. TxDOTI CK.TNDOTI so.TxDOT I c.Tx0OT ©TxDOT February 1998 COW SEC' JOB FRGHWAT REVISIONS Wa 2-98 9-07 5.21 i•— 1.02 7-13 DIET cowry SHEET NO. CH'- ylla 8-14 STANDARD WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS DETAILS PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS 01 11-3 I1 Type 11-A A T Y buttons o DOUBLE RAISED .La OI o 0 a o o o ED o 07 El O' 10 to 12" 10 to 12" Type 11-A A 0 PAVEMENT 4 to 12" Oc� MARKERS ,❑ 0 0 0 a o O o a o o o a o o ► NO-PASSING i 4' co CI> max) Q la o a o 0 0 0 0 o a o REFLECTOR!ZED .L t DL.0 el 01 o n a N o 0 O o O O ❑ O 00 Ia 0 ❑a O n 0 0 0 ❑ O PAVELENi SO- Yellow Yellow? Type 11-A-A V Type Y buttons LINE MARKINGS 4 to 12"t • L- Yellow D g REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PATTERN A RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS PATTERN A ''' EDGE LINE Type 1-C, I-A or II-A-A _ --,---Type W or I buttons SOLID RAISED o-C PAVEMENT ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 O a O O O a O O -e,gJ. --I 1-- oocN- Type II-A-A OR SINGLE MARKERS 0 c LINES 60" .3" '" REFLECTOR I ZED CD o L o CI>cI M� MN o o •o opcD oto o a o o o a o o o a o o o NO-PASSING LINE PAVEMENT IIINA 00 0000 -t ❑000 70 MARKINGS White or .Yellow °o f Yellow I' Type Y I 4 to 8" hnttnnc e to R" T r a i T-A-A -,� 1F type I-C Type W buttons a'1111 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PATTERN B RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS PATTERN B WIDE RAISED 7�7 1' Crp L❑GClI I o a o 0 0 ❑ o�o o ❑ 0 ,o cl, Pattern A is the TXDOT Standord, however Pattern B moy be used if approved by the Engineer PAVEeIENT 1-2" °,a Prefabricated morkings moy be substituted for reflectarized pavement morkings LINE MARKERS fO o o y, o a o o o ❑ O O O ❑ O co..„0:.J REFLECTOR! 1 $, :CX LD CF'OR LEFT TURN CHANNELIZING LINE cp E. CENTER LINE & NO-PASSING ZONE BARRIER LINES FOR TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY HIGHWAYS OR CHANNELIZINC LINE USED TO PAVEMENT1.1111111111 ..1111 L 1 MARKINGS a> L DISCOURAGE LANE CHANGING.I White Type I-C g' Type 1-C or 11-A A /-3" do+�°- / yp _ 0 'O.0 L CENTER RAISED DODOD o El Y o "OOTOD D:0" o a o 0 o a o 0 o a o 0 o a o 0 0 0 0 0 o a o{ a o 0 o a o 0 o a o 0 o a o 0 0 • �g�>' Type W buttons rType I-C or 11-C-R PAVEMENT VVhiteZ. 1-10 ———— 3 �'— Ail Type W or 1< 5',,,J c' n, Yellow DODOO e0000 rrxf' 00000 0000 LINE MARKERS V Y buttons -Q'9 <143 Type I-A"- Type Y buttons OR ,o co oa 0000000'ti 000 ❑ 0000000❑ 000 ❑o-;;,-.oa000a 000 ❑ 000 ❑ 4O' '1 L D.,_ '0 it LANE REFLECTOR!ZED , �❑ — _ oy 000a0000000a000aooy a o00a000aoo0a PAVEMENT / O — �o.o / �p a o Type I A Type Y buttons / LINE MARKINGS 7 Yellow v 1' 10' 30 --- White or Yellow ciao Type 1-C or 11-A A .0 W1->tlte\— O DODOO 00000 {DO 00000 00000 BROKEN (when reuired> 0 Type W buttons \ Type 1-C or 11-C-R LINES :00 oao0oao0oao0oao00000oaoo a000\_o oao0oao0oa [ °C'D`o REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED a a a a I a a a Lig-1 - RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS Type 1-C Rom err a a a a 1-z' a a a L. y��l Prefabricated morkings moy be substituted far reflectarized pavement morkings AUXILIARY 11 C-R 9 T e l-C or p oC OR ' te o a' EDGE & LANE LINES FOR DIVIDED HIGHWAY LANEDROP LINE REFPAVEETEO 111111 _ MARKINGS 9' O Type W buttons. - /"Type I-C 1 White/.. 0 00000 o000O 00000 0000d D0000 00000 REMOVABLE MARKINGS Type II-A-A f/iType Y buttons 0 S t- WITH RAISED 60o a o 0o 0o oao0oao0oao0oao oao0oao0oao0oa000a 0. J, Yellow oao00000oao0oao oa000ao0oao0oao0oa PAVEMENT MARKERS RS If raised pavement markers ore e used sed -10 30' J i i °0000 °0000 ❑;i❑o❑ 0000cl, °0000 0000o to supplement REMOVABLE morkings, RasedPavement Markers White/- O Type W buttons / "'-..Type 1-C the morkers shol I be applied to the O top of the tape at the approximote REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS mid length of tape used for broken mmilmmazzoia Prefabricated morkings moy be substituted for reflectorized pavement morkings lines or at 20 foot spacing for. k solid lines This allows on easier 2u' 1' LANE & CENTER LINES FOR MULTILANE UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS removal of raised pavement morkers Centerline only not to be used on edge lines and tape SHEET 12 OF 12 T e W buttons'\ TypeTrafficyp I C"\ 0 T Safety ,m 00000 °0000 ci'b000 oo'boa 0000° 000oo A Texas Department of Transportation Division Standard -,\/'\/II-1 i tg,—* a D D D 0 0 0 0 1.0 0 ❑ D D ❑0 D D ❑0 D D ❑0 D D O O ❑0 D D D D D D ❑0 0<Z>❑ Yellow 0000° Type Y buttonsor: DODOO TypeI-A-A II00000 -A- 0000° BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION 0B9V00Da 2° P°a000aos00ao00ao80800 000 ❑ o8°805000ao8°8°R PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS Raised pavement markers used as standard 0000\._ 0000° pavement markings shol I be from the approved A DODO0 00000 gp000 0000o products I ist and meet the requirements of White 0 Type W buttons/ Type 1-C Item 672 "RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS " BC< 12> -21 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS FILE: be-21.dgn M.TNDOT CK`TND01J cm TxOOTI c„Ts001 Prefabricated morkings moy be substituted for reflectorized pavement morkings COTzDOT February 1998 cant DEC' .roe HIGHWAY Ia:VISIONS TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE 1.97 9-07 5.21 2'98 7 13 -DISC COUNTY SHEET NO. ,nQ2, 8.14 S L SIGNAL SIGNAL • E•0 . WORK (p]1 0 WORK LEGEND CW2�SG-1 0 0 AHEAD / 1 I a S!DRL CWAH�G 1 D V 1 O I , • �� Type 3 Barricade •• Channelizing Devices 1Truck Mounted c 0 y o CW2 SG-1 AHEAD �I 1-1!_l: e 46" x 48" 48" x 48" 48" x 48" T �D 1 / Heovy Work Vehicle Attenuotor CTMA> 'Scu X / X 820Pco. __ __ 1D 1 X 8" x 48" Tro i Ier Mounted Portable Chongeoble 'o T r �� T1` E Flashing Arrow Boord Message Sign CPCMS> €G n�I x 1 1 x a.. Sign Traffic Flow o— T Hi.. �. �aD r, x .J y • .J ,�, 1. O' Flog U 0 Flogger 0 0 O O 0 0 c 0o cE:i 0 0 0 0 • 0 minlnun Nlinimun (er ® 1 SuQQested SpocinQ ofximun SuQQested Desirable @ocW Poster Forrrulo To er*b*nQths ChannelizingSiQn Longitudinal VW- Speed p 12' Devices SpocinQ Buffer Spece a c 'c • * 10' II On a Ono Distance B P ' al I X • I •• • Offse' Offset Offset Toper TonQent c• 8 b _ X • X I 30 2 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 120' 90' �a " • • 35 L 60s 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' 160' 120' on SIGNAL QJQt 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' �Q:7 AHEAD co 0 x WORK ` X 45 r450' 495' 590' 45' 90' 320' 195' 0 x�c'l� SIGNAL AHEAD240' X. I • WORK RIGHT 0a / 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' C° �OSG- • ANE ®/ 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' 't, CW X 41' T AHEAD Clf OSFO L=WS OI ill `la 8' K Note 8 , ��H � - 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 600' 350' C>I. O -+ -see c 48 O xG 1 C4W820(5TTRR" 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410 vo x x 482OX 98" 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' Id1$L r 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 540' c Ri .1 j CII - ' •' RIGHT Lun0eucivadi nuotis un4 COAL RIGHT LA D ** LA Toper Iengths hove been rounded off o„ L=Length of Toper(FT) W=Width of Offset(FT) S=Posted SpeedCMPH) y x CW21-5TR x o CW2'-5TR 48" x 48" 0 /0 0 /0 L. 48" x 48" 0 CW20-5TL 98 x48 UL L X of 0 0 "` 0 0 0 0 1 _x-F SIGNAL 5H SIGNAL .c7, WORK WORK WORKERS IN BUCKET TRUCKS SHALL NOT D AHEAD AHEAD AHEAD WORK ABOVE OPEN LANES OF TRAFFIC 0'- U CW2OSG-1 CCW82I 4G-1 fl 446 CW21 G-1 " (QII 48" x48" 48 x48' w:. u7i6 " NEAR SIDE LANE CLOSURE FAR SIDE RIGHT LANE CLOSURE FAR SIDE LEFT LANE CLOSURE vl c SHORT DURATION OR SHORT TERU STATIONARY Q xb' SHORT DURATION OR SHORT TERU STATIONARY SHORT DURATION OR SHORT TERU STATIONARY I R4-7 SIGNAL GENERAL NOTES \�L� 24" x 30" WORK SIGNAL /0"T V I SIGNAL AHEAD -, WORK WORK Cw0SG-1 ,'SIGNAL 1 The minimum size chonne Iizing device is the 28" cone 42" Two-piece AHEAD10 AHEAD 8 " x 48" WORK cones, drums, vertical panels or barricades wi I I be required when AHEAD the device must be left unattended at night • CW2OSG-1 iw2osc-1 CW2OSG-1 48" x48" �I 48" x48" 48 x 48" 2 Obstructions or hazards at the work area sholI be clearly marked ) I 1.- /i, Of and del ineoted at Oil times <3 • 24"7x 30" •'I 3 Floggers and Flogger Symbol CCW20-71 signs may be required according _ I to field conditions aW 4 Vehicles parked in roadway shot I be equipped with of least two _ _ _ - t 0 high intensity rotating, flashing, osciI toting or strobe type I ights ••• • It 5 4Aghvgimiewarning devices Cf log trees> may be used at corners of SHEET 1 OF 2 mu mg, _ _ _ _ q 10' mine 1. •• 6 When work operations ore performed on existing signals, the signals Operations 0 10. HAI 11 •�J • may be placed in flashing red mode when approved by the engineer 1 Division If existing signals do not hove power, Al I Woy Stop CR1-1 and R1-3P1 Texas Department of Transportation Standard 1 1/ signs may be implemented when approved by the engineer X 7 For Short-Term Stationary work the buffer space "B" from the above TRAFFIC SIGNAL WORK •• table should be used if field conditions permit For Short Duration 1111t1111 1' SIGNAL R4-7 <less than 1 hour> any buffer space provided wi I I enhance the O 1 O WORK 24" x 30" AHEAD safety of the setup TYPICAL DETAILS _ R4-7 _ a, 8 The arrow board at this location may be omitted for Short Duration SIGNAL , 24" x30" CW2S G-1 work if the work vehicle hos on arrow board in operation As on WORK 48" x 48" option, the arrow board may be placed at the end of the toper in AHEAD the closed lone if space is not ovoiloble at the beginning of the toper WZ<BTS-1) —13 CW -1 48" x 48" OPERATIONS IN THE INTERSECTION 9 Signs and devices for the NEAR SIDE LANE CLOSURE may be altered for TILE wzbts-1.5.ngn V\, IRUUI ICI..IXUUII OW, IFUUI I C, IXDuI ■� o left lone closure by using a LEFT LANE CLOSED <CW20-5TL) and adding I0IXUo1 April 11992 cow secT be "Ic"wn. SHORT DURATION channelizing devices on the centerline to protect the work space from ar,ro,1 opposing traffic 2-98 10-99 7-13 DIST COUNTY SKEET NO. 4-98 3-03 , .. WORK G20-5oP -Temporary Traffic Barrier CW2OSG-1 SIGNAL'. to tsnbirl G20-5T ZONE 36" x 24" 48" x48" SIGNAL WORK NEXT I MCI 48" x 24" TRAFFIC WARNING IJo1 1 011 I I Q WORK R20-5T 1 11 1 •AHEAD: :; ....." FINES 36" x 36" snms AHEAD G20-6T DOUBLE STATE LAW See NuLe 4 below 'Sj CW20SG-1 I I c,.",,,ox 48" x 30" EN R20-5oTP •20 3T Lr -, I -1 " I END 1 48" x48" t ! RESENT 36" x 18" 48" x42" 14'•-n, IS - o cal ROAD WORK 1 I 48"Ox 44 " X Note 7 below> 0 G20 2 � X X t to°'cm 36" x 18 e°a, WORK AREA— °.T T T T T T T o~-- oo 0110 0I 771 1 I 11 gDEWALK DIVERSION 1110 11 01 0,.crp e " 0 MAJOR STREET ° o ' [ SIDEWALK CIA [SIDEWALK] ENALKCLOSED] .. .-veil t 1OTES SIGNAL OM END CROSS HERE CLOSED CROSS HERE WORK m , '' I 1 Project signing as shown shol I be in place ci e �; \ \ (ROAD WORK) whenever signal contract work is in progress o Ry y - o AHEAD / F:c 5 / \ 24 2'Q 24" x 12" " " J011o1 p DDII c2o-2 x�'g OBE5oP WORK DGIN I 2 For closely adjoining projects, advance signing 36 x 18" tr\ 48" x 48 ul� WARNING 36" x 24" ZONE G20-5T -RBAD-WORK may not be required in advance of each E no slcNs48" x 24" NEXT I RILES SIGNAL`,\ intersection, but only in advance of the iSTATE IW RR77Q TRAFFIC - WORK intersections at the project limits Actualr1ra c 36 x36" FINES ADDRESS • AHEAD;.' VI^ NAL locations wil I be as directed by the EngineerI U CL o'S R20-3T DOUBLE G20-6T CTAT vCUJ • Yiz'? 48" x42" R20-5o1 , 48" x 30" .-.A,.,".. CW2i-.G-1 RIES 3 Advance signs shol I be removed when signal 6 • Work Area 0 36" X ARE PRESENT CW2OSG-1 construction operations ore no longer GI u 48" x 48" I I „ under way, as directed bythe Engineer* 48" x 48 Y0 0 O cII 4 Warning sign spacing shown is typical for both "H o TYPICAL ADVANCE SIGNAL PROJECT SIGNING directions - 6o' 5 See the Tobie on sheet 1 of 2 for Typical • L FOR LONG TERM and INTERMEDIATE-TERM STATIONARY WORK OPERATIONS warning sign spacing c I I S.IDEWALK DETOUR I K°11 oQ GENERAL t.10TES FOR WORK ZC>t4E SIGNS REFLECTIVE SHEETING C>L IY 11 CWl l-2 0 1 Signs shol I be instol led and maintained in a straight and plunt, I AlI signs shol I be retroreflective and constructed of sheeting meeting See Note 8 >L condition the requirements of the OMS and color usage table shown on this sheet 36" x 36" 's1UUKALK CLOSED` ' SIDEWALK a [ SIXIN K CDLOSED uc oo, 2 Wooden signposts shol I be pointed white SIGN SUPPORT ffEIGHTS See Note 6 �� R9 11aR CLOSED R9 11L UL.c - ` CROSS HERE 24 x 12" CROSS HERE 24" z 12" Eer 3 Barricades shol I NOT be used as sign supports. 1 Weights used to keep signs from turning over should be sandbags / R9-9 o filled with dry, cohesionless material I 24" x 12 ,noo 4 Nails shol I NOT be used to attach signs to any support • 41 -o u 2 The sandbags wil I be tied shut to keep the sand from spilling and CW11-2 SIGNAL ,L0 5 All signs shol I be instol led in accordance with the plans or as to maintain a constant weight 36" x 36directed by the Engineer IAHEADIWORK �uI 3 Rock, concrete, iron, steel or other solid objects wil I not be rilli See Note 6 H AHEAD .,oa45}b 6 The Contractor shol I furnish the sign design shown in the plans or permitted for use as sign support weights CW16-9P W�E(/) in the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" ISHSD> 24" x 12• Ill © CW16-7PL CW2 0 S G-1 4. Sandbags should weigh a minimum of 35 lbs and a maximum of 50 lbs5. 24 x 12 Work Area „ u>u> g g f 48" x 48 ' 7 The Contractor shol I furnish sign supports and substrates listed in vehicular impact Rubber, such as tire inner tubes, shol I not be used. j . . „ . , J instol led as per the manufacturer's reconmendotions , • . I1 J vl c • • • u u.- the "Campi iont Work Zone Traffic Control Device List" ICWZTCD>, 5 Sandbags shol I be mode of a durable material that tears upon 8 BHA'8$Ea rsaPiietih$tfMHA8m ngt4hgeiSSA.d bluliAaCe2 l SI d/or 6 8 BE1W iaastpallgIHdst5Ei gtVDRlt§zin%i$Rt°§6� oit21116s4$ttie�eaHHed i o "0 directed by the Engineer manufactured with rubber bases may be used when shown on the CWZTCD 9 Identificationub markings may be shown only on the bock of the sign I ist 0 101 , I I II substrate The maximum height of letters and/or company logos used 7 Sandbags shol I only be placed along or laid over the base supports for identificotion sholl be 1" of the traffic control device and shol I not be suspended above ground 10 Damaged wood posts shol I be replaced. Splicing wood posts level or hung with rope, wire, chains or other fostners Sandbags SIGNAL will not be al lowed. shol I be placed along the length of the skids to weigh down the sign support WORK DURATIC>t4 OF WORK 8 Sandbags ShOI I NOT be placed under the skid and ShOI I not be used to DEWALKCLOS ] 1 D AHEAD,/ 1 Work zone durations ore defined in Port 6, Section 6G 02 of the level sign supports placed on slopes CW2OSG-1 Texas Manuel on Uniform Traffic Control Devices ITMUTCD> ! USE OTHER SIDE 48" x 48" LEGEND MENEM ' SIGN MOUNTING HEIGHT .a. sign PEDESTRIAN CONTROL 1 Sign height of Long-term/Intermediate-term warning signs shol I be as :ill■ ChannelizingDevices shown on Figure 6F-1 of the TMUTCD I Holes, trenches or other hazards shol I be adequately protected by covering, 2 Sign height of Short-term/Short Duration warning signs shol I be as delineating or surrounding the hazard with orange plastic pedestrian Tvoe 3 Borr i code fencing or longitudinal channelizing devices, or as directed by the Engineer shown on Figure 6F-2 of the TMUTCD DEPARTMENT AL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 "CROSSWALK CLOSURES" as detoi led above xi 11 require the Engineer's approval SHEET 2 OF 2 3 Regulatory signs shol I be mounted at least 7 feet, but not more than prior to instol lotion Traffic 9 feet, above thepaved surface regardless of work duration SIGN FACE MATERIALS DMS-8300 3 R9 series signs shown may be placed on supports detailed on the BC standards Operations g Division or CWZTCD list, or when fabricated from approved lightweight plastic Texas Department of Transportation Standard FLEXIBLE ROLL-UP REFLECTIVE SIGNS DMS-8310 substrates, they may be mounted on top of a plastic drum at or near the REMOVING OR COVERING location shown. 4 For speeds less than 45 mph longitudinal channelizing devices may be used 1 When sign messages may be confusing or do not apply, the signs COLOR USAGE SHEETING MATERIAL instead of traffic barriers when approved by the Engineer Attenuation of shol I be removed or completely covered, unless otherwise AHntnaBB4icnnc;'ei°SStp� filled devices shol I be as per BC191 TRAFFIC SIGNAL 'WORK approved by the Engineer ORANGE BACKGROUND TYPE BrL OR TYPE CrLSHEETING c AND When signs ore covered, the material used shol I be opaque, such 5 Location of devices ore for general guidance Actual device spacing and BARRICADES AN D S I GN S as heovr mil block plastic, or other materials which wil I cover WHITE BACKGROUND TYPE A SHEETING location must be field adjusted to meet actual conditions the ent,re sign face and maintain their opaque properties under 6 Where pedestrians with visual disabilities normally use the closed sidewalk automobile headlights at night without damaging the sign sheeting BLACK LEGEND & BORDERS ACRYLIC NON-REFLECTIVE SHEETING Detectable P destrian Barricades should be used instead of the Type 3 Burlap, or heavy materials such as plywood or aluminum shol I not Sorricodes sown be used to cover signs 7 The width of existing sidewalk should be maintained if practical WZ<BT S—2>—1 3 3 Duct tape or other adhesive material shol I NOT be affixed to a Only pre-quo I ified products shol I be used. A copy of the 8 Pavement markings for mid-block crosswalks shall be paid for under the sign face "Campi iont Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List" <CWZTCD> 9 oppropriate bid iterns FEE. wzbts-13.dgn co IeDOl j a:•lxDISTIow, IxDUI Ic, IxUOI describes pre-quo I ified products and their sources and may pedestrian facilities ore closed or relocated, 4 Signs and anchor stubs shol I be removed and holes bock filled upon MOOT Apr i I 1992 c"NF SECT ma HIGHWAY be found at the fol lowing web address When crosswalks or other ftfIVISIONS completion of the work temporary facilities shol I be detectable and shol I include accessibility http://www txdot.gov/ixdot_library/publications/construction.htm f l tir consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian 798 10.99 7)3 INST MINTY SHFFT NO 98 3.03 C.I.!2.J ♦ . LEGEND [RoAiiN ORK] Channel izing = Type 3 Barricade DIM Channelizing Devices ROAD G20-2 Devices Truck Mounted <See note 21 & O. WORK 4B" X 29" C. p Heavy Work Vehicle Attenuator <TMA1 °- AHEAD <See note 21 & 0 4•0 Trailer Mounted ^I�" Portable Changeable <11 Flashing Arrow Board a Message Sign <PCMS1 i-o CW20-10 • t - Cl? 4 •&• Sign Traffic Flow u° '1 �8" ■ R [RoAiiN ORK] - u O See note 1 1 a .c a Devices g W 01 Flog --� Flogger o. oL u E <See note 21 & AH , , - 24" -oL ROAD L 0 Minimum Suggested Maximum •+_a ORK OI O oc i ' �,2� w L ` ': �, See note 21 & Desirable Spacing of Signsuggested Minimum '�7: °o <u L • Posted For-mula Taper Lengths Chonnel iz ingLongitudinal a..o+ T- O EAD E 0/s{ p �nM <Flags- 1 � Speed ** Devices SpX�ng Buffer Space °ir,( •J �( w See note 11 'c * I(y II' Ir On a On a Distance B u0c• <Flogs- ° o o:J u m°+ ' Offset Offset Offset Taper 'Tangent 4i<��1 See note 1 1 0 + vF 0�'� a N 0C,1 N 30 WS2 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 1 20' 90' , I u o. IJ " o > a o i 0 ° +-C 35 L=-- 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' 160' 120' U o- I o C]JOVI E .O•-of o>c o -ON. ,J ..J X U t 6 D C E _Y_ o ° 0c 0.c oao0 LB 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' " L vl m o w 45 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' 320' 195' c4OL 0 4- o> d 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' 240' c .+ x o_in on c° -II'- • z n i oN 55 L=WS 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' "_o., — .5 w O V •• A ® 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 600' 350' q�rY41j m 'i-I' I m •c _ 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410' L- J ChonneI izing a E 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' • u<uL Devices L ° a Inactive 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 540' -u0 a n t' ',4 I or Conventional Roads Only <See note 21 &- 9,°0 0 <u �,`' ik o veJic e ** 'p o L E u I 1 o .4.6e "' <See Note 31 Taper lengths have been rounded off n. Work vehicles or AP 1 L=Length of Toper<FT1 W=Width of Offset<FT1 S=Posted Speed<MPH1 °ISO ChonneI izing °, Min. .'.,I 1- -' oo0 ` devices may be o 4- I ill.i a other equipment Min, c oL<, omitted if the .+ x n necessary for the •J+ work area is a 's �!��'j..i 0. work operation, such :;;,•-ya,, �- ..J x —VOA; vi TYPICAL, USAGE "°E minimum of 30' p.J+� as trucks, moveable :i •/ o nco from the nearest I ld•• cranes, etc shd I • ��j 3 SHORT SHORT TERM I NTERMEDI ATE LONG TERM MOB.LE Lo 4- traveled wa ;.4", X •'.4.0 0 remain in areas i` 4- DURATION STATIONARY TERM STATIONARY STATIONARY 0 y b` Shadow Vehicle I.J•I. 5' separated from ' 0,D co <u :•' t with TMA and •) .S, -s + +- ■'Y%%=; o high intensity I '"yJj;. lanes of traffic by �_ � m c - a•o Shadow Vehicle cJ ` s channe I i zat ion • � � o a> ai"o with TMA and high 1 N�' o. rotating, o c devices at all times — 7'.:f o GENERAL NOTES 4 f I ashin ■ rn er:c>- intensity rotatinga- D , ■ ofc osci I I sting or�� L strobe Tights I L 1 Flags attached to signs where shown ore REQUIRED, 4-Do flashing, Shadow Vehicle 0 0 osci I I at i ng p� o <See notes 4 &51 i TMA an ■ o c 3 2 Al I traffic control devices i I lustroted ore REQUIRED, except those co VS VSerakeJ li gt§1 ■e ■8 „sigh intensity "' denoted with the triangle symbol may be omitted when stated elsewhere �:'4'g,,, rotating, flashing, 1N in the plans, or for routine maintenance work, when approved by the oxncn X osci I I ating or ■ow Engineer °>° c c strobe Ii hts 3 Inactive work vehicles or other equipment should be parked near the I+- o. <SFee note 4 t.51 I ! right-of-way I ine and not parked on the paved shoulder 0 :cyy E m �� Y 4 A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be used anytime it con be positioned o °,4 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure without adversely c L IIaffecting the performance or quo I ity of the work If workers are no • 8. c0 m longer present but rood or work conditions require the traffic control o a • to remain in place, Type 3 Barricades or other channelizing devices 0 L may be substihJ,turrlIted for the Shadow Vehicle and TWA. 0 • ri' 5 sddrLace anezf-atoowthyosecshownlin oruermto proteecctwiaer wworktspaoesed < • - .J 6. See TCP<S-11for shoulder work on divided highways, expressways and Channel Devices izing ,• ,,, x" I • n freeways <See note 21 & V • qA • 7. CW21-5 "SHOULDER WORK" signs may be used in place of CW20-ID "ROAD WORK AHEAD" signs for shoulder work on conventional o • END ] LLiJ <I E Channelizing i `?< roadways I ROAD WORK _ I ^ L 0 Devices N ry I E'D-F 24" . I-1_I' •� ... <See note 2) 0 1 0 0. VV J' 0 of J aJ <See note 2,A. o a " Dc �' I L <oj< VILU E o4'11/ A m N J ■ o ° T��. Traffic DJsi zing/______________-----' ' x Ikas Department of Transportation Operations!Vls10R48" X 48" (See note 21 -i,- y_ Standard <Flogs- See notes 1 & 71 RO A \\\\0\-\ TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN w [ROAD WORK CONVENTIONAL ROAD AH) G20-2 SHOULDER WORK 4W X24' AHEAD CW20-1D (See note 2) & CW20-10 TCP (1-1 O TCP �'+1-1 b) 48" X 48" TCP (1 -1 c) \\��/ 46 X 48' TCPCI-1 —18 See notes 1 & 71 Fee-ea.-es 1 & 71 ) so.> tcp1-1-18.dgn - ON: I DE: 1 Olt: 10..- WORK SPACE NEAR SHOULDER WORK SPACE ON SHOULDER WORK VEHICLES ON SHOULDER %TXDOT December I9 s WNT S LT Boa CFM'AY --- ,u.v,muNa 2 94 4-9R WA' l tiConvenona Roods ConventionalRoods f- .JConventional Roods 8-95 2-12 olsT cousin SHEET NO, oa-t 1-97 2 18 1 O r END 1 a0 = LEGEND illill Type 3 Barricade channelizing Devices ROAD ROAD WORK ROAD\ I T 1 Truck Mounted �'G ORK /�G20-2 WORK 1 �J� 1 Heavy Work Vehicle Attenuator <TMA1 o-� EAD 48 X 24 CW20 1p AHEAD \ 1 Tra i I er Mounted @ Portable Changeable o <u 48" X 48 Flashing Arrow Boord Message Sign <PCMS1 • - - �, <Flags- d° <Flogs- See note 1) x g o u w See note 1 1 /^\\ /^\\ r `1-1%_ ('� (/�� \ -&• Sign • v(+ Traffic Flow o>- .0 N .E I '1J' �IJ' rr,/' T V 1. 7. 1J' 4J� :ROAEDNWDORK1 IFlog IiLO Flogger L` L oJx Minimum 004. E ° v Suggested Maximum Minimum .0 L LEFT .T•• Bosted Formula Spacing of Sign Suggested o G20-2 Desirable �o- ° I N 48 X 24 Tope �Lengths ch Devices ,X, Buffer Sdinal pace+ D- °B a 1". ' LANE L Speed Spacing (��• c CW20-5TL CLOSED a..o ,,., L x D * 10' 11' 12' On a On a Distance B u }; ° D D x 48 X 48 / T• Offset Offset Offset Toper Tangent _�S2 a x °� °� 4 ■ i,°C 30 2 1 50' 165' 1130 30' 60' 1 20' 90' °`U x 111 '" ° 0 R° O. X 35 L= F73 205' 225' 295' 35' 70' 160' 1 20' 4 i I ■ I 60 o>co' } • 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' i ?.i$ • �■ 45 450' 495' 590' 45' 90' 320' 195' <u.L -Y • ♦t�t• 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' 240' C.00 ■ ♦�H-■ CD- ob'°, • .'c7 55 L=WS 550' 605' 660' 55' 11 0' 500' 295' w� -1-- CW1-60 T ■ 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 1 20' 600' 350' a, • _ 36" X 36 liQOs`ai '• ♦ - 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410' �:•: L •` '' ♦ c _ 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' �.t_• 9R L a ■�P.1. ♦ . ••L .1 461 X 48" 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 1 50' 900' 540' 4) • ♦ 4v 8 • �c ■ 7. _ �°p ■ •♦ .4CW13-1P ** Conventional Roads Only • '000- • 9'r. mHI •• _IL.... 24" X29" Taper lengths have been rounded off DNC D Shadow Vehicle with -_-_-_,- is -4 <See note 21. L=Length of Ta er<FTl W=Width of Offset<FT1 S=Posted Speed<MPH1 c a. TMA and high intensity L * m' <,. g p ■ y >0o L rotating, flashing, i V •-'lam• 1 1e{ , 0000ir osci 1 loting or strobe ■ +-f. t TYPICAL USAGE lights <See notes 4 & 51 • �:� :?;; N a E ■ <See note 71 ` + o MOBILE SHORT SHORT TERM I NTERMEDI ATE LONG TERM �■ ■- 1-a• 0 DURATION STATIONARY TERM STATIONARY STATIONARY LO.1- C 0 DLL • ■ Y �Y L It Shadow Vehicle with • • o .0.o TMA and high intensity 3• GENERAL NOTES o,o CD rotating, flashing, s+ 1 osci II ating or strobe • 1 Flogs attached to signs where shown ore REQUIRED -i-i fi'D tights <See notes 4 & 51 • Z Al !traffic control devices i Ilustroted ore REQUIRED, except those denoted u o D • X • with the triangle symbol may be omitted when stated elsewhere in the plans, ND • • or for routine maintenance work, when approved by the Engineer a:.0 - ■ 3 The CW20-1 D "ROAD WORK AHEAD" sign may be repeated if the W`� • ii ° visibi I ity of the work zone is less than 1500 feet clyr • 9 A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be used anytime it con be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure without adversely oc$b • - affecting the performance or quotity of the work If workers ore no longer • N c present but rood or work conditions require the traffic control to remain in CW1-6oT place, Type 3 Barricades or other channelizing devices may be substituted i X �GHT • • 36 X 36" for the Shadow Vehicle and TMA. • 11 • • / <See note 21A,. 5 Additional Shadow Vehicles with TMAs may be positioned off the paved •• 1 CLO • �•t' surface, next to those shown in order to protect wider work spaces ■ x • TCP 1 1-401 R • Z" 6. If this TCP is used for a left lone closure , CWZO-5TL"LEFT LANE CLOSED" -_+� 48" X qg I •� signs shollbe used and channelizing devices shollbe placed on the ••a•• IIIII centerline where needed to protect the work space from opposing traffic with •• X 48" the arrow panel placed in the closed lone near the end of the merging toper 8' L° x ii •• CW13-1 P TCP <1-4b1 a Where traffic is directed over a yellow center line, channelizing devices ac oc • <See note 21.A,. which separate two-way traffic should be spaced on tapers at 20' or 15' a a °.c if posted speeds ore 35 mph or slower, and for tangent sections, at I/ZS a where S is the speed in mph This tighter device spacing is intended (nj Sr)?\ J ,• for the areas of conflicting markings, not the entire work zone V V y`�L ^ is •� \��/\ ••a••_ / RIGHT 72r x NE ;�. Traffic S ED Operations END .a. Texas Department of Transportation Division [RoAiiN ORK] ROAD WORK CW20-5TR 1 Standard AHEAD x 48 X 48 "ROAD 8.. TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 48" X 48 X 24 t�j sj ^I^ vl 48" X 24" CW20-1D V 'U''U' /� 48" X4r _ LANE CLOSURES ON MULTILANE {Flogs- II g 1 See note 11 \ CONVENTIONAL ROADS TCP (1-4a) TCP (1-4b) \��///��` AHEAD TCP c 1 - 4 > - 1 8 TWO LANES CLOSED CWzo-1D I<'' I=t. ONE LANE CLOSED (4�E, tcpi December 1 "N: �� qg X 48" TxDOT 1985 0.N0 SECT JOB HIGHWAY <Flags- See REVISIONS note 11 2-94 4-98 - - - WW8-95 2-12 01ST COUNTY SHEET NO 4 . L' _ 1-97 2-18 Lierrre 0LL LEGEND [RoAiiN ORK] AI, ORK] —' Type 3 Barricade m m Channelizing Devices ° / G20-2 ,'�•yT1 DI) Heavy Work Vehicle Truck Mounted Co _ Al: 48" X 24" X 4" - Attenuator CTMA> e RoAiiN ORK] L L �� Tra i I er Mounted Portable Changeable CO U c O O Flashing Arrow Board Message Sign CPCMS> u/202 n .&. Sign v TraffiC Flow 8" X 24" ° u pc<1.1•u °c 40 o'I o:I Flag __� Flogger L.0 ■ . , p� !� O I oti w 1..)I.,),1. .).) to.14 ■�;1(`Y t i i.•,./: ((`` Minimum Suggested Maximum '�L bu bd -i- .i)1• 4Ir• E Desirable Minimum .-i ■ r' f Spacing of Suggested �� I Posted Formula Tape.k*Lengths Chonnelizing Sign Longitudinal c I I ,w, a I' A. , a Speed Spacing �:?'0 0- O 0 p I Iv 1 a o Devices .X, Buffer Space <n«- c .o } 4k �''�'.^- o `" * 10' 11' - 12' On a On a Distance B n .J h m 1Jj',a•I'r1`o•• o .`a�i I M' A...:1.' 1-•- 1 n c 4 4 Offset Offset Offset Taper Tangent u L c v' D • 30 2 1 50' 165' 180' 30' 60' 1 20' 90' WS p .- X 35 L=-- 205' 225' 2'15' 35' 70' 160' 120' o&0 .�, i ■ c-r- L'3PD (See notes 4 &5) • ,:�.„ . '10 60 265' 295' 320' '10' 80' 2'10' 155' <nE `��%= -� '15 '150' '195' 5'10' '15' 90' 320' 195' T ri.- J_. cun0L w I ><.;:s.^'": 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' '100' 2'10' ow <, IL - w +- I .! I a< 0 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' �_•_ v' o L=WS oxsa �� , ■ —' 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 1 20' 600' 350' a a-v ES-1 ■ • to L 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' '110' ai 48" X92" ■ ■ _i_ 3 70 700' 770' 8'10' 70' 1'10' 800' '175' c<'>0 L 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 5'10' .oo ■ • A J 4Sge5)n•t s iii voltventlonal xoads only DC I .L c Taper I engths have been rounded off .0 o . ,-�:--, '- o C . 1�i,i?, C D ■ ® y L=Length of TaperCFT) W=Width of OffsetCFT) S=Posted SpeedCMPH) °O J ■ :v .st m • ■ CO 0,!"` 11 :!' TYPICAL USAGE <"00 =_ 1 B ■_:...f 3i o • o • CI SHORT SHORT TERM INTERMEDIATE LONG TERM ooa- ^ • o • a: MOB!LE DURATION STATIONARY TERM STATIONARY STATIONARY 6oLL "Lf ■ i�1 I • • , co as = w t•o (See notes 4 & 5) X IOD • GENERAL NOTES X.� ® 01 • EXIT .. o ■ • OPEN " 1 k'lags attached to signs where shown, ore kt;;'QU1R6U .0 o'- a co 2 Al I traffic control devices i I lustroted ore REQUIRED, except those ° D •■ E5-2 den ed ith the rian 1 s o1 ma be omitted when state is here �,bq'O& D ■ 48 X 36 i -v in°tt'ne plans, or rot roguteine°maintenyance work, when approve elsewhere etoe En, 0, 40 & Engineer !' • • ■1♦ 3 Channelizing devices used to close lanes may be supplemented <as<s�• turun 4 o'Dt` b , ♦ -I with the Chevron Alignment Sign placed on every other channelizing o• c�"o D (• RIGHT ♦• device Chevrons may be attached to plastic drums as per BC Standards � 4 Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, flashing, uI LANE • , osci I loting or strobe I ights A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be ;,,° • CLOSED ♦ 'L.--, X- used anytime it con be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area •. \\ I •♦♦ • I of crew exposure without adversely affecting the performance or quol ity of the work. If workers ore no longer present but rood or --=t- -I RAMP N USE work conditions require the traffic control to remain in place, Type 3 _ CLOSED} RA Barricades or other channelizing devices may be substituted for the o / 4W28" X 0 TR Shadow Vehicle and TMA. u 11-2bT \ 5 Additional Shadow Vehicles with TMAs may be positioned in each .J. 0 8 X 30 closed lone, on the shoulder or off the paved surface, next to those CW25-1 T shown in order to protect a wider work space & LANE \\ y ..- 48 X I8 A ° CLOSED 4 ' ..!. o ► ■ Channe I i zing .a. • Devices at & CW20 STR ■ 20' spacing 0 8" 75 See traffics) ■ �8" � o for traffic ■ control n ��YYY�� devices Traffic ROAD ii See TCPC1-4a) for lane for lane Operations & closure dotal Is if a .&. I Division closure I I I lane closure is needed Texas Department of Transportation Standard 1NMILE ORK ) lo -&fie TCP Cl-5a> J rigRta17y1 �u4@h for advance .&. to ente .the ramp TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN warigns . for nlanein sclosure RAMP LANE CLOSURES FOR CW20-1F \See TCP Cl-5a) CLOSED DIVIDED HIGHWAYS 48" X 98" for advance AHEAD (Flags- warning signs -3D TCP <1 -5a1 See note I> TCP <1 -5b1 for lane closure TCP <1 -5c I 4820Xp4B TCPC1- )-1$ F"F tcpl-5-18 d's as: co. VI: as ONE LANE CLOSURE LANE CLOSURE NEAR EXIT RAMPS LANE CLOSURE NEAR ENTRANCE RAMPS ©TxDOT February 2012 RI.VISIONS CONS sec JOB HIGHWAY 'lx I- 5 el L3 3) --,w Reliable Signal Lighting Solutions November 14, 2022 City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Ref Project designation letter for Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22, City of Pearland, Project#TR2201, Bid Number 0822-25, RSLS Project No. 16608 Dear Sir or Madam, Reliable Signal and Lighting Solutions, LLC. (RSLS) has established the following project team to complete your above referenced project. Reliable Signal is proud to work with the City of Pearland in the completion phase of another successful project. Reliable Signal has appointed Larry Oviedo as the EEO officer He will ensure that work is being performed in a safe manner Larry can be reached at 281-997-1111 office or 713-494-5665 cell. Larry's email address is IoviedoOreliable-signal.com. The responsibility of certified payroll compliance has been appointed to Susana Bautista. She can be reached at 281-997-1111 office. Susana's email address is sbautista@reliable-signal.com. Brian Rasberry will assume the responsibility of Superintendent. Brian Rasberry will be the daily field point of contact and responsible for the installation of the required work to be performed. He can be reached at 281-997-1111 office or 713-444-6447 cell. Brian's email address is brasberry(arelia ble-signal.com. I, Enrique Del Cid, will assume the responsibility of Project Manager It is my responsibility that the team meets your expectations. He can be reached at 281-997-1111 office or 713-498-5672 cell. My email address is rdelcidOreliable-signal.com Again,we are looking forward to working with you on this project. Sincerely, Reliable Signal& Lighting Solutions, LLC Enrique"Ricky" Del Cid. President P O Box 2757 Pearland,Texas 77588 OFFICE(281)997-1111 FAX(281)754-4381 MINORITY AND FEMALE APPLICANTS We encourage the help in referring minority and female applicants for employment. If you know a minority and or/female who is seeking employment,please refer them to the Pearland office located at 2617 Lazy Bend Street,Pearland,Texas 77581 � Reliable Signal Ct Lighting Solutions November 14, 2022 City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Ref Emergency Contact Information for Traffic Signal Upgrades Program FY22, City of Pearland, Project#TR2201, Bid Number 0822-25, RSLS Project No. 16608 Dear Sir or Madam, Reliable Signal and Lighting Solutions, LLC. (RSLS) has established the following after-hours contact list for the project listed above: 1st Contact: Sergio Perez 713-344-3533 2nd Contact: Brian Rasberry 713-444-6447 3rd Contact: Wyndell McRay 832-696-3396 Please feel free to contact us to review any questions or concerns that you may have regarding this project. Again, we are looking forward to working with you on this project. Sincerely, Reliable Signal& Lighting Solutions, LLC Enrique"Ricky" Del Cid. President P 0 Box 2757 Pearland,TX 77588 OFFICE(281)997-1111 FAX(281)754-4381 Project Manual Check List Vendor Vendor Address & Primary Contact: Is Vendor Council in NW. Date Form 100 Form 200 Form 300 (Seal,w/vendor's initials) Verify Bid Pricing Sheet is Correct Bid Bond Supplier Response Local Bidder Preference Claim Form Contractor Questionnaire Conflict of Interest Non-Collusion , References Addenda as listed Form 500 (Seal,Article 4 Project Amount) Title 6 H B89 Form 1295 Bond 610 (Verified and signed/seal) Bond 611 (Verified and signed/seal) Bond 612 (Verified and signed/seal) 0615 Partial Waiver of Lien (Blank) l .�.�,wy:. -�"`S'�' edtiS,''r,Y«?yk�,-`�s�n �4••' '..�y'.s=i"� s�:��r ,�a,;y�.., r �:7*� ?S�er��;k a Section 700 COI `*"+-^s#,",ad, r�rk�� .,;„.�,;y'� ,n� ,�;.;`;;}:``�it`s•'•.�M-`�7u` ��;:r`tl.�� "'u�'.a.arks.:'.•s sN.� "'��' ^,;i `?Y i'!r r t�'+•'ip:•.Y. Jtr.;ya.o}',rr ek'+;P�'.,.'... .,t, f€TM �•'r..:�:Y�r. F r�:'` . ¢_,.. "- k 3 '?TY^:-s .w'f'..ttdY.:t.� br�1,M{ns;f Dropped off @ CSO Picked up @ CSO :to- ••y .. 3r msf"i�gF� •4^-, ':r,: �<e• ,.*k,...5} ,,v. ), ;Y. -..�..G' ;�.^"�;-,RTC'r+l''.;¢.'`.} w�W'd`yb-`..'ai;'i,:. I* A .e CSe i•4 a {• 1':taK 1 M'"l�'w"'k n7 .'>�,. A {ir.w.-:4i;•t�;..R.l^t': _d-'�*t :�` '^`�"L. ..F'. $.•c�r �.�"," s�°"; '' _�y:1`b'ffs.:.r.,f: _ ., :'�- +�i':•s Requested PO ;a"t~•.$AW, " MS .�; p� � 's�';. 14 'fur t �;� ^ .. .111 Schedule Pre-Construction Meeting Sent NTP l.. .. ". ,s.v. ;•a:•1' , 4: m`rR,, :t- :.,...,, € #ttq,A Vei €'aa'9`f`•- y +Y:; _Added Contract to Contract Log Submit Request to add to Masterworks '-?; - 'aRte• ;r` '. "ai y,a wy 4 3 '& !F